Sharp MX M283 363 453 503 PDF

TopPage
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMXM503/S2E
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
MX-M283 N
MX-M363 N/U
MX-M453 N/U
MODEL MX-M503 N/U
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 [A] EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 [B] OPERATION PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . .B-1
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND [C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION. . . . . . . . . . C-1
INTERNAL STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . 3-1 [D] SCANNER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND [E] PAPER FEED SECTION . . . . . . . . .E-1
SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT
[5] SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-1
[6] SELF DIAG AND [G] LSU SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-1
TROUBLE CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
[8] MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 [i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION . . . . . . . i-1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA [J] DEVELOPING SECTION . . . . . . . . . J-1
HANDLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[K] TRANSFER SECTION . . . . . . . . . . .K-1
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
[L] FUSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-1
[11] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION. . . . . . . . . 12-1 SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-1
[13] TOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
[O] PWB SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
[P] FAN SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION . . . . Q-1
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

1. Precautions for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [A] EXTERIOR
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .A-1
3. Note for installing site. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i [B] OPERATION PANEL
4. Note for handling PWB and electronic parts . . . . . . . . . .ii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .B-1
5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the transfer unit, 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .B-4
the developing unit, and the fusing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
[C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION
7. Screw tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . C-1
[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
1. System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-10
2. Machine configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
[D] SCANNER SECTION
3. Combination of options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . D-1
[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
3. Definition the developer/drum life end . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .E-1
4. Production number identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-4
[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .E-5
1. Identification of each section and functions . . . . . . . . . 3-1
[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .F-1
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .F-2
3. Details of adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
[G] LSU SECTION
[5] SIMULATION
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
1. General (Including basic operations) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
2. List of simulation codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
1. Self diag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
2. Trouble code list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
3. Details of trouble code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
4. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
1. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
2. Update procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
[8] MAINTENANCE
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . J-1
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . J-2
2. Contents of the maintenance codes
(Relationship between various counters values and [K] TRANSFER SECTION
display messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . .K-1
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works . . . . . . . . 8-4 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .K-2
1. HDD partition and data contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 [L] FUSING SECTION
2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . . L-1
the HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
3. Counter list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE [M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram . . . . . . . . M-1
2. Details and operation procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
[11] SPECIFICATIONS 3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-3
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 [N] DRIVE SECTION
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-1
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 [O] PWB SECTION
2. Actual wiring chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-9 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-1
3. Signal list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-22 [P] FAN SECTION
[13] TOOL LIST 1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P-1
1. Exclusive-use tools list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 [Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
NOTE
MX-M503N
FOR SERVICING 4) When connecting
Service Manualthe grounding wire, never connect it to the
following points.
It may cause an explosion, a fire or an electric shock.
1. Precautions for servicing
Gas tube
1) When servicing, disconnect the power plug, the printer cable, Lightning conductor
the network cable, and the telephone line from the machine,
A water pipe or a water faucet, which is not recognized as a
except when performing the communication test, etc.
grounding object by the authorities.
It may cause an injury or an electric shock.
Grounding wire for telephone line
2) There is a high temperature area inside the machine. Use an
5) Do not damage, break, or work the power cord.
extreme care when servicing.
Do not put heavy objects on the power cable. Do not bend it
It may cause a burn.
forcibly or do not pull it extremely.
3) There is a high voltage section inside the machine which may
It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
cause an electric shock. Be careful when servicing.
6) Keep the power cable away from a heat source.
4) Do not disassemble the laser unit. Do not insert a reflective
material such as a screwdriver in the laser beam path. Do not insert the power plug with dust on it into a power outlet.
It may damage eyes by reflection of laser beams. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
5) When servicing with the machine operating, be careful not to 7) Do not put a receptacle with water in it or a metal piece which
squeeze you hands by the chain, the belt, the gear, and other may drop inside the machine.
driving sections. It may cause a fire or an electric shock.
6) Do not leave the machine with the cabinet disassembled. 8) With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
Do not allow any person other than a serviceman to touch
inside the machine. It may cause an electric shock, a burn, or do not perform servicing.
an injury. It may cause an electric shock.
7) When servicing, do not breathe toner, developer, and ink
excessively. Do not get them in the eyes. 3. Note for installing site
If toner, developer, or ink enters your eyes, wash it away with Do not install the machine at the following sites.
water immediately, and consult a doctor if necessary. 1) Place of high temperature, high humidity, low tempera-
8) The machine has got sharp edges inside. Be careful not to ture, low humidity, place under an extreme change in tem-
damage fingers when servicing. perature and humidity.
9) Do not throw toner or a toner cartridge in a fire. Otherwise, Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, caus-
toner may pop and burn you. ing paper jam or copy dirt.
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
one only. described later.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
CAUTION
DOUBLE POLE/NEUTRAL FUSING 2) Place of much vibrations
(200V series only) It may cause a breakdown.
2. Warning for servicing

1) Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that
meets the specified voltage and current requirements.
Avoid complex wiring, which may lead to a fire or an electric
shock.
2) If there is any abnormality such as a smoke or an abnormal
smell, interrupt the job and disconnect the power plug.
3) Poorly ventilated place
An electrostatic type copier will produce ozone inside it.
3) Be sure to connect the grounding wire. If an electric leakage
The quantity of ozone produced is designed to a low level so
occurs without grounding, a fire or an electric shock may
as not to affect human bodies. However, continuous use of
result.
such a machine may produce a smell of ozone. Install the
To protect the machine and the power unit from lightening, machine in a well ventilated place, and ventilate occasionally.
grounding must be made.
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

4) Place of direct sunlight. 4. Note for handling PWB and electronic
Plastic parts and ink may be deformed, discolored, or may parts
undergo qualitative change.
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
It may cause a breakdown or copy dirt.
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

The organic photo-conductor (OPC) drum used in the machine
may undergo qualitative change due to organic gases such as
ammonium.
Installation of this machine near a diazo-type copier may result
in dirt copy.
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag
(case), use an earth band as shown below:
Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the
machine.
6) Place of much dust

When dusts enter the machine, it may cause a breakdown or
copy dirt.
7) Place near a wall

Some machine require intake and exhaust of air.
If intake and exhaust of air are not properly performed, copy
dirt or a breakdown may be resulted.
11-13/16"
When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the
(30cm) procedure on an anti-static mat.
11-13/16" 17-23/32"
(30cm) (45cm)
8) Unstable or slant surface

If the machine drops or fall down, it may cause an injury or a
breakdown.
If there are optional paper desk and the copier desk specified,
it is recommendable to use them.
When using the optional desk, be sure to fix the adjuster and
lock the casters.
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

5. Note for repairing/replacing the LSU 7. Screw tightening torque
When repairing or replacing, be sure to observe the following The screws used in this machine are largely classified into three
items. kinds.
1) When repairing or replacing the LSU, be sure to disconnect These kinds are classified according to the shape of the screw
the power plug from the power outlet. grooves and use positions.
2) When repairing or replacing the LSU, follow the procedures The table below shows the kinds of the screws and the tightening
described in this Service Manual. torques depending on the use position.
3) When checking the operations after repairing the LSU, keep all When tightening the screws for repair or maintenance, refer to the
the parts including the cover installed and perform the operatable.
tion check. However, for the other conditions of tightening screws than speci-
4) Do not modify the LSU. fied on this table, or when a special care is required, the details are
5) When visually checking the inside of the machine for the oper- described on the separate page. Refer to the descriptions on such
ation check, be careful not to allow laser beams to enter the a case.
eyes. NOTE: Especially for the screw fixing positions where there is an
If the above precaution is neglected or an undesignated work is electrode or a current flows, use enough care to tighten
performed, safety may not be assured. securely to avoid loosening.
6. Note for handling the drum unit, the Screw kinds and tightening torques
transfer unit, the developing unit, and the Normal screws, set screws (including step screws)
fusing unit Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
When handling the OPC drum unit, the transfer unit, and the devel- torque torque torque
diameter fixed
oping unit, strictly observe the following items. (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M2.6 Steel plate 0.8 - 1.0 8 - 10 0.6 - 0.7
If these items are neglected, a trouble may be generated in the
M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
copy and print image quality.
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
(Drum unit)
1) Avoid working at a place with strong lights. Tapping screws (for iron)
2) Do not expose the OPC drum to lights including interior lights Tightening Tightening Tightening
for a long time. Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
diameter fixed
3) When the OPC drum is removed from the machine, cover it (Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
with light blocking material. (When using paper, use about 10 M3 Steel plate 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
sheets of paper to cover it.) (Plate thickness
0.8mm or above)
4) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for-
M4 Steel plate 1.6 - 1.8 16 - 18 1.2 - 1.3
eign material on the OPC drum surface. (Plate thickness
(Transfer unit) 0.8mm or above)
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- M3 Steel plate 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
eign material on the transfer roller. (Plate thickness
less than 0.8mm)
(Developing unit)
M4 Steel plate 1.2 - 1.4 12 - 14 0.9 - 1.0
1) Be careful not to attach fingerprints, oil, grease, or other for- (Plate thickness
eign material on the developing unit. less than 0.8mm)
(Fusing unit)
Tapping screw (for plastic)
1) Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or other foreign
material on the fusing roller and the external heating belt. Tightening Tightening Tightening
Screw Material to be
torque torque torque
2) Do not leave the fusing roller in contact state for a long time. diameter fixed
(Nm) (kgfcm) (lbft)
M3 Plastic resin 0.6 - 0.8 6-8 0.4 - 0.6
M4 Plastic resin 1.0 - 1.2 10 - 12 0.7 - 0.9
MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

[1] PRODUCT OUTLINE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. System configuration
Paper exit system
DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM
STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N MX-M363U/M453U/M503U

10 MX-SCX1
PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
11 AR-SC3 (For saddle)
PUNCH MODULE SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

9 MX-PNX5 7 MX-FN10
A/B/C/D
STAPLE CARTRIDGE Paper feed system

10 MX-SCX1
FINISHER
PUNCH MODULE
5 MX-FNX9
8 MX-PNX1 EXIT TRAY UNIT
A/B/C/D 4 MX-TRX2
LARGE CAPACITY TRAY
3 MX-LCX1
STAPLE CARTRIDGE
14 AR-SC2 PAPER PASS UNIT
6 MX-RBX3
FINISHER PUNCH MODULE STAND/1 x 500 SHEET STAND/2 x 500 SHEET
12 MX-FN11 13 MX-PNX6 PAPER DRAWER PAPER DRAWER
A/B/C/D
1 MX-DEX8 2 MX-DEX9
Printer expansion Image send expansion
PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PRINTER EXPANSION KIT

WITHOUT HDD WITH HDD
(For U model only) (For U model only)
15 MX-PB10 16 MX-PB11 FACSIMILE
EXPANSION KIT STAMP UNIT
INTERNET FAX
EXPANSION KIT
APPLICATION
INTEGRATION MODULE
PS3 EXPANSION KIT 20 MX-FXX2 21 AR-SU1 23 MX-FWX1 25 MX-AMX1
17 MX-PKX1
ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT NETWORK SCANNER
BARCODE FONT KIT
XPS EXPANSION KIT
18 MX-PUX1 19 AR-PF1 STAMP CARTRIDGE
22 AR-SV1
(For N model only)
24 MX-EBX3
EXPANSION KIT (For U model only)
26 MX-NSX1
Authentication/Security Application/Solution
DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT

(For the machine (For the machine SHARPDESK SHARPDESK APPLICATION
1 LICENSE KIT 50 LICENSE KIT COMMUNICATION MODULE KEYBOARD (For N model only)
with HDD installed)
27 MX-FR14U
without HDD installed)
28 MX-FR15U 29 MX-USX1 32 MX-US50 34 MX-AMX2 36 MX-KBX2
SHARPDESK SHARPDESK EXTERNAL
5 LICENSE KIT
Memory 30 MX-USX5
100 LICENSE KIT
33 MX-USA0
ACCOUNT MODULE
35 MX-AMX3
EXPANSION
SHARPDESK
MEMORY BOARD
10 LICENSE KIT
37 MX-SMX3 31 MX-US10
MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

2. Machine configuration
MX-M363N/MX-M453N/MX-M503N MX-M283N MX-M363U/MX-M453U/MX-M503U
Copier STD STD STD
PCL printer STD STD OPT*1
PS printer OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Main body LCD COLOR WVGA 8.5" COLOR WVGA 8.5" MONOCHROME HVGA 8.1"
FAX OPT OPT OPT
Scanner STD STD OPT*1
Filing (Print hold function) STD STD OPT*1
HDD STD STD OPT*1
RSPF/DSPF DSPF RSPF RSPF
Automatic duplex STD STD STD
Security OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
Internet Fax OPT*1 OPT*1 OPT*1
STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option. OPT*1: Product key target.
3. Combination of options
MX-M283N
MX-M363U Product
MX-M363N
Section Name Model name MX-M453U key Remarks
MX-M453N
MX-M503U target
MX-M503N
Paper feed 1 STAND/1 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX8
system 2 STAND/2 x 500 SHEET PAPER DRAWER MX-DEX9
3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY MX-LCX1 A4
Paper exit 4 EXIT TRAY UNIT MX-TRX2
system 5 FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher
6 PAPER PASS UNIT MX-RBX3
7 SADDLE STITCH FINISHER MX-FN10
8 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX1A/B/C/D For inner finisher
9 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX5A/B/C/D For saddle stitch finisher
10 STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-SCX1 For finisher (MX-FNX9)/
For saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FN10)
11 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC3 For saddle
12 FINISHER MX-FN11
13 PUNCH MODULE MX-PNX6A/B/C/D For finisher (MX-FN11)
14 STAPLE CARTRIDGE AR-SC2 For finisher (MX-FN11)
Printer 15 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT WITHOUT MX-PB10
expansion HDD
16 PRINTER EXPANSION KIT WITH HDD MX-PB11 STD
17 PS3 EXPANSION KIT MX-PKX1
18 XPS EXPANSION KIT MX-PUX1 *3 *3 The expansion memory board
(MX-SMX3) is required.
19 BARCODE FONT KIT AR-PF1
Image send 20 FACSIMILE EXPANSION KIT MX-FXX2 *1 *1
expansion 21 STAMP UNIT AR-SU1
22 STAMP CARTRIDGE AR-SV1
23 INTERNET FAX EXPANSION KIT MX-FWX1 *4
24 ENHANCED COMPRESSION KIT MX-EBX3
25 APPLICATION INTEGRATION MODULE MX-AMX1 *4
26 NETWORK SCANNER EXPANSION KIT MX-NSX1 STD
Authentication/ 27 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR14U *4 Commercial version
Security (For the machine with HDD installed)
28 DATA SECURITY KIT MX-FR15U Commercial version
(For the machine without HDD installed)
Application/ 29 SHARPDESK 1 LICENSE KIT MX-USX1
Solution 30 SHARPDESK 5 LICENSE KIT MX-USX5
31 SHARPDESK 10 LICENSE KIT MX-US10
32 SHARPDESK 50 LICENSE KIT MX-US50
33 SHARPDESK 100 LICENSE KIT MX-USA0
34 APPLICATION COMMUNICATION MX-AMX2 STD/*2 *4 For North America,
MODULE the SharpOSA Utility CD-ROM
is not provided.
35 EXTERNAL ACCOUNT MODULE MX-AMX3 *4
36 KEYBOARD MX-KBX2 STD/*2
Memory 37 EXPANSION MEMORY BOARD MX-SMX3 1GB (Required when the XPS
expansion kit is used.)
STD: Standard provision. : Installable. : Cannot be connected. *1: No support for some destinations. *2: Standard for North America.
*3: Memory expansion are required. *4: The printer expansion kit with hard drive (MX-PB11) is required.
MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

[2] CONSUMABLE PARTS
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Supply system table
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Model Name collective Remarks
MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500NT 10 Life: A4/Letter
(Toner: Net 930g) 6% document
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500NR 10
B. MPE (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500BT 10 Life: A4/Letter
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500NV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500NR 10
C. Asia/SRH (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500AT 10 Life: A4/Letter
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10
D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)

Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500GT 10 Life: A4/Letter
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500GV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500GR 10
E. SMEF/Taiwan/Africa/Israel/Philippines (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Quantity in
MX-M363 N/U
package
MX-M503 N/U
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500FT 10 Life: A4/Letter
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 150K 200K MX-500AV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 150K 200K MX-500AR 10
F. SESC (MX-M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Quantity in
No. Item Content Life Model Name collective Remarks
package
1 Toner Cartridge (Black) Toner Cartridge with IC Chip x1 40K MX-500CT 10 Life: A4/Letter
2 Developer (Black) Developer (Developer: Net 310g) x1 200K MX-500CV 10
3 Drum OPC Drum x1 200K MX-500CR 10
MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 1

2. Maintenance parts list
A. USA/Canada/South and Central America/Asia/Agency/Middle East
(MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)
Life
Model MX-M363 N/U
No. Item Content Quantity Package Remarks
name MX-M283N MX-M453 N/U
MX-M503 N/U
1 Heat roller kit MX-503HK Lower heat roller 1 150K 200K 5
(200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4
Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2
Upper heat roller 1
Upper pressure roller bearing 2
Pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
2 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 150K 200K 10
Discharge plate 1
3 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 150K 200K 10
DV side seal F/R 1 pair
TN filter UN 2
4 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 150K 200K 10
Toner reception seal 1
Side seal F/R 1 pair
Drum separation pawl unit 4
MC unit 1
Side sheet F/R for toner reception 2
seal
Molt cushion for side seal F/R 2
5 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5
6 Paper dust MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 150K 200K 10
removing unit
7 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 300K 400K 10
8 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11)
9 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN10)
10 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/FN10)
11 Finish stamp AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
cartridge
B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)

Life
Model MX-M363 N/U
MX-M503 N/U
1 Upper heat roller kit MX-503UH Upper heat roller 1 150K 200K 10
(200K kit) Upper separation pawl/pawl spring 4
2 Lower heat roller kit MX-503LH Lower heat roller 1 150K 200K 10
(200K kit) Lower separation pawl/pawl spring 2
3 Web cleaning kit MX-503WC Upper pressure roller bearing 2 150K 200K 10
Pressure roller 1
Web roller 1
4 Transfer kit MX-503TU Transfer roller 1 150K 200K 10
Discharge plate 1
5 DV seal kit MX-503DS DV seal 1 150K 200K 10
DV side seal F/R 1 pair
TN filter UN 2
6 Main charger kit MX-503MK Cleaner blade 1 150K 200K 10
Toner reception seal 1
Side seal F/R 1 pair
Drum separation pawl unit 4
MC unit 1
Side sheet F/R for toner reception 2
seal
Molt cushion for side seal F/R 2
7 Toner collection box MX-503HB Toner collection box 1 80K 5
8 Paper dust MX-503PD Paper dust removing unit 1 150K 200K 10
removing unit
9 Filter kit MX-503FL Ozone filter 1 300K 400K 10
10 Staple cartridge AR-SC2 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For finisher (MX-FN11)

Life
Model MX-M363 N/U
MX-M503 N/U
11 Staple cartridge AR-SC3 Staple cartridge 3 2000 times x 3 40 For saddle stitch
finisher (MX-FN10)
12 Staple cartridge MX-SCX1 Staple cartridge 3 5000 times x 3 20 For inner finisher/
saddle stitch finisher
(MX-FNX9/FN10)
13 Finish stamp AR-SV1 Finish stamp cartridge 2 20
cartridge
3. Definition the developer/drum life end 4. Production number identification

When the developer/drum counter reaches the specified level. A. Drum cartridge
When the developer/drum rpm reaches the specified level.
When either of the above reached the specified level, it is judged
as life end.
In an actual case, when correction or warm-up operation is per-
formed as well as output operation, the developer and the drum
rotates. Therefore, the developer/drum consuming level cannot be
determined only by the copy/print quantity. When, therefore, the
rpm reaches the specified level, it is judged as life end.
To check the drum life, use SIM22-1/22-13.
Developer/drum counter
Developer/drum rpm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
28 CPM 36/45/50 CPM
model model
Developer/drum 150K 200K 930K rotations The lot number is of 10 digits. Each digit indicates the content as
follows.
28 CPM model 36/45/50 CPM model The number is printed on the flange on the front side.
Single multi 100,000 110,000
1: Number
2 sheets multi 140,000 150,000
For this model, this digit is 2.
3 sheets multi 150,000 177,000
2: Alphabet
4 sheets multi 200,000 Indicates the model conformity code.
3: Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Printable counter
4: Number or X, Y, Z
28 CPM model Indicates the production month.
250,000 X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
5/6: Number
36/45/50 CPM model
200,000 Indicates the day of the production date.
7: Number
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
150,000 X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
8/9: Number
Indicates the day of the packing date.
100,000
10: Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
50,000
0
Single multi 2 sheets multi 3 sheets multi 4 sheets multi

B. Developer D. Environmental conditions
BK (Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 30 35
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(Temperature)
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as fol-
lows. Standard environmental Temperature 20 25 C
conditions Humidity 65 5 %RH
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
Usage environmental Temperature 10 35 C
the developer bag.
1: Alphabet Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
Indicates the production factory. manufactured month (Production lot) under
2: Number unsealed state
Indicates the production year. Drum: 36 months from the manufactured month
3/4: Number under unsealed state
Indicates the production month.
5/6: Number
Indicates the production day.
7: Hyphen
8: Number
Indicates the production lot.
C. Toner cartridge
The label indicating the management number is attached to the
side of the toner cartridge.
Internal product name Destination Incompatibility
A3M X500NT 1 A
B 00001 090210 B
Production Serial No. Production Version

place in production day year/month/day
Example: 1st of production on February 10, 2009

[3] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Identification of each section and functions

A. External view
(10)
(8) (1) (2) (3) (4) (9) (5) (6)
The keyboard is provided

as a standard part for
some models only. When a finisher / saddle stitch
finisher is not installed
(7)
When a finisher is installed
(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)
When a saddle stitch finisher is (11)

installed
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 Automatic document feeder This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of
2-sided originals can be automatically scanned.
2 Front cover Open this cover to switch the main power switch to "On" or "Off" or
to replace a toner cartridge.
3 Paper pass unit* This transfers output to the finisher (large capacity) or the saddle
stitch finisher.
4 Operation panel This is used to select functions and enter the number of copies.
5 Right tray* When installed, output can be delivered to this tray.
6 Output tray (center tray) Output is delivered to this tray.
7 Finisher* This can be used to staple output. A punch module can also be
installed to punch holes in output.
8 Punch module* This is used to punch holes in output. Requires the finisher (large
capacity).
9 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as When using the USB port, be careful of
USB memory to the machine. For the USB cable, use a shielded the total current consumption not to
cable. exceed 500mA.
10 Keyboard* This is a keyboard that is incorporated into the machine. When not A standard part or an option depending
used, it can be stored under the operation panel. on the model and the destination.
11 Saddle stitch finisher* This can be used to staple output. The saddle stitch function for
folding and stapling output and the fold function for folding output in
half are also available.
A punch module can also be installed to punch holes in output.
12 Finisher (large capacity)* This can be used to staple output.
13 Tray 1 This holds paper.
14 Tray 2 This holds paper.
15 Tray 3 (when a stand/1 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer or a stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed)*
16 Tray 4 (when a stand/2 x 500 sheet This holds paper.
paper drawer is installed)*
17 Tray 5 (when a large capacity tray is This holds paper.
installed)*
*: Peripheral device.
MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 1

[Automatic document feeder and document glass]
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(8)
No. Name Function/Operation

1 Paper feed roller This roller rotates to automatically feed the original.
2 Document feeding area cover Open this cover to remove an original mis-feed or clean the paper feed roller.
3 Original guides These help ensure that the original is scanned correctly. Adjust the guides to the width of the original.
4 Document feeder tray Place originals in this tray. 1-sided originals must be placed face up.
5 Original exit tray Originals are delivered to this tray after scanning.
6 Scanning area Originals placed in the document feeder tray are scanned here.
7 Original size detector This detects the size of an original placed on the document glass.
8 Document glass Use this to scan a book or other thick original that cannot be fed through the automatic document feeder.
B. Internal operation parts

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

1 Toner cartridges These contain toner for printing. When the toner runs out in a cartridge, the cartridge of the color that
ran out must be replaced.
2 Fusing unit Heat is applied here to fuse the transferred image onto the paper.
3 Right side cover Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
4 Paper reversing section cover This is used when 2-sided printing is performed. Open this cover to remove a paper mis-feed.
5 Bypass tray Use this tray to feed paper manually. When loading paper larger than 8-1/2" x 11"R or A4R, be sure to
pull out the bypass tray extension.
6 Main power switch This is used to power on the machine. When using the fax or Internet fax functions, keep this switch in
the "on" position.
7 Waste toner box This collects excess toner that remains after printing.
8 Handle Pull this out and grasp it when moving the machine.
9 Right cover of stand/ Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 3 or tray 4.
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer right cover of stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer (when a stand/
1 x 500 sheet paper drawer or a stand/
2 x 500 sheet paper drawer is installed)
10 Paper tray right side cover Open this to remove a paper mis-feed in tray 1 or tray 2.
11 Right side cover release lever To remove a paper mis-feed, pull and hold this lever up to open the right side cover.

C. Connectors
When the fax expansion kit is installed
(6)
(7)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

1 USB connector (A type) Supports USB 2.0. This is used to connect a USB device such as USB memory to the When using the USB port, be
machine. This connector cannot be used under the factory setting. The connector on the careful of the total current
front section can be used under the factory setting. When the keyboard is installed to the consumption not to exceed 500mA.
machine, an exclusive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is disabled.)
2 LAN connector Connect the LAN cable to this connector when the machine is used on a network. For
the LAN cable, use a shielded type cable.
3 USB connector (B type) Supports USB 2.0. A computer can be connected to this connector to use the machine
as a printer. For the USB cable, use a shielded cable.
4 Service-only connector CAUTION: This connector is for use only by service technicians. Connecting a cable to
this connector may cause the machine to malfunction.
Important note for service technicians: The cable connected to the service connector
must be less than 118" (3 m) in length.
5 Power plug
6 Extension phone socket When the fax function of the machine is used, an extension phone can be connected to
this socket.
7 Telephone line socket When the fax function of the machine is used, the telephone line is connected to this
socket.

D. Operation panel
(1) MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9)
JOB STATUS PRINT

READY
DATA
SYSTEM
SETTINGS IMAGE SEND
LINE
DATA
HOME
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides
confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
3 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
4 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [HOME] key Touch this key to display the home screen. Frequently used settings can be registered in the home screen to
enable quick and easy operation of the machine.
8 IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
9 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
10 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
11 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
12 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
13 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
14 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( )
blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
15 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
16 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

(2) MX-M363U/M453U/M503U
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10)
PRINT
DOCUMENT READY
FILING DATA
LINE
IMAGE SEND
DATA
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
(7) (8) (9) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)

1 Touch panel Messages and keys appear in the touch panel display. Touch the displayed keys to perform a variety of
operations. When a key is touched, a beep sounds and the selected item is highlighted. This provides
confirmation as you perform an operation.
2 Mode select keys and indicators Use these keys to change the mode displayed in the touch panel.
The indicator of a key lights when the key is selected.
[PRINT] key / [DOCUMENT FILING] key
The name and function of the key varies depending on the peripheral devices that are installed.
When a hard drive is not installed in the machine, this key is the [PRINT] key. Press this key to select print
mode when printing data that uses the print hold function.
When a hard drive is installed in the machine, this key is the [DOCUMENT FILING] key. Press this key to
switch to document filing mode when you wish to store a document as an image file on the hard drive or print
or transmit an image stored on the hard drive.
[IMAGE SEND] key
Press this key to select network scanner / fax mode to use the scanner function or fax function.
[COPY] key
Press this key to select copy mode. Hold the [COPY] key down to view the machine's total page use count and
amount of toner remaining.
3 PRINT mode indicators READY indicator
Print jobs can be received when this indicator is lit.
DATA indicator
This blinks while print data is being received and lights steadily while printing is taking place.
4 IMAGE SEND mode indicators LINE indicator
This lights up during transmission or reception of a fax or Internet fax. This also lights during transmission of an
image in scan mode.
DATA indicator
This blinks when a received fax or Internet fax cannot be printed because of a problem such as out of paper.
This lights up when there is a transmission job that has not been sent.
5 Numeric keys These are used to enter the number of copies, fax numbers, and other numerical values. These keys are also
used to enter numeric value settings (except for the system settings).
6 [CLEAR] key ( ) Press this key to return the number of copies to "0".
7 [JOB STATUS] key Press this key to display the job status screen. The job status screen is used to check information on jobs and to
cancel jobs.
8 [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key Press this key to display the system settings menu screen. The system settings are used to configure paper tray
settings, store addresses for transmission operations, and adjust parameters to make the machine easier to use.
9 Function key To use the Sharp OSA function, press this key to switch to Sharp OSA mode.
10 [START] key Press this key to copy or scan an original. This key is also used to send a fax in fax mode.
11 [LOGOUT] key ( ) Press this key to log out after you have logged in and used the machine. When using the fax function, this key
can also be pressed to send tone signals on a pulse dial line.
12 [#/P] key ( ) When using the copy function, press this key to use a job program. When using the fax function, this key can be
used when dialing.
13 [CLEAR ALL] key ( ) Press this key to return to the initial operation state. Use this key when you wish to cancel all settings that have
been selected and start operation from the initial state.
14 [STOP] key ( ) Press this key to stop a copy job or scanning of an original.
15 [POWER SAVE] key ( ) / indicator Use this key to put the machine into auto power shut-off mode to save energy. The [POWER SAVE] key ( )
blinks when the machine is in auto power shut-off mode.
16 [POWER] key ( ) Use this key to turn the machine power on and off.
17 Main power indicator This lights up when the machine's main power switch is in the "on" position.

E. DSPF
(1) Internal structure
5 4 14 2 3 1
7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
2 Paper feed roller Performs the paper feed operation of documents.
3 Separation roller Separate a document to prevent against double-feed.
4 Resist roller (Drive) Performs resist of document transport.
5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to
document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller.
document.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to
document.
14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly.
(2) Sensors and Switches
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
CIS
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD5 SPPD6 (SPOD)
Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

CIS CIS unit CIS Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
SCOV DSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the DSPF upper cover.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SPED DSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 DSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 DSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 DSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPPD6 (SPOD) DSPF document exit sensor Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the DSPF paper feed tray.

(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB and lamps
4
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS
FAN

FAN Cooling fan motor DC motor Cools the CIS unit and the motor.
SPFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section.
STMPS Stamp solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Drives the stamp.
SRRC PS clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of resist roller.

1 DSPF control PWB Controls the DSPF section.
2 DSPF flash ROM PWB Program ROM for DSPF
3 DSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the DSPF section.
4 DSPF CIS unit Reads document images. (CIS PWB: CIS control, LED: Light source)
F. RSPF
(1) Internal structure
5 4 14 2 3 1
15 7 6 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 Pickup roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.
5 Resist roller (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the resist roller, and provides transport power of the resist roller to document.
6 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports document from resist roller to transport roller 2.
7 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applied a pressure to document and the transport roller, and provides the transport power of the transport roller to document.
8 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports document to the transport 3 roller.
10 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports document from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. / Transports document to the resist roller when
reversing the document.
12 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges document.
13 Paper exit roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to document and the paper exit roller and provides transport power of the paper exit roller to document.
14 Transport auxiliary roller Helps to transport document smoothly.
15 Reverse gate Reverses a document to scan the back surface of the document.

(2) Sensors and Switches
SCOV
SPPD2 SPPD1 SPLS2
SPED SPWS SPLS1
SOCD
SPPD3 SPPD5

SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover.
SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPED RSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 RSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 RSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPPD1 RSPF document pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the document.
SPWS RSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the RSPF paper feed tray.
(3) Motors, clutches, solenoids, PWB
SPFM
SPM
SRRC
STMPS SRVC
SPRS

SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the roller in the paper feed section.
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and
transporting it to the resist roller.
SRVC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit
roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the resist roller.

1 RSPF driver PWB Drives the motor and the clutch in the RSPF section.

G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS CCD
TFD3
TFD2 POD3
HPOS
POD2
APPD1
POD1
WEB-END
TH_MY
TH_US
DSW_ADU
BD
PCS
TCS
TH_DV/HUD_DV APPD2
PPD2 MPED MPLD
TNBOX
MTOP1
TNF MPWD
MTOP2
PPD1
MPFD
CLUD1 CPFD1
CPED1
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13 CSPD1 DSW_C
CSS14
CLUD2 CPFD2
CPED2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23 CSPD2
CSS24

Signal name Name Function/Operation Type
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass. Transmission type
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass. Transmission type
BD Laser beam detection Detects the laser scan start timing.
CCD CCD unit Converts document images (optical signals) into electrical signals.
CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Transmission type
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Transmission type
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty. Transmission type
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty. Transmission type
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass. Transmission type
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass. Transmission type
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection Detects the tray 1 paper remaining quantity.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear Duct switch
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 - 4. Duct switch
CSS13 Tray 1 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 1 is detected. Duct switch
CSS14 Tray 1 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear Duct switch
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 edge detection 1 - 4. Duct switch
CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3 The paper size of tray 2 is detected. Duct switch
CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4 Duct switch
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Detects the duplex (ADU) cover open/close. Transmission type
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home position. Transmission type
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty. Transmission type
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry. Transmission type
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width. Volume resistor
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position Transmission type
(storing position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull- Transmission type
out position).
OCSW Original cover SW Detects the trigger for document size. Transmission type
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from fusing. Transmission type
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the paper from paper exit. Transmission type
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit to right tray.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller. Transmission type
PPD2 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller. Reflection type
PCS Image density sensor Detects toner patch density. Reflection type
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density (K). Magnetic sensor
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face down paper exit tray full. Transmission type
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection Detects the right tray paper exit full.
TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity detection Detects the temperature and the humidity in the process section.
TH_MY Main thermistor Fusing temperature detection (main) Thermistor
TH_US Sub thermistor Fusing temperature detection (sub) Thermistor
TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste Transmission type
toner near end and the waste toner full.
WEB-END Web end detection Detects life end of the web cleaner. Electrode switch

H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
MSW DSW-F

DSW-F Front door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
DSW-R Right door open/close switch Micro switch Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF the power line of the fusing,
motor and the LSU laser.
MSW Main switch Seesaw switch Turns ON/OFF the DC power source.
PWRSW Operation panel power switch Push switch Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source.

I. Clutches and solenoids
ADUGS
MPUC
CPFC2
MPFS
MPGS
PSPS
TDSC
CPUC1
CPFC1
CPUC2

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
CPFC1 Paper transport clutch 1 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller 7.
CPFC2 Paper transport clutch 2 Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper transport section of
the paper feed tray section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
(Paper feed tray 2)
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
(Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
PSPS Separation solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.

J. Drive motor
OSM
ADUM_H
POM
WEBM
FUM
PGM
MIM DM
PFM
CPFM RRM
CLUM1
ADUM_L
CLUM2

ADUM_H ADU motor upper Stepping motor Drives the transport roller 13.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower Stepping motor Drives the paper transport roller in the right door section.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 1)
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor DC brush motor Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
(Paper feed tray 2)
CPFM Paper feed motor Brush-less motor Drives the paper feed section.
DM Drum motor Brush-less motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
FUM Fusing drive motor Brush-less motor Drives the fusing unit.
MIM Scanner motor Stepping motor Drives the scanner (reading) unit.
OSM Shifter motor Stepping motor Performs offset of paper.
PFM Transport motor Stepping motor Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the paper feed section.
Drives the transport roller which is between the resist roller and the right door section.
PGM Polygon motor DC brush-less motor Scans the laser beam.
POM Paper exit drive motor Stepping motor Drives the paper exit roller.
RRM Resist motor Stepping motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.
WEBM Fusing web cleaning motor Synchronous motor Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.

K. Lamps and gates
CCFT CLI CLI

(N model) (U model)
2
1
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW

CCFT LCD back-light Cold Cathode Fluorescent Tube Back-light for LCD
CLI Scanner lamp N model: LED Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan the document image.
U model: Xenon lamp
HL_UM Heater lamp (main) Heats the heat roller (main).
HL_US Heater lamp (sub) Heats the heat roller (sub).
HL_UW Heater lamp (for warm-up) Heats up supplementarily when warming-up.
No. Name Type Function/Operation

1 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to
discharge paper to the right tray.
2 ADU reverse gate Switches the transport route of paper to the duplex (ADU) section.

L. Fans and filters
POFM1
POFM2
RDCFM OZFM
POFM3 1
LSUFM
CPUFAM PSFM2
2
2
PSFM1
Signal name Name Function/Operation

CPUFAM MFP PWB cooling fan Cools the MFP PWB.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan Cools the LSU section.
OZFM Ozone fan Exhausts ozone.
PSFM1 Power cooling fan 1 Cools the power unit.
PSFM2 Power cooling fan 2 Cools the power unit.
POFM1 Paper exit cooling fan 1 Cools the fusing and the paper exit section.
RDCFM Suction fan Stabilizes paper transport.

1 Ozone filter Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
2 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.

M. PWB
N model U model
13 12 N model U model
14
14
15 15
9 9
13
12
27
27
11
8
10
22
23 21
26
7
16
5
4
19
20
18
28
17 6
24
25
29
3

1 RD I/F PWB Interfaces each sensor signal in the right door unit section.
2 Paper size detection PWB Detects the paper size in the paper feed tray.
3 DC power PWB Generates a DC voltage.
4 Motor drive PWB Drives each motor in the paper transport section.
5 HV PWB Generates the main charger voltage, the developing bias voltage, and the transfer voltage.
6 AC power PWB Controls the power source in the primary side.
7 Scanner control PWB Controls the scanner and the operation panel section.
8 CCD PWB Scans document images.
9 LED drive PWB (N model) / Inverter PWB (U model) Drives the scanner lamp.
10 Document detection light collector PWB Outputs the document size detection signal.
11 Document detection light emitting PWB Drives the document size detection LED.
12 LCD INV PWB Generates the high voltage for the LCD back-light.
13 LVDS PWB Converts display signals into LCD display signals.
14 MFP OPE PWB Outputs the key operation signal.
15 Power SW PWB Controls ON/OFF of the DC power source.
16 HL PWB Controls the heater lamp.
17 MFP PWB Controls data related to images, and controls the whole machine.
18 Mother PWB Interfaces signals of the MFP PWB and another PWB.
19 PCU PWB Controls the engine section.
20 PCU Flash ROM PWB The ROM PWB that control the PCU PWB.
21 BD PWB Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
22 LSU PWB Controls the LSU.
23 LD PWB Controls laser lighting.
24 PROG1 ROM PWB Program ROM PWB for booting the printer controller
25 PROG2 ROM PWB MFP PWB program ROM PWB
26 SCN Flash ROM PWB Scanner control program ROM PWB
27 USB I/F PWB USB I/F
28 Scanner function expansion PWB (Option for N model) Controls compression and decompression of image data.
29 WH PWB (Service kit: Dehumidifier heater) Controls the dehumidifier heater.

N. Fuses/Thermostats
U model
16
N model
14
15 U model
TS_UM
TS_US
10
13
11
12
8 6
7
1 9
2
3
4
5
Signal name Name Specifications Section

TS UM Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
TS US Thermostat Fusing roller overheat protection Fusing unit
NO Signal name Name Specifications Section

1 F201 Fuse T6.3AH 250V DC power PWB
6 F1 Fuse 15A 250V (100V) / T10AH 250V(200V) AC power PWB
7 F2 Fuse T10AH250V (200V only) AC power PWB
8 F3 Fuse T2AH 250V AC power PWB
9 F4 Fuse T2AH 250V (200V only) AC power PWB
10 F101 Fuse 12A 125V (100V) / T6.3AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
11 F102 Fuse T1AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
12 F103 Fuse T8AH 250V (100V) / T5AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
13 F301 Fuse T5AH 250V (100V) / T3.15AH 250V (200V) DC power PWB
14 F1 Fuse T0.8A 250V LCD INV PWB
15 F1 Fuse 200mA 250V LCD INV PWB
16 F1 Fuse 1.25A 250V CL inverter PWB

O. Rollers
34
35
33
32
36
37
24
25
27
26
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
22
23 21
31
30
5 19
17
18
4
6
15
16
8 14
40
7 41
12
13
9

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
5 Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
6 Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
10 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
11 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
12 Transport roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
13 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the transport roller 4.
14 Transport roller 3 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
16 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport
roller 7.
17 Transport roller 5 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
paper.
19 Transport roller 6 (Idle) Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
paper.
21 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
paper.
23 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
paper.
25 Transport roller 9 (Drive) Transports paper from the fusing roller to the transport roller 1.
paper.
27 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
paper.
29 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
paper.
31 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the paper from the
manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.
32 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper to the duplex (ADU) section. / Transports paper to the paper exit roller 2.
paper.
34 Paper exit roller 1 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
35 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
36 Paper exit roller 2 (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the paper exit roller to give the transport power of the paper exit roller to
the paper.
37 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Discharges paper.
38 Fusing roller (Heating) Heat and press toner onto paper to fuse images.
39 Fusing roller (Pressing) Applies a pressure to the fusing roller (heating).
paper.

[4] ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, how-
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the ever, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest. must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Per- If the above precaution should be neglected, the adjustment would
form only the necessary adjustments according to the need. not complete normally or trouble may occur.
2. Adjustment item list

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit 1A Adjust the developing doctor gap
1B Adjust the developing roller main pole position
1C Toner density control reference value setting 25-2
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values 2A Adjust the main charger grid voltage 8-2
2B Adjust the developing bias voltage 8-1
2C Transfer current and voltage adjustment 8-6
2D Transfer separation bias voltage adjustment 8-17
ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image 3A Print engine image skew adjustment (LSU parallelism adjustment) 64-2
position, image magnification ratio, 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direction) 50-10
void area adjustments 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment 50-10/50-1
(Manual adjustments) 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment 50-10
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion adjustment 4A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism adjustment
(OC mode) 4B Scan image sub scanning direction distortion adjustment
4C Scan image main scanning direction distortion adjustment
4D Scan image distortion adjustment (Whole scanner unit)
ADJ 5 Scanner image skew adjustment 5A DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment
(DSPF/RSPF mode) 5B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode) 64-2
5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode) 64-2
ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment 6A Image focus adjustment (Document table mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode) 48-1
6B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back surface mode)
ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio 7A Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1
adjustment (Manual adjustment) 7B Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode) 48-1/48-5
7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1
7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 48-1
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center adjustment 8A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode) 50-12
(Manual adjustment) 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-12/50-6
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position, void area adjustment (Printer mode) 50-5
ADJ 10 Copy image position, image loss, 10A Copy image position, image loss, void area adjustment (Document table mode) 50-1
and void area adjustment 10B Document scan position adjustment 53-8
(Manual adjustment) (DSPF/RSPF mode scanner scan position adjustment)
10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) 50-6
ADJ 11 CCD calibration 11A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) (Document table mode) 63-3/63-5
11B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration) (DSPF mode) (DSPF-installed machine only) 63-3
11C Shading adjustment (Calibration) (DSPF mode) (DSPF-installed machine only) 63-2
ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer density and gradation 46-24
(Auto printer density and gradation adjustment
adjustment) 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment 46-16
12C Copy density in each copy mode (Overall density adjustment) 46-2
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
12D Density and gradation adjustment in each copy mode (Normally not required) 46-10
12E Document background density reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy mode 46-32
(Normally unnecessary to adjust)
12F Color document reproducibility adjustment in the copy mode 46-37
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) (N model only)
12G Copy density and gradation adjustment (DSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the low 46-9
density area and the high density area) (In the case of DSPF)
12H Copy density and gradation adjustment (RSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the low 46-9
density area and the high density area) (In the case of RSPF)
12I Automatic copy and printer density and gradation adjustment by the user
(Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the automatic copy density and gradation adjustment, and
the adjustment)
ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment (Printer 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment 67-25
density and gradation adjustment)
ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure mode operating conditions in copy, scan, and FAX 46-19
ADJ 15 Paper size detection adjustment 15A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 40-2
15B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment 53-6
ADJ 16 Document size detection 16A Document size sensor detection point adjustment 41-1
adjustment (Document table mode) 16B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size sensor 41-2
MX-M503N ADJUSTMENTS AND SETTINGS 4 1

Job No Adjustment item list Simulation
ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 65-1
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, image 18A Print image main scanning direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment 50-28
off-center, image magnification (Document table mode)
ratio adjustment 18B Image off-center automatic adjustment (Each paper feed tray) 50-28
(Automatic adjustment) 18C Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning 50-28
direction image magnification ratio automatic adjustment (Document table mode)
18D Copy image off-center, image lead edge position, sub scanning direction image 50-28
magnification ratio automatic adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position adjustment
3. Details of adjustment
3) Insert a thickness gauge of 0.40mm in between 20mm - 40mm
ADJ 1 Adjust the developing unit from the edge of the developing doctor.
4) Push the developing doctor in the arrow direction, and tighten
1-A Adjust the developing doctor gap the fixing screw of the developing doctor. (Perform the similar
procedure for the front frame and the rear frame.)
This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
5) Check that the doctor gaps at two positions in 20mm - 40mm
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
from the both sides of the developing doctor are in the range of
* When the print image density is low. 0.40 0.02mm.
* When there is a blur on the print image. * When inserting a thickness gauge, be careful not to scratch the
* When there is unevenness in the print image density. developing doctor and the developing roller.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
NOTE: Do not hold the adjacent section of the MG roller strongly.
1) Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove 20mm 20mm
the developing unit upper cover. 40mm 40mm
Note for use of a thickness gauge

NOTE: All DV material must be removed before beginning step 2. Do not insert the gauge diagonally.
2) Loosen the developing doctor fixing screw. The gauge must pass freely.
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
1-B Adjust the developing roller main pole

position
* The developing unit has been disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* The toner is excessively dispersed.
NOTE: Be careful not to put fingerprints, oil, grease, or foreign
materials on the roller during the work.
1) Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the develop-
ing unit on a flat surface.
NOTE: All DV material must be removed before begining step 2.
2) Attach a piece of string to a sewing needle or pin.

3) Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because too heavy. It will not 1-C Toner density control reference value
provide a correct position.) setting
4) Mark the developing roller surface on the extension line of the This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
needle with the needle at 2 - 3mm from the developing roller * When developer is replaced.
surface. (Never touch the needle tip with the developing roller.)
NOTE: Be sure to execute this adjustment only when developer is
replaced. Never execute it in the other cases.
1) With the front cabinet open, enter SIM 25-2.
When setting the toner density control reference value, pull out
the toner cartridge in advance.

2 3mm 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
$7'(9($'-B.
$7'(9(92B.
5) Measure the distance between the marking position and the

doctor tip of the developing unit, and check that it is 12.0 . (;(&87(
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the devel- 2) Close the front cabinet and press [EXECUTE] button.
oping roller main pole position in the following procedures.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.
7&9B.
12.00.5mm
. (;(&87(
Adjustment completed

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
6) Remove the developing unit front cover, loosen the fixing $7'(9($'-B.
screw of the developing roller main pole adjustment plate, and $7'(9(92B.
move the adjustment plate in the arrow direction to adjust.
. (;(&87(
Abnormal end

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17
7&'B.(((/
7&9B.(((/
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the developing roller main pole
position comes to the specified range.
7) After completion of the adjustment of the developing roller
main pole position, fix the developing roller main pole adjust-
ment plate with the fixing screw.
. (;(&87(

3) After completion of the adjustment of the toner density control 2) Enter the SIM 8-2 mode.
reference value, insert the toner cartridge.

4) Close the front cabinet. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel- 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$ *%B.
oping roller rotates, and the toner density sensor detects toner $
density, and the output value is displayed.
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the aver-

age value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to normal from highlight.
This makes known about whether the adjustment operation is
completed or not. 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
NOTE: 10-key
EXECUTE
If the operation is interrupted within 3 minutes, the adjustment
EXECUTE
result is not reflected. or after 30 sec.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the opera-
tion is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal dis-
6,08/$7,2112
play.
7(67 &/26(
0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref- $

$ *%B.
erence toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error display Content Details of content

EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 67, or
sensor control voltage level over 197
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 154, or sensor
control voltage level less than 49
EE-EC EC abnormality Sensor output level less than 95, or
sensor control voltage level over 105 0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
NOTE: When not replacing the developer, do not execute SIM25- 3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 1 of the high
2. voltage PWB and the GND.
ADJ 2 Adjusting high voltage values

2-A Adjust the main charger grid voltage
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced.
* U2 trouble has occurred.
* The PCU PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

2 The main charger grid voltage is outputted for 30sec.
If this procedure is executed for a long time, the OPC drum
1 and the developing roller may be adversely affected. Use this
procedure as short as possible.
If possible, use a old developer unit and OPC drum for this
adjustment.
5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified val-
ues, change the adjustment value and adjust.
Adjustment value Setting Default

Item/Display Content
(Monitor voltage) range value
A GB_K K charging/grid 31.22 0.26V 0 - 850 650
bias set value
If the specified value voltage is not obtained even though the

adjustment value is changed, the following parts may be
defective.
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
MC unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode

3) Apply a digital multi-meter between the check pin 3 of the high
2-B Adjust the developing bias voltage voltage PWB and the GND.
1) Remove the rear cover of the machine.

The main charger voltage is outputted for 30sec.
5) Check the monitor voltage with the digital multi-meter.
Adjustment value Setting Default

(Monitor voltage) range value
A DVB_K K developing 0.84 0.02V 0 - 700 496
2) Enter the SIM 8-1 mode. bias set value
If the monitor voltage is not in the range of the specified values

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
shown in the table above, change the adjustment value and
'96(77,1*$1'287387 adjust. If the specified value voltage is not obtained even
$ '9%B.
$ though the adjustment value is changed, the following parts

may be defective.
High voltage PWB
PCU PWB
Developing unit
High voltage circuit electrode
2-C Transfer current and voltage adjustment

0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
10-key
EXECUTE * U2 trouble has occurred.
EXECUTE * The PCU PWB has been replaced.
or after 30 sec.
1) Enter the SIM 8-6 mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'96(77,1*$1'287387
$ '9%B. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$ 7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&3/$,1%:63;

$ % 7&3/$,1%:'3;
& 7&+($9<%:63;

' 7&+($9<%:'3;
( 7&2+3%:
) 7&(19(/23(%:
* 7&&/($1,1*
+ 7&&/($1,1*352&21
, 7&$'62537,21
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2. (;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&3/$,1%:63;
$ % 7&3/$,1%:'3;
& 7&+($9<%:63;
' 7&+($9<%:'3;
( 7&2+3%:
) 7&(19(/23(%:
* 7&&/($1,1*
+ 7&&/($1,1*352&21
, 7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.

2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] key.
By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer voltage is outputted.
Setting Default value

range 28/36 PPM model 45/50 PPM model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/ Standard paper mode
Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX White Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper mode Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
D TC HEAVY BW DPX Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 113 129
F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 - 255 113 129
G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 161 161
H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 161 161
I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 - 255 113 129
2-D Transfer separation bias voltage ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image
adjustment
position, image magnification
* When the high voltage PWB is replaced. ratio, void area adjustments
* U2 trouble has occurred. (Manual adjustments)
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. 3-A Print engine image skew adjustment
1) Enter the SIM 8-17 mode. (LSU parallelism adjustment)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
* When the LSU unit is replaced.
7(67
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387 * When the LSU unit is removed from the main unit.
$ 3/9)$&(
$ % 3/9%$&. 1) Enter the SIM 64-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$ 35,173$77(51
$ % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$
' '(16,7<),;(',)$

( 08/7,&2817
) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
* 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.
+ '83/(;12
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
(;(&87( 2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Set the set items to the values shown below.
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$ 3/9)$&( Item Setting value
$ % 3/9%$&.
A 1

B 1
C 254
D 255
3) Select the paper feed tray with A3 (11" x 17") paper in it by

changing the value of G.
(;(&87( 2.
The check pattern is printed out.
5) Check the printed image for any skew.
2) Select a mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. Measure the right angle level by using the printed cross pat-
3) Enter an adjustment value (specified value) and press [OK] tern.
key. There are following two methods of checking the image for any
By setting the default value, the specified voltage is outputted. skew (right angle).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the transfer separation bias Method 1:
voltage is outputted. Measure the maximum length of the diagonal lines of the rect-
angle print pattern. Check the difference in the length of the
Setting Default diagonal lines for judgment of good or no good.
range value
Method 2:
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
(Front surface) Compare the right angle of vertical side and the horizontal side
B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170 of the rectangle print pattern with the right angle of A3 or 11" x
(Back surface) 8.5" paper for judgment of good or no good.

(NOTE) 6) Remove the left cover and the paper exit tray cabinet.
In the case of Method 2, the right angle of paper to be used
may not be exact. Be sure to check the right angle of paper to
be used in advance.
(Method 1)
a) Measure the length of the diagonal lines of the rectangle
print pattern.
2
A 4
1 3
Diagonal line C Diagonal line D
7) When the LSU unit fixing screw is attached to the hole position
on the lower side, remove the fixing screw and attach it to the
hole on the upper side.
Loosen the fixing screw which is attached to the adjustment
hole position on the upper side. Loosen the LSU fixing screw
(left).
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C

and D of the diagonal lines.
c) Check to insure that the difference between C and D is in
the following range. C D = 0.8mm
If the difference between C and D is in the above range, there
is no need to adjust.
(Method 2)
a) Fit the side of A3 or 11" x 17" paper to the long side of the
rectangle print pattern.
8) Move the LSU front frame side up and down to adjust.

(When Method 1 is used to check the image for any skew
Comparison line
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
When C > D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
0.5mm or less shifted upward.
When C < D (the lengths of the diagonal lines), the LSU is
shifted downward.
Direction A Direction B (When Method 2 is used to check the image for any skew
(right angle) in procedure 5 in advance)
If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of A, to shift the
LSU upward. If the image is skewed in the arrow direction of B,
to shift the LSU downward.
b) Measure the shift distance between vertical side of paper

and side of the rectangle print pattern.
If the above distance is 0.5mm or less, there is no need to
adjust.
If not, execute the following procedures.
9) Execute procedures 4) and 5).

(Repeat procedures 4), 5), 7) and 8) until a satisfactory result
is obtained.)
10) When the adjustment result reaches a satisfactory level,
tighten the LSU unit fixing screws (at the left and at the center).

6) Change the set value of set item A.
3-B Print engine image magnification ratio
When the set value is changed by 1, the dimension is changed
adjustment (Main scanning direction) by 0.1mm.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification
* When the LSU (writing) unit is replaced. ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set
* U2 trouble has occurred. value is decreased, the BK image magnification ratio in the
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. main scanning direction is decreased.
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. Repeat procedures 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is obtained.
3-C Print engine print area (void area)
adjustment
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
$ %.0$*
$ * When the LSU is replaced or removed.
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6 * When a paper tray is replaced.
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
) 0$,1&6 * When the manual feed tray is replaced.
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
, 68%0)7 * When the duplex section is disassembled.
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced.
/ 68%/&& * When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
(;(&87( 2.
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled.
* When the registration roller section is disassembled.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print * The PCU PWB has been replaced.

7(67
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
(Note)
Before executing this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ 3B print
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7 engine image magnification ratio adjustment (Main scanning direc-
& 0$,1&6 tion) in advance.
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6 $ %.0$*
$
. 68%&6 % 0$,10)7
/ 68%/&&
& 0$,1&6
2. ' 0$,1&6
(;(&87(
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray. * 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
3) Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll , 68%0)7
key. - 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
The check pattern is printed out. (;(&87( 2.
5) Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
EXECUTE EXECUTE
End of print

7(67
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
240 0.5mm ) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper to all the trays, and select the set
item J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
adjustment target paper feed tray.
The adjustment pattern is printed.

4) Check the adjustment pattern to confirm that the items below 6) Select the adjustment item I, J, K with the scroll key, and enter
are in the range of the standard values. the adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Content Standard adjustment value Setting Default

X Lead edge void area 3.0 1.0mm range value
Y Rear edge void area 2.0 - 5.0mm A Lead RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50
Z1/Z2 FRONT/REAR void area 2.0 2.0mm edge reference position
adjust- (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
Z1 value motor ON Tray
2.0 2.0mm
C RRCB-CS34 timing Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC adjust- LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT ment Manual 1 - 99 50
paper
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
X loss area loss area setting
3.0 1.0mm Y H setting SIDE Side image loss area 0 - 99 20
2.0 - 5.0mm value adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjust- adjustment
J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
Z2 ment
2.0 2.0mm M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired ratio adjustment (CCD)
condition, execute the simulation 50-1. correction
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm. N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
5) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode. scanning correction value
O direction DENB-CS1 Tray 1 correction 1 - 99 50
print area value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8( value value
$ 55&$
$ % 55&%&6
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
& 55&%&6 value
' 55&%/&& R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
( 55&%0)7
value
) 55&%$'8
* /($'
S DENB-LCC LCC correction value 1 - 99 50
+ 6,'( T DENB-ADU ADU correction value 1 - 99 66
, '(1$
- '(1% When the adjustment value is increased, the void area is
. )52175($5
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the void
/ 2))6(7B2&
area is decreased.
2.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is

10-key changed by 0.1mm.
OK NOTE: The adjustment value and the actual void area are related
as follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( NOTE: When the amount of the rear edge void is different between
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$
each paper feed tray, change the adjustment value of item
$ % 55&%&6 N, O, P, Q, R, S, T (DENB-XXX) in SIM50-1 and adjust.
& 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
The adjustment item J (DENB) have a effect on the paper
( 55&%0)7 of all paper feed tray.
) 55&%$'8
That is, adjustment value of item N, O, P, Q, R, S, T
* /($'
+ 6,'(
(DENB-XXX) fine adjusts to adjustment item J (DENB) for
, '(1$ each paper tray.
- '(1%
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) - 4) to check
. )52175($5
/ 2))6(7B2&
that the void area is within the specified range.
2. Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if the
lead edge void area is not within the specified range, change the
adjustment value of RRCB-XXX (item B, C, D, E, F) of SIM 50-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained.

Setting Default
3-D Print engine image off-center adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. value (Tray 3)
* When a paper tray is replaced. F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 4)
* When the paper tray section is disassembled.
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment value (LCC)
(Main scanning direction) is performed. H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
* When the manual feed tray is replaced. value (ADU)
NOTE:
* When the manual feed tray is disassembled.
Before execution of this
* When the duplex section is disassembled. adjustment check to
* When the duplex section is installed or replaced. insure that the adjustment
items A - G have been
* When the large capacity paper feed tray is installed or replaced.
properly adjusted. If not,
* When the large capacity paper feed tray section is disassembled. this adjustment cannot be
* When the registration roller section is disassembled. made properly.
I SUB-MFT Registration Manual 1 - 99 50
motor ON paper feed
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. J SUB-CS12 Timing Standard 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. adjustment tray
(Note) K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
Before execution of this adjustment, check to insure the following
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
item.
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
* Check that the ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual 1-6 1 2
adjustment (Main scanning direction) has been properly paper feed (CS1)
adjusted. CS1 Tray 1 2
1) Enter SIM 50-10 mode. CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783 LCC LCC 6
$
$ %.0$* P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
% 0$,10)7
NO selection No 1
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
3) Set A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in the paper feed tray selected in pro-
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
cedure 2).
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7 The adjustment pattern is printed.
- 68%&6
5) Check that the adjustment pattern image is printed in the cor-
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
rect position.
(;(&87( 2. Measure the dimension of the void area in the front and the
rear frame direction of the adjustment pattern, and check that
EXECUTE all the following conditions are satisfied.
EXECUTE
End of print RV
2.0mm 2.0mm

7(67
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
2) Use the scroll key to select a paper feed tray which is to be

adjusted. (Items B - H)
Setting Default FV
Item/Display Content 2.0mm 2.0mm
range value
A BK-MAG Main scan print 60 - 140 100 RV: REAR VOID AREA
magnification ratio BK
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
FV: FRONT VOID AREA
value (Manual paper feed) RV + FV 4.0mm
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50 RV = 2.0 2.0mm
value (Tray 1)
FV = 2.0 2.0mm
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment 1 - 99 50
value (Tray 2) If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.

6) Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the
[EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pat-
tern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
When the set value is changed by 1, the shift distance is
changed by about 0.1mm.
Repeat procedures 3) - 6) until the conditions of procedure 5)
are satisfied.
In case a satisfactory result cannot be obtained by repeating
the above procedures, perform the following procedure.
7) Loosen the paper feed tray off-center adjustment screws (2
pcs.) at the center section of the lift plate of the paper feed tray,
and change the gear unit position in the front/rear frame direc-
tion. Repeat the adjustment procedures from 4).
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
ADJ 4 Scan image distortion

adjustment (OC mode)
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
* When the copy image is distorted.
side of the scanner unit B.
4-A Scanner (reading) unit parallelism

adjustment
Before execution of this adjustment, remove the document table
glass.
N model
1) Remove the LED lamp unit, and then loosen the screws which
are fixing the scanner unit A and the drive wire. Release the
scanner unit A from the drive wire.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.

5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit U model
B.
1) Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
dures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
2) Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper.
When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on
the front and the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is
proper.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
If this requirement is not met, do the following steps.

3) Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit B.
4) Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
on the front and the rear frames simultaneously.

5) Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B. 4-B Scan image sub scanning direction
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above proce- distortion adjustment
dures, perform the following procedures. 1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which (Draw a rectangular with four right angles.)
is not in contact.
L
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner L L
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
2) Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the docu-

ment table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
6) With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
3) Check for distortion in the sub scanning direction.

If La = Lb, there is no distortion.
La Lb
If there is any distortion in the sub scanning direction, perform

the following procedures.
4) Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)

5) Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the 5) Change the height balance of the scanner rail on the front
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scan- frame side.
ner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
6) Tighten the scanner unit drive pulley fixing screw.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 6) until the condition of the procedure 3)

is satisfied.
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted with
the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image distortion
adjustment (Whole scanner unit).
4-C Scan image main scanning direction

distortion adjustment
1) Make a test chart on A3 (11" x 17") paper as shown below.
(Draw a rectangular with four right angles.) Remove the lower cabinet of the operation panel. Loosen the
scanner rail fixing screw to change the balance between the
L right and the left heights of the scanner rail.
Repeat the procedures 2) - 5) until the difference between the
image distortions (distortion balance) is deleted.
6) Without changing the balance of the scanner rail on the front
L L frame side, change the overall height.
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper. Check
that the distortion in the main scanning direction is within the
specified range.
L = 10mm Repeat the procedures 6) and 7) until the distortion in the main
scanning direction is in the specified range.
L
If the distortion in the sub scanning direction cannot be deleted
with the above procedures, perform ADJ 4D Scan image dis-
tortion adjustment (whole scanner unit).
ment table, and make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
3) Check for distortion in the main scanning direction.
4-D Scan image distortion adjustment
If the four angles of the rectangle of the copy image are right
(Whole scanner unit)
angles, it is judged that there is no distortion. (The work is
completed.) This adjustment is executed when scan image distortion cannot be
adjusted with ADJ 4A, ADJ 4B, and ADJ 4C related to the scan
image distortion adjustment.
Change the upper and lower positions of the scanner unit distortion
adjustment plate on the right edge of the scanner unit so that the
scan image distortion is minimized. By adjusting the distortion of
the whole scanner unit, the scan image distortion is adjusted.
1) Loosen the fixing screw (A).
2) Adjust the scanner unit distortion adjustment plate.
If there is any distortion in the main scanning direction, perform

the following procedure.
4) Check the difference (distortion balance) between left-hand
and right-hand side images distortions.
Lc Lc
Copy A Copy B
A A A
Ld Ld A
There is no difference There is some difference
between the distortion on between the distortion on
the right and that on the left. the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld Lc Ld
If Lc = Ld, the distortion on the left is equal to that on the right.
(The distortions are balanced.)
If the above condition is satisfied, go to the procedure 6).
If not, perform the following procedures.

ADJ 5 Scanner image skew
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
5-A DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment
1) Make an DSPF/RSPF parallelism adjustment sheet.
Cut copy paper in the longitudinal direction.
20mm
A4/Letter size
2) Perform the adjustment according to the flowchart below.
<Flow chart> <Work procedure>

a) Check section A.
Start of the
adjustment Place the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet between
section A and the DSPF/RSPF glass height adjustment resin
surface (a), and close the DSPF/RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section A.
* Be careful not to cover the convex section of the glass
holding resin surface with the height adjustment sheet.
Is No The section
there a resist- A is lowered
ance? too much.
Yes
Adjust hinge D
until there is a
resistance in
section A.
(Counter- b) If it cannot be pulled out, loosen the fixing nut and turn the
clockwise)
section D clockwise to lift the DSPF/RSPF unit, and make an
adjustment.
If it can be pulled out without resistance, loosen the fixing nut
and turn the section D counterclockwise to move down the
Turn the hinge DSPF/RSPF unit, and make an adjustment.
D to lift the
DSPF/RSPF
so that
there is a
resistance in
the section A.
(Clockwise)

c) Adjust the section F.
Use a clearance gauge to check to confirm that the clearance
in the section F is 4.3mm - 5.0mm.
If not, loosen the fixing nut and turn the section E to adjust.
Adjust the
* Insert a clearance gauge in the range of 20mm from the
section F.
edge (a) of the OC mat.
No
4.3 - 5.0mm
Is there a
Section F
resistance in the
section B?
Yes a
Increase the 20mm

clearance in
the section F
until there is a
resistance in
the section B.
However, the
max. is 5.0mm.
* Turn section E clockwise to lift the DSPF/RSPF unit. Turn it

counterclockwise to move down the DSPF/RSPF unit.

d) Check section B.
Place the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet between
section B and the DSPF/RSPF glass height adjustment resin
surface (a), and close the DSPF/RSPF unit.
Slowly pull out the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet.
Check section B. Check to insure that a slight resistance is felt when pulling out
the DSPF/RSPF height adjustment sheet. (If the boss in
section B is in contact, it is O.K.)
* Be careful not to put the book sensor (b) on the height
adjustment sheet.
B
b
Is
there a re- No
sistance?
Yes
e) If it can be pulled out without resistance, turn the hinge in

section E clockwise to adjust.
Adjust hinge f) Check section C.

E until the Check to confirm that the projection in section C in the right
separation in front side of then DSPF/RSPF bottom is in contact with the
section C is
Check section C. deleted. glass surface (b).
(Counter-
clockwise)
b
C
* The bosses in section A
Is there No and B are excessively
a separating pressed. (The right
section.
side is separating.)
Yes
End of the b
adjustment

[Check Method 2]
5-B DSPF/RSPF skew adjustment
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction
(Front surface mode) print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 1.0mm.
* The DSPF/RSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF/RSPF unit.
0 - 1.0mm
* The DSPF/RSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values A
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction If the front surface copy image is as shown above and the
back surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3)
of "ADJ 5C DSPF skew adjustment (Back surface mode)".
If the above requirement is not met for the paper's front side,
then do step 3).
3) Remove the hex nut cover in the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjust-
ment screw section.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF/RSPF duplex mode, and then check the image
for skews (Set in the DSPF/RSPF feed tray so that the mark
on the adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1] 4) Raise the DSPF/RSPF unit upright, and loosen the fixing
(Front side) screw of the hinge.
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
C D
c d

5) Close the DSPF/RSPF unit, and loosen the hex nut of the
DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment screw section. 5-C DSPF skew adjustment
Turn the hex wrench of the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment (Back surface mode)
screw to adjust the alignment. This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
* The DSPF section has been disassembled.
* When replacing the DSPF unit.
* The DSPF unit generates skewed scanned images.
1) Create an adjustment chart by printing in duplex mode the self-
print pattern (grid pattern) specified in Simulation 64-2.
SIM 64-2 set values
A = 1, B = 1, C = 254, D = 255
Make sure that the print grid pattern is almost in parallel with
the paper edges, and apply position marks 'A', 'B', 'C' and 'D' to
the leading and trailing edges of the paper for both front and
back sides of the paper.
A Paper pass direction

* In the case of (A), turn the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw counterclockwise.
In the case of (B), turn the DSPF/RSPF diagonal adjustment
screw clockwise.
2) Copy the adjustment chart (created in step 1) to A3 (11" x 17")

paper in DSPF duplex mode, and then check the image for
skews (Set in the DSPF feed tray so that the mark on the
adjustment chart is at the edge).
Check with one of the following methods.
[Check Method 1]
(Front side)
A B Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |a-b| 1 mm
A B
a b
(Back side)
Make sure that the output satisfies the condition: |c-d| 1 mm
6) Make a copy again and measure (a) and (b) on the copied test
chart. Repeat procedures 2) to 5) until the condition ((a) - (b) =
1mm or less) is satisfied.
C D
7) Tighten the hinge section fixing screw which was loosened in
the procedure 4) to tighten the hinge section.
c d

[Check Method 2] [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
Check that the squareness of the main scanning direction left]
print line for the longitudinal direction of paper is within (When c < d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "L" direction.
1.0mm. [When the main scanning direction print line is shifted to the
right]
(When c > d): Shift the CIS mounting plate to "R" direction.
0 - 1.0mm
Repeat steps 2) to 5) until an acceptable result is obtained.
A ADJ 6 Scan image focus adjustment

6-A Image focus adjustment (Document table
mode/DSPF/RSPF front surface mode)
* The CCD unit has been removed from the machine.
* The CCD unit has been replaced.
* When the copy image focus is not properly adjusted.
If the back surface copy image is as shown above and the
front surface copy is not as shown above, go to the step 3) * When the copy magnification ratio in the copy image main scan-
of "ADJ 5B DSPF skew adjustment (Front surface mode)". ning direction is not properly adjusted.
If the back surface copy is not as shown above, perform the * U2 trouble has occurred.
procedures of step 3) or later. 1) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
3) Remove the front frame cabinet of the DSPF.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
2) Set the adjustment item CCD (MAIN) to 50 (default value).

4) Loosen the adjustment plate fixing screw. (On the front frame Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
side) adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
3) Place a scale on the original table as illustrated below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
5) Check the image skew state, and shift the CIS mounting plate
to "L" or "R" direction to adjust.
L R
4) Make a normal copy on A4 paper.
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode, and make a copy.
5) Compare the copied image of the scale and the actual scale
length in terms of length.

6) Obtain the copy magnification ratio correction ratio in the main
U model
scanning direction from the following formula.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (Original size - Copy image size) / Original size x 100%
(Example)
Compare the scale of 10mm with the scale of 10mm on the
copy image.
Main scanning direction copy magnification ratio correction
ratio = (100 - 99) / 100 x 100 = 1
100mm scale
(Orignal)
10 20 90 100 110 A
B
1.0mm 12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
Copy image repeat the procedures of 9) - 11) until the condition is satisfied.
(1mm (1%)
10 20 90 100 110 NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simula-
shorter than tion 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
the original) ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the opti-
cal system structure.
If the copy magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform the
following procedures. 6-B Image focus adjustment (DSPF back
7) Remove the document table glass. surface mode)
8) Remove the dark box cover. This adjustment is required in the following cases:
9) To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the * When the CIS unit is replaced.
CCD unit base as shown below.
* When the CIS unit is replaced.
* This procedure must be executed also when the CCD unit is
* When the COPY/SCAN/FAX image focus is not properly
replaced.
adjusted.
10) Loosen the CCD unit fixing screws.
* When the DSPF unit is removed.
* Never loosen the screws marked with X.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced.
If any one of these screws is loosened, the position and the
1) Make a duplex copy in DSPF mode.
angle of the CCD unit base may be changed to cause a
problem, which cannot be adjusted in the market. In that 2) Make sure that the copied image on the back side of the paper
case, the whole scanner unit must be replaced. is satisfactorily focused.
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning If the image is not satisfactorily focused, do the following
direction) to change the installing position. steps.
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the 3) Remove the rear frame and the front frame cabinet of the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter DSPF unit.
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A. 4) Loosen the fixing screw of the focus adjustment plate. (About
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%. one turn)
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the On the front frame side and the rear frame side.
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
N model
A
B

5) Turn the CIS focus adjustment screws on the front and the rear 2) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
frame sides to adjust the focus.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.
3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio.

Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
procedure.
5) Change the CCD (MAIN) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1.
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory focus is obtained. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio cation ratio is changed by about 0.02%.
adjustment Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio
is within the specified range (100 1.0%).
(Manual adjustment)
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 7-B Sub scanning direction image
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. magnification ratio adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode)
* When the copy image magnification ratio in the sub scanning
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
direction is not properly adjusted. below.
* When the scanner motor is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble occurs.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced.

Before this adjustment, the focus adjustment (CCD unit installing
position adjustment) must have been completed.
7-A Main scanning direction image

magnification ratio adjustment
(Document table mode)
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure
below.
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
2.

3) Make a normal copy and obtain the copy magnification ratio. 3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
Press [CLOSE] key to shift from the simulation mode to the images.
Copy magnifi-
cation ratio
(Original dimension - Copy dimension)
Original dimension
100% original
(Example 1)
Copy A
copy
10 20 90 100 110
(Shorter than 10 50 100 150 200 250
the original)
10 50 100 150 200 250
Scale
10 20 90 100 110 4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following
(Original)
formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
(Example 2) If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
Copy B
10 20 90 100 110
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
(Longer than
the original) If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
4) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
range (100 1.0%).

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
If the copy magnification ratio is within the specified range (100 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
1.0%), the adjustment is completed. If the copy magnification $ &&'0$,1
$
ratio is not within the specified range, perform the following
% &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

procedure. ' 63)68%
5) Change the CCD (SUB) adjustment value of Simulation 48-1. ( 63)%0$,1
) 63)%68%
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnifica-
tion ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnifi-
cation ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
2.
Repeat the procedures 3) - 5) until the copy magnification ratio is
within the specified range (100 1.0%). Setting Default
Item Display Content
range value
7-C Main scanning direction image A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio adjustment magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
(DSPF/RSPF mode) B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: magnification ratio
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. adjustment (CCD)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
surface magnification ratio
* When U2 trouble occurs. adjustment (Main scan)
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched. D SPF(SUB) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled.
adjustment (Sub scan)
a. Adjustment procedures E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu-
adjustment (Main scan)
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF.
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. surface magnification ratio
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and adjustment (Sub scan)
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
* Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
Paper pass direction * Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the magni-
A4 size fication ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item of SPF (MAIN)/SPFB (MAIN) with
the scroll key.
(Both the front surface
and the back surface) SPF (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
10mm 10mm (Front surface)
SPFB (MAIN) Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. (Back surface)

7) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key. 5) Enter the SIM 48-1 mode.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni- 0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
fication ratio is changed by 0.02%.

$ &&'0$,1
$ % &&'68%
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is & 63)0$,1
obtained. ' 63)68%
( 63)%0$,1
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the ) 63)%68%
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this

state, copy check can be normally performed. When the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode.
2.
7-D Sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment Setting Default
(DSPF/RSPF mode) range value
A CCD(MAIN) SCAN main scanning 1 - 99 50
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
magnification ratio
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. adjustment (CCD)
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
* When U2 trouble occurs. magnification ratio
adjustment (CCD)
* When the copy magnification ratio is not matched.
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
* When the DSPF/RSPF is disassembled. surface magnification ratio
a. Adjustment procedures
D SPF(SUB) DSPF/RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
1) Place the duplex adjustment chart shown below on the docu- surface magnification ratio
ment tray of the DSPF/RSPF. adjustment (Sub scan)
The adjustment chart is prepared by the following procedures. E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF/RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper, and put marks on both sides and
both surfaces of the paper at 10mm from each edge.
F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
10mm adjustment (Sub scan)
Paper pass direction * Items A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the
A4 size magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
* Items B, D: When the set value is increased by 1, the
magnification ratio is increased by 0.1%.
* It affects scanning (PC scanning, etc.) as well as copying.
6) Select an adjustment item with the scroll key.
10mm SPF (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio

(Front surface)
2) Make a duplex copy at the normal ratio on A4 paper. SPFB (SUB) Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
(Back surface)
3) Measure the images on the copy paper and the original
images. 7) Enter an image magnification ratio adjustment value with 10-
key, and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnifica-
10

When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the image magni-
50
fication ratio is changed by 0.01%.

100
Repeat the procedures of 1) - 7) until a satisfactory result is

10
obtained.
original
150
50
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the

200
100

copy system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
150
tion mode.
200
4) Obtain the image magnification ratio according to the following

formula:
Image magnification ratio = Original size / Original size x 100
(%)
Image magnification ratio = 99 / 100 x 100 = 99 (%)
If the image magnification ratio is within the specified range
(100 0.8%), there is no need to perform the adjustment.
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.

4) Select the adjustment mode OC with the scroll key.
ADJ 8 Scan image off-center 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment The entered value is set.
(Manual adjustment) When the set value is increased, the main scanning print posi-
tion is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of 6) Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. copy mode and make a copy.
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until the above condition is
8-A Scan image off-center adjustment satisfied.
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: 8-B Scan image off-center adjustment
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. (DSPF/RSPF mode)
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
* When a U2 trouble occurs. * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
* When the EEPROM on the scanner control PWB is replaced. * When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled.
1) Make a copy of the adjustment chart (made by yourself) in the * When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
adjustment mode (document table). * When U2 trouble occurs.
* When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, it is required that the ADJ 8A
A Scan image off-center adjustment (Document table mode)
must have been properly adjusted.
A=B 1) Prepare the adjustment chart.
Draw a line at the center of the front surface and the back sur-
face of A4 (11" x 8.5") paper in parallel with the paper transport
B direction.
Paper transport direction
Front surface Back surface
2) Check the copy image center position.

If A' - B' = 1.0mm, the adjustment is not required.
A'
A' - B' = 1.0mm Draw a line at the center of the

front surface and the back surface
(100%) of paper in parallel with the paper
transport direction.
B'
2) Set the adjustment chart to the DSPF/RSPF.
3) Make a duplex copy in the normal magnification ratio from the
manual paper feed tray, and check the image position on the
front surface and the back surface of the copy paper.
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
procedures.
3) Enter the SIM 50-12 mode. original copy

a
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&
$ % 63)6,'(
& 63)6,'(
If the difference is within the range of 0 2.7mmm there is no

2.
need to perform the adjustment.
If the adjustment is required, perform the following procedures.

4) Enter the SIM 50-12 or 50-6 mode. Setting Default
range value
(SIM50-12)
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back surface 1 - 99 50

document off-center
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
&/26(
adjustment
$ 2& K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
$ % 63)6,'(
front surface
& 63)6,'(
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
scan)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
2. image loss is increased.
* Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
(SIM50-6)
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
countermeasures against the case when shades are
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63) produced.
$ 6,'(
$
% 6,'( SIM50-6 (RSPF)
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'( Setting Default

( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
range value
) /($'B('*(6,'(
* )5217B5($56,'( A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50

+ 75$,/B('*(6,'( document scan
, 2))6(7B63)
position adjustment
- 2))6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
(CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
2.
document scan
position adjustment
SIM50-12 (CCD)
Setting Default C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
Item Display Content loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
range value
amount amount setting
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
center adjustment
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
setting
center adjustment
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
(SIDE1) edge image loss
center adjustment
amount setting
A - C: When the adjustment value is increased, the image F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
position is shifted to the rear frame side. loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
1step = 0.1mm G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIM50-6 (DSPF) SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
setting
Setting Default H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
range value (SIDE2) edge image loss
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 amount setting
document scan I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
position adjustment document off-
(CCD) center adjustment
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan document off-
position adjustment center adjustment
(CIS)
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 front surface
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss magnification ratio
amount amount setting adjustment (Sub
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 scan)
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
setting back surface
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30 magnification ratio
(SIDE1) edge image loss adjustment (Sub
amount setting scan)
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
(SIDE2) edge image loss * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan
amount setting timing is delayed.
G Image FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the
loss (SIDE2) image loss amount
amount setting
image loss is increased.
H setting TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20 * Item A - H: 1 step = 0.1mm change
SIDE2 (SIDE2) edge image loss * The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for
amount setting countermeasures against the case when shades are
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 produced.
document off-center
adjustment

5) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. 2) Select the set item L with the scroll key, and enter the value
(SIM50-12) corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11" x 8.5") paper
in it.
SPF(SIDE1) Front surface mode
SPF(SIDE2) Back surface mode Setting Default
range value
(SIM50-6)
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30
OFFSET SPF1 Front surface mode lead edge image position.
OFFSET SPF2 Back surface mode (PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
6) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
adjustment
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step) C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20
(When the adjustment value is increased, the print image is adjustment
shifted to the rear.) D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment correction
Repeat the procedures of 2) - 6) until a satisfactory result is
value
obtained.
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the adjustment correction value
machine goes into the normal operation mode. Under this F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
state, copy check can be normally performed. When the adjustment correction value
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula- G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
tion mode. adjustment correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void area 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction value
ADJ 9 Print lead edge image position, I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria
1 - 99 50
void area adjustment J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 66

(Printer mode) K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
* When the LSU is replaced or removed. CS2 Tray 2 3
* U2 trouble has occurred. CS3 Tray 3 4
* The PCU PWB has been replaced. CS4 Tray 4 5
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NOTE: This adjustment is performed by the user to increase the NO selection No 1
lead edge void area to greater than the standard value
(3mm) in the printer mode. 3) Press [EXECUTE] key.
1) Enter the SIM 50-5 mode. The adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 in the standard adjustment value range.
$
$ '(1&
Standard adjustment value: 3.0 2.0mm
% '(1%
& )52175($5

' '(1%0)7
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
3.0 2.0mm
(;(&87( 2.
10-key EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5
$ '(1&
$ % '(1%
& )52175($5

' '(1%0)7 If the above requirement is not met, do the following steps.
( '(1%&6
) '(1%&6
* '(1%&6
+ '(1%&6
, '(1%/&&
- '(1%$'8
. 08/7,&2817
/ 3$3(5&6
(;(&87( 2.

5) Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjust- 2) Enter the SIM 50-1 mode.
ment item DENC with the scroll key.
6) Change the adjustment value.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Enter the adjustment value and press the [OK] key or the /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
[EXECUTE] key. $
$ 55&$
% 55&%&6
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is & 55&%&6
printed. ' 55&%/&&

( 55&%0)7
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the ) 55&%$'8
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When * /($'
the adjustment value is decreased, the distance is decreased. + 6,'(
, '(1$
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed - '(1%
by about 0.1mm. . )52175($5
/ 2))6(7B2&
Repeat the procedures 4) - 6) until the condition of 4) is satisfied. 2.
NOTE: To adjust the void area, change the adjustment values of

items B and C. 10-key
OK
ADJ 10 Copy image position, image

loss, and void area adjustment 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
&/26(
(Manual adjustment) $
$ 55&$
% 55&%&6
This manual adjustment is used when the automatic adjustment of & 55&%&6
' 55&%/&&
SIM 50-28 cannot obtain a satisfactory result. ( 55&%0)7
) 55&%$'8
10-A Copy image position, image loss, void area * /($'
+ 6,'(
adjustment (Document table mode) , '(1$
- '(1%
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: . )52175($5
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. / 2))6(7B2&
2.
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced.
* When the LSU is replaced or removed.
3) Set RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the default values.
* U2 trouble has occurred. Setting Default
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50
* The EEPROM of the PCU PWB has been replaced. edge edge reference
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. adjust- position (OC)
B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced.
value motor Tray
NOTE: Before executing this adjustment, be sure to confirm that C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
the ADJ 3 Print engine image skew, image position, image D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
magnification ratio, void area adjustments has been com- E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
pleted normally. ment paper feed
1) Place a scale on the document table as shown in the figure F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
below. G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting
Place a scale so that it is in parallel with the scanning direction
H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
and that its lead edge is in contact with the document guide
value area adjustment
plate.
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead adjust- area adjustment
edge can be seen. J ment DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment
K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
REAR area adjustment
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
L Off-center OFFSET_ OC document off- 1 - 99 50
adjust- OC center adjustment
ment
M Magnifi- SCAN_ SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
cation SPEED_OC magnification ratio
ratio adjustment (CCD)
correction
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50
scanning correction value
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50
value

Setting Default
Item/Display Content 10-B Document scan position adjustment
range value
R Sub DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50 (DSPF/RSPF mode scanner scan position
scanning value adjustment)
S direction DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50 This adjustment must be performed in the following cases:
print area value
correction * When the scan control PWB is replaced.
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 66
value value * When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced.
4) Perform the image lead edge reference position adjustment.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
Press [CLOSE] key, and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy in 100% mode and in 200% * When U2 trouble occurs.
mode. * When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled.
When the adjustment value of RRCA is proper, the lead edge * When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced.
image from 3.0mm is not copied in either of 100% and 200% This simulation is to adjust the scanner reading position when
copy scale. scanning the front surface in the DSPF/RSPF mode.
If not, change and adjust the RRCA value. If this adjustment is made improperly, the scanner stop position is
(Adjust so that the lead edge image from 3.0mm is not copied shifted to the specified position and a shade of the document table
in either of different copy magnification ratios.) may be reflected on the lead edge section of the scan image in the
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is DSPF/RSPF (front surface) mode.
obtained. a. Adjustment procedures
Scale image 3.0mm position 1) Make a copy in the DSPF/RSPF (front surface) mode, and
Paper lead check for any shade on the lead edge section of the copy
edge image.
100% Papar lead edge

5mm 10mm
Image area
200%
5mm 10mm
Shadow image of DSPF
5) Image loss adjustment

When the adjustment item of the image loss below is set to the If there is any shade of the document table on the lead edge
default value, it is adjusted to the standard state. If it is not in section of the copy image, perform the following procedures.
the below standard state, or when it is set to a desired value, 2) Enter the SIM 53-8 mode, and press [MANUAL] key.
change these adjustment items.

Paper lead edge 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17
$872 0$18$/
Copy area
Maginification ratio : 400%
1 2 3 4
5mm 10mm

Void area: 3.0mm, Image loss: 3.0mm
3) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
De- Standard
Item/ Adjustment When the set value is increased, the distance from the home
Content fault adjustment
Display range
value value position to the DSPF/RSPF scanning position is increased.
LEAD Image loss Lead edge 0 - 99 30 3.0 When the set value is changed by 1, the scanning position is
adjustment image loss 1.0mm changed by 0.1mm.
adjustment Perform the procedures of 1) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
SIDE Side image 0 - 99 20 2.0 obtained.
loss 1.0mm
adjustment NOTE: After execution of this adjustment, be sure to execute ADJ
10C Copy mode image loss adjustment (DSPF/RSPF
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is mode).
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the
image loss is decreased.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the void area is
changed by 0.1mm.

10-C Copy mode image loss adjustment
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
This adjustment must be performed in the following cases: /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
* When the scan control PWB is replaced. $

$ 6,'(
% 6,'(
* When the EEPROM on the scan control PWB is replaced. & /($'B('*(6,'(
* When the scanner (reading) section is disassembled. ' )5217B5($56,'(
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(

* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. ) /($'B('*(6,'(
* When U2 trouble occurs. * )5217B5($56,'(
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
* When the DSPF/RSPF section is disassembled. , 2))6(7B63)
- 2))6(7B63)
* When the DSPF/RSPF unit is replaced. . 6&$1B63(('B63)
NOTE: To execute this adjustment, the following items must have

2.
been properly adjusted.
ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment

(DSPF)
ADJ 7C Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) Setting Default
ADJ 7D Sub scanning direction image magnification ratio range value
adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
ADJ 8B Scan image off-center adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode) document scan
ADJ 10B Document scan position adjustment (DSPF/RSPF position
mode scanner scan position adjustment) adjustment
(CCD)
a. Adjustment procedures B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
1) Prepare the adjustment chart. document scan
position
The adjustment chart can be made by the following proce-
adjustment (CIS)
dures.
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface 0 - 99 20
Use A4 (11" x 8.5") paper and draw arrow marks vertically and loss (SIDE1) lead edge image
horizontally on the front and the back surfaces. amount loss amount
At the same time, put marks of the lead edge, the trail edge, setting setting
D SIDE1 FRONT_REAR Front surface 0 - 99 20
the front end, and the rear end as well as the identification
(SIDE1) side image loss
marks of the front surface and the back surface.
amount setting
R Front surface
FACE (SIDE1) edge image loss
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
L T amount amount setting
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss
Put the position amount setting
marks. H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20
F amount setting
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front 1 - 99 50
Draw arrows. surface document
off-center
Back surface adjustment
R
BACK
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50
surface document
off-center
adjustment
L T
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification
Put the position ratio adjustment
marks. (Sub scan)
F * Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
Draw arrows. * Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
loss is increased.
* The DSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter-
measures against the case when shades are produced.

(RSPF) 2) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
to confirm that the lead edge image loss is within 3.0 1.0mm
Setting Default
Item/Display Content on the front surface and the back surface. The paper lead
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 edge must be aligned with the presumed image lead edge.
document scan
Paper lead edge The paper lead edge must be aligned with
position
the image lead edge.
adjustment (CCD)
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
adjustment (CCD)
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
SIDE1 Copy image
(SIDE1) image loss amount
setting
amount setting
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20 Image loss
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss 3.0 1.0mm
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount procedure.
setting 3) Enter the adjustment value of SIDE1/SIDE2 with 10-key, and
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30 press [OK] key.
Adjust so that the paper lead edge is aligned with the pre-
amount setting
sumed image lead edge.
I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
document off- SIDE1: Front surface lead edge scan position adjustment
center adjustment SIDE2: Back surface lead edge scan position adjustment
J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50 (When the adjustment value is increased, the print image posi-
surface document
tion is shifted to the delaying direction for the paper.)
off-center
adjustment (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 Perform the procedures of 2) - 3) until a satisfactory result is
front surface obtained.
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub (Rear edge image loss adjustment)
scan) 1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check
L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50 to confirm that the rear edge image loss is 2.0 - 5.0mm on the
back surface front surface and the back surface.
magnification ratio
adjustment (Sub
Paper rear edge
scan)
* Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan

timing is delayed.
* Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image
loss is increased.
* The RSPF rear edge image loss setting is provided for counter-
measures against the case when shades are produced. Copy image
NOTE: When [CLOSE] key is pressed in this simulation mode, the
system key is pressed, the machine returns to the simula-
tion mode. Image loss 2.0 - 5.0mm
(Lead edge image loss adjustment) If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following
1) Set the lead edge image loss adjustment values (LEAD EDGE procedure.
(SIDE1/SIDE2)) on the front surface and the back surface to 2) Enter the adjustment value of TRAIL EDGE (SIDE1/SIDE2)
the following values. with 10-key, and press [OK] key.
(Standard set value) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 1):
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 1): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
20 Lead edge image loss set value (Front surface) TRAIL EDGE (SIDE 2):
LEAD EDGE(SIDE 2): Rear edge image loss adjustment value (Back surface)
30 Lead edge image loss set value (Back surface) (When the adjustment value is increased, the rear edge image
(When the set value is increased, the lead edge image loss is loss is increased.)
increased.) (Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step)
(Change for change in the set value: 0.1mm/step) Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

(Front/rear frame direction image loss adjustment) (2) Adjustment procedures
1) Make a duplex copy in 100% in the DSPF/RSPF mode. Check 1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
to confirm that the image losses on the front frame side and the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu-
the rear frame side are 2.02.0mm on the front surface and the ment table.
back surface. Set the chart so that the lighter density side of the patch is on
the left side.
Paper F Image loss
side edge 2.0 2.0mm
Copy image
Copy image
Paper R Image loss

side edge 2.0 2.0mm
If the above condition is not satisfied, perform the following

procedure.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
2) Enter the adjustment value of FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1) / CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust-
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2), and press [OK] key. ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 1): method using the SIT chart.
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Front surface)
NOTE: Check to insure that the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or
FRONT/REAR (SIDE 2):
UKOG-0280FCZ1) is in close contact with the document
Front/Rear image loss adjustment value (Back surface) table.
(When the adjustment value is increased, the front/rear image
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.
loss is increased.)
(Change for change in the adjustment value: 0.1mm/step)
Select [OC] key, and press [EXECUTE] key.
Perform the procedures of 1) - 2) until a satisfactory result is
The automatic operation is started. During the adjustment,
obtained.
[EXECUTE] is highlighted. After completion of the adjustment,
[EXECUTE] returns to the normal display.
ADJ 11 CCD calibration

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
11-A CCD gamma adjustment (CCD calibration) 6(77+(&+$5721'63)$1'728&+>(;(&87(@

* When the CCD unit is replaced.
* When a U2 trouble is occurred.
(1) Note before adjustment
1) Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens (;(&87(
surface are free from dirt and dust.

(If there is some dust and dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.) NOTE: Since the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FC
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of Z1) is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ultraviolet
the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag (such
free from dirt and scratches. as a dark file) and store in a dark place of low temperature
and low humidity.
If they are dirty, clean them.
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.

11-B CIS gamma adjustment (CIS calibration)
(DSPF mode)
(DSPF-installed machine only) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
&/26(
This adjustment is required in the following cases: 2&

* When the CIS unit is replaced.

* When the scanner control PWB is replaced. &&&555

000***
<<<%%%
(1) Note before adjustment

1) Check to insure that there is no dirt or dust on the DSPF scan-
ning glass, the mirror, and the lens surface. (If there is, clean it
with alcohol.) % * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&
2) Check to confirm that the patches in BK1 and BK2 arrays of

the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) are 3) When a color button is selected, the adjustment value of the
free from dirt and scratches. selected color is displayed.
If they are dirty, clean them. * When [B] (Blue), [G] (Green), or [R] (Red) button is selected,
the selected button is highlighted and the adjustment value
If they are scratched or streaked, replace with new one.
of the selected color is displayed.
NOTE:
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected but-
Since the SIT chart is easily discolored by sunlight (especially ton is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
ultraviolet rays) and humidity and temperature, put it in a bag
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
such as a clear file) and store in a dark place of low tempera-
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
ture and low humidity.
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation is invalid.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
(2) Adjustment procedures

1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)
face-down in the DSPF paper feed tray. % * 5 '63) 2&
4) When [DSPF] button is pressed, it is highlighted, and the color

automatic adjustment execution screen is displayed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6(77+(&+$57213/$7(1$1'728&+>(;(&87(@
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CIS gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjust- (;(&87(
ment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment

method using the SIT chart.
NOTE: UKOG-0280FCZZ is equivalent to UKOG-0280FCZ1.

5) Press [EXECUTE] button and it is highlighted and the color * When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
auto adjustment is executed. played. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed during the automatic the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
adjustment, the automatic adjustment is interrupted. displayed.)

6,08/$7,2112 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
12:&+$573$7&+5($',1* &203/(7(
(;(&87( % * 5 (;(&87(

5(68/7
6) After normal completion, the result of calculation is displayed

in the initial screen. 11-C Shading adjustment (Calibration)
* When an error occurs in execution, the following screen is dis- (DSPF mode)
played. (DSPF-installed machine only)
When [CA] key is pressed, the simulation is terminated. When 1) Open the DSPF paper exit section, and insert the white refer-
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the display returns to the ence adjustment sheet (UKOG-0330FCZZ) along the guide on
sub number entry screen. the rear frame until it makes contact with the paper exit roller.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
Guide on the rear frame
6&$11(502725,61275($'<
(;(&87(
* When an error occurs in the automatic adjustment, all the error

patch numbers are displayed.
* When inserting the white reference adjustment sheet, insert
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to the ini-
it straight along the guide on the rear frame until the paper
tial screen. (The previous value is displayed)
detection actuator can be seen through the cut-out section
of the white reference adjustment sheet.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 2) Close the DSPF paper exit section.
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
6$035,1*'$7$81),7 3) Enter the SIM 63-2 mode.

4) Select [DSPF SHADING].

3/($6(&+(&.7+(&+$57$1'3/$7(1*/$66

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
6+$',1*(;(&87,1*
% * 5 (;(&87(
5(68/7
2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(

5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and shading (Relationship between the servicing job contents and the copy
is started. density and gradation adjustment)
* The white reference adjustment sheet is transported in the Note that the preliminary jobs before execution of the copy density
paper exit direction, and shading data are obtained during and gradation adjustment depend on the machine status and the
transportation. servicing conditions.
* During execution, "SHADING EXECUTING..." is displayed. Follow the flowchart of the copy density and gradation adjustment
* When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during execution, the procedures depending on the actual conditions.
operation is interrupted. There are following four, major cases.
* When shading is completed normally, [EXECUTE] key 1) When installing (as needed)
returns to the normal display and "COMPLETED" is dis- 2) When a periodic maintenance is performed.
played.
3) When a repair, an inspection, or a maintenance is performed.
* When [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during other (When a consumable part is replaced.)
than printing, the display returns to the sub number entry
4) When an installation, a repair, or inspection is performed.
screen.
(Without replacement of a consumable part)
<Descriptions of keys>
Display Content (2) Copy density and gradation check
OC OC analog correction level correction, and shading (Note)
SHADING correction data making (Document table mode)
Before checking the copy density and gradation, be sure to execute
DSPF DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
the following jobs.
SHADING correction data making (SPF mode)
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction)
<Result display> forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
Display Content * Execute the half-tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
COMPLETE Normal completion (Method)
ERROR Abnormal completion Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ), and check
INCOMPLETE Incomplete, interruption that it is proper.
Note for checking the copy mode density
To check the density, use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ).
ADJ 12 Copy quality adjustment Set the copy density level to "Manual 3" in the Text/Printed Photo
(Auto printer density and mode (Manual).
gradation adjustment) In addition, all the picture quality adjustment settings in the user
adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
(1) Note before execution of the copy density and gradation [Check with the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ)]
adjustment
In the copy density check with the gray test chart, check to insure
* Requisite conditions before execution of the copy density and the following conditions.
gradation adjustment
Before execution of the copy density and gradation adjustment, Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
SHARP gray chart
be sure to check to confirm that the related adjustments which SHARP GRAY CHART
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
will affect the copy density and gradation have been properly
completed.
The importance levels of them are shown below.
(Items which will affect the copy density and gradation but are
not required to be adjusted frequently. However, they must be Patch 3 is copied.
checked and adjusted when a trouble occurs.) Patch 1 is not copied.
1) The following items must be adjusted properly.

[Check with the servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11)]
Job
Adjustment item list Simulation Check to confirm that it is in the conditions shown below.
No
ADJ Adjust the ADJ Adjust the developing doctor
1 developing 1A gap Serviceman chart (Color patch section)
unit ADJ Adjust the developing roller

1B main pole position
ADJ Adjusting ADJ Adjust the main charger grid 8-2
2 high voltage 2A voltage
values ADJ Adjust the developing bias 8-1
2B voltage
ADJ Transfer current and voltage 8-6
2C adjustment
Patch 7 is slightly
ADJ Scan image focus adjustment copied or not copied.
6
ADJ CCD ADJ CIS gamma adjustment (CIS 63-3
11 calibration 11B calibration) (DSPF mode)
ADJ Shading adjustment 63-2
11C (Calibration) (DSPF mode)

c. Adjustment procedure
12-A Auto copy density and gradation
(Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer den-
adjustment, and auto printer density and sity and gradation adjustment by the serviceman)
gradation adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: Flowchart of the auto copy density and gradation adjustment/
auto printer density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM46-24)
* When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
replaced.
Start
Execute ADJ 12A Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and
* When the scanner (reading) unit is replaced. auto printer density and gradation adjustment.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Enter the SIM46-24 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper.
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced. Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Set the adjustment pattern on the document table, and press
a. General [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is scanned, and the
There are following two modes in the auto copy density and grada- adjustment is automatically performed to print the check pattern.)
tion adjustment.
Check the printed check pattern for any streaks or unclear copy. (*1)
1) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment, and auto printer
The adjustment check patterns of the copy mode and the printer
density and gradation adjustment by the serviceman (SIM 46- mode are printed out.
24 is used.)
SIM 46-24 allows simultaneous execution of the automatic Press [OK] key, and the initial setting of the half tone image correction
copy density and gradation adjustment, and the automatic is automatically performed.
printer density and gradation adjustment.
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-ton correction
There is no method to execute the automatic density and gra- (process control).
dation adjustment separately in the copy mode and in the
printer mode. When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed,
To execute the printer density and gradation adjustment auto- "Please quit this mode" is displayed.
"OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is normally
matically, use this method. completed.
2) Auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user (The When [RESULT] button is pressed, the details of the half-ton
user program mode is used.) correction are displayed.
The auto copy density and gradation adjustment by the user is

Cancel SIM 46-24.
provided to reduce the number of service calls.
If the balance of the copy density or gradation is lost for some
reason, the user can use this adjustment to recover the image Check the result of the copy density and gradation adjustment.
quality. Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or (UKOG-0317FCZZ/
When, however, the machine has a fatal problem or when the UKOG-0317FC11 or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a
machine condition is greatly changed, this function does not copy in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the copy density.
work effectively.
On the other hand, the automatic copy density and gradation Are the density
NO
adjustment by the serviceman can be used to obtain normal and gradation at the
satisfactory level?
picture quality even tough the machine environment is greatly
changed. In addition, if there is a fatal problem on the machine,
repair and adjustment of the machine can provide normal YES
images.
To perform the adjustment, the above difference must be fully Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy
density and gradation adjustment.
understood. (SIM46-16)
b. Note for execution of the auto copy density and gradation
adjustment *1:
If there is any streak or unclear
1) The print engine section must have been adjusted properly. copy on the printed check pattern,
check the print engine for any
2) The CCD gamma adjustment must have been adjusted prop-
problems.
erly.
3) Set the adjustment pattern sheet on the document table, and
place 5 sheet of white paper on the adjustment pattern sheet. Check the result of the printer density and gradation adjustment.
Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern, and check the density.
Are the density

and gradation at the NO
satisfactory level?
YES
End Execute manual printer density

and gradation adjustment.
(SIM67-25)

1) Enter the SIM 46-24 mode. 5) Press [OK] key on the operation panel.
According to data of this adjustment, the initial setting of the

half tone image correction is performed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$525h56,=(3$3(5 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)257+,6$'-8670(17 (1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
&21),507+($'-867('3$7&+$1'35(66>2.@725(*,67(57+,63$7&+'$7$
(;(&87(
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) 2.

paper is selected.)
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no Remark:
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTER-
3) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) paper printed in pro- ING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is dis-
cedure 2) on the document table. played. This operation takes several minutes.
Place the printed patch image (adjustment pattern) paper on 6) Check the copy gradation and density.
the document table so that the thin lines on the paper are on (Method 1)
the left side. Place 5 sheets of white paper on the printed patch Check to insure that the printed copy check patch image is
image (adjustment pattern) paper. within the following specifications.
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.

The patch density is changed gradually.
Patch A is not copied.

Patch C or D is slightly copied.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P
Q (Max)
Low density High density
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@
Patch A must not be copied.
/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66 (Method 2)
Use the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the servicing
color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) in the Text/Photo mode
(Manual) to check the copy density and gradation. (Refer to
the item of the copy density and gradation check.)
If the automatic adjustment cannot obtain satisfactory copy
density and gradation, use ADJ 12B manual adjustment (SIM
46-16).
(;(&87(
The copy density and gradation adjustment and the printer NOTE: For the U model where no printer option is installed, the
density and gradation adjustment are automatically performed, adjustment pattern for the printer is not printed.
and the copy check patch image and the printer check patch
image are printed. (One for each) Wait until the operation
panel shown in procedure 5) is displayed.

7) Check the printer density and gradation.
12-B Manual copy density and gradation
Check to insure that the printed printer check patch image is
within the following specifications. adjustment
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. * When a consumable part (developer, OPC drum, transfer belt) is
The patch density is changed gradually. replaced.
P R INT E R C A L IB RAT ION
Patch A or B is slightly copied.
* When the scanner (reading) section is replaced.
A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P * U2 trouble has occurred.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced.
Q (Max) * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
a. General
The manual copy density and gradation adjustment (manual
adjustment) is used when the automatic adjustment previously
stated cannot obtain the specified result or a fine adjustment is
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
required and the user requests for customization.
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. Execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and
then execute this adjustment for better efficiency.
b. Note for the copy density and gradation adjustment
8) Press [EXECUTE] key to execute the half-tone correction (pro-
(Manual adjustment)
cess control).
1) The print engine section must have been properly adjusted.
c. Adjustment procedure
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17 Manual copy density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1 (SIM 46-16)
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,2167$57
253/($6(386+&$.(<72),1,6+ Start
Execute ADJ 12B Manual copy density and gradation adjustment. (*1)
Enter the SIM 46-16 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or

A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper.
Press [EXECUTE] key.

(The adjustment check pattern is printed.)
(;(&87( Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check

pattern.
When the half-tone correction (process control) is completed, Select a target adjustment level with the scroll key.
"Please quit this mode" is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10 key.
"OK" is displayed to confirm that the half-tone correction is nor-
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment check pattern is
mally completed. printed.)
When [RESULT] button is pressed, the details of the half-tone
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check
correction are displayed. pattern.

6,08/$7,2112 Are the density NO
7(67 &/26(
at the satisfactory
(1*,1($872$'-8670(17
level?
&203/(7(7+,6352&('85(
3/($6(48,77+,602'( YES
2.RU1*
Cancel SIM 46-16.
Perform the initial setting of the half tone image correction.

(SIM 44-21)
Check the copy color balance and density adjustment result with the
test chart. (*1)
Use the test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or servicing color
test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11 or
UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) to make a copy
in the Text/Printed Photo mode, and check the density.
5(68/7 5(75<
Display Content Are the density NO

at the satisfactory
COMPLETE Normal completion level?
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality
YES
ADJUSTMENT
[K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality
End
OTHER Other errors
*1:
9) Cancel the simulation. If satisfactory density is not obtained with the
adjustment, check the print engine for any problems.

1) Enter the SIM46-16 mode. 4) Select the point to be adjusted with the scroll key.
Density level Adjustment

Item/Display Default
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( (Point) value range
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$ 32,17
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
$ % 32,17 B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
& 32,17 C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
' 32,17
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
( 32,17
) 32,17
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
* 32,17 F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
+ 32,17 G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
, 32,17
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
- 32,17
. 32,17 I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
/ 32,17 J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
(;(&87( 2. K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
10-key EXECUTE M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
EXECUTE N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
or self print end
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$ 32,17 5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
$ % 32,17
The adjustment value can be set in the range of 245 - 755.
& 32,17
' 32,17 When SIM 46-24 is used to execute the automatic density and
( 32,17 gradation adjustment, all the set values of this simulation are
) 32,17
set to 500.
* 32,17
+ 32,17 To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To

, 32,17 decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
- 32,17
. 32,17
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis-
/ 32,17 fied.
(;(&87( 2. When the overall density is low, or when the density is high
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively.
paper is selected.)
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no way of adjustment.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
6) Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check pat-
The adjustment check pattern is printed. tern. (Refer to the item of the copy density and gradation
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density check.)
and gradation is satisfactory. 7) Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed. When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted and the
operation is started.
Patch A is not copied.

Patch C or D is slightly copied. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
Q (Max)
(;(&87(
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After com-
not be reversed. pletion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
Patch A must not be copied.
When, however, the color balance is adjusted on the request
from the user, there is no need to set to the standard color bal-
ance stated above.
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the following
procedures.

(Normal end (Auto transition)) 1) Enter the SIM 46-2 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
5(68/7 $ $872
$ % $872
&203/(7( & 7(;7
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
+ 0$3
5(68/7 (;(&87( /2: +,*+ 2.
(Abnormal end (Auto transition)) 10-key

OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
5(68/7 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
(5525. $ $872
$ % $872
& 7(;7
' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
) 35,17('3+272
* 3+272*5$3+
+ 0$3
5(68/7 (;(&87(
/2: +,*+
After completion of the operation, the simulation is canceled. 2.
This adjustment is required to memory the data as the refer-

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the scroll key.
ence data for half-tone correction.
Immediately after execution of ADJ 12B (Copy density and Setting Default
gradation adjustment (Manual)), be sure to execute this adjust- range value
ment. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
When ADJ 12A (Copy/printer density and gradation adjust- HIGH 1 - 99 50
ment (Automatic)) is executed, this adjustment is automatically B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
executed. HIGH 1 - 99 50
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
8) Make a copy of the gray test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) or the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
servicing color test chart (UKOG-0317FCZZ/UKOG-0317FC11
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
or UKOG-0326FCZZ/UKOG-0326FC11) and a users docu-
PHOTO HIGH 1 - 99 50
ment according to necessity in the Text/Printed Photo mode
E TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
(Manual), and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the
HIGH 1 - 99 50
item of the copy density and gradation check.)
F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
If the copy density and gradation are not adjusted to the speci- HIGH 1 - 99 50
fied level, there may be another cause. G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treat- HIGH 1 - 99 50
ments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
from the beginning. HIGH 1 - 99 50
12-C Copy density in each copy mode 3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
(Overall density adjustment) When adjusting the copy density on the low density part, select
"LOW" mode and change the adjustment value. When adjust-
(Normally unnecessary to adjust) ing the copy density on the high density part, select "HIGH"
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: mode and change the adjustment value.
* When there is necessity to change copy density of the low den- When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
sity and high density part at each copy mode individually. increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy
* When there is necessity to change the density gradient of the density is decreased.
copy by each the copy mode individually. 4) Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the nor-
* When there is necessity to change all copy density by each the mal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result
copy mode individually. Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alter-
* U2 trouble has occurred. nately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-2) and the
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
The density is adjusted in each copy mode individually. Normally
obtained.
individual adjustments are not required. When there is a request
from the user, execute this adjustment. To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.

2) Select the copy mode to be adjusted with the mode key.
12-D Density and gradation adjustment in each
3) Select the density level (point) to be adjusted with the scroll
copy mode (Normally not required) key.
* When there is a necessity to change the density and gradation in Adjustment
Item/Display Density level (Point) Default value
value range
each copy mode individually.
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
* When the MFP PWB is replaced. C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
* When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced. D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
This is to adjust the density in each copy mode. Normally individual E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
adjustments are not required. This adjustment is executed when F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
there is a request from the user. G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
$872 $872 7(;7 7(;73573+272
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
7(;73+272 35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
4) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
(;(&87( increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the den-
$872 sity is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the densities are collectively
adjusted.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@ That is, all the density levels (points) from the low density point
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
& 32,17 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
' 32,17
( 32,17
printed out.
) 32,17
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no
* 32,17
+ 32,17 A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
, 32,17
- 32,17
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
. 32,17 referring to this adjustment pattern. However, it is more practi-
/ 32,17
cally to make a copy and check it.
'3, '3, (;(&87( 2.
10-key 12-E Document background density

OK reproducibility adjustment in the auto copy
mode (Normally unnecessary to adjust)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Use for the reproducibility adjustment of document background
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@
$ 32,17
density in auto copy mode.
$ % 32,17
This adjustment is required in the following cases.
& 32,17
' 32,17 * When there is a desire not to reproduce the background of the
( 32,17
document. When there is a desire to reproduce the low density
) 32,17
* 32,17 image of the document.
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17 * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
. 32,17
/ 32,17 * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.

. '3,
* When there is request from the user.
& 0 '3,
< (;(&87( 2.
[SYSTEM
EXECUTE
EXECUTE SETTINGS] key
or end of print

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17>$872@
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
. '3, & 0 '3,

< (;(&87( 2.

12-F Color document reproducibility adjustment
in the copy mode (Normally unnecessary to
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
&/26(
adjust) (N model only)
$
$ &23<2&
Use to adjust the reproducibility of the red image and the yellow
% &23<'63)6,'(
& &23<'63)6,'(

image when copying a color document that includes the red/yellow
' 6&$12& images.
( 6&$1'63)6,'(
) 6&$1'63)6,'(
* )$;2& * When there is desire to change reproducibility of yellow/red
+ )$;'63)6,'( image in case of making a color copy of the color document in
, )$;'63)6,'(
copy mode.
2.
10-key 1) Enter the SIM 46-37 mode.
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
$ 55DWLR
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $ % *5DWLR
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*

$ &23<2&
$ % &23<'63)6,'(
& &23<'63)6,'(
' 6&$12&
( 6&$1'63)6,'(
) 6&$1'63)6,'(
* )$;2&
+ )$;'63)6,'(
, )$;'63)6,'(
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
10-key DEFAULT
2.

6,08/$7,2112
2) Select the adjusting mode "COPY: OC", "COPY: DSPF/RSPF"
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
with the scroll key. $

$ 55DWLR
% *5DWLR
3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, reproducibility of the

background and the low density image is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the back-
ground and the low density image is decreased.
(DSPF)
Setting Default '()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 EXECUTE NO
B COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)

C COPY: DSPF Copy mode 1 - 250 196 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface) % :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
55DWLR
D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196 $
$
% *5DWLR
E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196

F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode 1 - 250 196
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196 $5(<28685("
'()$8/7 <(6 12 (;(&87(
(SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
YES
(RSPF)
Setting Default
range value
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
A COPY: OC Copy mode (OC) 1 - 250 196 $ 55DWLR
$ *5DWLR
B COPY: RSPF Copy mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196 %

C SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX: OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the scroll key. a. Adjustment procedures
(Front surface copy density adjustment)
Item/Display Content Setting range Default value
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 303 1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode.
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 697

3) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the ini- $ &23<6,'($/2:
$
tial values (Default). % 6&$16,'($/2:
& )$;6,'($/2:

When the adjustment value of the adjustment item A is ' &23<6,'($+,*+
increased, the copy density of red images is decreased. When ( 6&$16,'($+,*+
the adjustment value is decreased, the density is increased. ) )$;6,'($+,*+
When the adjustment value of the adjustment item B is

increased, the copy density of yellow images is increased.
When the adjustment value is decreased, the density in also
decreased.
4) Press [OK] key. 2& '63) 2.
5) Make a copy in text/printed photo copy mode (manual), check

OC
the copy.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained, return to the SIM 46-37 10-key
mode and change the adjustment value.
OK
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is
obtained.

6,08/$7,2112
12-G Copy density and gradation adjustment 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
(DSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the $

$ &23<6,'($/2:
% 6&$16,'($/2:
low density area and the high density area) & )$;6,'($/2:
(In the case of DSPF) ' &23<6,'($+,*+

( 6&$16,'($+,*+
It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol- ) )$;6,'($+,*+
lowing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed.

* When the copy density differs in the DSPF mode and in the doc-
ument table mode.
* When the copy density differs on the front surface and on the
back surface in the DSPF mode. 2& '63) 2.
* When the copy density in the DSPF mode is too low or too high.
* When the DSPF unit is replaced. Item Button Display Content
Setting Default
range value
* When the DSPF unit is disassembled.
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
* When the DSPF CIS unit is replaced. SIDEA: exposure adjustment
* When U2 trouble occurs. LOW (Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: exposure adjustment
LOW (Low density side)
C FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 52
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
HIGH exposure adjustment
(High density)

Setting Default
Item Button Display Content Setting Default
range value Item Button Display Content
range value
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: exposure adjustment
C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
(Low density side)
(Low density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
(High density)
(High density)
G BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
SIDEB: R R
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 LOW (Low density side)
SIDEB: G G
I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50 SIDEB: exposure adjustment
SIDEB: B B LOW (Low density side)
2) Press [OC] key to select the front surface copy density adjust- C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
ment mode. LOW exposure adjustment
(Low density side)
3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY SIDEB: exposure adjustment
SIDE A LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area, HIGH (High density side)
select "COPY SIDE A HIGH." E SCAN DSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 50
4) Enter an adjustment value with 10-key.
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
the density, enter a smaller number. HIGH exposure adjustment
5) Press [OK] key. (High density)
6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode. G DSPF BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: R R
7) Make a copy and check the copy density.
H BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
Repeat the above procedures until a satisfactory result is obtained. SIDEB: G G
(Back surface copy density adjustment) I BALANCE DSPF color balance 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: B B
1) Enter the SIM46-9 mode.
2) Press [DSPF] key to select the back surface copy density
adjustment mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) 3) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key.
$ &23<6,'($/2:
$ % 6&$16,'($/2: To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY
& )$;6,'($/2:
SIDE B LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area,
' &23<6,'($+,*+
( 6&$16,'($+,*+ select "COPY SIDE B HIGH."
) )$;6,'($+,*+
To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease
the density, enter a smaller number.
5) Press [OK] key.
2& '63) 2. 6) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.
DSPF
7) Make a copy, and check the copy density.
10-key
OK

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23<6,'(%/2:
$ % 6&$16,'(%/2:
& )$;6,'(%/2:
' &23<6,'(%+,*+
( 6&$16,'(%+,*+
) )$;6,'(%+,*+
* %$/$1&(6,'(%5
+ %$/$1&(6,'(%*
, %$/$1&(6,'(%%
2& '63) 2.

12-H Copy density and gradation adjustment 12-I Automatic copy and printer density and
(RSPF mode) (Individual adjustment of the gradation adjustment by the user
low density area and the high density area) (Setting of ENABLE/DISABLE of the
(In the case of RSPF) automatic copy density and gradation
It is normally not necessary to perform this adjustment. In the fol- adjustment, and the adjustment)
lowing cases, however, this adjustment must be performed. a. General
* When the copy density differs in the RSPF mode and in the doc- In the user program mode, the user can execute the automatic
ument table mode. adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gradation.
* When the copy density in the RSPF mode is too low or too high. This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user opera-
* When the RSPF unit is replaced. tion with SIM 26-53.
* When the RSPF unit is disassembled. NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the users
* When U2 trouble occurs. understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy and
the printer density and gradation as well as the users oper-
ational ability is judged enough to execute the adjustment.
(Front surface copy density adjustment)
When set to enable, operation procedures must be fully
1) Enter the SIM 46-9 mode. explained to the user.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) * When the MFP PWB is replaced.
$ &23</2: * When the EEPROM on the MFP PWB is replaced.
$ % 6&$1/2:
* When the PCU PWB is replaced.
& )$;/2:
' &23<+,*+
* When the EEPROM of the PCU PWB is replaced.
2. b. Setting procedure
10-key
OK
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$ <(612
$
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
$ &23</2:
$ % 6&$1/2:
& )$;/2:
' &23<+,*+
2.
2) Select an adjustment mode with the scroll key. 2.
To adjust the density in the low density area, select "COPY

LOW." To adjust the density in the high density area, select 10-key
"COPY HIGH." OK
Setting Default
range value
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48 7(67
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
adjustment (Low density side) $ <(612
B SCAN: LOW RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 48 $

exposure adjustment
(Low density side)

C FAX: LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48
adjustment (Low density side)
D COPY: HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density side)
E SCAN: HIGH RSPF scanner mode 1 - 99 53
exposure adjustment
(High density side) 2.
F FAX: HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53
adjustment (High density)

To increase the density, enter a greater number. To decrease
the density, enter a smaller number.
4) Press [OK] key.
5) Press [CLOSE] key to exit the simulation mode.
6) Make a copy and check the copy density.

2) Select ENABLE or DISABLE with 10-key. (Method 1)
When disabling, set to "0" (NO). When enabling, set to "1" Execute SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern.
(Yes). Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
3) Press [OK] key. print test pattern is printed.
When this is set to DISABLE, the menu of the automatic adjust-
ment of the user copy color balance and density is not displayed in
the user program mode.
(Automatic adjustment of the copy and the printer density and gra-
dation)
Remark:
1) Enter the system setting mode.
2) Enter the copy setting mode.
3) Press the auto calibration key.
The patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
5) Set the patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure
4) on the document table.
Set the patch image so that the light density area is on the left
side. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
Place the adjustment pattern on the document table so that the to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
adjustment pattern patch faces in the sub scanning direction. reversed.
(When the adjustment pattern is printed on A4R or 11" x 8.5"R (Method 2)
paper, place the adjustment pattern paper vertically on the Execute SIM 67-25 to print the adjustment check pattern.
document table.)
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above patch The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.
image (adjustment pattern). The patch density is changed gradually.
Thin line Patch A or B is slightly copied.
Q (Max)

The copy and the printer density and gradation adjustment is
automatically executed. After completion of the adjustment,
the display returns to the original operation screen. The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
ADJ 13 Printer quality adjustment Patch A or B is slightly copied.
(Printer density and gradation
13-A Manual printer density and gradation
adjustment)
adjustment
NOTE: For the U model where no printer function is provided, this This adjustment is needed in the following situations:
adjustment is not required.
* When the copy density and gradation adjustment is required.
(1) Note before execution of the printer density and gradation
a. General
adjustment
When the printer density and gradation are not within the specified
(2) Printer density and gradation check
range in the previous automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A, or when a
(Note) fine adjustment is required, or when the user requests for customi-
Before checking the printer density and gradation, be sure to exe- zation, this adjustment is executed manually.
cute the following procedures in advance. Execute the automatic adjustment of ADJ 12A in advance, and
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) then execute this adjustment for better efficiency.
forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* The half-tone image correction is forcibly executed. (SIM 44-26)

b. Adjustment procedure 1) Enter the SIM 67-25 mode.
Manual printer density and gradation adjustment procedure flowchart

(SIM 67-25) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
Start
& 32,17
' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
Execute ADJ 13A Manual printer density and gradation adjustment. * 32,17
(*1) + 32,17
, 32,17
Enter the SIM 67-25 mode, and select A3 (11" x 17") or - 32,17
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper. . 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check 10-key

pattern.
OK
Select a target adjustment density level with the scroll key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key.
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment pattern is printed.)
& 32,17
' 32,17
Check the density and gradation of the adjustment check ( 32,17
pattern. ) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
Are the density NO . 32,17
at the satisfactory / 32,17
level? (;(&87( 2.
YES
EXECUTE EXECUTE
Cancel SIM 67-25. or self print end

6,08/$7,2112
Check the printer density and gradation adjustment result. 7(67 &/26(
35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17
Use SIM 64-5 to print the check pattern, $ % 32,17
and check the printer density. & 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
Are the density * 32,17
and gradation at the NO + 32,17

, 32,17
satisfactory level?
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
YES
(;(&87( 2.
End
*1:
If satisfactory density is not obtained with the
adjustment, check the print engine for any problems.

2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (A3 (11" x 17") or A4R (11" x 8.5"R) 1) Enter the SIM 46-19 mode.
paper is selected.)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. (;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
$(B02'(
The adjustment check pattern is printed. $(B6723B&23<
02'(
5($/7,0(
02'(
6723 35(6&$1
3) Check that the following specification is satisfied or the density $(B6723B)$; 2)) 21
and the gradation are satisfactory. $(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1

$(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53
If not, execute the following procedures. $(B:,'7+ )8// 3$57
The patch density is identical between patches or not reversed.


A B C D E F G H I J K L MN O P 2) Set REALTIME or STOP to adjustment item AE STOP COPY.

For contents of each setting item, refer to below. Change the
setting value of "AE WIDTH" item to "FULL" or "PART", in
Q (Max)
Low density High density some cases.
Default
Item/Display Content Set value
value
AE_MODE Auto exposure MODE1, MODE2 MODE2
mode
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Stop (for copy)
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must Stop (for FAX)
not be reversed. AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/STOP STOP
Patch A or B is slightly copied. Stop (for scanner)
When, however, the density and the gradation are adjusted on AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
the request by the user, there is no need to set to the standard setting NORMAL
density and gradation stated above. SHARP
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
4) Select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5) Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key. NOTE: MODE1: High gamma (Improves the image contrast)
The adjustment value is set in the range of 0 - 255 (1 - 99). MODE2: Normal gamma
When SIM 46-24 is used to adjust the automatic density, all the STOP:
set values of this simulation are set to 50. Reads the density of 3 - 7 mm area from leading edge of
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To document, decides the output image density according to
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value. the density of that part. (The output image density is con-
Repeat procedures of 2) - 5) until the condition of 3) is satis- stant at whole area.)
fied. REALTIME:
When the overall density is low, or when the density is high Reads the density of width of the document one by one,
and patch A is copied, use the arrow key to adjust all the decides the output image density according to the density
adjustment values of A - Q (MAX) to a same level collectively. of each part of the document. (The output image density
Then, adjust each patch density individually. This is an efficient may be not constant at whole area.)
way of adjustment. AE WIDTH FULL:
6) Cancel SIM 67-25. Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
(leading edge of document) x Document width. No relation-
7) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
ship to PRESCAN MODE
density and gradation.
AE WIDTH PART:
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
Document density reading area in auto mode is 3 - 7 mm
The print test pattern is printed.
(leading edge of document) x 100 mm (width). No relation-
ship to PRESCAN MODE
Operation in auto copy mode:
ADJ 14 Automatic setting of exposure When the density of the document of the read area is light,
mode operating conditions in output image density is increased by control. When the
density of the document of the read area is dark, output
copy, scan, and FAX image density is decreased by control.
Use for setting the condition of read operation (Exposure) for docu-
ment density in auto copy mode.
When a copy with correct density is not obtained by type of docu-
ment, change the setting.
* When a copy with correct density is not obtained in auto mode.

Document table/DSPF mode

6,08/$7,2112
3 to 7mm 7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
AE WIDTH = FULL
(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Document table mode

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3 to 7mm %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
(;(&87,1*
100mm
AE WIDTH = PART
(;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
DSPF mode %<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
3$326,7,21$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
3 to 7mm
100mm AE WIDTH = PART

(;(&87(
EXECUTE
Repeat the above procedure to adjust

the A4R width MIN POSITION.
Document density detection area

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
&203/(7(
ADJ 15 Paper size detection

adjustment
15-A Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
adjustment
* The manual paper feed tray section has been disassembled.
(;(&87(
* The manual paper feed tray unit has been replaced.

2) Open the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width posi-
tion. 15-B DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray paper width
sensor adjustment
* The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray section has been disassem-
bled.
* The DSPF/RSPF paper feed tray unit has been replaced.
* The scanner PWB has been replaced.
* The EEPROM on the scanner PWB has been replaced.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal
display.
The maximum width position detection level of the manual
paper feed guide is recognized.
4) Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4 size.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted. Then it returns to the normal (;(&87(
display.
The A4 size width position detection level of the manual paper 2) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum width
feed guide is recognized. position.
6) Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
display.
Set the manual paper feed guide to the width for the A4R size.
8) Open the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width posi-
tion.

The maximum width detection level is recognized.
4) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A4R size.
The A4R width detection level is recognized.
6) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the width for the
A5R size.
display.
8) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width
The minimum width position detection level of the manual
position.
paper feed guide is recognized.
If the above operation is not completed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed.
When the operation is completed normally, the above data are
saved to the memory and "COMPLETE" is displayed.

16-B Adjust the sensitivity of the original size
The minimum width detection level is recognized.
sensor
* When each of the above operations has been completed,
the "COMPLETE" message appears; when any of the oper- 1) Enter the SIM 41-2 mode.
ations has failed, the "ERROR" message appears.
ADJ 16 Document size detection

adjustment
* When the original size sensor section has been disassembled.
* When the original size sensor section has been replaced.
* When U2 trouble has occurred. EXECUTE

16-A Document size sensor detection point

adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Adjustment
3'6(1625&+(&. failed
2&6: 3' 3' 3'
3' 3' 3' 3'
Adjustment completed EXECUTE

Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment screw

and slide the actuator position so that the display OCSW is
returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit
top from the table glass is 32 0.5mm by slowly tilting the doc-
ument detection arm unit in the arrow direction and adjust.
(If the ON timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the doc-
ument detection function may malfunction.)
2) Execute the sensor adjustment without document.

With the document cover open, without placing a document on
the table glass, press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Place A3 (11" x 17") paper on the document table and press
[EXECUTE] key.
If the adjustment is completed normally, "DOCUMENT PHOTO
32+
-0.5mm SENSOR LEVEL IS ADJUSTED" is displayed.

ADJ 17 Touch panel coordinate setting 18-A Print image main scanning direction image
magnification ratio automatic adjustment
This adjustment is needed in the following situations: (Document table mode)
* The operation panel has been replaced.
* The scanner control PWB has been replaced.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
* The EEPROM on the scanner control PWB has been replaced. $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
1) Enter the SIM 65-1 mode. 2&$'- %.0$*$'-

63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] with the key button.

2) Precisely press the cross mark points (4 positions). 3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
When the cross mark is pressed precisely, a buzzer sounds (Any paper size will do.)
and the display is reversed. When all the four points are
pressed and the touch panel adjustment is completed, the dis-
6,08/$7,2112
play returns to the simulation sub number entry screen. 7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
&/26(
In case of an error, the display returns to the entry screen 0)7 &6 &6
again.
Check to confirm that there is no shift between the display
frame and the detection position when the touch panel is
pressed.
* When pressing the touch panel, never use a sharp tip (such
as a needle or a pin).
ADJ 18 Image lead edge position, (;(&87(
image off-center, image 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.

magnification ratio adjustment The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
(Automatic adjustment) 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with
SIM 50-28. It takes less time to use this adjustment than to use the NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
following manual adjustments. guide.
* ADJ 3B Print engine image magnification ratio adjustment
(Main scanning direction)
* ADJ 3C Print engine print area (void area) adjustment
* ADJ 3D Print engine image off-center adjustment
* ADJ 7 Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
(Manual adjustment)
* ADJ 10 Copy image position, image loss, and void area adjust-
ment (Manual adjustment)
(Menu in SIM 50-28 mode)
OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
ADJ paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Display of data used when an adjustment is executed

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4) Select a paper feed tray to be adjusted.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*
0)7 &6 &6 $'8
&6 &6 /&&
(;(&87(
The following item is automatically adjustment. (;(&87(
* Print image main scanning direction image magnification

ratio 5) Press [EXECUTE] key.
7) Press [OK] key. The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out.
The adjustment result becomes valid. 6) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. (Any direc-
tion)
6,08/$7,2112
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&( guide.
%.0$*
5(35,17 5(6&$1 5(75< '$7$ 2.
18-B Image off-center automatic adjustment

(Each paper feed tray)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'-
63)$'-
%.0$*$'-
6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$ The following item is automatically adjustment.
* Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* Print image off-center adjustment
8) Press [OK] key.
The adjustment result becomes valid.
Perform procedures 4) to 7) for each paper feed tray.

2) Select [SETUP/PRINT] ADJ with the key button. 18-C Copy lead edge image reference position
3) Select [ALL] with the key button. adjustment, image off-center, sub scanning
direction image magnification ratio
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
automatic adjustment
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
/($' 2))6(7
$// 1) Enter the SIM50-28 mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

(Note)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are

executed simultaneously.

2) Select [OC ADJ] with the key button. 7) Press [OK] key.
3) Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button. The adjustment result becomes valid.
(Any paper size will do.)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112 $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,21&203/(7(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
3/($6(386+&$.(<
0)7 &6 &6

(;(&87(
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 18-D Copy image off-center, image lead edge
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is printed out. position, sub scanning direction image
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. magnification ratio automatic adjustment
(Any direction)
(DSPF/RSPF mode)
NOTE: Fit the adjustment pattern correctly with the document
guide.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
2&$'- %.0$*$'-
63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
5(68/7 '$7$

2) Press the [SPF ADJ] button.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
6,'( 6,'(
$//
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(
12:(;(&87,1*

3) Proceed to one of the three screens for selecting the cassette

(;(&87( used to print DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns by selecting the
corresponding button.
The following item is automatically adjustment. Select [ALL] with the key button.
* Copy lead edge image reference position adjustment, image SIDE1: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the front side
off-center, sub scanning direction image magnification ratio
SIDE2: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for the back side
automatic adjustment
ALL: DSPF/RSPF adjustment for both the front and back
sides
4) Select one of the cassettes that can be used to print DSPF/
RSPF adjustment patterns. (Multiple selection is not allowed.)
5) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts self-print
of DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns.
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
self-printing DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns.
When self-print finishes, the next screen appears where you
can start DSPF/RSPF adjustments.

6) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/ <Adjustment item list>
RSPF.
DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (back side)
DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (back side)
DSPF/RSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (back
side)
10) The adjustment result screen appears.
This screen shows the current values along with the previous
values in parentheses.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front and back
sides) again.
* To have the machine start re-reading the DSPF/RSPF
adjustment patterns (front and back sides), press the [RES-
CAN] button.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the * To return to the top menu without saving the adjustment val-
cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print ues into EEPROM and RAM, press the [RETRY] button.
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns again. * To display the data used for adjustment, press the [DATA]
button.
7) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts reading
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the front side). 11) To save the adjustment values into EEPROM and RAM and
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is return to the top menu, press the [OK] button.
reading and calculating DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns * To return to the result screen, press the [BACK] button.
(for the front side).
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
the front side) after it has read the patterns for the front side. ADJ 19 Fusing paper guide position
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment adjustment
amount for the front side, the next screen appears where
you can have the machine start reading DSPF/RSPF adjust- Normally there is no need to perform this adjustment. In the follow-
ment patterns (for the back side). ing cases, perform this adjustment.
<Adjustment item list> * When a paper jam occurs in the fusing section.
* When wrinkles are made on paper in the fusing section.
DSPF/RSPF original leading edge adjustment (front side)
* When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in the
DSPF/RSPF original off-center adjustment (front side)
paper rear edge section.
DSPF/RSPF sub-scan magnification ratio adjustment (front
1) Loosen the fusing paper guide fixing screws which are on two
side)
position in the front/rear frame direction.
8) DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns are loaded into the DSPF/
2) Use the fusing paper guide position scale as the reference to
RSPF.
shift the paper guide in the arrow direction A or B.
* By pressing the [REPRINT] button, you can return to the

cassette selection screen and have the machine self-print
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns again. The standard fixing position is one scale lower than the center
of the marking scale. Change the actual fixing position accord-
9) Press the [EXECUTE] button, and the machine starts loading
ing to the condition.
DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back side).
* When wrinkles are generated on paper, change the position
* The screen shows a message indicating that the machine is
in the arrow direction B.
reading DSPF/RSPF adjustment patterns (for the back
side). * When an image deflection or an image blur is generated in
the paper rear edge section, change the position in the
The machine starts calculating the adjustment amount (for
arrow direction A.
the back side) after it has read the patterns for the back side.
After the machine has finished calculating the adjustment
amount for the back side, the next screen appears where
you can view the results of the adjustments.

[5] SIMULATION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. General (Including basic operations)

The simulation mode has the following functions, to display the
machine operating status, identify the trouble position and causes
in an earlier stage, and make various setups and adjustments
speedily for improving the serviceability of the machine.
1) Various adjustments
2) Setting of the specifications and functions
3) Canceling troubles
4) Operation check
5) Counters check, setting, clear
6) Machine operating conditions (operation hysteresis), data
check, clear.
7) Various (adjustments, setting, operation, counters, etc.) data
transport.
The operating procedures and displays depend on the design of
the operation panel of the machine.
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1) Copy mode key ON Program key ON Asterisk (*) key ON
CLEAR key ON Asterisk (*) key ON Ready for input of
a main code of simulation
2) Entering a main code with the 10-key START key ON.
Or select a main code with the SIM key on the touch panel.
3) Entering a sub code with the 10-key START key ON.
4) Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5) The machine enters the mode corresponding to the selected
item. Press [START] key or [EXECUTE] key to start the simu-
lation operation.
When canceling the current simulation mode to change the
main code and the sub code, press [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key.
* Canceling the simulation mode to return to the normal mode

1) Press [CA] key.
(Note for the simulation mode)

Do not turn OFF the power switch on the operation panel when the
machine is in the simulation mode. If the power switch should be
turned OFF in the simulation mode, a malfunction may be resulted.
In this case, turn OFF/ON the main power source.
MX-M503N SIMULATION 5 1
START (Copy mode)
Press the Program key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Press the clear key.
Press the asterisk (*) key.
Standby for entry of Press the SYSTEM

SIM code. SETTINGS key
Enter the main code of

SIM with the 10-key.
The main code of SIM

is displayed.
NO
Press the START button.

YES Is it the same
simulation main
code?
YES
In the power OFF/ON type
Standby for entry of SIM <Exclusion type> simulation, OFF/ON
Is there a sub code ?
sub code You have to exit messages is
simulation mode Press the SYSTEM displayed by the
NO before entering into SETTINGS key SYSTEM
Enter SIM sub code with
this mode for self YES
SETTINGS key.
the 10-key. printing type.
Select the mode and the Do you want
NO
Press the START button. item with the scroll key to perform another
and the item key. simulation ? The simulation mode
is canceled.
NO
If there is no item. YES Press the EXECUTE button
Operation check ?
and OK button.
NO Do you YES
Operation is made according want to end the Press the clear all key.
to the selected mode and item. simulation ?
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Operating conditions
check ? and OK button.
NO
The display is made according to
the selected some and the item.
YES Press the EXECUTE button

Data clear ?
and OK button.
NO
The selected mode and
the item are cleared.
YES Adjustments NO Operation is made according

or setting (counter data to the selected mode and the item.
change) ? (Other modes)
The display is made according

to the selected mode and the item.
Do you NO
want to change the
content ?
The changed content
YES
is stored.
Enter the new setting and Press the EXECUTE button

adjustment values. and OK button.
2. List of simulation codes
Main Sub Functions Section
1 1 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 Used to check the sensors in the scanner (reading) section and the related circuits. Scanner
5 Used to check the operation of the scanner (reading) unit and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
2 1 Used to check the operations of the automatic document feed unit and the control circuit. Automatic document feeder
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the document feed unit Automatic document feeder
section and the control circuits.
3 Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feed unit and the control Automatic document feeder
circuit.
3 2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the finisher and the control Finisher
circuit.
3 Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit. Finisher
10 Used to adjust the finisher. Finisher
4 2 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and their control Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
circuits.
3 Used to check the paper feed section (Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 Used to check the operation of the paper transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
5 1 Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit. Operation unit (Operation/Display Control PWB)
2 Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit. Fusing
3 Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the control circuit. Scanner (reading)
6 1 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper transport system (clutches and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
solenoids) and the control circuits.
2 Used to check the operations of each fan and its control circuit. Others
7 1 Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
6 Used to set the operating intermittent aging cycle.
8 Used to display the warm-up time. Fusing
12 The document reading number of sheets setting (for aging operation) Automatic document feeder
8 1 Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage in each print mode and the Toner supply, developing
control circuit.
2 Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each printer mode Photo-conductor
and the control circuit.
6 Used to check and adjust the operation of the transport voltage and the control circuit. Transfer
17 Used to check and adjust the operation of the separation bias voltage and the control circuit.
9 2 Used to check the operation of the sensors and detectors in the switchback section (duplex Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
section) and the control circuit.
3 Used to check the operations of the load in the paper reverse section (duplex section) and its Duplex
control circuit.
10 1 Used to check the operations of the toner supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the related Toner supply, developing
circuit.
13 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble. MFP (ICU) PWB
14 - Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5" trouble. Fusing
15 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trouble. LCC
16 - Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
17 - Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
21 1 Used to set the maintenance cycle.
22 1 Used to display the print count value of each section and the operation mode.
2 Used to display the number of total mis-feed and the number of troubles.
3 Used to display the mis-feed position and the number of mis-feed at the position.
4 Used to display the trouble (self diag) history.
5 Used to display the ROM version of each unit (section).
6 Used to print information on various settings, adjustments, counters, controls, and versions.
8 Used to display the number of operations (the counter value) of the finisher, the DSPF/RSPF,
and scanning (reading).
9 Used to display the print quantity of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
10 Used to display the system configuration (options and internal hardware).
11 Used to display the use frequency of send/receive of FAX. (Only when FAX is installed.) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
12 Used to display the mis-feed position of the DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at the Automatic document feeder
position.
13 Used to display the use quantity of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner cartridge). Process
19 Used to display various counter values related to scan - image send.
90 Used to output the various set data lists.
23 2 Used to output the trouble history list of paper jam and mis-feed.
80 Used to output the operation data of paper feed and paper transport in the paper feed/ Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
transport section.
24 1 Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter.
2 Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and the scan (reading) unit counter.
4 Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit and the fusing
unit.
5 Used to clear the developer counter. Toner supply, developing
6 Used to clear the copy counter.
7 Used to clear the OPC drum counter. Photoconductor
9 Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
10 Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed) FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
15 Used to clear the counters related to the scan mode and the image send.
30 Used to initialize the administrator password.
31 Used to initialize the service mode (Web page) password.
25 1 Used to check the operations of the developing section, and to display the toner density Toner supply, developing
detection level.
2 Used to make the initial setting of toner density when replacing developer. Toner supply, developing
(Automatic adjustment)
26 1 Used to set the paper exit operation from the right side. Paper exit section
2 Used to set the paper type and the weight type. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
3 Used to set the specifications of the auditor. Auditor
5 Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x 17") print.
6 Used to set the specifications of the destination.
10 Used to set the trial mode of the network scanner.
18 Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner save mode operation. (For the Japan and the UK
versions.)
30 Used to set the operation mode corresponding to the CE mark (Europe safety standards).
35 Used to set the trouble history display mode.
38 Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop" when the maintenance timing is reached or the
consumable part life is over.
41 Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnification ratio automatic select function (AMS) in the
center binding mode.
49 Used to set the print speed of postcards mode.
50 Used to set the operation specifications and functions.
52 Used to set whether non-printed paper (insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up or not.
53 Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto calibration (gradation, density adjustment) in the
copy mode.
65 Used to set the limit of the staple process.
69 Used to set the operating conditions for toner near end.
73 Used to adjust the image loss (shade removal amount) in the poster, the continuous
enlargement copy, the card scan, and the A3 wide copy mode.
74 Used to set the OSA trial mode.
78 Used to set the password of the remote operation panel mode.
27 1 Used to set non-detection of communication error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
2 Used to set the sender's registration number and the HOST server telephone number.
(FSS function)
4 Used to set the initial call and toner order auto send. (FSS function)
5 Used to set the machine tag No. (FSS function)
6 Used to set of the manual service call. (FSS function)
7 Used to set of the enable, alert call out. (FSS function)
9 Used to set the paper transport time recording YES/NO threshold value and shading gain
adjustment retry number. (FSS function)
10 Used to clear the trouble prediction history information. (FSS function)
11 Used to check the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain adjustment retry
number history. (FSS function)
12 Used to check the high-density and the half-tone process control error history. (FSS Function)
13 Used to check the history of paper transport time between sensors. (FSS function)
14 Used to set the FSS function connection test mode.
30 1 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in other than the paper feed Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
2 Used to check the operations of the sensors and the detectors in the paper feed section and Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
the control circuits.
33 1 Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of card. (HDD-installed machine only) Others
40 2 Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor adjustment. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
7 Used to set the adjustment value of the manual paper feed tray paper width sensor. Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
41 1 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
2 Used to adjust the document size sensor detection level. Others
3 Used to check the operations of the document size sensor and the control circuit. Others
43 1 Used to make the fusing reference temperature setting 1 in each operation mode. Fusing
4 Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in each operation mode. Fusing
20 Used to set the environmental correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing
fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
21 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing
the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
22 Used to set the environment correction under low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for the Fusing
fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
23 Used to set the environment correction under high temperature and high humidity (H/H) for Fusing
the fusing temperature setting (SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
24 Used to set the correction of the temperature adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-4. Fusing
31 Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor. Fusing
32 Used to set various items related to the forcible operation of web cleaning when job end. Fusing
44 1 Used to set each correction operation function in the image forming (process) section. Process
2 Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image density sensor. Process
4 Used to set the conditions of the high density process control operation. Process
6 Used to execute the high density process control forcibly. Process
9 Used to display the result data of the high density process control operation. Process
12 Used to display the operation data of the high density process control and the image density Process
sensor.
14 Used to display the output level of the temperature and humidity sensor.
16 Used to display the toner density control data. Toner supply, developing
21 Used to register the target value of the half-tone process control. Process
22 Used to display the toner patch density level in the half tone process control operation. Process
24 Used to display the correction target and the correction level in the half tone process control Process
operation.
25 Used to set the calculating conditions of the correction value for the half tone process control. Process
26 Used to execute the half tone process control compulsory. Process
27 Used to clear the correction data of the half tone process control. Process
28 Used to set the process control execution conditions. Process
29 Used to set the operating conditions of the process control during a job. Process
37 Used to set the development bias correction level in the continuous printing operation. Toner supply, developing
46 2 Used to adjust the copy density in each monochrome copy mode.
4 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (color mode). (N model only)
5 Used to adjust the density in the image send mode (monochrome mode).
8 Used to adjust the image send mode color balance RGB. (N model only)
9 Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image density (copy, image send mode)
10 Used to adjust the copy density (in each copy mode).
16 Used to adjust the copy density manually.
19 Used to set the operating conditions of document density scanning (copy, image send mode). Scanner
23 Used to set the density correction of copy high density section (High density tone gap
supported).
24 Copy and printer density adjustment (Auto adjustment)
32 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the document background density in the automatic copy
mode.
37 Used to adjust the reproducibility of the scan image color document (copy, image send
mode). (N model only)
39 Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send images.
40 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Collective adjustment of all the modes)
41 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Normal)
42 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Fine)
43 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Super Fine)
44 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (Ultra fine)
45 Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (600dpi).
47 Used to set the compression rate of copy and scan images (JPEG).
48 Used to set the output resolution in each copy mode. (N model only)
51 Used to adjust the gamma for the copy mode heavy paper mode and the image process
mode (manual adjustment).
52 Used to set the gamma default for the copy mode heavy paper and the image process mode.
(The set values of SIM46-51 are set to the default values.)
61 Used to adjust the area separation recognition level in the image send mode (color, gray, auto
exposure mode). (N model only)
63 Used to adjust the density in the low density area of a scan image. (N model only)
64 Used to set the image process mode in each copy mode.
90 Used to set the process operation of high-compression PDF images. (N model only)
48 1 Used to adjust the scan image magnification ratio (in the main scanning direction and the sub Scanner
scanning direction).
5 Used to correction the scan image magnification ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Scanner
6 Used to adjust the rotation speed of each motor.
49 1 Used to perform the firmware update.
3 Used to install and update the Operation Manual data stored in the HDD. (N model only)
5 Used to install and update the watermark data stored in the HDD.
50 1 Copy image position, image loss adjustment
2 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (simple adjustment).
5 Used to adjust the print lead edge image position. (PRINTER MODE)
6 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode).
7 Used to adjust the copy image position and the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode) (simple
adjustment).
10 Used to adjust the image off-center position.
(The adjustment is made separately for each paper feed section.)
12 Used to perform the scan image off-center position adjustment.
(The adjustment is made separately for each scan mode.)
27 Used to perform the image loss adjustment of scanned images in the FAX or image send
mode.
28 Used to automatically adjust the image loss, void area, image off-center, and image
magnification ratio.
51 2 Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflection amount) on paper by the main unit and the Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
DSPF/RSPF resist roller.
53 6 Used to adjust the detection level of the DSPF/RSPF document width.
7 Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document size width sensor. Automatic document feeder
8 Used to adjust the document lead edge reference and the DSPF/RSPF mode document scan Automatic document feeder
position.
55 1 Used to set the specifications of the engine control operations. (SOFT SW)
2 Used to set the specifications of the scanner control operation. (SOFT SW)
3 Used to set the specifications of the controller operation. (SOFT SW)
56 1 Used to transport data between HDD - MFP PWB SRAM/EEPROM.
(Used to repair the PWB.) (HDD-installed machine)
2 Used to backup the data in the EEPROM. SRAM, and HDD (including user authentication
data and address data) to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
3 Used to backup the document filing data to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
4 Used to backup the JOB log data to the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
60 1 Used to check the operations (read/write) of the MFP PWB memory. MFP (ICU) PWB
2 Used to set the specifications of the MFP PWB on-board SDRAM. MFP (ICU) PWB
61 1 Used to check the LSU polygon motor rotation and laser detection. LSU
3 Used to set the laser power LSU
62 1 Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area). HDD
* If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash memory is formatted.
2 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (partial). HDD
3 Used to check read/write of the hard disk (all areas). HDD
6 Used to perform the self diagnostics of the hard disk. HDD
7 Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics error log. HDD
8 Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding the system area and the operation manual area) HDD
10 Used to delete the job log data. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
11 Used to delete the document filing data. (HDD-installed machine) HDD
12 Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in a hard disk trouble. HDD
13 Used to format the hard disk. (only the operation manual and watermark area) HDD
63 1 Used to display the shading correction result. Scanner
2 Used to perform shading. Scanner
3 Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma auto adjustment. Scanner
4 Used to display the SIT chart patch density. Scanner
5 Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma default setting. Scanner
64 2 Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
4 Printer test print. (Self print)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer function.
5 Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
6 Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
65 1 Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
2 Used to display the touch panel (LCD display section) detection coordinates. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
5 Used to check the operation panel key input. Operation unit (Operation/Display control PWB)
67 17 Printer controller reset
25 Printer density adjustment (Manual adjustment)
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option
function.
31 Used to clear the printer calibration value (Half-tone process control data).
33 Used to adjust the gamma and the density in each printer screen.
* This simulation functions only for the machines which are provided with the printer option
function.
34 Used to set the density correction in the printer high density section.
(Support for the high density section tone gap)
70 MFP PWB SRAM data clear MFP (ICU) PWB
3. Details of simulation 1-5
Purpose Operation test/check
1 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
(reading) unit and the control circuit.
1-1 Section Scanner (reading)
Purpose Operation test/check Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner 1) Select the operation speed with the touch panel key.
(reading) unit and the control circuit. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Section Scanner (reading) Scanning is repeated at the speed corresponding to the scan
Operation/Procedure resolution (operation speed).
1) Select the operation resolution (scan speed) with the touch When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
panel key.
Item/Display Operation mode Default value
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
Scanning is once performed at the speed corresponding to the 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
scan resolution (operation speed). 600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s)
OC SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)

6,08/$7,2112
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s) 7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
1200DPI 1200DPI (86.5mm/s) 2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&+(&.
2&6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
'3,
(;(&87(
(;(&87(
2
2-1
1-2
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the auto-
Function (Purpose) Used to check the sensors in the scanner matic document feed unit and the control
(reading) section and the related circuits. circuit.
Section Scanner Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure Operation/Procedure
The operating status of the sensor is displayed. 1) Select the operation mode and the speed with the touch panel
When "MHPS" is highlighted, the scanner unit is in the home posi- key.
tion. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The DSPF/RSPF repeats paper feed, transport, and paper exit

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
operations at the speed corresponding to the scan resolution
6&$11(56(1625&+(&. (operation speed).
MHPS
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated.
[DSPF]
(SINGLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
(DOUBLE) 300DPI 300DPI (346.0mm/s) 300DPI
400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (346.0mm/s)
600DPI 600DPI (173.0mm/s)
[DSPF]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)$*,1*

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)6&$1 300DPI '3, '3,
63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$'
66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
633' 633' 633' 633'

632' 63/6 63/6 67038
SINGLE '28%/( (;(&87(

[RSPF] [RSPF]

SPF SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (259.5mm/s) 300DPI 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(SINGLE 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s)
63)6(1625&+(&.6:'B/(1 6('B$'
(single face)) 600DPI 600DPI (173.0 mm/s) 66(7 62&' 6&29 63('
SPF SCAN 300DPI 300DPI (259.5mm/s) 300DPI 633' 633' 633' 633'
(DOUBLE 400DPI 400DPI (259.5mm/s) (259.5mm/s) 63/6 63/6 67038
(double face)) 600DPI 600DPI (173.0 mm/s)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 2-3
63)$*,1*
63)6&$1 '3, '3, '3,
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the loads
in the automatic document feed unit and
the control circuit.
6,1*/( '28%/( (;(&87(
Section Automatic document feeder
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item of the operation check with the touch panel
2-2
key.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- The selected load performs the operation.
sors and the detectors in the document
feed unit section and the control circuits.
Section Automatic document feeder [DSPF-installed model]
Operation/Procedure SPUM DSPF paper feed motor

SPFM DSPF transport motor
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
SRRC DSPF resist roller clutch
played.
SPFFAN DSPF fan motor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
STMPS Stamp solenoid
are highlighted. (Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.)
SSET DSPF/RSPF installation detector

SOCD DSPF/RSPF open/close detector
6,08/$7,2112
SCOV DSPF/RSPF cover open/close detector 7(67 &/26(
63)287387&+(&.
SPED1 DSPF/RSPF document detector 1 6380 63)0
SPPD1 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 1 655& 63))$1
(Paper entry detection) 67036
SPPD2 DSPF/RSPF document pass detector 2

(Resist roller front document transport detection)
(Document scanning front document transport detection)
(DSPF: Document transport detection)
(RSPF: Document transport detection/Document reverse
rear document transport detection) (;(&87(
SPOD DSPF paper exit detector (Only the DSPF)

[RSPF-installed model]
SPLS1 DSPF/RSPF document length detector 1 (Short)
SPLS2 DSPF/RSPF document length detector (Long)
SPUM RSPF paper feed motor
STMPU DSPF/RSPF stamp unit installation detector
SPFM_F RSPF paper feed reverse motor (normal rotation)
SWD_LEN DSPF/RSPF guide plate position (Unit: 0.1mm)
SPFM_R RSPF paper feed reverse motor (reverse rotation)
SWD_AD DSPF/RSPF document detection volume output AD value
SRRC RSPF resist roller clutch
SRVC RSPF reverse clutch
SPRS RSPF pressure release solenoid
STMPS Finish stamp solenoid
(Displayed only when the finish stamp is installed.)
FDTPD EMPS Delivery tray paper detector
FPLD FSLD Paper surface detector
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
FPPD2 FFPD Paper transport detector 2
63)287387&+(&.
6380 63)0
FSPHS FFHPD Saddle plate home position sensor
655& 63))$1 FSTPD FFED Saddle exit tray paper detector
67036 FSMRS FFE Saddle motor rotation sensor
FTULD FULD Tray upper limit detector
(;(&87( FTLLD FLLD Tray lower limit detector
FTLMRS FLE Tray lift motor rotation sensor
FSHS FSHPD Staple home position sensor
FSSHPS FSTHPD Stapler shift home position sensor
3 FSED
FSLS
FSD
FSPD
Staple empty detector
Staple lead edge sensor
FTPS FMLD Tray position sensor
3-2 FCD1 FFDD Cover detector 1
FCD2 FCD Cover detector 2
FSSW1 FFDDW Safety switch 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen- FCD FJSW Finisher connection detector
sors and the detectors in the finisher and FSSSW1 FSSSW Staple safety switch
the control circuit. FFL FFANLK Fan lock signal
Section Finisher FDRHS FNHPD Delivery roller home position sensor
Operation/Procedure FPPD3 FSPOD Paper transport detector 3
FSATPD FSDTPD Saddle paper alignment tray paper detector
FSSSW2 FSJPD Stapler safety switch 2
played.
FPHHD FPHHPD Paper hold home position sensor
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
FSAPHS FSJHPD Saddle alignment plate home position sensor
are highlighted.
FSPGHS FAHPD Saddle paper guide home position sensor
<Inner finisher> FSRHS FSR3HPD Saddle roller home position sensor
FPDD FGED Delivery detector
FED Entry port paper detection (Status detection "1")
FSSHS FSSHPD Saddle staple home position sensor
FBED Tray paper detection
FSSES FSSD Saddle staple sensor
FULD Tray upper limit detection
FSSCS FSSDSW Saddle staple cover sensor
FMLLD Tray intermediate lower limit detection
FSSSHS FSSTHPD Finisher saddle stapler shift home position
FLLD Tray lower limit detection
sensor
FSLD1 Paper surface detection 1
FPMRS FPMCK Punch motor rotation sensor
FSLD2 Paper surface detection 2
FPD FPUC Punch unit detection (connector)
FRLD Roller up/down detection
FPCHPS FPHPD Punch home position sensor
FBRD Belt separation detection
FPDFS FPDD Punch dust sensor
FFJHPD Alignment HP detection front
FPHPS FPSHPD Punch unit home position sensor
FRJHPD Alignment HP detection rear
FPTS FPTD Punch timing sensor
FJPD Alignment guide position detection
FPES1 FPSD1 Punch paper edge sensor 1
FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FSD Staple empty detection
FPPS FPPD Punch paper position sensor
FSTD Staple lead edge position detection
FDSW Door open detection <4K finisher>
FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FJPID Interface transport unit entry port detection
FPRPD Punch rear position detection (Status detection "1")
FJPOD Interface transport unit exit port detection
FPUC Punch unit connection detection
FJPDD Interface transport unit cover detection
FPHPD Punch HP detection
FED Entry port paper detection
FPSHPD Punch side resist HP detection
FAED1 Tray 1 area detection 1
FPPD1 Punch paper surface detection 1
FFJHPD Alignment plate HP detection front
FRJHPD Alignment plate HP detection rear
FBED1 Tray 1 paper detection
FBED2 Tray 2 paper detection
FPDD Punch dust detection
FCCD Tray approach detection
FPPEND Punch paper rear edge detection
FSLD1 Tray 1 paper surface detection
FPDES1 Punch destination detection 1
FPDD1 Discharged paper detection
FPDES2 Punch destination detection 2
FSLD2 Tray 2 paper surface detection
<Saddle stitch finisher> FASHPD Rear edge assist HP detection
FSWHPD Oscillation guide HP detection
PDPPD1 FJPID Paper pass paper transport detector 1 FSWOPD Oscillation guide open detection
PDPPD2 FJPOD Paper pass paper transport detector 2 FSTPD Staple tray paper detection
PDCS FJPDD Paper pass cover Open/Close sensor FSHPD Staple drive HP detection
FPPD1 FED Paper delivery detector 1 FSTHPD Staple shift HP detection
FPAPHS_F FFJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor F FSD Staple empty detection
FPAPHS_R FRJHPD Paper alignment plate home position sensor R FSTD Needle lead edge position detection
FATPD FAD Paper alignment tray paper detector FFANLK Fan motor lock detection
FGHPS FGHPD Gripper home position sensor FSJOGD Stapler alignment interference detection
FSAD Staple safety SW <Saddle stitch finisher>
FSHTD Shutter open detection PDPGS FINRPS Paper pass paper gate solenoid
FCD Upper door open detection PDPTM FJPM Paper pass paper transport motor
FFDD Front cover open detection PDCF FJFM Paper pass cooling fan
F24V 24V output interruption detection FPTM1 FFM Paper transport motor 1
FPSW1 PUSHSW1 detection FDRLM FNM Finisher paper exit roller lift motor
FPSW2 PUSHSW2 detection FGM FGM Gripper motor
FPSW3 PUSHSW3 detection FPAM-F FFJM Paper alignment motor F
FAED21 Tray 2 area detection 1 FPAM-R FRJM Paper alignment motor R
FAED22 Tray 2 area detection 2 FSSM FSM Stapler shift motor
FAED23 Tray 2 area detection 3 FSM FFSM Staple motor
FDSW1 DIPSW1 detection FPTM2 FLM Paper transport motor 2
FDSW2 DIPSW2 detection FSDM FFM2 Saddle motor
FDSW3 DIPSW3 detection FSPTM FTM Saddle paper transport motor
FDSW4 DIPSW4 detection FSPAM FSR3M Saddle paper alignment motor
FDSW5 DIPSW5 detection FSPM FSJM Saddle positioning motor
FDSW6 DIPSW6 detection FSDSM FPPM Saddle staple motor
FDSW7 DIPSW7 detection FPHS1 FSSM Paper holding solenoid 1
FDSW8 DIPSW8 detection FPHS2 FPHS Paper holding solenoid 2
FPE Punch motor lock detection FTLM FPS Tray lift motor
FPUC Punch unit connection detection FPM FPNM Punch motor
FPHPD Punch HP detection FPSM FPSM Punch shift motor
FPSHPD Punch horizontal resist HP detection
FPFDD Punch front door open detection <4K finisher is installed>
FPDD Punch dust detection
FINRPS Interface paper gate solenoid
FPUDSW Punch upper cover open detection SW
FJPM Interface transport motor
FJFM Interface transport fan motor

FFM Entry port transport motor
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( FAM Bundle paper exit motor
),16(1625&+(&.
3'33' 3'33' 3'&6 )33' FFJM Alignment motor front
)3$3+6B) )3$3+6B5 )$73' )*+36 FRJM Alignment motor rear
)'73' )3/' )33' )63+6
)673' )6056 )78/'
FSM Staple shift motor
)7//'
)7/056 )6+6 )66+36 )6(' FTLM1 Tray 1 lift motor
)6/6 )736 )&' )&'
FTLM2 Tray 2 lift motor
)66: )&' )666: ))/
)'5+6 )33' )6$73' )666:
FFSM Staple motor
)3++' )6$3+6 )63*+6 )65+6 FSWM Oscillation motor
)3'' )66&6
)66+6 )66(6
FASM Rear edge assist motor
)666+6
FINRRS Inlet port roller separation solenoid
FBRRS Buffer roller separation solenoid

FFDRRS Paper exit roller separation solenoid
FBES Buffer rear edge holding solenoid
FSHC Shutter open/close clutch
3-3 FAORC Bundle exit lower roller clutch
Purpose Operation test/check FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch horizontal resist motor
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the load in
the finisher and the control circuit.
Section Finisher

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure ),1/2$'&+(&.
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel

3'3*6 3'370 3'&) )370
key.
)'5/0 )*0 )3$0) )3$05
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. )660 )60 )7/0 )370
The selected load performs the operation. )6'0 )6370 )63$0 )630

)6'60 )3+6 )3+6
<Inner finisher>

FINRPS Entry port reverse pass solenoid

FSLS Paper surface detection solenoid
(;(&87(
FPDS Paddle solenoid
FBRS Belt separation solenoid
FRM Registration motor
FSWM Oscillation motor
FAM Bundle exit paper exit motor
FFJM Alignment motor front
FRJM Alignment motor rear
FSM Staple shift motor
FFSM Staple motor
FTLM Tray lift motor
FFANM Fan motor
FPNM Punch motor
FPSM Punch side resist motor
M X -M 503N SIM U LATIO N 5 10

Setting Default
3-10 Item/Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment M SADDLE_ADJU Saddle alignment position 35 - 65 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the finisher. ST_POS adjustment
N GRIPPER_POS Gripper exit position 35 - 65 50
Section Finisher
adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch NOTE: "A: SADDLE POSITION (Saddle binding position adjust-
panel. ment)" and "B: FOLDING POSITION (Saddle folding posi-
tion adjustment"
2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The saddle binding position adjustment and the saddle
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
folding position adjustment can be executed in the system
<Inner finisher> setting menu. However, the adjustments in the system set-
ting are based on the adjustment value of this simulation.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content If, therefore, the adjustment value of this simulation is set
range value
A FRONT Alignment position 2 - 18 10 to an extreme level, the adjustment range in the system
ADJUST adjustment (front) setting may be narrowed. (Adjustment range in the system
B REAR ADJUST Alignment position 2 - 18 10 setting 5.0mm)
adjustment (rear) In general, when the saddle binding position and the sad-
C STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 dle folding positions are adjusted to the center by this simu-
adjustment lation, the above trouble will not occur.
(one position at the rear)
D STAPLE Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 <4K finisher>
FRONT adjustment Default
(one position in front) Item Display Item Set range
value
E STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 A FRONT ADJUST Alignment position 0 - 20 10
adjustment (center position adjustment (front)
of two positions binding) B STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
F STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 68 - 132 100 adjustment (one
adjustment (staple pitch of position at the rear)
two positions binding) C STAPLE FRONT Staple binding position 94 - 106 100
G PUNCH Punch center positioning 37 - 63 50 adjustment (one
CENTER sensor position in front)
H PUNCH HOLE Punch hole adjustment 42 - 58 50 D PUNCH Punch center 30 - 70 50
(paper transport direction) CENTER adjustment
E PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 46 - 52 50
<Saddle stitch finisher> adjustment
Setting Default
range value

A SADDLE Saddle stitch position 25 - 75 50 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
POSITION adjustment ),1,6+(5$'-8670(17
B FOLDING Saddle folding position 25 - 75 50 $

$ 6$''/(326,7,21
% )2/',1*326,7,21
POSITION adjustment
& )5217$'-867
C FRONT Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 ' 5($5$'-867
ADJUST adjustment (Front) ( 67$3/(5($5
D REAR ADJUST Paper alignment position 35 - 65 50 ) 67$3/(5($55
* 67$3/()5217
adjustment (Rear)
+ 67$3/()52175
E STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 25 - 75 50 , 67$3/(%27+
adjustment (one position at - 67$3/(3,7&+
the rear) (When the paper . 381&+&(17(5
width is greater than / 381&++2/(
232mm) 2.
F STAPLE REAR Staple binding position 45 - 75 50

R adjustment (one position at
the rear) (When the paper
width is 232mm or less) 4
G STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 75 50
FRONT adjustment (one position in
front) (When the paper 4-2
width is greater than Purpose Operation test/check
232mm)
H STAPLE Staple binding position 25 - 55 50 Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section
FRONT R adjustment (one position in (Desk/LCC) sensors and detectors and
front) (When the paper their control circuits.
width is 232mm or less) Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
I STAPLE BOTH Staple binding position 45 - 55 50
Operation/Procedure
adjustment (two positions
at the center) The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis-
J STAPLE PITCH Staple binding position 35 - 62 50 played.
adjustment (two positions The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active
in pitch) are highlighted.
K PUNCH Punch center adjustment 35 - 65 50
CENTER
L PUNCH HOLE Punch hole position 30 - 60 50
adjustment
<Desk> <A4 LCC>
DCSI1 Desk 1 installation detection LPFM LCC transport motor
DPFD1 Desk 1 transport detection LLM LCC lift motor
DLUD1 Desk 1 upper limit detection LPFC LCC paper feed clutch
DPED1 Desk 1 paper empty detection LPFS LCC paper feed solenoid
DCSPD1 Desk 1 remaining paper quantity detection LTRC LCC transport clutch
DCSS11 Desk 1 rear edge detection 1

DCSS13 Desk 1 rear edge detection 3 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'6./&&/2$'&+(&.
'3)0 '/80 '38& '/80
DCSI2 Desk 2 installation detection
DPFD2 Desk 2 transport detection '38& '75&
DLUD2 Desk 2 upper limit detection

DPED2 Desk 2 paper empty detection
DCSPD2 Desk 2 remaining paper quantity detection
DSW_DSK Desk transport cover open/close detection (;(&87(
<A4 LCC>
LPFD LCC transport sensor 4-5
LUD LCC tray upper limit sensor
LDD LCC tray lower limit sensor
LPED LCC tray paper empty sensor Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the paper
LCD LCC tray insertion detection transport clutch for the paper feed tray unit.
LDSW LCC upper open/close detection SW Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
LRE LCC lift motor encoder sensor Operation/Procedure
L24VM LCC24V power monitor
[Check the ON operation]
LLSW LCC upper limit SW
LTOD LCC main unit connection detection
Press the clutch button of the target of the ON operation check.
Checking is started. When the operation is normal, the button on
the display is highlighted. When it is abnormal, the button is not

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
highlighted.
7(67
'6./&&6(1625&+(&.
'&6, '3)' '/8' '3('
[Check the OFF operation]
'&63' '&66 '&66 '&66 Press the highlighted button which is ON.
'&66 '&6, '3)' '/8'
'3(' '&63' '&66 '&66 When the operation is normal, the highlighted button on the display
'&66 '&66 '6:B'6. returns to the normal display. When it is abnormal, the highlighted
display is maintained.
button Content
DTRC Desk transport clutch
LTRC LCC transport clutch

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(6./&&6<1&521,=,1*6,*1$/&+(&.
4-3 '75& '75&2))

/75& /75&2))

Function (Purpose) Used to check the paper feed section
(Desk/LCC) loads and their control circuits.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
Operation/Procedure
1) Select the load item that is required to operation check with the
touch panel key.
The selected load performs the operation.
<Desk>
DPFM Desk main motor
DLUM1 Desk 1 lift-up motor
DPUC1 Desk 1 paper feed clutch
DLUM2 Desk 2 lift-up motor
DPUC2 Desk 2 paper feed clutch
DTRC Desk transport clutch
5 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
+($7(5/$03/2$'6(783
+/B80 +/B86
5-1 +/B8:

Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control cir-
cuit.
Section Operation unit
(Operation/Display Control PWB)
Operation/Procedure (;(&87(
The LCD is changed as shown below.

The contrast changes every 2sec from the current level to MAX
MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted. 5-3
The LCD display contrast change and the LED lighting status are Purpose Operation test/check
checked.
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the scanner
lamp and the control circuit.
NO.05-01
SIMULATION
7(67
Section Scanner (reading)
Operation/Procedure
key.
The scanner lamp lights up for 10 sec.
Display Content
OC COPY LAMP OC scanner lamp
DSPF COPY LAMP DSPF scanner lamp (DSPF-installed model only)
[DSPF-installed model]
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
2&&23</$03 '63)&23</$03
(;(&87(
5-2
6,08/$7,2112
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the heater 7(67 &/26(
&23</$03&+(&.
lamp and the control circuit.
2&&23</$03
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(
key.
The selected heater lamp repeats ON/OFF operations 10
times at the interval of 500ms.
Heater lamp operation check method:
Remove the rear cabinet, open the PWB holder, and the heater
lamp lighting status can be checked from the clearance between
the frames.
HL_UM Main heater lamp (HL MAIN)

HL_US Sub heater lamp (HL SUB)
HL_UW Warm-up heater lamp (HL UW)
Load operation check method:
6 The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However,
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
6-1
Purpose Operation test/check Item/Display Content
POFM12 Paper exit cooling fan motor 12
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
OZFM Ozone fan motor
the paper transport system (clutches and
PSFM Power cooling fan motor
solenoids) and the control circuits.
LSUFM LSU cooling fan motor
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport RDCFM Suction fan motor
Operation/Procedure POFM3 Paper exit cooling fan motor 3
1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel MFP FAN (CPUFM) Controller fan motor
key.
6,08/$7,2112
The selected load performs the operation. 7(67
)$1/2$'6(783
&/26(
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the operation is terminated. 32)0 2=)0

36)0 /68)0
Load operation check method: 5'&)0 32)0
The load operation is checked by the operation sound. However, 0)3)$1&38)0
there are some loads which cannot be checked with the operation
sound.
Section Item/Display Content

Transport/ PFM Transport motor
process RRM Registration motor
POMF Paper exit motor (normal rotation) $// (;(&87(
POMR Paper exit motor (reverse rotation)

FUM Fusing motor
CPFM Tray paper feed motor
OSM
CPFC
Shifter motor
Tray vertical transport clutch 1
7
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2
PSPS Separation solenoid 7-1
Paper feed CLUM1 Tray 1 lift-up motor Purpose Setting
CPUC1 Tray 1 paper feed clutch
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
CLUM2 Tray 2 lift-up motor
aging.
CPUC2 Tray 2 paper feed clutch
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Section
MPFS Manual feed take-up solenoid Operation/Procedure
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid 1) Select the target to be set with the touch panel key.
The machine is rebooted in the aging mode.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)(('287387&+(&. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
3)0 550 320) 3205
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
)80 &3)0 260 &3)&
&3)& 3636 &/80 &38&

AGING Aging operation setup
INTERVAL Intermittent setup
&/80 &38& 038& 03)6
MISFEED DISABLE JAM detection enable/disable setup
03*6
FUSING DISABLE Fusing operation enable/disable setup
WARMUP DISABLE Warm-up skip setup
DV CHECK DISABLE DV unit detection enable/disable setup
SHADING DISABLE Shading disable setup
(;(&87(
CCD GAIN FREE No setting of the CCD gain adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6-2 $*,1*7(676(77,1*

$*,1* ,17(59$/
0,6)(('',6$%/( )86,1*',6$%/(
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of each fan :$5083',6$%/( '9&+(&.',6$%/(
6+$',1*',6$%/( &&'*$,1)5((
and its control circuit.
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
key.
(;(&87(
The selected load performs the operation.

Press [ALL] key to select all the fans collectively.
7-6 7-12
Purpose Setting Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating intermittent aging Function (Purpose) The document reading number of sheets
cycle. setting (for aging operation)
Section Section Automatic document feeder
1) Enter the intermittent aging operation cycle (unit: sec) with 10- 1) Set document reading quantity with 10-key.
key. (Setting range: 0 - 255)
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [OK] key. The set value is saved.
The time entered in procedure 1) is set. The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
* The interval time that can be set is 1 to 900 (sec). after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.
The aging operation condition set by this mode is maintained here-
after unless the power is turned off or the setting is changed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25,*,1$/66(77,1*
$ 25,*,1$/6
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( $
,17(59$/$*,1*&<&/(7,0(6(783

$ &<&/(7,0(6(&
$

2.
2.
8
7-8
Purpose Information display/print 8-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the warm-up time.
Purpose Adjustment
Section Fusing
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operations of
Operation/Procedure the developing voltage in each print mode
Press [EXECUTE] key. and the control circuit.
Counting of the warm-up time is started and the time required for Section Toner supply, developing
warm-up is displayed Operation/Procedure
* Interruption of counting by pressing [EXECUTE] key is inhibited. 1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
:$50837,0(',63/$<6(77,1*
6(&21'6
saved.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during outputting, the opera-
tion is terminated.
Setting Default
range value
A DVB_K K developing bias set value 0-700 496

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87( '96(77,1*$1'287387
$ '9%B.
$

0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
8-2 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A GB_K K charging/grid bias set value 0 - 850 650
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section Photo-conductor 0+9*5,'6(77,1*$1'287387

$ *%B.
Operation/Procedure $
1) Enter the setting value with 10-key.

The entered voltage is outputted for 30 sec and the set value is
saved.
tion is terminated.
0,''/( /2: (;(&87( 2.
8-6
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of
the transport voltage and the control circuit.
Section Transfer
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the
set value is output for 30 sec.
tion is terminated.

range 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
A TC PLAIN BW SPX Transfer current Black/White Standard Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
B TC PLAIN BW DPX paper modeBack surface 0 - 255 113 129
C TC HEAVY BW SPX Heavy paper Front surface 0 - 255 113 129
D TC HEAVY BW DPX mode Back surface 0 - 255 113 129
E TC OHP BW OHP mode 0 - 255 113 129
F TC ENVELOPE BW Envelope mode 0 - 255 113 129
G TC CLEANING Transfer cleaning Cleaning in the normal operation mode 0 - 255 161 161
H TC CLEANING PROCON bias voltage Cleaning in the process control mode 0 - 255 161 161
I TC ADSORPTION Transfer current between paper 0 - 255 113 129

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+96(77,1*$1'287387
$ 7&3/$,1%:63;
$ % 7&3/$,1%:'3;
& 7&+($9<%:63;

' 7&+($9<%:'3;
( 7&2+3%:
) 7&(19(/23(%:
* 7&&/($1,1*
+ 7&&/($1,1*352&21
, 7&$'62537,21
(;(&87( 2.
8-17 9-3
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check and adjust the operation of Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the load in
the separation bias voltage and the control the paper reverse section (duplex section)
circuit. and its control circuit.
Section Section Duplex
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] key. 1) Select the item to be operation checked with the touch panel
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. key.
Enter the default value specified on the following list. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. The selected load performs the operation.
The set value is saved and the voltage corresponding to the When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
set value is output for 30 sec. tion is terminated.
ADUM_L ADU motor lower
tion is terminated.
ADUM_U ADU motor upper
Setting Default ADUGS ADU gate solenoid
range value
A PLV (FACE) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170
(Front surface) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
B PLV (BACK) Separation bias output 0 - 255 170 $'8/2$'&+(&.

$'80B/ $'80B8 $'8*6
(Back surface)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7+9$&6(77,1*$1'287387
$ 3/9)$&(
$ % 3/9%$&.

(;(&87(
10
(;(&87( 2.
10-1
9 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the toner
supply mechanism (toner clutch) and the
9-2 related circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Toner supply, developing
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the sensors Operation/Procedure
and detectors in the switchback section 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
(duplex section) and the control circuit. The selected load operation is performed for 10 sec.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during operation, the opera-
Operation/Procedure tion is terminated.
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- NOTE: This simulation must be executed without installing the
played. toner cartridges.
The code names of the sensors and the detectors which are active If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridges
are highlighted. installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
unit, resulting in over toner.
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection
APPD1 ADU transport detection 1
If this simulation is erroneously executed with the toner car-
APPD2 ADU transport detection 2
tridge installed, the over toner state may be canceled by
making several background copies.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'86(1625&+(&. 721(5&/87&+$&7,9$7,21
'6:B$'8 $33' $33'
7'6& 710B& 710B0 710B<

(;(&87(

13 6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
/&&7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
13--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key to execute cancellation of the trouble.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
16
16--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U2" trouble.
Section
$5(<28685("
Operation/Procedure
<(6 12 (;(&87(

14 6,08/$7,2112
7(67
87528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
&/26(
14--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "H3, H4, H5"
trouble.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(&$1&(//$7,2127+(5
17
17--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "PF" trouble.
Operation/Procedure
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

15
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3)7528%/(&$1&(//$7,21
15--
Purpose Cancel
Function (Purpose) Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" trou-
ble.
Section LCC
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Display
21 Target
Display Content
Default range/
counter value No. of
digits
21-1 Document DOC FIL (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Purpose Setting filing document filing
print counter
Function (Purpose) Used to set the maintenance cycle.
Other OTHER (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
Section other counter
Operation/Procedure Maintenance MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 Max. 8
counter ALL counter (Total)
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch
Fuser unit FUSER WEB Fuser web 0 0-
panel.
SEND cleaning send 65535
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. counter
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) FUSER WEB Fuser web print 0 Max. 8
UNIT counter
Default FUSER WEB Use day of fuser 0 0 - 740
Item/Display Content Setting range
value DAY web unit
A MAINTENANCE Maintenance 0 : Default 150K*1/ Drum life DRUM LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
COUNTER counter 1 - 300: 1K - 300K 200K*2 meter number of drum (%) (1%
(TOTAL) (Total) 999 : Free rotations (K) unit)
Developer DEVE LIFE (K) Accumulated 0 0 - 100
*1: 28 CPM model *2: 36/45/50 CPM model life meter number of (%) (1%
developer unit)
Default value rotations (K)
Item 28 CPM model 36/45/50 CPM model
Group A Group B Group A Group B

A 100 150 150 200 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&2817(5',63/$<
727$/287%:
Group Destination 727$/%:
Group A Japan 727$/&2/
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch AB_B Europe &23<%:
35,17%:
U.K. AUS. AB_A China '2&),/%:
27+(5%:
0$,17(1$1&($//

)86(5:(%6(1'
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(5:(%81,7
0$,17(1$1&(&<&/(6(783
)86(5:(%'$<
$ 0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5727$/
$ '580/,)(.
%
'(9(/,)(.

22-2
Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of total mis-
feed and the number of troubles.
2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam, trouble counter value is displayed.
22 Item/Display Content
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPFJAM counter
22-1
TROUBLE Trouble counter
Function (Purpose) Used to display the print count value of
each section and the operation mode. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5',63/$<
Section 0$&+,1(-$0
Operation/Procedure
563)'63)-$0
7528%/(
Display
Target Default range/
Display Content
counter value No. of
digits
Total output TOTAL OUT Total output 0 Max. 8
quantity (BW) quantity of black
and white
Total use TOTAL (BW) Total use 0 Max. 8
quantity quantity of black
and white
Copy COPY (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
copy counter
Print PRINT (BW) Black and white 0 Max. 8
print counter
FINISHER Finisher
Purpose Information display PUNCH Punch unit
Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position and NIC NIC
the number of mis-feed at the position. POWER-CON Power controller
Section E-MANUAL Operation manual (HDD storage)
WATER MARK Watermark (HDD storage)
Operation/Procedure
ESCP ESCP font ROM
The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one PDL PDL font ROM
up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.) ACRE (MAIN) ACRE (Main section) (N model only)
ACRE (DATA) ACRE (Data section) (N model only)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$<
&/26(
[N model]
33'B1&3)'B60)775$<
33'B1&3)'B633'B1'3)'B1

/&&33'B35,'3)'B1/&& 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
32'B633'B35,75$<)3''B6 61
)'230)7 ,&80$,1 1,&
,&8%227 32:(5&21
/$1*8$*( (0$18$/
*5$3+,& :$7(50$5.
3&8 (6&3
6&8 3'/
63) $&5(0$,1
)$;0$,1121( $&5('$7$
)$;0$,1121(

'(6.121(
/&&
),1,6+(5
22-4 381&+

[U model]
Function (Purpose) Used to display the trouble (self diag) his-
tory.
Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
61
Operation/Procedure ,&80$,1 6&8
The trouble history is displayed from the latest one up to 30 items. ,&8%227 )$;0$,1121(
(The old ones are deleted sequentially.) /$1*8$*( )$;0$,1121(
*5$3+,& '(6.121(
3&8

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(&2'('$7$',63/$<
())/
22-6
)/))
)/))
))+(
Purpose Information print
8)/(
Function (Purpose) Used to print information on various set-

tings, adjustments, counters, controls, and
versions.
Section
Operation/Procedure

* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
22-5 (Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1) Select the print list mode with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the ROM version of each Print list
Item/Display Print content
unit (section). mode
Section A DATA PATTERN 1 Firmware version, counter data, etc.
2
Operation/Procedure
3 Data related to the process control
The ROM version of the installed unit in each section is displayed.
When there is any trouble in the software, use this simulation to 2) Press [EXECUTE] key to start printing the list selected in step
check the ROM version, and upgrade the version if necessary. 1).

6,08/$7,2112
S/N Serial No. (The codes for November and December 7(67
'$7$35,1702'(
&/26(
are "X" and "Y" respectively.) $ '$7$3$77(51

$
ICU (MAIN) ICU (Main section)

ICU (BOOT) ICU (Boot section)
LANGUAGE Language support data version
GRAPHIC Graphic data for LCD
PCU PCU
SCU SCU
SPF DSPF/RSPF
FAX1 (MAIN) FAX 1-Line (Main section)
DESK Desk unit (;(&87( 2.
LCC Side LCC
22-8

6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Information display 7(67 &/26(
3$3(5)(('&2817(5',63/$<
75$<
Function (Purpose) Used to display the number of operations 75$<
(the counter value) of the finisher, the 75$<
DSPF/RSPF, and scanning (reading). 75$<

0)7727$/
Section 0)7+($9<
Operation/Procedure 0)72+3
0)7(19
The counter values of the finisher, the DSPF, and the scanner /&&
related counters are displayed. $'8
SPF Document feed quantity

SCAN Number of times of scan
STAPLER Staple counter
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter 22-10
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter Purpose Information display
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
Function (Purpose) Used to display the system configuration
COVER Cover open/close counter
(options and internal hardware).
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section Section
(* hour * minutes) Operation/Procedure
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section The system configuration is displayed.
(* hour * minutes) (DSPF-installed model only)
(The model names of the installed devices and options are dis-
[DSPF-installed model] played.)
[N model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Device Model name Content
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$<
63)
MACHINE MX-M283N Main unit
6&$1 MX-M363N
67$3/(5 MX-M453N
381&+(5
MX-M503N
67$03
6$''/(67$3/(5
SPF STANDARD Auto document feeder
6$''/(9)2/' STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp
&29(5
DESK MX-DEX8 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
+3B21
2&/$037,0(
MX-DEX9 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer
'63)/$037,0( LCC MX-LCX1 A4 Large capacity tray (side LCC)
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module

MX-PNX1B
MX-PNX1C
[RSPF-installed model] MX-PNX1D
MX-PNX5A
MX-PNX5B
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( MX-PNX5C
25*67$3/(&2817(5',63/$< MX-PNX5D
63) 6$''/(67$3/(5 MX-PNX6A
6&$1 6$''/(9)2/' MX-PNX6B
67$3/(5 &29(5 MX-PNX6C
381&+(5 +3B21 MX-PNX6D

67$03 2&/$037,0( FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher
MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
MX-FN11 Finisher (4K)
22-9 FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit
NETWORK MX-NSX1/ Network scanner expansion kit
SCANNER STANDARD
Function (Purpose) Used to display the print quantity of each PRINTER MX-PB11/ Printer expansion kit with hard
paper feed section. STANDARD drive
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
Operation/Procedure
SECURITY MX-FR14U Data security kit
The counter values related to paper feed are displayed. (commercial version)
(For the machine with HDD
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter installed)
TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter MX-FR15U Data security kit
TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter (Authentication version)
TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter (For the machine without HDD
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) installed)
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) MX-FR14 Data security kit
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) (Authentication version)
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) (For the machine with HDD
installed)
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section)
SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
Device Model name Content Device Model name Content
SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity AIM MX-AMX1 Application integration module
HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity SDRAM (SYS) *****MB SDRAM capacity
NIC STANDARD NIC SDRAM (ICU) *****MB SDRAM capacity
BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font HDD *****MB Hard disk capacity
INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit NIC STANDARD NIC
ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication BARCODE AR-PF1 Bar code font
("STANDARD" for module INTERNET-FAX MX-FWX1 Internet Fax expansion kit
North America) ACM (*) MX-AMX2 Application communication
EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module ("STANDARD" for module
ACRE MX-EBX3 Enhanced compression kit North America)
(ACRE) EAM (*) MX-AMX3 External account module
ACRE NONE Enhanced compression kit
(*): Displayed in the OSA model only.
(ACRE)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67
0$&+,1(6<67(0
&/26(

0$&+,1( 0;01 36 0;3.;
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63) 67$1'$5' ;36 0;38; 0$&+,1(6<67(0
67$03 $568 6(&85,7< 0;)58 0$&+,1(0;08 381&+(50;31;$
'(6. 0;'(; $,0 0;$0; 63)67$1'$5' ),1,6+(50;)1;
/&& 0;/&; 6'5$06<6 0%
67$03$568 )$;0;);;
381&+(5 0;31;$ 6'5$0,&8 0%
'(6.0;'(; )$;0;)/;
),1,6+(5 0;)1; +'' 0%
)$; 0;);; 1,& 67$1'$5' /&&0;/&; )$;0(025<$500
)$; 121( %$5&2'( $53)
)$;0(025< $500 )217 121(
+$1'6(7 121( ,17(51(7)$; 0;):;
1(7:25.6&$11(5 0;16;
35,17(5 0;3%
$&0 0;$0;
22-11
($0 0;$0;
[U model] Function (Purpose) Used to display the use frequency of send/
receive of FAX.
Device Model name Content
(Only when FAX is installed.)
MACHINE MX-M363U Main unit
MX-M453U Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
MX-M503U Operation/Procedure
SPF STANDARD Reversing single pass feeder The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
STAMP AR-SU1 Finish stamp are displayed.
DESK MX-DEX8 Stand/1x500 sheet paper drawer
MX-DEX9 Stand/2x500 sheet paper drawer FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter (for line 1)
LCC MX-LCX1 A4 Large capacity tray (side LCC) FAX SEND FAX send counter
PUNCHER MX-PNX1A Punch module FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
MX-PNX1B SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
MX-PNX1C SEND TIME FAX send time
MX-PNX1D RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
MX-PNX5A ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications
MX-PNX5B
MX-PNX5C

MX-PNX5D 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
MX-PNX6A )$;&2817(5',63/$<
)$;287387
MX-PNX6B )$;6(1'
MX-PNX6C )$;5(&(,9('
MX-PNX6D 6(1',0$*(6
6(1'7,0(
FINISHER MX-FNX9 Inner finisher 5(&(,9('7,0(
MX-FN10 Saddle stitch finisher (1K) $&56(1'
MX-FN11 Finisher (4K)

FAX1 MX-FXX2 Facsimile expansion kit
NETWORK MX-NSX1 Network scanner expansion kit
SCANNER
PRINTER MX-PB10 Printer expansion kit
MX-PB11 Printer expansion kit with hard

drive
PS MX-PKX1 PS expansion kit 22-12
XPS MX-PUX1 XPS expansion kit
SECURITY MX-FR14U Data security kit
(commercial version) Function (Purpose) Used to display the mis-feed position of the
(For the machine with HDD DSPF/RSPF and the number of mis-feed at
installed) the position.
MX-FR15U Data security kit
(Authentication version)
(For the machine without HDD Operation/Procedure
installed) The paper jam and mis-feed history is displayed from the latest one
MX-FR14 Data security kit up to 50 items. (The old ones are deleted sequentially.)
(commercial version)
* For the list of the jam codes, Refer to "Paper JAM code list" in
(For the machine with HDD
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE.
installed)
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
RECEIVE
63)-$0+,6725<'$7$',63/$< INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send

MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send

USB CNT Number of times of USB storage

TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)

SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)

(N model only)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5',63/$<
1(76&125*B%:
1(76&125*B&/
22-13 ,17(51(7)$;287387
Purpose Information display ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387

,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
Function (Purpose) Used to display the use quantity of the pro- ,17(51(7)$;6(1'
cess section (OPC drum, DV unit, toner 0$,/&2817(5

)73&2817(5
cartridge). 60%6(1'
Section Process
86%&17
75,$/02'(B% &
Operation/Procedure 6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) 22-90

DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm)
(K)
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) Function (Purpose) Used to output the various set data lists.
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) K Section
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K)
Operation/Procedure
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance
(cm) (K) 1) Change the display with [] [] key.
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 2) Select the print target with the keys on the touch panel.
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) K 3) Press [EXECUTE] key to start self print of the list.
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K)
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) All setting list ALL CUSTOM SETTING LIST
Printer test page PCL SYMBOL SET LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT LIST

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( PCL EXTENDED FONT LIST
352&(66&$575,'*(',63/$< PS FONT LIST
'580&75*.
'5805$1*(.
PS KANJI FONT LIST
'5807851. PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
'580'$<.
NIC PAGE
'(9(&75*.
Address registration INDIVIDUAL LIST
'(9(5$1*(.
'(9(7851.
list (*) GROUP LIST
'(9('$<. PROGRAM LIST
721(502725.
MEMORY BOX LIST
721(57851.
ALL SENDING ADDRESS LIST
Document filing list DOCUMENT FILING FOLDER LIST

System setting list ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (IMAGE SEND)
22-19 ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (DOC FILING)
Purpose Information display ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS LIST (COMMON)
Function (Purpose) Used to display various counter values
ALL ADMINISTRATOR SETTINGS LIST
related to scan - image send.
Receive YES/NO ANTI JUNK FAX NUMBER LIST
Section number table
Operation/Procedure Receive rejection/ ANTI JUNK MAIL/DOMAIN NAME LIST
allow address
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner domain table
Change the display with [] [] key. To network INBOUND ROUTING LIST
Transfer table list
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity To administrator DOCUMENT ADMIN LIST
counter (B/W scan job) Transfer list
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity Web setting list WEB SETTING LIST
counter (Color scan job) (N model only) Meta data set list METADATA SET LIST
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX output
OUTPUT * When the data list print of system setting is inhibition in DSK
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page model, this setting is invalid.
OUTPUT

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
/,6735,17 '$7$35,1702'(3$3(5)(('
$//&867206(77,1*/,67 3&/6<0%2/6(7/,67 3$3(5)(('7,0(/,67
3&/,17(51$/)217/,67 3&/(;7(1'(')217/,67
36)217/,67 36.$1-,)217/,67
36(;7(1'(')217/,67 1,&3$*(
,1',9,'8$//,67 *5283/,67
352*5$0/,67 0(025<%2;/,67
$//6(1',1*$''5(66/,67 '2&80(17),/,1*)2/'(5/,67
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67&23< $'0,16(77,1*6/,6735,17
$'0,16(77,1*6/,67,0$*(6(1' $'0,16(77,1*6/,67'2&),/,1*
$'0,16(77,1*6/,676(&85,7< $'0,16(77,1*6/,67&20021
$//$'0,1,675$7256(77,1*6/,67 $17,-81.)$;180%(5/,67
$17,-81.0$,/'20$,11$0(/,67 ,1%281'5287,1*/,67
(;(&87( (;(&87(
23 24
23-2 24-1
Purpose Information print Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to output the trouble history list of Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trou-
paper jam and mis-feed. ble counter.
Section Section
Press [EXECUTE] key to execute print. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
The trouble history of paper jams and mis-feed is printed. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
3) Press [YES] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( The target counter is cleared.
-$07528%/('$7$35,1702'(
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(-$07528%/(35,17
MACHINE Machine JAM counter
SPF DSPF/RSPF JAM counter
TROUBLE Trouble counter

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
-$07528%/(&2817(5'$7$&/($5
0$&+,1( 63) 7528%/(
(;(&87(
23-80
Function (Purpose) Used to output the operation data of paper
feed and paper transport in the paper feed/
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
transport section.

Operation/Procedure 24-2
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the timing list of paper feed and Purpose Data clear/Reset
paper transport is outputted.
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the num-
Used to print the operations timing list of the sensors and detectors ber of prints) of each paper feed section.
in the paper feed and transport section.
The timing list of paper feed and paper transport operations of the
Operation/Procedure
latest job (copy or print) on the final paper is printed.
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Since the paper feed and paper transport routes differ depending
on the used paper feed tray and the print operation mode, the sen- 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
sor and the detectors and the operation timing also differ. 3) Press [YES] key.
The target counter is cleared.
SECTION Operation content (Trigger name - Detection
operation or load operation name) TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter
STANDARD Standard value (ms) TRAY2 Tray 2 paper feed counter
CURRENT (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the latest job on the TRAY3 Tray 3 paper feed counter
final paper TRAY4 Tray 4 paper feed counter
PREVIOUS (*1) Operation timing (ms) of the second latest job MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total)
on the final paper
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper)
MAXIMUM (*1) Max. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP)
MINIMUM (*1) Min. operation timing (ms) of all the jobs
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope)
*1: The value without unit on the left side of each item on the list LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC)
has no relation to the operation timing. It is not used in the market. ADU ADU paper feed counter

24-4
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
3$3(5)(('&2817(5&/($5
&/26(
Purpose Data clear/Reset
75$< 75$< 75$< 75$<
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the maintenance counter, the
0)7727$/ 0)7+($9< 0)72+3 0)7(19 printer counters of the transfer unit and the
/&& $'8 fusing unit.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [YES] key.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( The target counter is cleared.
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total)

24-3 FUSER WEB SEND Fuser web send counter
FUSER WEB Fuser web print counter
Purpose Data clear/Reset FUSER WEB DAY Fuser web unit use day
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the finisher, DSPF/RSPF, and
the scan (reading) unit counter.

Section 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$,17(1$1&(&2817(5&/($5
Operation/Procedure 0$,17(1$1&($// )86(5:(%6(1' )86(5:(% )86(5:(%'$<
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. )86(581,7/ ( )86(5'$<8 )86(5'$</ (
3) Press [YES] key.

SPF DSPF/RSPF document feed counter

SCAN Scan counter
STAPLER Staple counter
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
PUNCHER Puncher counter
STAMP Stamp counter

SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter
24-5
COVER Cover open/close counter
HP_ON HP detection count Purpose Data clear/Reset
OC LAMP TIME OC section lamp total lighting time Function (Purpose) Used to clear the developer counter.
DSPF LAMP TIME DSPF section lamp total lighting time Section Toner supply, developing
(DSPF-installed model only)
Operation/Procedure
[DSPF-installed model] 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 3) Press [YES] key.
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5
NOTE: When SIM25-2 is executed, this counter is also cleared
automatically.
+3B21 2&/$037,0( '63)/$037,0(
Developer cartridge print counter (K)

Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used developer (Day) K

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( '(9(/23(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5
. & 0 <

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
25*287387&2817(5'$7$&/($5
63) 6&$1 67$3/(5 381&+(5
67$03 6$''/(67$3/(5 6$''/(9)2/' &29(5

+3B21 2&/$037,0(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-6 24-9
Purpose Data clear/Reset Purpose Data clear/Reset
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the copy counter. Function (Purpose) Used clear the printer mode print counter
Section and the self print mode print counter.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. Operation/Procedure
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
3) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The target counter is cleared. 3) Press [YES] key.
COPY BW Copy counter (B/W)
PRINT BW Print counter (B/W)

OTHER BW Other counter (B/W)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23<&2817(5'$7$&/($5
&23<%: &23<&2/ 6,1*/(&2/25 &2/25
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,1727+(5&2817(5&/($5
35,17%: 27+(5%:
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-7
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the OPC drum counter. 24-10
Section Photoconductor Purpose Data clear/Reset

Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to clear the FAX counter.
(Only when FAX is installed)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section FAX unit (TEL/LIU, FAX control PWB)
3) Press [YES] key. Operation/Procedure
The target counter is cleared. 1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key.
Drum cartridge print counter (K) 3) Press [YES] key.
Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K)
Number of day that used drum (Day) K
FAX OUTPUT FAX Print quantity counter (for line 1)

FAX SEND FAX send counter
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter
'580&75*&2817(5&/($5
. & 0 < SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter (for line 1)
SEND TIME FAX send time
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)$;&2817(5'$7$&/($5
)$;287387 )$;6(1' )$;5(&(,9(' 6(1',0$*(6
6(1'7,0( 5(&(,9('7,0( $&56(1'

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
24-15 24-31
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the counters related to the Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the service mode (Web
scan mode and the image send. page) password.
Section Section
1) Select the item to be cleared with the touch panel key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
3) Press [YES] key. The service mode password is initialized.
The target counter is cleared. If the password of Web page is forgotten, execute this simulation to
set the password to "service" (default).
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity
counter (B/W scan job)

NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
counter (COLOR scan job) (N model only) 6(59,&(3$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output

INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX sending page
SEND OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX Number of internet FAX receive
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send
SMB SEND Number of SMB send
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job)
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W)
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR)
(N model only) 25
25-1
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1(7:25.6&$11(5&2817(5'$7$&/($5 Purpose Operation test/check
1(76&125*B%: 1(76&125*B&/
,17(51(7)$;287387 ,17(51(7)$;6(1'287387 Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the devel-
,17(51(7)$;5(&(,9(
0$,/&2817(5
,17(51(7)$;6(1'
)73&2817(5
oping section, and to display the toner den-
60%6(1' 86%&17 sity detection level.
75,$/02'(B% & 6&$172+''B%:
6&$172+''B&/ Section Toner supply, developing
Operation/Procedure
The developing motor and the OPC drum motor rotate for 3
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( minutes and the output level of the toner density sensor is dis-
played.
24-30 TCD_K Toner density detection level K

Purpose Data clear/Reset TCV_K Toner density sensor output voltage level K
Function (Purpose) Used to initialize the administrator pass- NOTE: The toner cartridge must be removed before executing this
word. simulation.
Section If this simulation is executed with the toner cartridge
Operation/Procedure installed, toner will be forcibly supplied to the developing
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. unit, resulting in over toner and a trouble.
2) Press [YES] key.
The administrator password is initialized. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(56(1625287387021,725
If the administrator password of system setting and Web page is 7&'B.
forgotten, execute this simulation to set the password to "admin" 7&9B.
(default).

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$'0,13$66:25',1,7,$/,=(
/2: 0,''/( (;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
25-2
26
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to make the initial setting of toner
26-1
density when replacing developer. (Auto-
matic adjustment) Purpose Setting
Section Toner supply, developing Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper exit operation from
the right side.
Operation/Procedure
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. Section Paper exit section
The developing motor rotates for 3 minutes, and the toner density Operation/Procedure
sensor makes sampling of the toner density. The detected level is 1) Enter the set value with 10-key.
displayed. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
After stopping the developing motor, the average value of the toner This setting is required to use the paper exit tray unit (MX-TRX1).
density sampling results is set as the reference toner density con-
trol level. Item/Display Content
A 0 YES Paper exit tray: YES
NOTE: When the above operation is interrupted on the way, the
1 NO Paper exit tray: NO
reference toner concentration level is not set. Also when
error code of EE-EC, EE-EL or EE-EU is displayed, the ref-
erence toner density level is not set normally.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Do not execute this simulation unless new Developer material has 5,*+775$<6(783
been installed. If it is executed in other cases, under toner or over- $

$ <(612

tone may occur, causing a trouble.
Adjustment result data display

AT DEVE ADJ _K Toner density adjustment value
AT DEVE VO _K Toner density sensor control voltage level
Data display during execution

Item/Display Content 2.
TCD_K Toner density sensor detection level K

TCV_K Toner density sensor control voltage level K
26-2
Display in case of an error
Purpose Setting
Error display Content Details of content
EE-EL EL abnormality Sensor output level less than 67, or Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper type and the weight
sensor control voltage level over 197 type.
EE-EU EU abnormality Sensor output level over 154, or sensor Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
control voltage level less than 49
Operation/Procedure
EE-EC EC abnormality The sampling level in the automatic
toner density adjustment is outside of Select a paper size to be changed with the touch panel.
1005.
LCC 0 8.5 x 11
1 A4

2 B5
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8720$7,&'(9(/23(5$'-8670(17 G/LBS SET 0 GRAM
$7'(9($'-B.
1 LBS
$7'(9(92B.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,=(6(783
/&& h $ %
*/%66(7 *5$0 /%6
. & 0 < (;(&87(

Default
value
Purpose Setting PRINTER MODE1 PRINTER CONTROL MODE
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the auditor. CONTROL MODE1 (All the items of 1
(Japan only) OUTSIDE AUDITOR can be
selected.)
Section Auditor MODE2 PRINTER CONTROL
Operation/Procedure MODE2 (The item of
Select an item to be set with the touch panel. OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
be the value of "P VENDOR
Default 1" and the other buttons are
Item/Display Content gray out.)
value
BUILT-IN P10 Built-in auditor mode P10 MODE3 PRINTER CONTROL
AUDITOR (standard mode) operation. MODE3 (The item of
OUTSIDE AUDITOR must
EC1 EC1 mode operation
be the value of "P OTHER"
OUTSIDE NONE No external connection NONE
and the other buttons are
AUDITOR vendor is used.
gray out.)
P VENDOR1 Coin vendor mode
(Only the copy mode can be (*1) Displayed only when EQUITRAC.
controlled.)
(*2) Details of the vendor mode
P VENDOR2 Vendor mode communicating
with the parallel I/F (for Completion of Insufficient Completion of
DocuLyzer) (Japan only) the specified money during the specified
VENDOR-EX Vendor I/F for EQUITRAC VENDER quantity. copy job quantity.
(*1) MODE (Money No money (No money
VENDOR-EX VENDOR-EX + Multi job remaining) remaining remaining)
(MULTI) (*1) cueing Enable mode Condition 1 Condition 2 Condition 3
P OTHER NOT USED MODE1 Operation 1 Operation 2 Operation 1
S_VENDOR Serial vendor mode MODE2 Operation 1 Operation 1 Operation 1
DOC ADJ ON Support for the auditor in OFF MODE3 Operation 1 Operation 3 Operation 3
document filing print
OFF No support for the auditor in Operation 1:
document filing print Standby during setting time of auto clear. Default is 60 seconds,
PF ADJ ON Continuous printing is OFF which can be changed in the system setting.
performed in the duplex print
Operation 2:
mode.
Auto clear is not made.
If the remaining money
expires during continuous Operation 3:
printing, the sheets in the The display is shifted to the initial screen.
machine are discharged
without being printed on the

back surfaces. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
$8',7256(783
OFF Continuous printing is not %8,/7,1$8',725 3 (&
performed in the duplex print 2876,'($8',725 121( 39(1'25 39(1'25
mode. (The remaining 327+(5 9(1'25(; 9(1'25(;08/7,
amount is checked for 6B9(1'25
printing every surface in all '2&$'- 21 2))

3)$'-
the printing process.) 9(1'2502'(
21 2))
02'( 02'( 02'(
If the remaining money &2817837,0,1* )86(5B,1 )86(5B287 (;,7B287
expires during printing, the ,06&21752/ 21 2))
sheet is discharged without 35,17(5&21752/ 02'( 02'( 02'(
printing on the back surface.

VENDOR MODE1 Vendor mode 1 MODE

MODE (*2) MODE2 Vendor mode 2 3
MODE3 Vendor mode 3
COUNTUP FUSER_IN When the paper lead edge EXIT_
TIMING passes the fusing rear OUT 26-5
sensor. Purpose Setting
FUSER_OUT When the paper rear edge
passes the fusing rear Function (Purpose) Used to set the count mode in A3 (11" x
sensor. 17") print.
EXIT_OUT When the paper rear edge Section
passes the paper exit sensor
Operation/Procedure
in the main unit, the right tray,
and the after process unit. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
IMS ON There is some restriction in OFF 2) Enter the setting value with 10-key
CONTROL the image send mode. 1 = Count up by 1, 2 = Count up by 2
OFF There is no restriction in the 3) Press [OK] key.
image send mode.
The set value in step 2) is saved.
Item/Display Content Default value

A TOTAL (B/W) Total counter (B/W) 2
B MAINTE (B/W) Maintenance counter (B/W) 2
C DEV (B/W) Developer counter (B/W)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67
$h&281783 1(7:25.6&$11(575,$/02'(6(783
$ 727$/%: $ 75,$/02'(<(612

$ $
% 0$,17(%:
& '(9%:
2.
2.
26-18
26-6 Purpose Setting
Purpose Setting Function (Purpose) Used to set Disable/Enable of the toner
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the desti- save mode operation.
nation. (For the Japan and the UK versions.)
Section Section
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The selected set content is saved. 3) Press [OK] key.
U.S.A. United States of America
CANADA Canada Default
INCH Inch series, other destinations Item Display Content
value
JAPAN Japan A COPY 0 Copy toner save mode is inhibited.
AB_B AB series (B5 detection), other destinations 0
1 Copy toner save mode is allowed
EUROPE Europe B PRINTER 0 Printer toner save mode is inhibited.
0
U.K. United Kingdom 1 Printer toner save mode is allowed.
AUS. Australia
AB_A AB series (A5 detection), other destinations

CHINA China 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
721(56$9(02'(6(783
$ &23<<(612

$ % 35,17(5<(612
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
'(67,1$7,216(783
86$ &$1$'$ ,1&+ -$3$1
$%B% (8523( 8. $86
$%B$ &+,1$
2.
26-30
(;(&87(

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation mode corre-
26-10 sponding to the CE mark (Europe safety
standards).
Purpose Setting
Section
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trial mode of the network
Operation/Procedure
scanner.
Section
Operation/Procedure 0 Control allowed
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. 1 Control inhibited
2) Press [OK] key. 2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. The set value in step 1) is saved.
TRIAL MODE 0 Trial mode setting * Even in Enable state, the control may not be executed due
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 Trial mode cancel (Default) to the power frequency, etc.
U.S.A 1 (CE not supported) EUROPE 0 (CE supported)

CANADA 1 (CE not supported) U.K. 0 (CE supported)
INCH 1 (CE not supported) AUS. 0 (CE supported)
JAPAN 1 (CE not supported) AB_A 0 (CE supported)
AB_B 1 (CE not supported) CHINA 0 (CE supported)

6,08/$7,2112 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67
&(0$5.&21752/6(77,1* (1*,1(/,)(29(56(77,1*
$ <(612 $ 0$,17(1$1&(/,)(29(5&217,18(6723
$ $ % )86(5:(%(1'&217,18(6723

2. 2.
26-35 26-41
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the trouble history display Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of the magnifi-
mode. cation ratio automatic select function (AMS)
Section in the center binding mode.
Operation/Procedure Section
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. Operation/Procedure
0 Only once display.
1 Any time display. 0 AMS Disable
1 AMS Enable
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. 2) Press [OK] key.

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
<Default value of each destination>
7(67
7528%/(0(025<02'(6(783
$ 21&($1<
U.S.A 0 (Disable) EUROPE 1 (Enable)
$ CANADA 0 (Disable) U.K. 1 (Enable)
INCH 0 (Disable) AUS. 0 (Disable)
JAPAN 0 (Disable) AB_A 0 (Disable)
AB_B 0 (Disable) CHINA 0 (Disable)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$03+/(702'($066(77,1*
$ <(612
$
2.

26-38
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set "Print continue" or "Print stop"
when the maintenance timing is reached or
the consumable part life is over. 2.
Section
Operation/Procedure
26-49
Purpose Setting
2) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 1) is saved. Function (Purpose) Used to set the print speed of postcards
mode.
Default Section
value
Operation/Procedure
A MAINTENANCE 0 Print continue 0
LIFE OVER 1 Print stop Select the copy speed mode with the touch panel. (Default: LOW)
B FUSER WEB END 0 Continue/Stop setting of print 0 When the setting is changed, the paper feed interval in print or
(0: CONTINUE when the fusing web is end copy in the postcard mode is changed and the job speed is
1: STOP) (Print Continue) changed accordingly.
1 Continue/Stop setting of print LOW: The paper feed interval is long. (Normal mode)
when the fusing web is end
(Print Stop) HIGH: The paper feed interval is short. (when a paper jam occurs,
the number of sheets of jam paper is greater than that in the LOW
mode.)
(*2)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Target Target paper setting
&23<63(('02'(6(783 paper 0 1
3267&$5' /2: +,*+
1K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation
saddle envelope 30 sheets of a same kind are is stopped
stitch discharged continuously. When, when the
finisher however, different kinds of paper exit tray
sheets are mixed and full, 500
discharged and less than 30 sheets, or
sheets of a kind are 94mm height
continuously discharged, the of paper exit is
operation is performed similarly detected.
to that of setting value "1".

Label The operation is stopped when
sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
26-50 however, different kinds of
Purpose Setting sheets are mixed and
discharged and less than 100
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operation specifications sheets of a kind are
and functions. continuously discharged, the
Section operation is performed similarly
Operation/Procedure
Inner Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation
1) Select a target item of setting with [] [] key on the touch finisher envelope 10 sheets of a same kind are is stopped
panel. discharged continuously. When, when the
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. however, different kinds of paper exit tray
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) discharged and less than 10 sheets, or
sheets of a kind are 33.5mm
Default continuously discharged, the height of
value operation is performed similarly paper exit is
A BW REVERSE 0 BW reverse copy Disable Refer to that of setting value "1". detected.
1 BW reverse copy Enable to *1 Label The operation is stopped when
B FINISHER 0 Finisher special paper 0 sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
FUNCTION The number of paper exit is Refer sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
limited. to *2 however, different kinds of
1 Finisher special paper sheets are mixed and
The number of paper exit is discharged and less than 100
not limited. sheets of a kind are
C FEED TRAY 0 Paper feed tray color display 0 continuously discharged, the
COLOR ON during paper feed operation is performed similarly
1 Paper feed tray color display to that of setting value "1".
OFF during paper feed 4K Postcard, The operation is stopped when The operation
finisher envelope 100 sheets of a same kind are is stopped
(*1) Default values for each destination of item A discharged continuously. When, when the
however, different kinds of paper exit tray
Destination Item A
USA 1 discharged and less than 100 sheets, or
CANADA 1 sheets of a kind are 94mm height
INCH 1 continuously discharged, the of paper exit is
JAPAN 1 operation is performed similarly detected.
AB_B 1 to that of setting value "1".
EUROPE 1 Label The operation is stopped when
UK 0 sheet, tab 100 sheets of a same kind are
AUS 1 sheet, OHP discharged continuously. When,
however, different kinds of
AB_A 1
sheets are mixed and
CHINA 1
discharged and less than 100
sheets of a kind are
continuously discharged, the
operation is performed similarly

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)81&7,216(77,1*
$ %:5(9(56(<(6
$ % ),1,6+(5)81&7,21<(6
& )(('75$<&2/25<(6
2.
26-52 26-65
Purpose Setting Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether non-printed paper Function (Purpose) Used to set the limit of the staple process.
(insertion paper, cover paper) is counted up Section
or not.
Operation/Procedure
Section
Use the touch key to set.
Operation/Procedure
[Target paper size]
<LIMIT SHEETS>
0 Count up A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 16K, 16KR
1 No count up <LIMIT SHEETS(L)>
(A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13.5, 8.5 x 13.4, 8.5 x 13, 8K)
2) Press [OK] key.
* When mixed sizes of a same width are loaded, the setting con-
forms to the LIMIT SHEETS(L) setting.
Destination Default
Set Setting Default
U.S.A 0 (Counted) Item Content
value range value
CANADA 0 (Counted)
LIMIT 30 Number of sheets of stapling: 30 or 50 50
INCH 0 (Counted) SHEETS Max. 30
JAPAN 1 (Not counted) 50 Number of sheets of stapling:
AB_B 0 (Counted) Max. 50
EUROPE 0 (Counted) LIMIT ON Inner finisher: ON or ON
U.K. 0 (Counted) COPIES 30 copies for all sizes OFF
AUS. 1 (Not counted) 1K saddle finisher:
AB_A 0 (Counted) 50 copies for all sizes
CHINA 0 (Counted) 4K finisher: A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
100 copies
Other than the above

50 copies
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
$%/$1.3$3(5&281702'(6(783
OFF Number of sets of stapling: Not
$ <(612 Limited
$ LIMIT 25 Number of sheets of stapling: 25 or 30 25

SHEETS Max. 25
(L) 30 Number of sheets of stapling:
Max. 30
SADDLE ON Number of sets loaded in the ON or ON
COPIES saddle staple: Limited (*1) OFF
OFF Number of sets loaded in the
saddle staple: Not Limited
2.
* LIMIT SHEETS: The 4K finisher is fixed to 50 sheets.
* LIMIT SHEETS(L): Valid only for the 1K saddle finisher.
The 4K finisher is fixed to 30 sheets.
26-53 *1: 1-5sheets (20 sets) / 6-10 sheets (15 sets) /
Purpose Setting 10-15 sheets (10 sets)
Function (Purpose) Used to set Inhibit/Allow of the user auto

calibration (gradation, density adjustment) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
in the copy mode. ),1,6+(5$/$5002'(6(78367$3/(/,0,7
/,0,76+((76
Section /,0,7&23,(6 21 2))
Operation/Procedure /,0,76+((76/
6$''/(&23,(6 21 2))
0 Inhibit (Default)
1 Allow
2) Press [OK] key.


6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1$%/,1*2)$8720$7,&*5$<&$/,%5$7,21
$ <(612
$

2.
D: Setting of the allowable quantity of copy/print/FAX after display-
26-69
ing the message when item B is set to "0" (the message is dis-
Purpose Setting played at toner near end). (Range: 0 - 200 sheets)
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions for The number of output print allowed in item D is based on the
toner near end. assumption that the sheets are of A4 size with print ratio of 6%.
Section (The number of outputs allowed differs depending on the paper
size and the print ratio.)
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
Set values of Item D and the number of output print allowed
1: Print Disable after toner near end
3) Press [OK] key.
2: 25 sheets print Enable after toner near end
The set value in step 2 is saved.
Setting Default 4: 100 sheets print Enable after toner near end
range value
A TONER 0 The toner preparation 0-1
PREPARATION message is NOTE: When item B is set to "0" and item D to a desired number,
(0: YES 1: NO) displayed. printing can be made after toner near end. However, insuf-
1 The toner preparation ficient density, thin spots, or improper color balance may be
message is not resulted depending on the using conditions. When item D
displayed. is set to "1" printing is disabled after toner near end. this
B TONER NEAR 0 The toner near end 0-1 case, toner end display is made in the toner near end sta-
END message is tus, and copy/print/FAX outputs are disabled.
(0: YES 1: NO) displayed.
1 The toner near end
message is not 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
displayed. 721(51($5(1'6(77,1*
$ 721(535(3$5$7,21<(612
C TONER END 1 Operation Enable in 1-3 2 $ % 721(51($5(1'<(612
TONER END & 721(5(1'
2 Operation STOP in ' 721(5(1'&2817
TONER END ( 721(5(0$,/$/$57
3 Operation STOP in
TONER END
D TONER END Setting of the number of 1-5 3
COUNT copy/print/FAX outputs
Enable after TONER
NEAR END.
2.
E TONER E-MAIL 0 Condition for Low 0-1 1
ALART status send of E-mail
alert
When the toner 26-73
preparation message
Purpose Setting
is displayed (in near
near toner end) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image loss (shade
1 Condition for Low removal amount) in the poster, the continu-
status send of E-mail ous enlargement copy, the card scan, and
alert the A3 wide copy mode.
When near toner end
Section
<List of Default values and set values for each destination> Operation/Procedure
Set value 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
Destination Toner preparation 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Toner near end message
message 3) Press [OK] key.
U.S.A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss
CANADA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
(shade delete quantity) is increased.
INCH 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed)
JAPAN 0 (Displayed) 1 (Not Displayed) Setting
AB_B 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) Item/Display Content Default value
range
EUROPE 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) A DELETING Rear frame side 0 - 50 0
U.K. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) SHADOW ADJ image loss quantity (Adjustment
AUS. 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) (M) (shade delete amount:
AB_A 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) quantity) adjustment 0.1mm/step)
CHINA 0 (Displayed) 0 (Displayed) B DELETING Lead edge image 0 - 50 0
SHADOW ADJ loss quantity (shade (Adjustment
(Contents of set items) (S) delete quantity) amount:
adjustment 0.1mm/step)
A: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner remaining quantity reaches 25%.
B: Enable/Disable setting of the toner preparation message display
when the toner near end status is reached.
C: Enable/Disable setting of the machine operation when the toner
end status is reached.
For except Japan, performs operation of set value "3" regardless of
the setting value.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67

&/26(
27
'(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-8670(17
$ '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-0
$ % '(/(7,1*6+$'2:$'-6 27-1

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set non-detection of communica-
tion error (U7-00) with RIC. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2.
0 Not detection
1 Detection
26-74
2) Press [OK] key.
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the OSA trial mode.
Section
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure ',6$%/,1*2)87528%/(
$ ',6$%/(<(6
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. $
2) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A OSA TRIAL 0 Used to set the 0-1 1
MODE OSA trial mode.
(0: YES 1: NO) 1 OSA trial mode is
canceled.
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
26$75$,$/02'(6(77,1*
$
$ 26$75,$/02'(<(612
27-2

Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the sender's registration num-
ber and the HOST server telephone num-
ber. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with touch panel.
2.
[USER FAX NO] [SERVA TEL NO]
26-78 3) Press [SET] key.
Purpose Setting The set value in step 2) is saved.
Function (Purpose) Used to set the password of the remote
USER FAX_NO. Sender registration number (Max. 16 digits)
operation panel mode.
SERVA TEL_NO. Host server telephone number (Max. 16 digits)
Section If the connection process is not completed
Operation/Procedure normally when registering the FSS, calling to the
HOST may be continuously made every time when
1) Enter a password with 10-key. (5 - 8 digits) the power is turned ON (from OFF) or rebooted.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW. In this case, enter "********" to inhibit calling to the
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key HOST.
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783,1387
35(6(17
6,08/$7,2112 1(: 6(7
7(67 &/26(
523(3$66:25'6(77,1*
86(5)$;B12 6(59$7(/B12
35(6(17
1(: 6(7
3$86(
27-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the initial call and toner order
auto send. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting
Item/Display Content Default value Remarks
range
A FSS MODE NEB1 Set the FSS MODE Exclusive for send 0-3 0 1
in NE-B mode
NEB2 Send/Receive in 1
NE-B mode
NFB1 Exclusive for send 2
in NE-F mode
NFB2 Send/Receive in 3
NE-F mode
B RETRY_BUSY Resend number setting when busy 0 - 15 2 * 0: No retry
C TIMER (MINUTE) _BUSY Resend timer setting (minute) when busy 1 - 15 3
D RETRY_ERROR Resend number setting when error 0 - 15 1 * 0: No retry
E TIMER (MINUTE) _ERROR Resend timer setting (minute) when error 1 - 15 1
F TONER ORDER 100% - 75% Toner order auto send 100% - 75% 0-5 5 3 (49%-25%)
TIMING (K) 74% - 50% timing setting (K) 74% - 50% 4
49% - 25% 49% - 25% 3
LOWER 25 25% or less 2
NEAREND NEAREND 1
EMPTY EMPTY 0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,216(783
$ )6602'(1(%
$ % 5(75<B%86<
& 7,0(50,187(B%86<

' 5(75<B(5525
( 7,0(50,187(B(5525
) 721(525'(57,0,1*.
2.
27-5
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
7$*6(77,1*
Function (Purpose) Used to set the machine tag No. 35(6(17

1(: 6(7
(FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Enter the password (max. 8 digits) with 10-key.
The entered password is displayed on the column of "NEW.
In order to correct the entered password, press the [clear] key
to delete the entered value one digit by one digit.
2) Press [SET] key.
27-6
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
)66)81&7,216(783)81&7,21
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the manual service call. $

$ )81&7,21<(612
% $/(57<(612

(FSS function) & &211(&7,21)$;(0$,/
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Allow (Default)
1 Inhibit
2) Press [OK] key. 2.
27-9
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0$18$/6(59,&(&$//6(783 Purpose Setting
$ <(612
$ Function (Purpose) Used to set the paper transport time record-
ing YES/NO threshold value and shading
gain adjustment retry number.
(FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
2.
3) Press [OK] key.
27-7 A FEED TIME 1 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper

transport time between sensors
Purpose Setting (Main unit) (50: Default)
Function (Purpose) Used to set of the enable, alert call out. B FEED TIME 2 0 - 100 Threshold value of the paper
(FSS function) transport time between sensors
(DSPF/RSPF) (50: Default)
Section
C GAIN ADJUSTMENT 0 - 20 Threshold value of the gain
Operation/Procedure RETRY adjustment retry number
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. (11: Default)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. D JAM ALERT 1 - 100 Alert judgment threshold value for
occurrence of continuous jams
3) Press [OK] key. Alert judgment threshold value for
The set value in step 2) is saved. occurrence of continuous jams
(Setting of the number of times of
A FSS 0 FSS function enable continuous jams as the alert for
FUNCTION 1 FSS function disable (*1) (Default) continuous jams) (Default: 10
B ALERT 0 Alert call enable (*2) (Default) times)
1 Alert call disable
* Items A, B: 0%, standard passing time between sheets of paper;
C CONNECTION 0 FAX connection enable
100%, time for judgment as a jam between sheets of paper.
1 E-MAIL connection enable
* Item C: Because of a trouble in shading operation, the number of
*1 The FSS function setting can be changed only from Disable to retry is actually not registered.
Enable. (Cannot be changed from Enable to Disable.)
*2 Alert send timing

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)66)81&7,21$'-8670(17
No alert cause Initial state / Trouble / Continuous JAM alert $ )(('7,0(
$
Maintenance When the maintenance timing is reached. % )(('7,0(
& *$,1$'-8670(175(75<

Service call When pressing Service call.
' -$0$/(57
Toner send request When the toner order automatic send setting is
reached.
Toner collection request Revision of the toner installation date (only for
a new product)
Alert resend
2.
27-10

6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Data clear/Reset 7(67
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7
&/26(
'$7(5(75<
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the trouble prediction history /68
information. (FSS function) /68

'(6.
'(6.
Section ),1,6+(5
),1,6+(5
Operation/Procedure '63)
'63)
6&$1*$,1$'-
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
2) Press [YES] key. 6&$1*$,1$'-
6&$1*$,1$'-
The history information of trouble prediction is cleared. '63)*$,1$'-

'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
'63)*$,1$'-
Target history Serial communication retry number history
High density process control error history
Half tone process control error history
Scanner gain adjustment retry history
DSPF gain adjustment retry history (DSPF model only) 27-12
Paper transport time between sensors Purpose Information display
Function (Purpose) Used to check the high-density and the
half-tone process control error history. (FSS
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Function)
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,21+,6725<&/($5
Section
Operation/Procedure
The high density and the half-tone process control error history are
displayed.
HV_ERR1 High density error history 1

$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( HV_ERR5 High density error history 5
H_TONE ERR1 Half tone error history 1
27-11
Purpose Information display H_TONE ERR5 Half tone error history 5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the serial communication
retry number and the scanner gain adjust-

ment retry number history. (FSS function) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7$'-8670(17B(5525
Section '$7((5525&2'(
+9B(55
Operation/Procedure +9B(55
+9B(55
+9B(55
The serial communication retry number history and the scanner +9B(55
+B721((55
gain adjustment retry number history are displayed. +B721((55
+B721((55
+B721((55
Display Item +B721((55
Occurrence date Retry Content

Item name
(Display) number
LSU1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Serial
LSU2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits communication retry
DESK1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits number history

DESK2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits display
* For DSPF1/
DSPF1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF2, only the
DSPF2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF model is
FINISHER1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits displayed.
FINISHER2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits Scanner gain
SCAN GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
SCAN GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
SCAN GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
SCAN GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits DSPF gain
DSPF GAIN ADJ1 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits adjustment retry
DSPF GAIN ADJ2 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits history
DSPF GAIN ADJ3 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits (Only the DSPF
model is displayed.)
DSPF GAIN ADJ4 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
DSPF GAIN ADJ5 99/99/99 99:99:99 8 digits
27-13
Function (Purpose) Used to check the history of paper transport
time between sensors. (FSS function)
Section
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] key.
Code Reference
Item/Display Content Occurrence date between Passing time passing
sensors time
Main FEED TIME1 History of paper transport time between sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
unit FEED TIME2 History of paper transport time between sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME3 History of paper transport time between sensors 3 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
DSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
FEED TIME2(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 2 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
RSPF FEED TIME1(SPF) History of paper transport time between SPF sensors 1 99/99/99 99:99:99 5 digits 5 digits (ms) 5 digits (ms)
[N model] [U model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
'$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0( 7528%/(35(&2*1,7,215(68/7)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( '$7(6(1625&2'(3$667,0(67$1'$5'7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0( )(('7,0(
)(('7,0(
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)
)(('7,0(63)

27-14

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
Purpose Setting
7(67
0$,181,76(1625&+(&.
33' 33' 32' 32'
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function connection 32' 7)' 7)' +326
test mode. '6:B5 '6:B& '6:B) 71)

71%2;
Section
Operation/Procedure
0 Disable (Default)
1 Enable
2) Press [OK] key.
30-2
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)667(6702'(6(783 Purpose Operation test/check
$ &211(&7,217(6702'(212))
$ Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
sors and the detectors in the paper feed
Operation/Procedure
played.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
2. lighted.
* For setting the FSS function connection test mode, only DIS- CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection
ABLE to ENABLE can be made. (ENABLE to DISABLE cannot CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection
be made.) CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection
CSPD1 Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
30 CSS12
CSS13
Tray 1 rear edge detection 2
Tray 1 rear edge detection 3
30-1 CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection
Purpose Operation test/check CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection
CPED2 Tray 2 paper YES/NO detection
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sen-
CSPD2 Tray 2 paper remaining detection
sors and the detectors in other than the
paper feed section and the control circuits.
Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport CSS23 Tray 2 rear edge detection 3
Operation/Procedure CSS24 Tray 2 rear edge detection 4
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection
played. MPLD Manual feed paper length detection
MTOP1 Manual feed tray retraction detection
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high-
MTOP2 Manual feed tray extension detection
lighted.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection
PPD1 Resist pre-detection
PPD2 Resist detection

POD1 Fusing rear detection 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
75$<6(1625&+(&.0$,1
POD2 Main unit paper exit detection &3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection &66 &66 &66 &66
&3)' &/8' &3(' &63'
TFD2 Main unit paper exit full detection &66 &66 &66 &66
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full detection 03)' 03/' 0723 0723
HPOS Shifter home detection 03('
DSW_R Right door open/close detection

DSW_C Tray 1 transport cover open/close detection
DSW_F Front cover open/close detection
TNF Waste toner full detection
TNBOX Waste toner near end detection

33 40
33-1 40-2
Purpose Operation test/check Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the card Function (Purpose) Manual paper feed tray paper width sensor
reader sensor and the control circuit. adjustment.
Section Others Section Paper feed, paper reverse/transport
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are dis- 1) Open the manual paper feed guide to the max. width (MAX).
played. 2) Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- The max. width (MAX) detection level is recognized.
lighted.
3) Open the manual paper feed guide to P1 width (A4).
CARD Card Yes/No detection 4) Press [EXECUTE] key.
DATA Card number signal detection The P1 width (A4) detection level is recognized.
CLOCK Reference clock signal detection 5) Open the manual paper feed guide to P2 width (A4R).

The P2 width (A4R) detection level is recognized.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&$5'5($'(56(1625&+(&. 7) Open the manual paper feed guide to the min. width (MIN).
&$5' '$7$ &/2&.
The min. width (MIN) detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is not performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed. When completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width

P1(A4)POSITION Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
P2(A4R)POSITION Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
%<3$6675$<$'-8670(17
33-2 0$;326,7,21$'-8670(17
Purpose Data clear/Reset 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the ID (IDM) information of

card. (HDD-installed machine only)
Section Others
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The ID (IDM) information of Felica card in the HDD is deleted. (;(&87(

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&$5',''$7$&/($5
40-7
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the adjustment value of the
manual paper feed tray paper width sensor.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( 3) Press [OK] key.
Default
value
A MAX POSITION Manual feed max. width 241
B P1(A4) POSITION Manual feed P1 position width 231
(A4)
C P2(A4R) POSITION Manual feed P2 position width 140
(A4R)
D MIN POSITION Manual feed min. width 19

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
%<3$6675$<9$/8(6(77,1* '2&80(176,=(3+2726(16256(783
$ 0$;326,7,21
$ % 3326,7,21
& 3326,7,21
' 0,1326,7,21
2. (;(&87(
41-3
41 Purpose Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu-
41-1 ment size sensor and the control circuit.
Purpose Operation test/check Section Others
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the docu- Operation/Procedure
ment size sensor and the control circuit. The detection output level (A/D value) of OCSW and the document
Section Others sensor (PD1 - PD7) is displayed in real time.
Operation/Procedure The light receiving range of PD1 - PD7 is 1 - 255. (Default: 128)
Item/Display Content Detection level range
played.
OCSW Original cover SW 0-1 ("1" to Close)
The sensors and the detectors which are turned ON are high- PD1 Document detection 1 0 - 255
lighted. PD2 Document detection 2 0 - 255
PD3 Document detection 3 0 - 255
OCSW Document cover status Open: Normal display
Close: Highlighted
PD1 - 7 Document detection No document: Normal display
sensor status Document present: Highlighted

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3'6(1625&+(&.
2&6: 3' 3' 3' 3'6(1625',63/$<
3' 3' 3' 3' 2&6:
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @
3'> @

41-2
43
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document size sensor
detection level.
43-1
Section Others
Purpose Setting
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to make the fusing reference temper-
1) Open the document cover, and press [EXECUTE] key without
ature setting 1 in each operation mode.
place a document on the document table.
Section Fusing
The sensor level without document is recognized.
Operation/Procedure
2) Set A3 (11 x 17") paper on the document table, and press
[EXECUTE] key. 1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys.
The sensor level when detecting the document is displayed. 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
When the above operation is normally completed, it is displayed. 3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
trouble may be occur.
Default value
Setting 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM READY TH_UM set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
B HL_US READY TH_US set value when ready standby 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
C HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_UM set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
D HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW Black and white plain paper TH_US set 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
value
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation start 30 - 200 155 155 165 165 165 165 175 175
TH_UM set value
F WARMUP FUMOFF HL_UM T Fusing motor previous rotation 0 - 255 5
complete time
G WARM UP END TIME Warm-up complete time 1 - 255 17
H HL_UM HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_UM set value 70 - 230 190 195
I HL_US HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper TH_US set value 70 - 230 190 195
J HL_UM OHP PAPER OHP-TH_UM set value 70 - 230 175 180
K HL_US OHP PAPER OHP-TH_US set value 70 - 230 175 180
L HL_UM ENV PAPER Envelope TH_UM set value 70 - 230 195
M HL_US ENV PAPER Envelope TH_US set value 70 - 230 195
N HL_UM E-STAR Preheating TH_UM set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
O HL_US E-STAR Preheating TH_US set value 30 - 200 145 145 155 155 150 150 160 160
P PRE-JOB Resetting from preheating TH_UM set 30 - 200 165 165 185 185 175 175 195 195
value
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
R HL_US WARMUP_120L TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or below
S LO_WARMUP_TIME Q - R applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H TH_UM set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
U HL_US WARMUP_120H TH_US set value when Warm-Up at 70 - 230 170 175 190 190 180 185 200 200
120C or above
V HI_WARMUP_TIME T - U applying time 0 - 255 5
(Timer from completion of Ready)
<Code descriptions>

TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(036(783)253$3(5

$ +/B805($'<
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % +/B865($'<
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & +/B803/$,13$3(5%:
' +/B863/$,13$3(5%:
<List of destination groups> ( :$5083)8021+/B807

) :$5083)802))+/B807
Group Destination * :$5083(1'7,0(
Group A Japan China AB_B + +/B80+($9<3$3(5
, +/B86+($9<3$3(5
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch - +/B802+33$3(5
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe . +/B862+33$3(5
/ +/B80(193$3(5
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting.
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m 2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
43-4
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the fusing temperature 2 in
each operation mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
3) Press [OK] key. trouble may be occur.
Default value
Setting 28/36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model
range Group A Group B Group A Group B
SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B SW-A SW-B
A HL_UM PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_UM set value
B HL_US PLAIN PAPER BW DUP Black and white plain paper 70 - 230 165 170 185 185 175 180 195 195
duplex TH_US set value
C PLAIN PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white plain paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
D HL_UM HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_UM set value
E HL_US HEAVY PAPER BW DUP Black and white heavy paper 70 - 230 190 195
duplex TH_US set value
F HEAVY PAPER BW DUP APP CNT Black and white heavy paper 0 - 60 0
duplex applying number of
sheets
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(036(783)253$3(5

$ +/B803/$,13$3(5%:'83
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % +/B863/$,13$3(5%:'83
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & 3/$,13$3(5%:'83$33&17

' +/B80+($9<3$3(5%:'83
<List of destination groups> ( +/B86+($9<3$3(5%:'83
) +($9<3$3(5%:'83$33&17
Group Destination
Group A Japan China AB_B
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe
2.
SW-A Setting value when 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
SW-B Set value when 80 - 105g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
The set value displayed in this simulation differs depending on
60 - 79g/m 2 or 80 - 105g/m2 which is selected in the system
setting/device setting/fusing control setting.
(Example) When 60 - 79g/m2 is selected in the system setting/
device setting/fusing control setting, the value of SW-A is
displayed.
43-20
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environmental correction
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
range Group A Group B
A HL_UM READY LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
B HL_US READY LL Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
C HL_UM PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW LL Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_US T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T LL Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
G WARMUP END TIME LL Correction value for warm-up complete time under LL environment 1 - 99 80 80
H HL_UM HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
I HL_US HEAVY LL Correction value for heavy paper TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
J HL_UM OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
K HL_US OHP LL Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
L HL_UM ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
M HL_US ENVELOPE LL Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
N HL_UM E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
O HL_US E-STAR LL Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under LL environment 1 - 99 55 55
P PRE-JOB LL Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_LL Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H LL Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under LL 1 - 99 55 55
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_LL Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under LL 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(03$'-8670(17//

$ +/B805($'<//
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % +/B865($'<//
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & +/B803/$,1%://

' +/B863/$,1%://
<List of destination groups> ( :$5083)8021+/B867//
) :$5083)802))7//
Group Destination * :$5083(1'7,0(//
+ +/B80+($9<//
Group A Japan China AB_B , +/B86+($9<//
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch - +/B802+3//
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe . +/B862+3//
/ +/B80(19(/23(//
2.
43-21
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the environment correction
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-1) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change/1sec change
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99
A HL_UM READY HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
B HL_US READY HH Correction value for TH_US set value in ready standby under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
C HL_UM PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
D HL_US PLAIN BW HH Correction value for black and white plain paper TH_US set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
E WARMUP FUMON HL_UM T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation start TH_UM set value under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
F WARMUP FUMOFF T HH Correction value for fusing motor previous rotation completion time under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
G WARMUP END TIME HH Correction value for warm-up complete time under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
H HL_UM HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
I HL_US HEAVY HH Correction value for heavy paper TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
J HL_UM OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
K HL_US OHP HH Correction value for OHP TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
L HL_UM ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
M HL_US ENVELOPE HH Correction value for envelope TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 50 50
N HL_UM E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_UM set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
O HL_US E-STAR HH Correction value for preheating TH_US set value under HH environment 1 - 99 45 45
P PRE-JOB HH Correction value for resetting from preheating TH_UM set value under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
Q HL_UM WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
R HL_US WARMUP_120L HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or below under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
S LO_WARMUP_TIME_HH Correction value for Q - R applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
T HL_UM WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
U HL_US WARMUP_120H HH Correction value for TH_US set value in Warm-Up at 120C or above under HH 1 - 99 45 45
environment
V HI_WU_TIME_HH Correction value for T - U applying time (timer from Ready complete) under HH 1 - 99 50 50
environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $ +/B805($'<++
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % +/B865($'<++
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & +/B803/$,1%:++

' +/B863/$,1%:++
<List of destination groups> ( :$5083)8021+/B807++
) :$5083)802))7++
Group Destination * :$5083(1'7,0(++
+ +/B80+($9<++
Group A Japan China AB_B , +/B86+($9<++
Group B U.S.A. Canada Inch - +/B802+3++
AB_A U.K. AUS Europe . +/B862+3++
/ +/B80(19(/23(++
2.
43-22
Purpose Setting
under low temperature and low humidity (L/
L) for the fusing temperature setting (SIM
43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Correction value: -49 - +49, 1 Count = 1C change
A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP LL Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 55 55
LL environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under LL environment
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17//'83
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub $ +/B803/$,1%:'83//
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % +/B863/$,1%:'83//
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & 3/$,1%:'83$33&17//

' +/B80+($9<%:'83//
<List of destination groups> ( +/B86+($9<%:'83//

) +($9<%:'83$33&17//
Group Destination

2.
43-23
Purpose Setting
under high temperature and high humidity
(H/H) for the fusing temperature setting
(SIM 43-4) in each paper mode.
Section Fusing NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Operation/Procedure individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
3) Press [OK] key.
The set value in step 2) is saved. Correction value -49 -25 -5 0 +5 +25 +49
Input value 1 25 45 50 55 75 99

A HL_UM PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 45 40
HH environment
B HL_US PLAIN BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white plain paper duplex under 1 - 99 45 40
HH environment
C PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white plain paper duplex 1 - 99 50 50
under HH environment
D HL_UM HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_UM set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
E HL_US HEAVY BW DUP HH Correction value for TH_US set value in black and white heavy paper duplex under 1 - 99 50 50
HH environment
F HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH Correction value for applying number of sheets in black and white heavy paper 1 - 99 50 50
duplex under HH environment
<Code descriptions> <List of destination groups>

Group Destination
TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor main
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)86(57(03$'-8670(17++'83
$ +/B803/$,1%:'83++
$ % +/B863/$,1%:'83++
& 3/$,1%:'83$33&17++

' +/B80+($9<%:'83++
( +/B86+($9<%:'83++
) +($9<%:'83$33&17++
2.
43-24
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the correction of the tempera-
ture adjustment value of SIM 43-1 and 43-
4.
Section Fusing
Operation/Procedure
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
range value
A NN_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under NN 1 - 99 55
environment, common to items HL_UM and HL_US.) (when duplex)
B LL_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under LL 1 - 99 50
C HH_120_FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_US Fusing temperature correction value (When rising the power at less than 120C under HH 1 - 99 50
D NN_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under NN environment 1 - 60 5
E LL_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under LL environment 1 - 60 10
F HH_120_FUS_DUP_CNT Fusing duplex paper exit count under HH environment 1 - 60 5
G COOL_DOWN_HEAVY Cool down time (heavy paper mode) 1 - 60 1
H COOL_DOWN_OHP Cool down time (OHP mode) 1 - 60 30
I COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP Cool down time (envelope mode) 1 - 60 40
J FUS MOTOR Fusing web motor operating interval 1 - 20 8
* Each paper exit count: 1 count = 1 sheet change

* Time setting: 1 count = 1sec change
<Code descriptions>

7(67 &/26(
TH_US Fusing upper thermistor sub )86(57(035(6(7

$ 11BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
HL_UM Heater lamp upper main $ % //BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86
HL_US Heater lamp upper sub & ++BB)86B'83B+/B80 +/B86

' 11BB)86B'83B&17
( //BB)86B'83B&17
) ++BB)86B'83B&17
* &22/B'2:1B+($9<
+ &22/B'2:1B2+3
, &22/B'2:1B'(9(/23
- )8602725
2.
Setting Default
43-31 Item Display Item
range value
Purpose Adjustment/Setup C JOB END Number of forcible 1-5 1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the fusing COMP ACT operations of the fusing
web cleaning motor. CNT web motor when job end
Section Fusing

Operation/Procedure 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. -2%(1':(%&/($1,1*&2038/625<&+(&.

$ -2%(1'&203$&7&+(&.<(612
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive. $ % -2%(1'&203$&7,17(59$/
2) When driving the fusing web cleaning motor is completed,

& -2%(1'&203$&7&17
"COMPLETE" is displayed.

Fusing web unit 2.
installation detection Operation Remark

state
Fusing web unit Not operate * During this operation,
installed the fusing web cleaning
Fusing web unit not 10sec continuous feed counter is not 44
installed rotation counted up.
* The fusing web unit is used by installing to the fusing unit. For 44-1
checking the fusing web cleaning motor rotation, remove the Purpose Setting
whole fusing unit and check with the door open. Function (Purpose) Used to set each correction operation func-
tion in the image forming (process) section.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Section Process
)86(5:(%&/($1,1*&+(&.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an item to be set with the touch panel.
(The selected item is highlighted.)
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The set value is saved.)
Set the items to the default values unless a change is spe-

cially required.
(;(&87(
Setting Default
43-32 range value
HV Enable/Disable setting of Normal Enable
Purpose Adjustment/Setup the high density process (Disable:
Function (Purpose) Used to set various items related to the control in normal 0: NO)
forcible operation of web cleaning when job operation Reverse
end. HT Enable/Disable setting of (Enable: Enable
the medium density 1: YES)
Section Fusing process control in normal
Operation/Procedure operation
1) Select an item to be set with [] [] keys. TC Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the transfer output
correction
3) Press [OK] key. MD VG Enable/Disable setting of Enable
The set value in step 2 is saved. the membrane decrease
grid voltage correction
MD LD Enable/Disable setting of Enable
individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how- the membrane decrease
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a laser power voltage
trouble may be occur. correction
MD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
Setting Default the membrane decrease
Item Display Item
range value environment grid voltage
A JOB END Fusing web Enable 0-1 0 1 correction
COMP ACT motor forcible Disable 1 TN_HUM Enable/Disable setting of Enable
CHECK operation the toner density
condition when humidity correction
job end TN_AREA Enable/Disable setting of Disable
B JOB END Interval of the print quantity 1 - 200 110 the toner density area
COMP ACT of compulsory action of the correction
INTERVAL fusing web motor at job end
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Setting Default
range value Item/Display Content
range value
TN_LIFE Enable/Disable setting of Normal Disable
A PCS_K LED ADJ Image density sensor 1 - 255 21
the toner density life (Disable:
sensitivity (light quantity)
correction 0: NO)
adjustment value
TN_COV Enable/Disable setting of Reverse Enable
B PCS_K DARK Image density sensor 0 - 255 0
the toner density print (Enable:
dark voltage
ratio correction 1: YES)
C PCS_K GRND Belt surface detection 0 - 255 0
TN_PROCON Enable/Disable setting of Enable
level when the
the toner density process
adjustment of item A is
control correction
completed
TN_ENV Enable/Disable setting of Disable
D PCS_K DRUM OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
MAX detection level Max.
environment correction
value
TN_DRIP Enable/Disable setting of Enable
E PCS_K DRUM MIN OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
the toner density
detection level Min. value
correction unconditional
F PCS_K DRUM DIF OPC drum surface 0 - 255 0
supply
detection level differential
TN_SPEND Enable/Disable setting of Disable
(Item D - Item E)
toner compulsory
consumption mode
PRT_HT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Error name Error content
the half-tone process Sensor adjustment PCS_K LED ADJ error
control printer correction abnormality The adjustment target level is not reached by
feedback three times of retry operations.
TN_INTERMITTENT Enable/Disable setting of Enable Surface scanning PCS_K GRND error
the intermittent supply abnormality The difference between the max. value and
TN_ABSOLUTE Enable/Disable setting of Enable the min. value of the OPC drum surface
the unconditional supply detection level is out of the specified range in
TN_PROFIT_RETURN Enable/Disable setting of Enable detection of one circle of the OPC drum
the differential return surface.
correction
MD LD EV Enable/Disable setting of Enable
the environment laser 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
power correction for the 352&21*$,1$'-8670(17

3&6B./('$'-
OPC drum membrane
3&6B.'$5.
decrease correction 3&6B.*51'
MD LD HV Enable/Disable setting of Enable 3&6B.'5800$;
the process control laser 3&6B.'5800,1
power correction 3&6B.'580',)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
02'(6(77,1*
+9 +7 7& 0'9*
(;(&87(
0'/' 0'(9 71B+80 71B$5($
71B/,)( 71B&29 71B352&21 71B(19
71B'5,3 71B63(1' 357B+7 71B,17(50,77(17

44-4
71B$%62/87( 71B352),7B5(7851 0'/'(9 0'/'+9
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the conditions of the high den-
sity process control operation.
(;(&87(
Section Process

Operation/Procedure
44-2 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Purpose Adjustment 3) Press [OK] key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sensitivity of the image NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
density sensor. individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
Section Process ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
Operation/Procedure
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment is executed auto- Setting Default
matically. range value
After completion of the adjustment, the adjustment result is dis- A PCS_K TARGET Image density sensor 1 - 255 210
sensitivity adjustment
played.
target value
If the adjustment is not executed normally, "ERROR" is displayed. B LED_K OUTPUT Initial current level black 1 - 255 21
sensor LED light emitting
quantity set value in the
image density sensor
adjustment
Setting Default
Item/Display Content 44-6
range value
C PCS ADJSTMENT Adjustment error 1 - 255 10 Purpose Operation test/check
LIMIT allowance level in the Function (Purpose) Used to execute the high density process
sensor sensitivity control forcibly.
adjustment
D DRUM GROUND The difference between 0 - 255 128
Section Process
DIF the max. value and the Operation/Procedure
min. value of the OPC Press [EXECUTE] key.
drum surface detection
level is in the allowable
In case of a normal completion, the result is saved.
range in detection of one In case of an abnormal completion, "ERROR" is displayed.
circle of the OPC drum (Refer to the table below.)
surface.
In case of an ERROR, the previous correction data are saved.
E BIAS_BK Developing bias 0 - 255 0
STANDARD DIF reference value in the Result display Content description
high density process
COMPLETE Normal complete
control
ERROR Abnormal end
F BIAS PATCH Patch-forming developing 1 - 255 45
INTERRUPTION Forcible interruption
INTERVAL bias voltage interval
(voltage difference) in the
high density process Details of error display Content description
control BK_SEN_ADJ_ERR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
G K_PAT TARGET Toner patch density target 1 - 255 50 error
ID value (black) in the high K_HV_ERR Density process control operation error
density process control TIMEOUT_ERR Density process control operation time-out
H HV BK_GROUND Error judgment criterion 1 - 255 29
LIMIT for the difference between
the max. level and the
6,08/$7,2112
min. level of the OPC 7(67 &/26(
352&21&2038/625<(;(&87,21
drum surface detection 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21,1,7,$/'(16,7<6(783
$ 3&6B.7$5*(7
$ % /('B.287387
& 3&6$'-670(17/,0,7

' '580*5281'',)
( %,$6B%.67$1'$5'',)
) %,$63$7&+,17(59$/
* .B3$77$5*(7,'
+ +9%.B*5281'/,0,7 (;(&87(
2.
44-9
Function (Purpose) Used to display the result data of the high
density process control operation.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a target display mode with [CPY/PRN],[OTHER] keys.
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
CPY/ P BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** High density process control mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
PRN (PROCON) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
N BLACK : GB ***/*** DV ***/*** Actual operation mode GB: 230 - 850 GB: 630
(NORMAL) GB/DV data (K) (Actual output voltage level / Base voltage level) DV: 0 - 700 DV: 430
OTHER TN/TC TN HUD AREA Toner density correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
TN HUD DATA Toner density correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC TMP AREA Transfer voltage correction temperature area 1-9 4
TC TMP DATA Transfer voltage correction temperature AD value 0 - 1023 0
TC HUD AREA Transfer voltage correction humidity area 1-9 4
TC HUD DATA Transfer voltage correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
MD HUD AREA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity area 1 - 14 9
MD HUD DATA OPC drum membrane decrease correction humidity AD value 0 - 1023 0
Default
Mode Item/Display (*: Correction value) Content Display range
value
OTHER DRUM MD K STEP OPC drum membrane decrease correction STEP number display 0-4 0
(K)
MD K DRUM COUNTER OPC drum membrane decrease correction counter (rotation 0 - 20 0
distance)
VG MD K REVISE(VG) Display of MC correction voltage for OPC drum membrane 0 - 255 0
decrease
LD MD K REVISE(LD) OPC drum membrane decrease laser power correction display 0 - 255 0
LD EV MD K REVISE(LD EV) Display of drum membrane decrease environment laser power -128 - 128 0
correction
LD HV MD K REVISE(LD HV) Display of high-density process control laser power correction -128 - 128 0
LD ALL MD K REVISE(LD ALL) Display of laser power total correction amount -128 - 128 0
HV MD K REVISE(HV) OPC drum membrane environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CP MD K REVISE(CP) OPC drum membrane / Environment MC correction voltage display 0 - 255 0
CRUM DESTINATION CRUM destination data stored in the PCU PWB of the machine
MODEL TYPE Model type of the machine 0-1 0
CRUM DEST_K Crum destination data
CNT PROCON COUNT HV High density process control execution number 0 - 99999999 0
PROCON COUNT HT Half-tone process control execution umber 0 - 99999999 0

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&21'$7$',63352&211250$/
%/$&.B3*%B'9B
%/$&.B1*%B'9B
&3<351 27+(5
44-12
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
3$7&+7$5*(7'$7$',63/$<
$'.B6/.
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operation data of the $'.B,17.
high density process control and the image 7$5*(7.
density sensor.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
Select a display mode with [TARGET] [PATCH] keys.
Display Default
range value
7$5*(7 3$7&+ 3$7&+
ADK_SL (K) Development characteristics -9.99 - 0
gradient coefficient (High density 9.99
process control operation)
ADK_INT(K) Development characteristics -999.9 - 0 44-14
intercept level (High density process 999.9 Purpose Information display
control operation 0V)
Function (Purpose) Used to display the output level of the tem-
TARGET (K) High density process control target 0.00 - 0
perature and humidity sensor.
density level (K) 255.00
n-1 High density process control nth 0 - 255 0 Section
time patch density level 1 (n=1-5) Operation/Procedure
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=1-5) 0 - 255 0
The output levels of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor are displayed.
BK only Item/Display Content Display range
n-1 Patch data nth time patch 1 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 TH_UM Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
n-2 Patch data nth time patch 2 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 main A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
n-3 Patch data nth time patch 3 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
n-4 Patch data nth time patch 4 (n=6-10) 0 - 255 0 TH_US Fusing upper thermistor Temperature:
BK only sub A/D value, 0 - 255C (1C)
temperature AD value: 0 - 1023
TEMPRATURE Temperature thermistor Temperature:
A/D value, temperature -40.0 - 60.0C (0.1C)
(for process control) AD value: 0 - 1023
HUMIDITY Humidity sensor A/D Humidity:
value, humidity (for 5.0 - 90.0% (0.1%)
process control) AD value: 0 - 1023
Setting Default

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
range value
7(67
6(1625'$7$',63/$<021,725 AREA VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
7+B80GHJ;;;
voltage correction value for the 127
7+B86GHJ;;;
7(035$785(GHJ;;;
temperature and the humidity
+80,',7<;;; HUD VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for a
change in the temperature and
the humidity
PRINT RATE VO Toner density sensor control
voltage correction value for the
document print ratio
PROCON VO Toner density sensor control
high density process control
result
44-16 LIFE VO Toner density sensor control
Purpose Information display developer life
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner density control SENSITIVITY VO Toner density sensor sensitivity 1 - 999 500
data. correction control voltage
correction value
Section Toner supply, developing
ENV VO Toner density sensor control -127 - 0
Operation/Procedure voltage correction value for the 127
1) The toner density control data are displayed. environment with a high humidity
Setting Default Setting Default

Item/Display Content Item/Display Content
range value range value
TONER DEN_LT Current toner density sensor 1 - 255 129 AUTO DEVE Area in the Display of the 1 - 14 8
output value (final value) AREA auto humidity area when
TONER DEN_ST Current toner density control 128 development SIM25-2 is executed
reference value display (the adjustment
value including all the correction AREA Current area Current humidity
values) area display
Setting Default

range value 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
AUTO DEVE Toner density sensor output 1 - 255 128 721(5&21752/'$7$',63/$<

721(5'(1B/7
value when SIM25-02 is 721(5'(1B67
executed and completed.
ALL Actual toner density control value
(including all the correction
factors)
AREA Toner density control correction -127 - 0
value for the temperature and the 127
humidity
HUD Toner density control correction
value for a change in the
. & 0 < 1(;7
humidity
PRINT RATE Toner density control correction

value for the document print ratio
PROCON Toner density control correction 44-21
value for the result of the high Purpose Registration
density process control
LIFE Toner density control correction Function (Purpose) Used to register the target value of the half-
value for the developer life tone process control.
SENSITIVITY Toner density sensor sensitivity 1 - 999 500 Section Process
correction value
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default
Item/Display Content The half tone process control target is set and the operation data
range value
are displayed.
AUTO DEVE VO Toner density sensor control 1 - 255 128
voltage value when SIM25-02 is
Display Content
executed and completed.
ALL VO Actual toner density sensor
control voltage value (including ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
all the correction factors) ADJUSTMENT error
[K] High density process control error
OTHER Other errors

Category Item/Display Content
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Coefficient [LOW FIELD] Coefficient value of the
+$/)721(352&2167$1'$5'9$/8(5(*,67(5
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57
approximate equation in the
low density area
[MID FIELD] Coefficient value of the
approximate equation in the
medium density area
Reference [SENSOR_TARGET] Half tone process control
value reference value
Correction [S_VALUE] Half tone process control
value correction value
For printer [PRINTER_S_VALUE] Printer half tone process
(;(&87(
control correction value
[PRINTER_BASE_ Printer half tone process
DITHER_VALUE] control reference dither value
[PRINTER_AUTO_ Printer auto density
44-22
HT_VALUE] adjustment correction value
Purpose Information display Previous [BEFORE S_VALUE] Previous half tone process
Function (Purpose) Used to display the toner patch density correction value control value
level in the half tone process control opera-
tion.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section Process +$/)721(352&215(68/7',63/$<
Operation/Procedure
>/2:),(/'@$%&
>0,'),(/'@$%&
1) The toner patch density level made in the half tone process
control operation is displayed.
BASE_n Belt substrate data (n = 1 - 6)
ID_n Patch data display (n = 1 - 6)

6,08/$7,2112 1(;7
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7
37. 37.
%$6( ,'
%$6( 44-25
%$6(
%$6(
Purpose Setting
%$6(
Function (Purpose) Used to set the calculating conditions of the
%$6(
,'
correction value for the half tone process
,' control.
,'
,'
Section Process
,' Operation/Procedure

1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
6,08/$7,2112
3) Press [OK] key.
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(&255(&75(68/7

,' individual arrangement. Except for the above cases, how-
,' ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a
,' trouble may be occur.
,'
Setting Default
,' Item/Display Content
range value
,'
A HIGHTLIGHT Correction point in the 1 - 17 7
POINT low density area
%$&.
B MID FIELD POINT Correction point in the 1 - 17 12
medium density area
C LOW FIELD Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
DITHER DEF the low density area
44-24 D MID FIELD DITHER Input dither difference in 0 - 255 10
Purpose Information display DEF the medium density area
E LOW POINT COEF Correction amount low 0 - 100 100
Function (Purpose) Used to display the correction target and
density point correction
the correction level in the half tone process
coefficient
control operation.
F MID POINT COEF Correction amount 0 - 100 100
Section Process medium density point
Operation/Procedure correction coefficient
1) Select the display category with [NEXT] key.

44-27
6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
+$/)721(352&21,1,7,$/9$/8(',63/$<
$ +,*+7/,*+732,17
$ % 0,'),(/'32,17
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the correction data of the half
& /2:),(/'',7+(5'() tone process control.
' 0,'),(/'',7+(5'()
( /2:32,17&2()
Section Process
) 0,'32,17&2() Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
The correction data of the half tone process control are
cleared.
2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(352&21$'-8670(17'$7$&/($5
44-26
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process con-
trol compulsory.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
The half tone process control is performed and the operation data $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
are displayed.

ERROR BLACK SENSOR Image density sensor sensitivity adjustment
ADJUSTMENT error
[K] High density process control error
OTHER Other errors
44-28

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Setting
+$/)721('(16,7<&255(&7(;(&87,21
728&+>(;(&87(@7+(1(;(&87,2167$57 Function (Purpose) Used to set the process control execution
conditions.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
(;(&87( NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control A INITIAL YES When warm-up after clearing the Enable 0-1 0 0
Enable/Disable NO counter of the OPC drum and the Disable 1
setting developer unit
B SW ON When supplying the power (when Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
clearing shut-off.) BK process control Enable 2
Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item K, L.)
C TIME After passing the specified time from Process control Disable 1-3 1 3
leaving READY continuously (Time can BK process control Enable 2
be changed by INTERVAL TIME) Pixel count judgment 3
(Judgement is based on the
setting value of item I.)
D HUM_LIMIT HUM judgment is made when turning Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
ON the power and after passing TIME. BK process control Enable 2
Default
Mode Item/Display Content Setting range
value
Process control E HUM The temperature and humidity in side Process control Disable 1-2 1 2
Enable/Disable the machine are monitored only during a BK process control Enable 2
setting job for every 2hours (set by item L).
When the changes in the temperature
and the humidity are greater than the
specified level (the set value of item L) in
comparison with the previous process
control.
F REV1 YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the OPC drum unit reaches a certain Inhibit 1
level after supply the power.
G REV2_BK YES When the accumulated rotation time of Enable 0-1 0 0
NO the BK position OPC drum unit reaches Inhibit 1
a certain level after execution of the
previous density correction.
H REFRESH YES YES/NO setting of the display of the Key operation display YES 0-1 0 1
MODE NO manual process control key by key Key operation display NO 1
operations
Process control I DAY When the next warm-up if there is no job 0: Disable of the specified 0 - 999 0 1
conditions after a job after passing the specified days judgment
setting days from execution of the previous 1 - 999: 1 - 999 days 1 - 999
process control passing
J PIX_RATIO_BK Magnification ratio setting (%) of the BK toner count specified value 1 - 999 10
entry of 100 corresponds to 1k of A4 5% print.
K INTERVAL TIME Passing time setting of "TIME" (h: hour) 1-255 12
(1-255: 1-255h passed)
L HUM HOUR Interval setting of the temperature and humidity monitoring time of 1 - 24 2
"HUM" (h: hour)
M HUM_DIF Area difference specified value when compared with the execution of 1-9 2
the previous process control of "HUM
N BK_RATIO Magnification ratio setting (%) of the specified value of the BK position 1 - 999 30
OPC drum traveling distance of "REV2_BK (Entry of 20 corresponds
to 100,000mm.)
O HT_DIF Bias variation difference value used for HT process control execution 1-255 60
judgment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
352&217,0,1*$'-8670(17
$ ,1,7,$/<(6
$ % 6:21
& 7,0(
' +80B/,0,7
( +80
) 5(9<(6
* 5(9B%.<(6
+ 5()5(6+02'(
, '$<
- 3,;B5$7,2B%.
. ,17(59$/7,0(
/ +80+285
2.
44-29
Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of the
process control during a job.
Section Process
Operation/Procedure
panel.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. +$/)721(6(77,1*
3) Press [OK] key. $

$ &23<+93+7
% 35,17(5+93+7
& )$;+93+7

Default ' 6(/)35,17+93+7
Item/Display Content Setting range
value
A COPY During copy job 0-2 0: No execution 2
B PRINTER During print job 1: HV only 2
C FAX During FAX print 2: HV HT 2
job
D SELF PRINT During self print 2
HV: High density process control 2.
HT: Half tone process control
44-37
To adjust the copy density in the low density area, select the "LOW"
Purpose Setting mode and change the adjustment value. To adjust the copy density
Function (Purpose) Used to set the development bias correc- in the high density area, select the "HIGH" mode and change the
tion level in the continuous printing opera- adjustment value.
tion. When the adjustment value is increased, the copy density is
Section Toner supply, developing increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the copy den-
Operation/Procedure sity is decreased.
1) Select a set target color with the touch panel. Setting Default
2) Select a target item with [] [] buttons. range value
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. A AUTO1 Auto 1 LOW 1 - 99 50
HIGH 1 - 99 50
B AUTO2 Auto 2 LOW 1 - 99 50
NOTE:
HIGH 1 - 99 50
When the print density is varied in the continuous printing opera-
C TEXT Text LOW 1 - 99 50
tion, this simulation is used.
HIGH 1 - 99 50
D TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed LOW 1 - 99 50
Item/ Default Variable
PHOTO Photo HIGH 1 - 99 50
Display value range
Current DV less than 300[v] A 0 0-5 E TEXT/PHOTO Text/ LOW 1 - 99 50
Bias voltage (*1) Photograph HIGH 1 - 99 50
300[v] or more, less B 0
than 450[v] F PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo LOW 1 - 99 50
450[v] or more C 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
Time (T) from Less than 10 [sec] & D 0 0-12 G PHOTOGRAPH Photograph LOW 1 - 99 50
termination of after process control (*2) HIGH 1 - 99 50
continuous JOB H MAP Map LOW 1 - 99 50
outputs to start 10 [sec] or more, less E 0 HIGH 1 - 99 50
of the next than 60 [sec]
output 60 [sec] or more, less F 0
operation
than 240 [sec] 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
240 [sec] or more G 0 (;32685($'-8670(17%:>&23<@
$ $872
$
<Use example> % $872
& 7(;7
(*1) The default of A/B/C is "0" and this function is set to OFF. ' 7(;735,17('3+272
( 7(;73+272
When 10 sheets are printed in the multi copy and the 10th output is
) 35,17('3+272
lighter than the first sheet, set the values of 1 - 5. * 3+272*5$3+
The greater the value is, the darker the density of the 10th sheet or + 0$3
later.
(*2) The correction amount is adjusted by the length of the leaving time.
When (*1) is 1 - 5, the greater the value of (*2) is, the greater the
density of printing is.
/2: +,*+ 2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
,0$*('(16,7<'9%$'-8670(176(77,1*
$ '9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
46-4
$ % '9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
Purpose Adjustment
& '9B$'-B%.B0B'$7$B
' '9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
( '9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B send mode (color mode). (N model only)
) '9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B
* '9B$'-B67$57B%.B0B Section

Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
. & 0 < 2.
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
46 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa.
46-2
Setting Default
Purpose Adjustment Item/Display Content
range value
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density in each A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50
monochrome copy mode. B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
Section
PHOTO
Operation/Procedure D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
panel. F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. G MAP Map 1 - 99 50

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The color balance can be adjusted separately for the low density
(;32685($'-8670(17&2/25>6&$11(5@ area and the high density area.
$ $872
$ % 7(;7
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density of the
& 7(;735,17('3+272 target color is increased, and vice versa.
' 7(;73+272
( 35,17('3+272
Default
) 3+272*5$3+ Item/Display Content
value
* 0$3
A LOW DENSITY POINT Low density correction amount 50
B HIGH DENSITY POINT High density correction amount 50

2. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($'-8670(17&2/256&$11(502'(
$ /2:'(16,7<32,17
$ % +,*+'(16,7<32,17

46-5
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the image
send mode (monochrome mode).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch % * 5 2.
panel.
46-9
Purpose Adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the SPF mode scan image
density (copy, image send mode)
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
increased, and vice versa. Section
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select an adjustment target mode with [OC] and [DSPF] keys
range value
on the touch panel. (DSPF-installed model only)
A AUTO TEXT Automatic/Text 1 - 99 50
B TEXT Text 1 - 99 50
panel.
C TEXT/PRINTED Text/Printed Photo 1 - 99 50
PHOTO 3) Enter the set value with 10-key.
D TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph 1 - 99 50 * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
E PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo 1 - 99 50 item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
F PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 1 - 99 50 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G MAP Map 1 - 99 50
This adjustment result affects the image send mode, the copy
mode, and the fax mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17%:>6&$11(5@ increased, and vice versa.
$ $8727(;7
$ % 7(;7 [DSPF-installed model]
& 7(;735,17('3+272
Setting Default
' 7(;73+272
Item Button Display Content
( 35,17('3+272 range value
) 3+272*5$3+ A OC COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47
* 0$3
SIDEA: LOW exposure
adjustment
(Low density side)
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47
SIDEA: LOW mode exposure
2. adjustment
(Low density side)
LOW exposure
46-8 adjustment
Purpose Adjustment (Low density side)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image send mode color SIDEA: HIGH exposure
balance RGB. (N model only) adjustment
Section (High density side)
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 52
Operation/Procedure
SIDEA: HIGH mode exposure
1) Select an adjustment target with [R] [G] [B] keys on the touch adjustment
panel. (High density side)
2) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch F FAX SIDEA: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 52
panel. HIGH exposure
adjustment
(High density)
Setting Default
range value
6,08/$7,2112
A DSPF COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 47 7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763)
SIDEB: LOW exposure
adjustment $ &23</2:
$
(Low density side) % 6&$1/2:
B SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 47 & )$;/2:
SIDEB: LOW mode exposure ' &23<+,*+
adjustment 2.
(Low density side)

C FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 47
LOW exposure 46-10
adjustment Purpose Adjustment
(Low density side)
D COPY DSPF copy mode 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density (in each
SIDEB: HIGH exposure copy mode).
adjustment Section
(High density side)
Operation/Procedure
E SCAN DSPF scanner 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: HIGH mode exposure 1) Select an adjustment target mode with the touch panel key.
adjustment 2) Select 600dpi or 1200dpi with the resolution select button.
(High density side)
F FAX SIDEB: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 99 50
HIGH exposure * When the key is pressed, the setting value of each
adjustment item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively.
(High density) 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
G BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50 When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is
SIDEB: R balance R
H BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50
SIDEB: G balance G A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
I BALANCE DSPF color 1 - 99 50 (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
SIDEB: B balance B
Item Content
AUTO1 Automatic 1

6,08/$7,2112
AUTO2 Automatic 2
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(1763) TEXT Text
$ &23<6,'($/2:
$
TEXT/PRT PHOTO Text/Printed Photo
% 6&$16,'($/2:
& )$;6,'($/2:

TEXT/PHOTO Text/Photograph
&23<6,'($+,*+

PRINTED PHOTO Printed Photo
( 6&$16,'($+,*+
PHOTO Photograph
) )$;6,'($+,*+
MAP Map
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value

A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500
2& '63) 2.
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
[RSPF-installed model] E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500
Setting Default
Item/Display Content G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500
range value
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500
A COPY: LOW RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 48
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500
adjustment
(Low density side) J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500
B SCAN: LOW RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 48 K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500
adjustment L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
C FAX: LOW RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 48 N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
adjustment O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500
(Low density side) P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500
D COPY: HIGH RSPF copy mode exposure 1 - 99 53 Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500
adjustment
(High density side)
E SCAN: HIGH RSPF scanner mode exposure 1 - 99 53

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(17
(High density side) $872 $872 7(;7 7(;73573+272
F FAX: HIGH RSPF FAX mode exposure 1 - 99 53 7(;73+272 35,17('3+272 3+272 0$3
adjustment
(High density)
(;(&87(
Item/Display Content Set value Default value
46-16
AE_STOP_SCAN Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Purpose Adjustment Stop (for scanner) STOP
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy density manually. AE_FILTER Auto exposure filter SOFT NORMAL
setting NORMAL
Section
SHARP
Operation/Procedure
AE_WIDTH AE exposure width FULL/PART FULL
panel.

2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685(02'(6(783%:$(
* When the key is pressed, the setting value of each $(B02'( 02'( 02'(
item can be changed with 1up (1down) collectively. $(B6723B&23< 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
$(B6723B)$; 2)) 21
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $(B6723B6&$1 5($/7,0( 6723 35(6&$1
When the adjustment value is increased, the image density is $(B),/7(5 62)7 1250$/ 6+$53

$(B:,'7+ )8// 3$57
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R

(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range Default value

A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500

C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 NOTE:
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 MODE 1 High gamma (high contrast images)
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 MODE 2 Normal gamma
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 STOP The image density in 3 - 7mm area at the lead edge is
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 scanned, and the output image density is determined
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 according to the scanned density. (The output image density
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 is even for all the surface.)
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 REALTIME The densities of the document width are scanned
sequentially, and the output image density is determined
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500
according to the density in each area of document. (The
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500
output image density may not be even for all the surface.)
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500
AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 FULL mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x the document
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 width. This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 AE WIDTH The document density scan area in the monochrome auto
PART mode is 3 - 7mm at the document lead edge x 100mm width.
This is not related to the PRESCAN mode.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
46-23
(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$5/$'-8670(17>$//%:@3*
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
Purpose Setting
& 32,17
' 32,17 Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction of copy
( 32,17
high density section (High density tone gap
) 32,17
* 32,17
supported).
+ 32,17 Section
, 32,17
- 32,17 Operation/Procedure

. 32,17
/ 32,17
(;(&87( 2.
0 Enable
1 Inhibit
46-19 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)

Purpose Setting
Setting Default
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of doc- range value
ument density scanning (copy, image send A K 0 K engine highest density 0-1 1
mode). (0: ENABLE correction mode: Enable
1: DISABLE) 1 K engine highest density
Section Scanner
correction mode: Disable
Operation/Procedure
Select an item to be set with touch panel. * When tone gap is generated in the high density area, set item A
When an item is selected, it is highlighted and the setting change is to "0".
saved. The density of high density part decreases. However, the tone
gap is better.
Item/Display Content Set value Default value * To increase the density in the high density area further, set item
AE_MODE Auto exposure mode MODE1, MODE2 A to "1".
MODE2
The tone gap may occur in high density part.
AE_STOP_COPY Auto B/W exposure REALTIME/ STOP
Stop (for copy) STOP
AE_STOP_FAX Auto B/W exposure ON/OFF ON
Stop (for FAX)

46-32
6,08/$7,2112
Purpose Adjustment
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'(
$
$ (1$%/(',6$%/(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the

document background density in the auto-
matic copy mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
2. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
46-24 adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
Purpose Adjustment and the low density image is decreased.
Function (Purpose) Copy and printer density adjustment [DSPF-installed model]
(Auto adjustment)
Setting Default
Section Item Display Content
range value
Operation/Procedure A COPY: OC Copy mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. B COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF front 1 - 250 196
(SIDE1) surface)
The adjustment pattern is printed out.
C COPY: DSPF Copy mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (SIDE2) back surface)
The automatic adjustment of copy and printer density is exe- D SCAN: OC Scanner mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
cuted, and then the adjustment result pattern of the copy mode E SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
as well as that of the printer mode is printed. (SIDE1) front surface)
F SCAN: DSPF Scanner mode (for DSPF 1 - 250 196
3) Press [OK] key.
(SIDE2) back surface)
The half tone correction target registration is processed. G FAX: OC FAX mode (for OC) 1 - 250 196
4) The half-tone correction execution menu is displayed. Press H FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
[EXECUTE] key. (SIDE1) (for DSPF front surface)
Half-tone correction is executed. When [RESULT] button is I FAX: DSPF FAX mode 1 - 250 196
pressed after completion of correction, the data of the half-tone (SIDE2) (for DSPF back surface)
correction can be checked.

Display Content 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
COMPLETE Normal completion /,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*

$ &23<2&
ERROR BLACK SENSOR Black sensor abnormality $ % &23<'63)6,'(
ADJUSTMENT & &23<'63)6,'(
[K] Half-tone correction [K] abnormality ' 6&$12&
OTHER Other errors ( 6&$1'63)6,'(
) 6&$1'63)6,'(
* )$;2&
+ )$;'63)6,'(

6,08/$7,2112 , )$;'63)6,'(
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
35(66>(;(&87(@72352&21(;(&87,21$1'35,177+(7(673$7&+
3/($6(86(63(&,),('7<3(2)$25h6,=(3$3(5
)257+,6$'-8670(17 2.
Setting Default
range value
A COPY: OC Copy mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
B COPY: RSPF Copy mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
(;(&87( C SCAN: OC Scanner mode (OC) 1 - 250 196
D SCAN: RSPF Scanner mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
E FAX: OC FAX mode (OC) 1 - 250 196

6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
F FAX: RSPF FAX mode (RSPF) 1 - 250 196
7(67
(1*,1(+$/)721($872$'-8670(1702'(5(*8/$5
3/($6(3/$&(35,17('7(673$7&+21'2&80(17*/$667+(135(66>(;(&87(@

/,*+7$5($$7/()76,'(21'2&80(17*/$66
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/,0,72)$(5($&7,216(77,1*
$ &23<2&
$ % &23<563)
& 6&$12&
' 6&$1563)
2.
(;(&87(
46-37 Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A 200 x 100 [DPI] 200 x 100 [DPI] 0-2 1
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the reproducibility of the OFF half tone OFF
scan image color document (copy, image B 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
send mode). (N model only) OFF half tone OFF
Section C 200 x 200 [DPI] 200 x 200 [DPI] 0-2 1
ON half tone ON
Operation/Procedure
D 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. OFF half tone OFF
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E 200 x 400 [DPI] 200 x 400 [DPI] 0-2 1
3) Press [EXECUTE] key. ON half tone ON
F 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
4) Press [YES] key.
OFF half tone OFF
This simulation is used to adjust the reproducibility of red and yel- G 400 x 400 [DPI] 400 x 400[DPI] 0-2 1
low images when copy a color document of red and yellow images ON half tone ON
in the monochrome mode. H 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
OFF half tone OFF
Setting Default I 600 x 600 [DPI] 600 x 600[DPI] 0-2 1
range value ON half tone ON
A R-Ratio Gray making setting (R) 0 - 1000 303
B G-Ratio Gray making setting (G) 0 - 1000 697

6,08/$7,2112
* B-Ratio: The value of gray making setting (B) is obtained from 7(67
,0$*(6(1'6+$531(66$'-8670(17
&/26(
the formula below. $ h>'3,@2))

$
1000-R-Ratio - G-Ratio % h>'3,@2))
& h>'3,@21

When [DEFAULT] key is pressed, the values are set to the initial ' h>'3,@2))
values (default). ( h>'3,@21
) h>'3,@2))
When the adjustment values of items A and B are decreased, the * h>'3,@21
copy density of yellow images is increased. When the adjustment + h>'3,@2))
values are increased, the density is decreased. , h>'3,@21
When the adjustment value of item A is decreased and the adjust-

ment value of item B is increased, the copy density of red images is
increased. When the adjustment value of item A is increased and 2.
the adjustment value of item B is decreased, the copy density is

decreased.
46-40

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment
% :,0$*(&5($7($'-8670(17%5DWLR
$ 55DWLR Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
$ % *5DWLR
(Collective adjustment of all the modes)

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the original on the original table.
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
'()$8/7 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default
range value
A EXPOSURE Used to adjust the FAX 1 - 99 50
46-39
LEVEL(ALL) send image density.
Purpose Adjustment (Collective adjustment of all
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the sharpness of FAX send the modes)
images.
Section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Operation/Procedure (;32685($'-8670(17)$;$//
$ (;32685(/(9(/$//
1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel. $

Input large numeric value to obtain crispy image. Input small
numeric value to decrease moire.
(;(&87( 2.
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Adjustment H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 1/ 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. Half tone
(Normal) I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 2/ 1 - 99 50
Half tone
Section
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 3/ 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure Half tone
1) Set the original on the original table. K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 4/ 1 - 99 50
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Half tone
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Fine/Exposure 5/ 1 - 99 50
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key Half tone
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set M EXECUTE AUTO Print Fine/Auto 1- 1 1
and the scanned document image is outputted. MODE EXP1 mode Fine/ 12 2 (AUTO)
Exposure 1
Setting Default EXP2 Fine/ 3
range value Exposure 2
A AUTO Auto 1 - 99 50 EXP3 Fine/ 4
B EXPOSURE1 Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Exposure 3
C EXPOSURE2 Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 EXP4 Fine/ 5
D EXPOSURE3 Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Exposure 4
E EXPOSURE4 Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 EXP5 Fine/ 6
F EXPOSURE5 Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Exposure 5
G EXECUTE AUTO Print Auto 1-6 1 1 AUTO Fine/ 7
MODE EXP1 mode Exposure 1 2 (AUTO) H_TONE Automatic/
EXP2 Exposure 2 3 halftone
EXP3 Exposure 3 4 EXP1 Fine/ 8
H_TONE Exposure 1
EXP4 Exposure 4 5
/Half tone
EXP5 Exposure 5 6
EXP2 Fine/ 9
To check the adjustment density level of items A - F, set the docu- H_TONE Exposure 2
/Half tone
ment and set the setting value of item G according to items A - F,
EXP3 Fine/ 10
and press [EXECUTE] key.
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
EXP4 Fine/ 11
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;1250$/ H_ONE Exposure 4
$ $872
/Half tone
$ % (;32685(
EXP5 Fine/ 12
& (;32685(
' (;32685(

H_TONE Exposure 5
( (;32685( /Half tone
) (;32685(
* (;(&87(02'($872 To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L,

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;(&87( 2.
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;),1(
$ $872
$ % (;32685(
& (;32685(

46-42 ' (;32685(
Purpose Adjustment ( (;32685(
) (;32685(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. * $872+B721(
(Fine) + (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
Section - (;32685(+B721(
Operation/Procedure . (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(
1) Set the original on the original table. (;(&87( 2.

3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set 46-43
and the scanned document image is outputted. Purpose Adjustment
Setting Default Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
Item/Display Content (Super Fine)
range value
A AUTO Fine/Automatic 1 - 99 50 Section
B EXPOSURE1 Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
C EXPOSURE2 Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
1) Set the original on the original table.
D EXPOSURE3 Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50
E EXPOSURE4 Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
F EXPOSURE5 Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
G AUTO H_TONE Fine/Automatic/ 1 - 99 50 When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
Half tone and the scanned document image is outputted.
Setting Default 46-44
range value
Purpose Adjustment
A AUTO Super Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
B EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density.
C EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 (Ultra fine)
D EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Section
E EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
F EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 1) Set the original on the original table.
G AUTO H_TONE Super Fine 1 - 99 50
/Auto/Half tone
H EXPOSURE1 Super Fine/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key
H_TONE /Half tone When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set
I EXPOSURE2 Super Fine/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 and the scanned document image is outputted.
H_TONE /Half tone
J EXPOSURE3 Super Fine/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 Setting Default
H_TONE /Half tone range value
K EXPOSURE4 Super Fine/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 A AUTO Ultra Fine/Auto 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Half tone B EXPOSURE1 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
L EXPOSURE5 Super Fine/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 1
H_TONE /Half tone C EXPOSURE2 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
M EXECUTE AUTO Print Super Fine 1- 1 1 2
MODE mode /Auto 12 (AUTO) D EXPOSURE3 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP1 Super Fine 2 3
/Exposure 1 E EXPOSURE4 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Super Fine 3 4
/Exposure 2 F EXPOSURE5 Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP3 Super Fine 4 5
/Exposure 3 G AUTO H_TONE Ultra Fine/Auto/Half 1 - 99 50
EXP4 Super Fine 5 tone
/Exposure 4 H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP5 Super Fine 6 1/Half tone
/Exposure 5 I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
AUTO Super Fine 7 2/Half tone
H_TONE /Auto J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
/Half tone 3/Half tone
EXP1 Super Fine 8 K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
H_TONE /Exposure 1 4/Half tone
/Half tone L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE Ultra Fine/Exposure 1 - 99 50
EXP2 Super Fine 9 5/Half tone
H_TONE /Exposure 2 M EXECUTE AUTO Print Ultra Fine/ 1- 1 1
/Half tone MODE mode Auto 12 (AUTO)
EXP3 Super Fine 10 EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 2
H_TONE /Exposure 3 Exposure 1
/Half tone
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 3
EXP4 Super Fine 11 Exposure 2
H_TONE /Exposure 4
EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 4
/Half tone
Exposure 3
EXP5 Super Fine 12
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 5
H_TONE /Exposure 5
Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 6
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu- Exposure 5
ment and set the setting value of item M according to items A - L, AUTO Ultra Fine/ 7
H_TONE Auto/Half
tone
EXP1 Ultra Fine/ 8

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
H_TONE Exposure
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;683(5),1( 1/Half tone
$ $872
$
EXP2 Ultra Fine/ 9
% (;32685(
H_TONE Exposure 2
& (;32685(
' (;32685(
/Half tone
( (;32685( EXP3 Ultra Fine/ 10
) (;32685( H_TONE Exposure 3
* $872+B721(
/Half tone
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
EXP4 Ultra Fine/ 11
- (;32685(+B721(
H_TONE Exposure 4
. (;32685(+B721( /Half tone
/ (;32685(+B721( EXP5 Ultra Fine/ 12
(;(&87( 2. H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

To check the adjustment density level of items A - L, set the docu-

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;8/75$),1(
$ $872
$ (;32685(
& (;32685(

' (;32685( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
( (;32685(
(;32685($'-8670(17)$;'3,
) (;32685(
$ $872
$872+B721(
$ % (;32685(
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721( & (;32685(
- (;32685(+B721( ' (;32685(
. (;32685(+B721(
( (;32685(
/ (;32685(+B721(
) (;32685(
(;(&87( 2.
* $872+B721(
+ (;32685(+B721(
, (;32685(+B721(
46-45 - (;32685(+B721(
Purpose Adjustment . (;32685(+B721(
/ (;32685(+B721(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the FAX send image density. (;(&87( 2.
(600dpi).
Section
1) Set the original on the original table. Purpose Setting
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the compression rate of copy
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key and scan images (JPEG).
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment value is set Section
and the scanned document image is outputted.
Operation/Procedure
Setting Default 1) Select a target item with [] [] keys on the touch panel.
range value 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
A AUTO 600dpi/Auto 1 1 - 99 50 3) Press [OK] key.
B EXPOSURE1 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50
The set value is saved.
C EXPOSURE2 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50
D EXPOSURE3 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 [N model]
E EXPOSURE4 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 Operation Setting Default
F EXPOSURE5 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 Item/Display Content
mode range value
G AUTO H_TONE 600dpi/Auto 1 - 99 50 (COLOR) A COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
/Half tone 1 (Document (C) com-
H EXPOSURE1 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 1 1 - 99 50 filing (COLOR pression
/Half tone mode)) (Color)
I EXPOSURE2 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 2 1 - 99 50 MIDDLE Medium 1
/Half tone com-
J EXPOSURE3 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 3 1 - 99 50 pression
/Half tone (Color)
K EXPOSURE4 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 4 1 - 99 50 HIGH High 2
/Half tone com-
L EXPOSURE5 H_TONE 600dpi/Exposure 5 1 - 99 50 pression
/Half tone (Color)
M EXECUTE AUTO Print 600dpi/Auto 1- 1 1 LOWER Super 3
MODE EXP1 mode 600dpi/ 12 2 (AUTO) low com-
Exposure 1 pression
EXP2 600dpi/ 3 (Color)
Exposure 2 COPY B COPY LOW Low 0 0 (LOW)
EXP3 600dpi/ 4 (GRAY) (G) com-
Exposure 3 (Copy/ pression
Document (Gray)
EXP4 600dpi/ 5
filing MIDDLE Medium 1
Exposure 4
(Monochrome com-
EXP5 600dpi/ 6
half-tone pression
Exposure 5
mode)) (Gray)
AUTO 600dpi/Auto/ 7
HIGH High 2
H_TONE Half tone
com-
EXP1 600dpi/ 8
pression
H_TONE Exposure 1
(Gray)
/Half tone
LOWER Super 3
EXP2 600dpi/ 9
low com-
H_TONE Exposure 2
pression
/Half tone
(Gray)
EXP3 600dpi/ 10
H_TONE Exposure 3
/Half tone
EXP4 600dpi/ 11
H_TONE Exposure 4
/Half tone
EXP5 600dpi/ 12
H_TONE Exposure 5
/Half tone
Operation Setting Default [U model] (Enable when the HDD is installed)
mode range value Operation Setting Default
PUSH SCAN C SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0 Item/Display Content
mode range value
(COLOR) (C) 1 com- (MIDDLE COPY A COPY LOW Low com- 0 0
(Scanner (*1) pression 1) (GRAY) (G) pression (LOW)
(Color mode)) mode 1 (Copy gray) (Gray)
Low (Scanner MIDDLE Medium 1
com- (Monochrome com-
pression half-tone pression
MIDDLE Medium 1 mode)) (Gray)
2 com-
HIGH High com- 2
pression
pression
mode 2
(Gray)
Medium
LOWER Super low 3
com-
com-
pression
pression
MIDDLE Medium 2
(Gray)
3 com-
pression
mode 3

High 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
com-
&23<6&$1&2035(665$7($'-8670(17
pression
$ &23<*/2:
PUSH SCAN D SCAN MIDDLE Medium 0 0 $
(GRAY) (G) 1 com- (MIDDLE
(Scanner (*1) pression 1)
(Monochrome mode 1
2.
half-tone Low
mode)) com-
pression
MIDDLE Medium 1 46-48
2 com-
pression
Purpose Setting
mode 2 Function (Purpose) Used to set the output resolution in each
Medium copy mode. (N model only)
com-
pression
Section
MIDDLE Medium 2 Operation/Procedure
3 com- 1) Select the output resolution of each copy mode with the key.
pression
In order to change the reproducibility of line images, change
mode 3
High
this setting.
com- 600dpi mode: Line images becomes thicker. The reproducibility of
pression line images is increased.
*1: Setting of compression rate for images when the image com- 1200dpi mode: Line images are reproduced finer than 600dpi
pression rate is set to "Medium" in the user mode. mode.
NOTE: When the compression rate is increased, the HDD capacity Button Default
in the document filing mode is decreased. On the other hand, how- Item Content
display value
ever, the image quality of some documents may be remarkably AUTO 600DPI Automatic 600DPI
reduced. 1200DPI*
TEXT 600DPI Text 600DPI

1200DPI*
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23<6&$10)335,17&2035(665$7($'-8670(17 TEXT PRT 600DPI Text printed photo 600DPI
$ &23<&/2:
1200DPI*
$ % &23<*/2:
TEXT PHOTO 600DPI Text photograph 1200DPI
& 6&$1&0,''/(
' 6&$1*0,''/( 1200DPI*

PRINTED PHOTO 600DPI Printed photo 1200DPI
1200DPI*
PHOTO 600DPI Photograph 1200DPI
1200DPI*
MAP 600DPI Map 600DPI
1200DPI*
2.
* The 1200dpi mode is available only for the N model.
[Displayed only N model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
)81&7,216(77,1*)25&23<287387
$872 '3, '3,
7(;7 '3, '3,
7(;7357 '3, '3,
7(;73+272 '3, '3,
35,17('3+272 '3, '3,
3+272 '3, '3,
0$3 '3, '3,

46-51
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma for the copy
mode heavy paper mode and the image
process mode (manual adjustment).
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with the touch panel key Item/Display Content
[PAPER/DITHER]. HEAVY Heavy paper
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the 600ED Error diffusion
touch panel. (600dpi)
1200ED Error diffusion
(N model only) (1200dpi)
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, or [OK] key. DITH1 600dpi Dither For PRINTED PHOTO/
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the self print image is out- PHOTO MODE
putted. DITH2 1200dpi For TEXT PRINTED PHOTO /
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no (N model only) dither TEXT PHOTO / PRINTED PHOTO
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. MODE
DITH3 1200dpi For PHOTO MODE
When the image density is insufficient or a background copy is (N model only) dither
made in heavy paper copy, change this adjustment value to adjust
the image density.
Item/Display Density level (Point) Setting range HEAVY 600ED 1200ED DITH1 DITH2 DITH3
A POINT1 Point 1 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
B POINT2 Point 2 245 - 755 500 500 507 500 517 514
C POINT3 Point 3 245 - 755 500 501 526 499 523 525
D POINT4 Point 4 245 - 755 500 501 537 499 525 527
E POINT5 Point 5 245 - 755 500 502 564 498 533 531
F POINT6 Point 6 245 - 755 500 503 579 498 540 532
G POINT7 Point 7 245 - 755 500 508 594 498 549 529
H POINT8 Point 8 245 - 755 500 513 579 508 526 506
I POINT9 Point 9 245 - 755 500 489 522 519 481 473
J POINT10 Point 10 245 - 755 500 465 451 532 459 491
K POINT11 Point 11 245 - 755 500 451 398 528 483 522
L POINT12 Point 12 245 - 755 500 437 357 546 492 555
M POINT13 Point 13 245 - 755 500 416 325 567 474 543
N POINT14 Point 14 245 - 755 500 410 306 558 449 511
O POINT15 Point 15 245 - 755 500 408 303 536 425 477
P POINT16 Point 16 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500
Q POINT17 Point 17 245 - 755 500 500 500 500 500 500

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
&23,(5+($9<3$3(5*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
& 32,17

' 32,17
( 32,17
) 32,17
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
3$3(5',7+(5 (;(&87( 2.
Setting Default
range value
Purpose Data clear/Reset G SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the gamma default for the copy ADJUST [BK/CL] adjustment:
mode heavy paper and the image process Chroma/Achroma
judgment
mode. (The set values of SIM46-51 are set
to the default values.) H SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [TXT ON adjustment:
Section BG] Text on background
Operation/Procedure I SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3
ADJUST [SCR] adjustment:
1) Select an item to be set to the default with the touch panel key.
Dot
To reset the adjustment values of all the items, select [ALL].

3) Press [YES] key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6(*0(17/(9(/$'-8670(17
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. $ 6(*0(176:,7&+>7;7216&5@
$ % 6(*0(176:,7&+>/,1(6&5@
& 6(*0(176:,7&+>60$//6&5@
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ' 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7@
&23<&$/,%5$7,21'$7$&/($5$7',7+(5 ( 6(*0(17$'-867>&/7;7@
+($9<3$3(5 (' (' ',7+ ) 6(*0(17$'-867>%.7;7&/7;7@
* 6(*0(17$'-867>%.&/@
',7+ ',7+
+ 6(*0(17$'-867>7;721%*@
, 6(*0(17$'-867>6&5@
2.
46-63
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the density in the low den-
sity area of a scan image. (N model only)
46-61
Section
Purpose Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the area separation recogni-
tion level in the image send mode (color, 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
gray, auto exposure mode). (N model only) panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
Section
3) Press [OK] key.
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
adjustment value is decreased, reproducibility of the background
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key. and the low density image is decreased.
3) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
NOTE: The set value may be changed for a design change or an Item/Display Content
range value
A COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text print 1-9 3
ever, the set value must not be changed. If it is changed, a PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
trouble may be occur. B COLOR PUSH: TEXT Text (Color PUSH) 1-9 3
When the adjustment value is changed greatly from the ini- C COLOR PUSH: Printed photo 1-9 5
tial value, an image quality trouble may occur. PRINTED PHOTO (Color PUSH)
D COLOR PUSH: Photograph 1-9 5
Setting Default PHOTOGRAPH (Color PUSH)
range value E COLOR PUSH: TEXT/ Text photograph 1-9 3
A SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 PHOTO (Color PUSH)
SWITCH [TXT ON Text on dot F COLOR PUSH: MAP Map (Color PUSH) 1-9 5
SCR] G COLOR PUSH: AUTO Automatic 1-9 5
B SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0 (Color PUSH)
SWITCH [LINE SCR] line screen
C SEGMENT: Detection ON/OFF: 0-1 0
SWITCH [SMALL Dot in a small area

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
SCR] %*5(029($'-8670(17
D SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 $ &2/25386+7(;735,17('3+272
$
ADJUST [BK TXT 1] adjustment: % &2/25386+7(;7
& &2/25386+35,17('3+272
Black text 1
' &2/25386+3+272*5$3+
E SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3 ( &2/25386+7(;73+272
ADJUST [CL TXT 1] adjustment: ) &2/25386+0$3
Color text 1 * &2/25386+$872
F SEGMENT: Detection level 1-5 3

ADJUST [BK TXT 2, adjustment:
CL TXT 2] Black text 2, Color
text 2
2.
Setting Default
46-64 Item Button Display Content
range value
Purpose Adjustment A COLOR LUMINANCE Luminance 0-4 2
Function (Purpose) Used to set the image process mode in ADJUSTMENT adjustment
each copy mode. B CHROMA Chroma 0-2 1
INTENT selection
Section
C NEUTRAL Neutral 0-2 0
Operation/Procedure ADJUSTMENT adjustment
1) Select a target mode of setting with [] [] key on the touch D R-RATIO Gray scale 0- 299
panel. ADJUSTMENT adjustment (R) 1000
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. E G-RATIO Gray scale 0- 587
ADJUSTMENT adjustment (G) 1000
3) Press [OK] key. A BG BG LAYER Speed priority 0-2 1
0: Error diffusion process 1: Dither pattern process LAYER INTENT 1 setting
B BG LAYER Image quality 0-2 1
Setting Default INTENT 2 priority setting
range value
A TEXT/PRINTED Text print 0-1 0
PHOTO

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
B PRINTED PHOTO Printed photo 0-1 1 &203$&73')6(77,1*6
C PHOTOGRAPH Photograph 0-1 1 $ */<3+6(16,7,9,7<

$ % %*6:)25),1'/,1(6
D TEXT/PHOTO Text photograph 0-1 1
& +25),1'/,1(66:
E TEXT/PRINTED Text print: Toner save 0-1 0 9(57),1'/,1(66:
PHOTO (TS) ( )*&2/25,1'(;,1*6(/
F TEXT/PHOTO (TS) Text photograph: 0-1 1 ) )*&2/25,1'(;,1*$'-
Toner save

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
+$/)721(6(/(&7',7+(5('
$ 7(;735,17('3+272 7(;7 &2/25 %*/$<(5 2.
$ % 35,17('3+272
& 3+272*5$3+
' 7(;73+272
( 7(;735,17('3+27276
) 7(;73+27276
48
48-1
Purpose Adjustment
2. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the scan image magnifica-
tion ratio (in the main scanning direction
and the sub scanning direction).
46-90 Section Scanner
Purpose Adjustment Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to set the process operation of high- 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
compression PDF images. (N model only) panel.
Section 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Operation/Procedure 3) Press [OK] key.
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [TEXT], [COLOR] and The set value is saved.
[BG LAYER] keys. When the adjustment value is increased, the image magnification
2) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key. ratio is increased.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item A, C or E corre-
sponds to a change of about 0.02% in the copy magnification ratio.
4) Press [OK] key.
A change of "1" in the adjustment value of item B or D corresponds
The set value is saved.
to a change of about 0.1% in the copy magnification ratio.

Setting Default [DSPF-installed model]
range value
Setting Default
A TEXT GLYPH Text handling 0-2 0 Item/Display Content
range value
SENSITIVITY selection
B BG SW FOR Line handling 0-1 0
magnification ratio
FINDLINES selection
adjustment (CCD)
C HOR Line detection 0-2 0
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50
FINDLINES SW SW (H)
magnification ratio
D VERT Line detection 0-2 0
adjustment (CCD)
FINDLINES SW SW (V)
C SPF(MAIN) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
E FGCOLOR Text color 0-3 0
INDEXING SEL number
adjustment SW
D SPF(SUB) DSPF document front 1 - 99 50
F FGCOLOR Text color 0-4 2
INDEXING ADJ adjustment
Setting Default When there is an error in the image magnification ratio in reduction,
Item/Display Content change the adjustment value in the high speed mode. When there
range value
E SPFB(MAIN) DSPF document back 1 - 99 50 is an error in the image magnification ratio in enlargement, change
surface magnification ratio the adjustment value in the low speed mode.
Setting Default
range value

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
A MR (HI) Scanner motor (High speed) 1 - 99 50
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17 B MR(MID) Scanner motor 1 - 99 50
$ &&'0$,1
$
(Reference speed)
% &&'68%
& 63)0$,1

C MR(LO) Scanner motor (Low speed) 1 - 99 50
' 63)68% D SPF(HI) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
( 63)%0$,1 (High speed)
E SPF(MID) Document feed (SPF) motor 1 - 99 50
(Reference speed)
Scan speed
Reference speed
Unit
2. HI MID LO
OC 346.0mm/s 173.0mm/s 86.5mm/s
RSPF 259.5mm/s 173.0mm/s
[RSPF-installed model] DSPF 346.0mm/s 173.0mm/s
Setting Default
Item/Display Content [DSPF-installed model]
range value
magnification ratio

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (CCD) 0272563(('$'-8670(17
B CCD(SUB) SCAN sub scanning 1 - 99 50 $ 05+,

$
magnification ratio % 050,'
& 05/2
adjustment (CCD)
' 63)+,
C SPF(MAIN) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50 ( 63)0,'
D SPF(SUB) RSPF document front 1 - 99 50
E SPFB(MAIN) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50
surface magnification ratio 2.

F SPFB(SUB) RSPF document back 1 - 99 50 [RSPF-installed model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0272563(('$'-8670(17
6,08/$7,2112 $ 05+,

7(67 &/26(
$ % 050,'
0$*1,),&$7,21$'-8670(17
$ &&'0$,1 & 05/2

$ % &&'68% ' 63)+,
2.
& 63)0$,1
' 63)68%
2.
48-6
Purpose Adjustment
48-5 Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the rotation speed of each
Purpose Adjustment motor.
Function (Purpose) Used to correction the scan image magnifi- Section
cation ratio (in the sub scanning direction). Operation/Procedure
Section Scanner 1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch
Operation/Procedure panel.
1) Select a target adjustment item with [] [] key on the touch 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
panel. 3) Press [OK] key.
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. The set value is saved.
3) Press [OK] key. When the adjustment value is increased, the speed is increased,
The set value is saved. and vice versa. A change of 1 in the adjustment value corresponds
When the image magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is to a change of about 0.1% in the speed.
adjusted with SIM48-1, and a different magnification ratio is speci-
fied, and the image magnification ratio is not satisfactory, perform
this adjustment.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content A4LCC (BOOT) Side LCC (A4) Boot section
range value
A RRM Resist motor correction value 1 - 99 47 A4LCC (MAIN) Side LCC (A4) main section
B DVM_K Developing K motor correction 1 - 99 41 FIN (BOOT) Inner finisher BOOT section
(DM) value FIN (MAIN) Inner finisher MAIN section
C FSM (FUM) Fusing motor correction value 1 - 99 56 1KFIN (BOOT) 1K finisher Boot section
D PFM Paper transport motor correction 1 - 99 50 1KFIN (MAIN) 1K finisher Main section
value 4KFIN(BOOT) 4K finisher Boot section
E POM Paper exit motor correction value 1 - 99 51 4KFIN(MAIN) 4K finisher Main section
F FUSER Fusing speed select timing 1 - 99 50 1KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
SETTING 1KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
G RRM RRM speed increasing start 0 - 255 0 4KPUNCH (BOOT) Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
START timing 4KPUNCH (MAIN) Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
H RRM END RRM speed increasing end timing 0 - 255 38 SCU (BOOT) SCU Boot section
SCU (MAIN) SCU Main section
NOTE: This must be set to the default unless any change is spe-
DSPF (BOOT) DSPF Boot section (DSPF-installed model only)
cially required.
DSPF (MAIN) DSPF Main section (DSPF-installed model only)
When the adjustment value is set to a value greatly differ- FAX (BOOT) FAX1 Boot section
ent from the default value, a jam, paper wrinkle, or image FAX(MAIN) FAX1 Main section
quality trouble may occur. ESCP_FONT ESC/P font
PDL_FONT PDL font

ANIMATION Animation data
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
9(/2&,7<$'-8670(17 IMAGE_DATA MFP ASIC data
$ 550
WEB HELP WEB help
$ % '90B.'0
& )60)80

UNICODE UNICODE table
' 3)0 ACRE (BOOT) ACRE Boot section (N model only)
( 320 ACREM (MAIN) ACRE Main section (N model only)
) )86(56(77,1*
ACRE_DATA ACRE table (N model only)
* 55067$57
+ 550(1'
List of error displays in case of abnormal end
CONF Configuration data
&2/25 0212 +($9< 2.
ICUM ICU Main section former half
ICUBM ICU Boot section main
ICUCN ICU Boot section CN
LANG Language support data program (General term)
49 GRAPH Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD
PCUB PCU Boot section
49-1
PCUM PCU Main section
Purpose Version upgrade DESKB Desk unit BOOT section
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the firmware update. DESKM Desk unit MAIN section
LCC4B Side LCC (A4) Boot section
Section
LCC4M Side LCC (A4) main section
Operation/Procedure FINB Inner finisher BOOT section
1) Save the firmware to the USB memory. FINM Inner finisher MAIN section
2) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. (Use USB I/F of the FIN1B 1K finisher Boot section
operation panel section.) FIN1M 1K finisher Main section
3) Select a target firmware file for update with the touch panel. FIN4B 4K finisher Boot section
FIN4M 4K finisher Main section
4) Select a target firmware.
1PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 1K finisher
Press [ALL] key to select all the Firmware collectively. 1PUNM Punch unit Main section for 1K finisher
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. 4PUNB Punch unit Boot section for 4K finisher
6) Press [YES] key. 4PUNM Punch unit Main section for 4K finisher
The selected firmware is updated. SCUB SCU Boot section
SCUM SCU Main section
When the operation is normally completed, "COMPLETE" is
DSPFB DSPF Boot section (DSPF-installed model only)
displayed. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is dis-
DSPFM DSPF Main section (DSPF-installed model only)
played.
FAXB FAX1 Boot section
Item/Display Content FAXM FAX1 Main section
CONFIG Configuration data ESCP ESC/P font
ICU (MAIN) ICU Main section former half PDL PDL font
ICU (BOOTM) ICU Boot section main ANIME Animation data
ICU (BOOTCN) ICU Boot section CN IMGDT Image ASIC data
LANGUAGE Language support data program (General term) WEBHP WEB help
GRAPHIC Graphic data for L-LCD UNICD UNICODE table
SLIST SLIST data for L-LCD ACREB ACRE Boot section (N model only)
PCU (BOOT) PCU Boot section ACREM ACRE Main section (N model only)
PCU (MAIN) PCU Main section ACRED ACRE table (N model only)
DESK (BOOT) Desk unit BOOT section
DESK (MAIN) Desk unit MAIN section

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@ :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
',5!:0

49-3
Purpose Install 50
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the Operation
Manual data stored in the HDD. 50-1
(N model only)
Purpose Adjustment
Section
Function (Purpose) Copy image position, image loss adjust-
Operation/Procedure ment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
Section
* When the USB is not inserted, "INSERT A STORANGE E-
Operation/Procedure
MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] key is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder select menu 1. 1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch
panel.
2) Press the folder button of the operation manual data. (The dis-
play is shifted to the operation manual update menu.) 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
The current version and the update version are displayed. Set the items other than RRCA, LEAD, and SIDE to the
default.
RRCA: Image lead edge reference position adjustment
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted, and [YES] [NO] keys becomes
active from gray out. LEAD: Lead edge image loss adjustment
4) When [YES] key is pressed, the selected operation manual is SIDE: Side image loss adjustment
updated. 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When update is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is dis-
Setting Default
played. When terminated abnormally, "ERROR" is displayed. Item/Display Content
range value
A Lead RRCA Document lead 0 - 99 50

edge edge reference
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@ adjust- position (OC)
',5!)2/'(5 ),/( B ment RRCB-CS12 Resist Standard 1 - 99 50
),/( ',5!)2/'(5 value motor Tray
',5!0$18$/
C RRCB-CS34 ON Desk 1 - 99 50
D RRCB-LCC timing LCC 1 - 99 50
E RRCB-MFT adjust- Manual 1 - 99 50
ment paper
feed
F RRCB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
G Image LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
loss area loss area setting

H setting SIDE Side image loss 0 - 99 20
value area adjustment
I Void area DENA Lead edge void 1 - 99 30
adjust- area adjustment
49-5
J ment DENB Rear edge void 1 - 99 30
Purpose Install area adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to install and update the watermark K FRONT/ FRONT/REAR 1 - 99 20
data stored in the HDD. REAR void area
adjustment
Section
L Off- OFFSET OC document off- 1 - 99 50
Operation/Procedure center _OC center adjustment
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. adjust-
ment
2) Select the button of the folder to perform the watermark
M Magnifi- SCAN SCAN sub 1 - 99 50
update.
cation _SPEED scanning
3) The current version and the update version are displayed. ratio _OC magnification ratio
4) Press [EXECUTE] key. correc- adjustment (CCD)
tion
5) Press [YES] key.
The selected watermark is updated.
Setting Default L1: Distance from the lead edge of the copied image to 10mm
Item/Display Content scale.
range value
N Sub DENB-MFT Manual feed 1 - 99 50 L2: Distance from the paper lead edge to the copy image lead
scanning correction value edge.
print area value
P correction DENB-CS2 Tray 2 correction 1 - 99 50 L1
value value
Q DENB-CS3 Tray 3 correction 1 - 99 50 Paper lead
value edge
R DENB-CS4 Tray 4 correction 1 - 99 50
value
S DENB-LCC LCC correction 1 - 99 50
value
T DENB-ADU ADU correction 1 - 99 66
value
A. (RRC-A) Timing from starting document scanning to specifying

the image lead edge reference is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) L2
* When the value is decreased, the timing is advanced. When 400% enlargement copy
the value is increased, the timing is delayed.
B - F. (RRC-B) Timing of paper (resist roller ON) for the image posi-
tion on the transfer belt is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) Fig. 1
* When the value is decreased, the timing is delayed. When the
value is increased, the timing is advanced.
G. (LEAD) The lead edge image loss amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
step) 5) Make a copy at the magnification ratio of 100%, and adjust the
rear edge void.
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased.
H. (SIDE) The side image loss amount is adjusted. Setting Default
Item/Display Description
* When the value is increased, the image loss is increased. range value
(0.1mm/step) A Actual L1 Distance from the 0 - 999 -
measurement image lead edge to
I. (DEN-A) The paper lead edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/
value the scale of 10mm.
step) (Platen 400%,
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. 0.1mm increment)
J. (DEN-B) The paper rear edge void amount is adjusted. (0.1mm/ B L2 Distance from the 0 - 999 0
step) paper lead edge to
the image lead edge
* When the value is increased, the void is increased. (0.1mm increment)
K. (FRONT/REAR) The void amount on the right and left edges of C Image loss LEAD Lead edge image 0 - 99 30
paper is adjusted. (0.1mm/step) area setting loss amount setting
value (When the

adjustment value is
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( increased, the image
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ 55&$
loss is increased.)
$ % 55&%&6 D SIDE Side edge image 0 - 99 20
& 55&%&6 loss amount setting
' 55&%/&& (When the
( 55&%0)7
adjustment value is
) 55&%$'8
increased, the image
* /($'
+ 6,'(
loss is increased.)
, '(1$ E Void area DENA Lead edge void area 1 - 99 30
- '(1% adjustment adjustment (When
. )52175($5 the adjustment value
/ 2))6(7B2&
is increased, the
2.
void is increased.)
F DENB Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30
adjustment (When
50-2 the adjustment value
is increased, the
Purpose Adjustment void is increased.)
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and G FRONT/ FRONT/REAR void 1 - 99 20
the image loss (simple adjustment). REAR amount adjustment
(When the
Section adjustment value is
Operation/Procedure increased, the void
1) Set item A (L1) and item B (L2) to 0. is increased.)
2) Place a rule on the left edge of the document table, and make Same as the adjusted items of SIM50-01 except for A and B.
a copy at a magnification ratio of 400%.
The values adjusted with A and B are reflected to the document
3) Measure the length of L1 and L2 on the copied image in the lead edge reference position (RRC-A) of SIM50-01 and all the
unit of 0.1mm (referring to the figure below). Enter the adjust- paper lead edge positions (RRCB-**).
ment values of L1 x 10 and L2 x 10. Be sure to enter the both
All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
adjustment values of L1 and L2.

50-5
6,08/$7,2112
7(67
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(&$/&
&/26(
Purpose Adjustment
$
$ /
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the print lead edge image
% /
& /($'

position. (PRINTER MODE)
' 6,'(
Section
( '(1$
) '(1% Operation/Procedure

* )52175($5
1) Select a target adjustment item (DEN-C) with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
2) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
(;(&87(
The set value is saved, and the adjustment check pattern is
printed.
4) Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Standard reference value: 3.02.0mm
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the
adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by
about 0.1mm.
Setting Default
Item/Display Content NOTE
range value
A DEN-C Used to adjust the print 1 - 99 30 Adjustment value too align the print lead edge for the printer. When the
lead edge image adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the printer print start position
position. in the paper transport direction is shifted to the lead edge by 0.1mm.
(PRINTER MODE)
B DEN-B Rear edge void area 1 - 99 30 Void amount generated at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment value
adjustment of item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the print area adjustment value in the
sub scanning direction for the paper transport direction is decreased by
0.1mm.
C FRONT/REAR FRONT/REAR void area 1 - 99 20 Adjustment of the void amount generated on the left and right edges of paper.
adjustment When the adjustment value is increased, the void amount is increased.
D DENB-MFT Manual feed rear edge 1 - 99 50 Fine adjustment value of each paper feed source for the adjustment value of
void area adjustment DEN-B
correction value
E DENB-CS1 Tray 1 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
F DENB-CS2 Tray 2 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
G DENB-CS3 Tray 3 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
H DENB-CS4 Tray 4 rear edge void 1 - 99 50
area adjustment
correction value
I DENB-LCC LCC rear edge void aria 1 - 99 50
adjustment correction
value
J DENB-ADU ADU rear edge void aria 1 - 99 66
adjustment correction
value
K MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
L PAPER MFT Tray Manual 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
selection paper feed
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
M DUPLEX YES Duplex Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO print No 1
selection
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When the adjustment
value is decreased, the distance from the paper lead edge to the image lead edge is decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed by about 0.1mm.
Item E - H: When a shadow image appears on the rear edge,

increase the adjustment value to delete the shadow.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(35,17(5 All adjustment items: 1 step = 0.1mm change
$ '(1&
$ % '(1%
& )52175($5

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
' '(1%0)7
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
( '(1%&6
$ 6,'(
) '(1%&6 $
% 6,'(
* '(1%&6
& /($'B('*(6,'(
+ '(1%&6
' )5217B5($56,'(
, '(1%/&&
( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
- '(1%$'8
) /($'B('*(6,'(
. 08/7,&2817
* )5217B5($56,'(
/ 3$3(5&6
+ 75$,/B('*(6,'(
(;(&87( 2.
, 2))6(7B63)
- 2))6(7B63)
. 6&$1B63(('B63)
50-6 2.
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and [RSPF-installed model]
the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode).
Setting Default
Section range value
Operation/Procedure A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50
document scan
position
panel. adjustment (CCD)
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) document scan
position
[DSPF-installed model] adjustment (CCD)
Setting Default C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20
Item/Display Content loss (SIDE1) edge image loss
range value
A SIDE1 Front surface 1 - 99 50 amount amount setting
document scan D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20
position SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount
adjustment (CCD) setting
B SIDE2 Back surface 1 - 99 50 E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30
document scan (SIDE1) edge image loss
position amount setting
adjustment (CCD) F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 20
C Image LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead 0 - 99 20 loss (SIDE2) edge image loss
loss (SIDE1) edge image loss amount amount setting
amount amount setting G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20
D setting FRONT_REAR Front surface side 0 - 99 20 SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount
SIDE1 (SIDE1) image loss amount setting
setting H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 30
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear 0 - 99 30 (SIDE2) edge image loss
(SIDE1) edge image loss amount setting
amount setting I OFFSET_SPF1 RSPF front surface 1 - 99 50
F Image LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead 0 - 99 30 document off-
loss (SIDE2) edge image loss center adjustment
amount amount setting J OFFSET_SPF2 RSPF back 1 - 99 50
G setting FRONT_REAR Back surface side 0 - 99 20 surface document
SIDE2 (SIDE2) image loss amount off-center
setting adjustment
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear 0 - 99 20 K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
(SIDE2) edge image loss front surface
amount setting magnification ratio
I OFFSET_SPF1 DSPF front surface 1 - 99 50 adjustment (Sub
document off- scan)
center adjustment L SCAN_SPEED_SPF2 RSPF document 1 - 99 50
J OFFSET_SPF2 DSPF back 1 - 99 50 back surface
surface document magnification ratio
off-center adjustment (Sub
adjustment scan)
K SCAN_SPEED_SPF1 DSPF document 1 - 99 50
front surface
magnification ratio

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment (Sub
/($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)
scan)
$ 6,'(
$
Item A, B: When the adjustment value is increased, the scan timing % 6,'(
is delayed. & /($'B('*(6,'(

' )5217B5($56,'(
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss 2.
is increased.
50-7
Purpose Adjustment

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the copy image position and /($'('*($'-8670(1763)&$/&
the image loss (DSPF/RSPF mode) (simple $ /

$
adjustment). % /
& /($'B('*(6,'(
Section ' )5217B5($56,'(

( 75$,/B('*(6,'(
Operation/Procedure ) /($'B('*(6,'(
1) Select an adjustment target item with [] [] key on the touch * )5217B5($56,'(
panel. + 75$,/B('*(6,'(
2) Set item A (L4) and item B (L5) to 0.

3) Set the magnification ratio to 200%, and make a copy in the
DSPF/RSPF duplex mode. (;(&87(
4) Measure the size of the printed image. Enter the actual mea-
surement value of distance a (DSPF/RSPF) to L4 and L5 in the
unit of 0.1mm.
(Adjustment value "1" for 0.1mm)
L4: Distance a (DSPF/RSPF front surface: 200%) (unit: 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0.1mm) /($'('*($'-8670(179$/8(63)&$/&
L5: Distance a (DSPF/RSPF back surface: 200%) (unit: $ /

$
0.1mm) % /
& /($'B('*(6,'(
' )5217B5($56,'(
(;(&87(
50-10
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the image off-center posi-
tion. (The adjustment is made separately
for each paper feed section.)
Section
Operation/Procedure
panel.
Distance "a"
Setting Default
range value
A L4 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
0.1mm unit) from the front
surface image lead edge
to the scale of 10mm.
B L5 Distance (SPF 200%, 0 - 999 -
0.1mm unit) from the back
surface image lead edge
to the scale of 10mm.
C LEAD_EDGE Front surface lead edge 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
D FRONT_REAR Front surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE1) loss amount setting
E TRAIL_EDGE Front surface rear edge 0 - 99 30
(SIDE1) image loss amount setting
F LEAD_EDGE Back surface lead edge 0 - 99 DSPF: 30
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting RSPF: 20
G FRONT_REAR Back surface side image 0 - 99 20
(SIDE2) loss amount setting
H TRAIL_EDGE Back surface rear edge 0 - 99 DSPF: 20
(SIDE2) image loss amount setting RSPF: 30
(RSPF only)
Item C - H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss

is increased.
Items C - H are linked with items C - H of SIM50-06.
Default
Item/Display Content Setting range NOTE
value
A BK-MAG Main scan print magnification ratio BK 60 - 140 100 Adjustment Item List
B MAIN-MFT Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Manual paper feed)
C MAIN-CS1 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 1) 1 - 99 50
D MAIN-CS2 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 2) 1 - 99 50
E MAIN-CS3 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 3) 1 - 99 50
F MAIN-CS4 Print off center adjustment value (Tray 4) 1 - 99 50
G MAIN-LCC Print off center adjustment value 1 - 99 50
(Large capacity tray)
H MAIN-ADU Print off center adjustment value (Duplex) 1 - 99 50 Adjustment Item List
(NOTE) If the adjustment items A - G are
not properly adjusted, this adjustment
cannot be executed properly.
I SUB-MFT Resist motor ON Manual paper feed 1 - 99 50
J SUB-CS12 timing adjustment Standard cassette 1 - 99 50
K SUB-CS34 DESK 1 - 99 50
L SUB-LCC LCC 1 - 99 50
M SUB-ADU ADU 1 - 99 50
N MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1 Adjustment pattern print conditions setting
O PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
P DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
Item A: When the set value is increased, the BK image magnification ratio in the main scanning direction is increased. When the set value is
decreased, the image magnification ratio is decreased.
Item B - H: When the adjustment value is increased, it is shifted to the front frame side. When the adjustment value is decreased, it is shifted to
the rear frame side.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$3(5&(17(52))6(76(783
$ %.0$*
$
% 0$,10)7
& 0$,1&6
' 0$,1&6
( 0$,1&6
) 0$,1&6
* 0$,1/&&
+ 0$,1$'8
, 68%0)7
- 68%&6
. 68%&6
/ 68%/&&
(;(&87( 2.
50-12 Setting Default

range value
Purpose Adjustment
A OC Document table image off- 1 - 99 50
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scan image off-center center adjustment
position adjustment. (The adjustment is B SPF(SIDE1) SPF front surface image off- 1 - 99 50
made separately for each scan mode.) center adjustment
Section C SPF(SIDE2) SPF back surface image off- 1 - 99 50
center adjustment
Operation/Procedure
panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
2) Enter the set value with 10-key. 25,*,1$/&(17(52))6(76(783
$ 2&
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $ % 63)6,'(
When the adjustment value is increased, the image position is & 63)6,'(
shifted to the rear frame side. When the adjustment value is

decreased, it is shifted to the front frame side.
1step = 0.1mm
2.
50-27
Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the image loss adjustment
of scanned images in the FAX or image
send mode.
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment mode with [FAX] or [SCANNER]
key.
panel.

FAX send A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
B amount setting FRONT_REAR (OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
C OC TRAIL_EDGE (OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
E amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 20 (2mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 30 (3mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 DSPF: 30 (3mm)
amount setting RSPF: 20 (2mm)
H SPF SIDE2 FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 DSPF: 20 (2mm)
RSPF: 20 (2mm)
I TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 DSPF: 20 (2mm)
RSPF: 30 (3mm)
When image A Image loss LEAD_EDGE (OC) OC lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
send mode B amount setting FRONT_REAR(OC) OC side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
(Except for C OC TRAIL_EDGE(OC) OC rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
FAX and D Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
copy) amount setting
E FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1) Front surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
F SPF SIDE1 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1) Front surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
G Image loss LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface lead edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
H amount setting FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2) Back surface side image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
I SPF SIDE2 TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2) Back surface rear edge image loss amount setting 0 - 100 0 (0mm)
A-I: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is increased.
1step = 0.1mm
[DSPF-installed model] [RSPF-installed model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
6&$11(5)$;6(1'$//('*($'-8670(179$/8(
$ /($'B('*(2&
$ % )5217B5($52& $ /($'B('*(2&
& 75$,/B('*(2&
$ % )5217B5($52&
' /($'B('*(63)B6,'( & 75$,/B('*(2&
( )5217B5($563)B6,'(
' /($'B('*(63)B6,'(
) 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
)$; 6&$11(5 2.
* /($'B('*(63)B6,'(
+ )5217B5($563)B6,'(

, 75$,/B('*(63)B6,'(
)$; 6&$11(5 2.
(4) Print lead edge adjustment image off-center
50-28
(Each paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Purpose Adjustment 1) Select [SETUP/PRINT ADJ] on the touch panel.
Function (Purpose) Used to automatically adjust the image 2) Select the adjustment mode; LEAD (print lead edge adjust-
loss, void area, image off-center, and image ment) or OFF SET (image off-center) or ALL (both modes).
magnification ratio.
3) Select the paper feed tray for the adjustment pattern print.
Section (Two or more trays can be selected.)
Operation/Procedure 4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
The following adjustment items can be executed automatically with 5) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table.
SIM50-28. 6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
* Print image magnification ratio adjustment When two or more paper feed trays are selected in the proce-
(Main scanning direction) (Print engine section) dure 3), perform procedures 5) and 6) for the adjustment pat-
* Image off-center adjustment (Print engine section) tern printed with each paper.
* Scan image magnification ratio adjustment 7) Press [OK] key.
* Scan image off-center adjustment RESCAN: The adjustment pattern is scanned.
* Print area (void area) adjustment (Print engine section) REPRINT: The adjustment pattern is printed again.
* Copy image position, image loss adjustment RETRY: Shifts to the top menu.

OC ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table $872,0$*(326,7,21$'-8670(176(59,&(

2&$'- %.0$*$'-
mode) 63)$'- 6(78335,17$'-
BK-MAG ADJ Main scanning direction image magnification ratio 5(68/7 '$7$
adjustment
SPF ADJ Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
SETUP/PRINT ADJ Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
RESULT Adjustment result display
DATA Adjustment operation data display
(1) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image

magnification ratio adjustment (Document table mode)

1) Select [OC ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the paper tray to be used for the adjustment pattern
print.
51
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. 51-2
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned. Purpose Adjustment
6) Press [OK] key. Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the contact pressure (deflec-
(2) Main scan direction image magnification ration adjustment tion amount) on paper by the main unit and
the DSPF/RSPF resist roller.
1) Select [BK-MAG ADJ] on the touch panel.
print. Operation/Procedure
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed. 1) (When DSPF model)
4) Set the adjustment pattern on the document table. Select a target adjustment mode with [REGI1] or [REGI2] or
[ENGINE] keys.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
(When RSPF model)
6) Press [OK] key.
Select a target adjustment mode with [SIDE1] or [SIDE2] or
(3) Image loss off-center sub scan direction image
[ENGINE] keys.
magnification ratio adjustment (DSPF/RSPF mode)
2) Select a target item to be adjusted with [] [] buttons.
1) Select [SPF ADJ] on the touch panel.
2) Select the adjustment mode; SIDE 1 (Front surface) or SIDE 2
(Back surface) or ALL (Both modes). 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
print.
4) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is printed.
5) Set the adjustment pattern on the DSPF/RSPF.
6) Press [EXECUTE] key, and the adjustment pattern is scanned.
When ALL is selected in the procedure 2), perform procedures
5) and 6) for both of the front surface and the back surface.
7) Press [OK] key.
Setting Default
Display/Item Content
range value
A REGI1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(DSPF) (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN _HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN _ HIGH DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN _LOW DSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A SIDE1 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(RSPF) (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
C NORMAL_THIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/HIGH)
D NORMAL_THIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Normal/Thin paper/LOW)
E RANDOM_PLAIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/HIGH)
F RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Plain paper/LOW)
G RANDOM_THIN_HIGH RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/HIGH)
H RANDOM_THIN_LOW RSPF deflection amount adjustment value 1 - 1 - 99 50
(Random/Thin paper/LOW)
A SIDE2 NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
(RSPF) value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/HIGH)
B NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1 RSPF back surface document deflection amount adjustment - 1 - 99 50
value 1 (Normal/Plain paper/LOW)
A ENGINE TRAY1(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
B TRAY1(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
C TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
D TRAY1 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 1 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
E TRAY2(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Small size)
F TRAY2(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Lower stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
value (Plain paper/Large size)
G TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(S) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Small size)
H TRAY2 HEAVY PAPER(L) Main unit cassette 2 (Upper stage)/deflection adjustment LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
value (Heavy paper/Large size)
I MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Small size)
J MANUAL PLAIN PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
(Plain paper/Large size)
K MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(S) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Small size)
L MANUAL HEAVY PAPER(L) Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
(Heavy paper/Large size)
M MANUAL OHP Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (OHP) - 1 - 99 70
N MANUAL ENV Manual feed tray/deflection adjustment value (Envelope) - 1 - 99 70
O ADU PLAIN PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
P ADU PLAIN PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
Q ADU HEAVY PAPER(S) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
R ADU HEAVY PAPER(L) ADU/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
S DESK(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 30
T DESK(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Plain paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 30
U DESK HEAVY PAPER(S) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Small size) LT size (216mm) or less 1 - 99 60
V DESK HEAVY PAPER(L) DESK/deflection adjustment value (Heavy paper/Large size) LT size (216mm) or above 1 - 99 60
W A4LCC A4LCC/deflection adjustment value - 1 - 99 30
<Small size, Large size>
1 TRAYVOLMAX Tray size volume maximum value
Small size: The paper length in the transport direction is shorter
2 TRAYVOLA4R Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
than the LT size (216mm).
3 TRAYVOLA5R Tray volume A5R size adjustment value
Large size: The paper length in the transport direction is longer 4 TRAYVOLMIN Tray size volume minimum value
than the LT size (216mm).
When the adjustment value is increased, the warp amount is [DSPF-installed model]
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the warp
amount is decreased.
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the stop timing is 63)75$<$'-8670(17
75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
changed by 0.1mm.) 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$ % 1250$/B3/$,1B/2:
& 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
' 1250$/B7+,1B/2:
(;(&87(
( 5$1'20B3/$,1B+,*+
) 5$1'20B3/$,1B/2:
* 5$1'20B7+,1B+,*+
+ 5$1'20B7+,1B/2:

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75$<$'-8670(17
5(*, 5(*, (1*,1( 2. 75$<92/0$;75$<$'-8670(17
[RSPF-installed model] 35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

6,08/$7,2112 (;(&87(
7(67 &/26(
5(*,6752//(5$'-8670(17
$ 1250$/B3/$,1B+,*+
$ % 1250$/B3/$,1B/2:

53-7
& 1250$/B7+,1B+,*+
' 1250$/B7+,1B/2: Purpose Adjustment
6,'( 6,'( (1*,1( 2.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the DSPF/RSPF document
size width sensor.
53 Operation/Procedure
53-6 panel.
Purpose Adjustment 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the 3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
DSPF/RSPF document width.
Setting Default
Item/Display
Section range value
Operation/Procedure A AD_MAX Max. width position 0 - 1023 84
1) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the maximum B AD_P1 A4R width position 0 - 1023 509
width. C AD_P2 A5R width position 0 - 1023 808
D AD_MIN Min. width position 0 - 1023 961
The maximum width detection level is recognized. [DSPF-installed model]
3) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the A4R width.

4) Press [EXECUTE] key. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
The A4R width detection level is recognized. 63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/

$ $'B0$;
5) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the A5R width. $ % $'B3
& $'B3

6) Press [EXECUTE] key. ' $'B0,1

7) Open the DSPF/RSPF paper feed guide to the minimum width.

The minimum width detection level is recognized.
When the above operation is nor performed normally, "ERROR" is
displayed and. When the above operation is completed normally, 2.
"COMPLETE" is displayed.
55

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
63)75<$'-8670(170$18$/
55-1
$ $'B0$; Purpose Setting
$ % $'B3
Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the engine
& $'B3
control operations. (SOFT SW)
' $'B0,1
2. Section
Operation/Procedure
53-8

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Purpose Adjustment (1*,1(62)76:6(77,1*

6:1R 6:1R
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the document lead edge ref- '$7$
erence and the DSPF/RSPF mode docu-
ment scan position.

Operation/Procedure
Select an adjustment item with [AUTO] [MANUAL] key.
<AUTO: Document lead edge reference (RRCA) adjustment>
(Auto adjustment)
(;(&87(
1) Set a sheet of black paper of A4 or 11"x 8.5" on the document
table.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. (The adjustment is performed and the
adjustment value is saved.) 55-2
Purpose Setting
Setting Default
Item/Display Content Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the scan-
range value
ner control operation. (SOFT SW)
MEASUREMENT Document lead edge 0-255 -
DISTANCE measurement distance (0.1mm unit) Section
RRCA Document lead edge 0 - 99 50 Operation/Procedure
reference position

NOTE: The AUTO mode must not be used. 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(562)76:6(77,1*
6:1R 6:1R
<MANUAL: DSPF/RSPF mode document scan position adjust- '$7$
ment>

Setting Default
range value
A ADJUST DSPF/RSPF mode document 1 - 99 5
VALUE scan position adjustment
(;(&87(
(Scanner stop position
adjustment)
When the adjustment value is increased, the scanner stop posi-

55-3
tion in the DSPF/RSPF mode is shifted to the right.
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the position is Purpose Setting
shifted by 0.1mm. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the control-
ler operation. (SOFT SW)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section
63)6&$11,1*326,7,21$'-8670(17 Operation/Procedure
$872 0$18$/

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
0)362)76:6(77,1*
6:1R 6:1R
'$7$

(;(&87(
(Machine with the DSK installed)
56 1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit.
2) Select a target transfer item with the touch panel.
56-1 <IMPORT>
Purpose Data transfer From USB MEMORY DEVICE to EEPROM, SRAM, HDD
<EXPORT>
Function (Purpose) Used to transport data between HDD - MFP
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD to USB MEMORY DEVICE
PWB SRAM/EEPROM. (Used to repair the
PWB.) (HDD-installed machine) 3) Enter the password with 10-key.
Section 4) Press [SET] key.
Operation/Procedure 5) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
1) Select a target content of data transfer. Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key and press [YES] key. When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed.
Data transfer of the item selected in procedure 1) is executed.
<Data list outside the backup targets>
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. (EEPROM/SRAM)
ALL HDD All the memory contents are transferred to the HDD. PWB Type Content NOTE
HDD ALL The HDD contents are transferred to all the Controller Machine serial No.
memories. Product key information
EEPROM HDD Transfer from EEPROM to HDD Various counter Copy counter/FAX
HDD EEPROM Transfer from HDD to EEPROM send counter etc.
SRAM HDD Data transfer from SRAM to HDD. Trouble history
(Including the FAX memory) PCU Machine serial No.
When the FAX memory or an option memory Various counter Maintenance counter
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents in the Machine adjustment execute
memory for FAX are also transferred to HDD. history
HDD SRAM Transfer from HDD to SRAM Trouble history
(including the FAX memory) SCU Various counter Maintenance counter
When the FAX memory or an option memory Trouble history
(memory for FAX) is installed, the contents of the
FAX memory are also transferred to HDD. (HDD)
Classification Content NOTE

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Japanese FEP User dictionary
&23<'$7$ Job end list Job end list display data
$//+'' (1$%/( (The image send series
+''$// ',6$%/(
include the preserved job list.)
((3520+'' ',6$%/(
+''((3520 ',6$%/(
Log Job log Read from WEB is
65$0+'' ',6$%/( enable.
+''65$0 ',6$%/( New N/A Print history information
JAM history information
Trouble history information
Same position continuous
jam count value
Charging information
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Life information
Operation E-manual
NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. manual
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a Document filing Document filing data
trouble may be generated.

56-2
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(;3257,03257),/,1*'$7$
Purpose Data backup +''(;3257 +'',03257

((352065$0(;3257 ((352065$0,03257
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data in the EEPROM.
SRAM, and HDD (including user authenti-
cation data and address data) to the USB
memory. (HDD-installed machine)
Section
Operation/Procedure
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine.
If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a
<EXPORT>
trouble may be generated.
From EEPROM, ESRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is
56-3
60
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the document filing data to
60-1
the USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
Section HDD
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations (read/write)
Operation/Procedure
of the MFP PWB memory.
Section MFP (ICU) PWB
Operation/Procedure
<IMPORT>
From USB MEMORY DEVICE To EEPROM, SRAM, HDD 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
<EXPORT> Start the test.
From EEPROM, SRAM, HDD To USB MEMORY DEVICE
Result display Description
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. OK Success
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. NG Fail
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is NONE Not installed (Including DIMM trouble)
displayed. In case of an abnormal end, "ERROR" is displayed. INVALID Execution disable

SLOT Description
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( SLOT1 System memory (expansion) DIMM1
(;3257,03257'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$
'2&),/(;3257 '2&),/,03257
SLOT2 System memory (standard) DIMM2
SLOT3 Local memory (MFP expansion) DIMM3
SLOT4 Local memory (MX-EBX3 standard)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6'5$05($':5,7(7(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57

56-4
Purpose Data backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the JOB log data to the
(;(&87(
USB memory. (HDD-installed machine)
Section HDD
1) Insert the USB memory into the main unit. Purpose Setting
2) Press [JOB LOG EXPORT] key. Function (Purpose) Used to set the specifications of the MFP
3) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [YES] key. PWB on-board SDRAM.
Data transfer selected in the procedure 2) is performed. Section MFP (ICU) PWB
When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is Operation/Procedure
panel.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 2) Enter the set value with 10-key.
(;3257-2%/2*'$7$
-2%/2*(;3257
3) Press [OK] key.
NOTE: Set to the default value.
Setting Default
range value
A SETTING DISABLE SDRAM DDR 0-1 0 0
ENABLE setting setting
change of On-
flag board
SPD
ENABLE DDR 1
setting
of B or
later
B NUMBER 11BIT ROW address 0-2 0 2
OF ROW 12BIT width 1
13BIT 2
Setting Default
range value 61
C NUMBER 8BIT COLUMN address 0-4 0 2
OF 9BIT width 1
COLUMN 61-1
10BIT 2
11BIT 3 Purpose Operation test/check
12BIT 4 Function (Purpose) Used to check the LSU polygon motor rota-
D TWR 2CLOCK TWR set value 0-3 0 1 tion and laser detection.
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
Section LSU
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
Operation/Procedure
5CLOCK 3
E TRAS 4CLOCK TRAS set value 0-3 0 2 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
SETTING 5CLOCK 1 When the operation is completed normally, [OK] is displayed.
VALUE 6CLOCK 2 In case of an abnormal end, [NG] is displayed.
7CLOCK 3
F TRC 6CLOCK TRC set value 0-4 0 3 Display Content
SETTING 7CLOCK 1 LSU TESTRESULT NG: PG Polygon mirror rotation abnormality
VALUE 8CLOCK 2 LSU TESTRESULT NG: K Laser abnormality (K)
9CLOCK 3
10CLOCK 4

G TRCD 2CLOCK TRCD set value 0-3 0 1 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
/687(67
35(66>(;(&87(@7267$57
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
H TRP 2CLOCK TRP set value 0-3 0 1
SETTING 3CLOCK 1
VALUE 4CLOCK 2
5CLOCK 3
I TFRC 7CLOCK TFRC set value 0- 0 3
SETTING 8CLOCK 13 1
VALUE - -
20CLOCK 1 (;(&87(
3
J CAS CL=2 CAS latency 0-2 0 1
LATENC CL=2.5 1 61-3
Y CL=3 2
K TOTAL NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
Purpose Setting
NUMBER 128M total capacity 1 Function (Purpose) Used to set the laser power
OF BYTE Section LSU
MBYTES 256M 2
ON BYTE
Operation/Procedure
BOARD 1) Select a target mode for adjustment with [COPY], [PR600/
DDR FAX] and [PR1200] on the touch panel.
L NUMBER NONE On-board DDR 0-2 0 1
OF ON 1CHIP bunk number 1
BOARD-
panel.
SELECT
DDR 2CHIP 2 3) Enter the adjustment value using the 10-key.
CS-BANK SELECT 4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
When the laser power and the DUTY adjustment value are
increased, the print density is increased and the line width of
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( line images are increased.
6'5$06(77,1*
$ 6(77,1*(1$%/(',6$%/(
$ % 180%(52)52:%,7 Setting
& 180%(52)&2/801%,7 range
' 7:56(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. COPY A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
( 75$66(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
600dps (BW1) BW1
) 75&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
* 75&'6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&.
B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
+ 7536(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. (BW2) BW2
, 7)5&6(77,1*9$/8(&/2&. C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255
- &$6/$7(1&<&/
BW
. 727$/180%(52)0%<7(621%2$5'''50%<7(
COPY A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
/ 180%(52)21%2$5'''5&6%$1.&+,36(/(&7
2.
1200dpi (BW1) BW1
(N model B LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
only) (BW2) BW2
C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255
BW
PR600/ A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
FAX (BW1) BW1
(BW2) BW2
C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255
BW
Setting
range 62
PR1200 A LASER POWER Laser power setting/ 0 - 255
(N model (BW1) BW1
only) 62-1
(BW2) BW2 Purpose Data clear/Reset
C LASER DUTY (BW) Laser DUTY select/ 0 - 255 Function (Purpose) Used to execute the hard disk format
BW
(except operation manual area).
[N model] * If no HDD is installed, the MFP Flash
memory is formatted.
Default value
Category Item Section HDD
36PPM 45/50PPM
COPY 600dpi A 89 111 Operation/Procedure
B 89 111 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
C 0 0 2) Press [YES] key.
COPY 1200dpi A 89 111
Used to execute the hard disk format. Used to execute the
B 89 111
MFP PWB flash memory format.
C 0 0
PR600/FAX A 89 111 When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
B 89 111 normal display.
C 40 40

PR1200 A 89 111 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
B 89 111 +'')250$7
C 0 0
[U model, 28 CPM model]

Default value
Category Item
28/36PPM 45/50PPM
COPY 600dpi A 89 111
B 89 111
C 0 0
PR600/FAX A 89 111
B 89 111 $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
C 40 40
[N model]
62-2
6,08/$7,2112
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783>),(5<@
/$6(532:(5$8726(783 Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<.
$ /$6(532:(5%: (partial).
$ % /$6(532:(5%:
/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<&
/$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<0
& /$6(5'87<%:
& Section HDD
' /$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<<
Operation/Procedure
( /$6(532:(5/2:),(5<.
) /$6(532:(5/2:),(5<& 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
* /$6(532:(5/2:),(5<0
2) Press [YES] key.
+ /$6(532:(5/2:),(5<<
, /$6(532:(5+,*+),(5<%:

- /$6(532:(50,''/(),(5<%:
6,08/$7,2112
. /$6(532:(5/2:),(5<%: 7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(673$57
/ /$6(5/870,''/(),(5<.
&23<GSL &23<GSL 35)$; 35 2.
[U model, 28 CPM model]

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
/$6(532:(5$8726(783
$ /$6(532:(5%:
$ % /$6(532:(5%:
& /$6(5'87<%: $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
&23<GSL 35)$; 2.
62-3
Function (Purpose) Used to check read/write of the hard disk
(all areas).
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
Read/write operations are performed.

6,08/$7,2112 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
7(67 &/26(
+''5:7(67$// 60$57(5525/2*35,17287
35(66>(;(&87(@7235,177+(60$57(552535,17
(;(&87(
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-8
62-6 Purpose Data clear/Reset
Purpose Operation test/check Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (Excluding
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the self diagnostics of the the system area and the operation manual
hard disk. area)
Section HDD Section HDD

1) Select the self diag area. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [EXECUTE] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
The self diag operation is performed. Used to execute the hard disk format.
NOTE: When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
E7-03 error occurs. If there may be a trouble in the HDD, use this normal display.
simulation to cheek the HDD. * When the HDD formatting (except for the system area) is not
completed normally, "HDD FORMAT (EXCEPT SYSTEM AREA)
SHORT S.T Partial area diag NG" is displayed.
EXTENDED S.T All area diag

When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
normal display.
+'')250$7(;&(376<67(0$5($
Normal completion "OK(RESULT:0)" is displayed.

Abnormal end "NG(RESULT: Other than 0)" is displayed.
* If the simulation cannot be executed or terminated abnormally for
some reason, "ERROR" is displayed on the corresponding sec-
tion.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
60$572))/,1(7(67
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
6+25767 (1$%/(
(;7(1'('67 ',6$%/(
62-10
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the job log data.
(HDD-installed machine)
Section HDD
Operation/Procedure
(;(&87(

2) Press [YES] key.

Used to delete the job log data.
62-7
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
Purpose Operation test/check normal display.
Function (Purpose) Used to print the hard disk self diagnostics
error log.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Section HDD -2%&203/(7('$7$&/($5:,7+-2%/2*'$7$
Operation/Procedure
ERROR LOG SECTOR of the SMART function is executed, and
the result is printed.
normal display.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-11 62-13
Function (Purpose) Used to delete the document filing data. Function (Purpose) Used to format the hard disk. (only the
(HDD-installed machine) operation manual and watermark area)
Section HDD Section HDD
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
2) Press [YES] key. 2) Press [YES] key.
Used to delete the document filing data. The operation manual data are deleted.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
normal display. normal display.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( 6,08/$7,2112 &/26(
7(67
'2&80(17),/,1*'$7$&/($5 +'')250$70$18$/:$7(50$5.$5($21/<
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87( $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
62-12
Purpose Setting 63
Function (Purpose) Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format
in a hard disk trouble. 63-1
Section HDD Purpose Information display
Operation/Procedure Function (Purpose) Used to display the shading correction
1) Enter the set value with 10-key. result.
2) Press [OK] key. Section Scanner
The set value is saved. Operation/Procedure
When it is set to Enable, if a read error of HDD occurs in the system 1) Select a mode.
data storage area (FAX/device cloning data, etc.), only the system 2) Select a target color to display with [R] [G] [B] key on the touch
data storage area is cleared. panel. (For the U model, the key operations can be made but
the displayed data of each color is the same.)
A 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default) Item/Display Content NOTE
GAIN ODD Gain adjustment value

(odd number)
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( GAIN EVEN Gain adjustment value
$872)250$76(77,1*+''7528%/(
(Even number)
$ <(612
$ OFFSET Offset value
ODD (odd number)
OFFSET Offset value
EVEN (even number)
SMP AVE Reference plate
ODD sampling average
value (ODD)
SMP AVE Reference plate
EVEN sampling average
value (EVEN)
2.
TARGET Target value
VALUE
BLACK Black output level
LEVEL
M X -M 503N SIM U LATIO N 5 88

ERROR Error code 0 No error [U model]
CODE (0, 1 - 14) 1 STAGE1: Loop number
(for debug) over
6,08/$7,2112
2 STAGE2: The target value 7(67 &/26(
is under the specified 6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<

*$,12''
value.
*$,1(9(1
3 STAGE3: The gain set
2))6(72''
value is negative.
2))6(7(9(1
4 END is not asserted.
% * 5
(Gain adjustment)
5 (reserve)
6 STAGE2: Underflow
7 Black shading error 63-2
8 Other error Purpose Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform shading.
(White shading)
10 END is not asserted. Section Scanner
(Black shading) Operation/Procedure
DSPF-installed model
(Light quantity correction)
12 END is not asserted. 1) Select [OC SHADING] key or [DSPF SHADING] key, and
(Scan) press [EXECUTE] key.
13 Register check error. Used to perform shading.
(When booting/Gain) When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the
14 Register check error. normal display.
(Before light quantity
correction)

DSPF FACE First scan DSPF front when DSPF 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
WHITE surface/back surface 6+$',1*(;(&87,21

6(/(&72&6+$',1*'63)6+$',1*$1'35(66(;(&87(
LEVEL 1ST white reference level
DSPF FACE DSPF front/back
WHITE surface white reference
LEVEL 2ND level of the second or
later scanning
MAX Max. density judgment
DENSITY value
MAX Max. density position
POSITION
LED DA LED DA adjustment
value 2&6+$',1* '63)6+$',1* (;(&87(
LED DA LED DA adjustment

MEMORY save value RSPF-installed model
GAIN Gain adjustment save 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
MEMORY value Used to perform shading.
TARGET Target save value
MEMORY
normal display.
RATIO White plate scan ratio
BLACK Black offset set value
OFFSET (1-12 area)
6,08/$7,2112
1-12 7(67 &/26(
6+$',1*(;(&87,21
RSPF First scan RSPF white when RSPF 35(66>(;(&87(@726+$',1*67$57
WHITE reference level
LEVEL 1ST
RSPF RSPF white reference
WHITE level of the second or
(;(&87(
LEVEL 2ND later scanning
[N model]
63-3

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( Purpose Adjustment
6+$',1*'$7$',63/$<
*$,12'' Function (Purpose) Used to perform scanner (CCD/CIS) color
*$,1(9(1 balance and gamma auto adjustment.
2))6(72''
2))6(7(9(1 Section Scanner

603$9(2''
Operation/Procedure
603$9((9(1
7$5*(79$/8( 1) Place the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1)

%/$&./(9(/
on the reference position of the left rear frame side of the doc-
(5525&2'(
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/67
ument table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside
'63))$&(:+,7(/(9(/1' up on the DSPF tray.
0$;'(16,7<
2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
% * 5 2& '63)

The scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance automatic adjustment is
performed. (For the U model, only the automatic gamma
adjustment is executed.)
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the [N model]
normal display.
After completion of the operation, press [RESULT] key, and the

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
adjustment data are displayed. At that time, the target color of data 3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
display can be selected with [R] [G] [B] key. (For the U model, the 2&

key operations can be made but the displayed data of each color is
the same.)
&&&555
[N model] 000***
<<<%%%

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17
2&

% * 5 (;(&87(
2&

[U model]
&&&555
000***
<<<%%%
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3$7&+'$7$',63/$<2)6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&(
2&

% * 5 '63) (;(&87(
2&

[U model] % * 5 2&

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6&$11(5&2/25%$/$1&($872$'-8670(17 63-5
2&

Function (Purpose) Used to perform the scanner (CCD/CIS)

color balance and gamma default setting.
% * 5 2& Section Scanner
Operation/Procedure
1) Select [SIDE A(OC)] key or [SIDE B(DSPF)] key. (For the U
63-4 model, only the [SIDE A (OC)] key is displayed.)
Purpose Information display 2) Press [EXECUTE] key, and press [OK] key
Function (Purpose) Used to display the SIT chart patch density. The scanner (CCD/CIS) color balance and gamma are set to
the default. (For the U model, only the gamma is set.)
Section Scanner
[N model]
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the SIT chart (UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1) to
the reference position on the left rear frame side of the docu- 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
ment table. For the DSPF mode, put the SIT chart backside up 6,'($2& 6,'(%'63)
on the DSPF tray.

2) Select [OC] key or [DSPF] key.
The patch of the SIT chart is scanned.
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
the normal display.
4) Select a data display mode.
$5(<28685("
THROUGH GAMMA SIT chart scan data <(6 12 (;(&87(
COPY GAMMA Copy mode gamma process data of the

SIT chart scan data [U model]
SCANNER GAMMA Image send mode gamma process data of
the SIT chart scan data

6,08/$7,2112
Select an target display color with [R] [G] [B] keys. (For the U 7(67 &/26(
67$1'$5'6&$11(5*$00$6(783
model, the key operations can be made but the displayed data of 6,'($2&
each color is the same.)
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
64
64-2
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Test print. (Self print) (Monochrome mode)
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Set the print conditions.
Select an item to be print condition with [] [] keys.
Set the print conditions with 10-key.
The test print (self print) is performed.

A PRINT PATTERN Print pattern specification 1 - 58 1
(1,2,9 - 11,15 - 19, 21, 22, 29, 33 - 35) (* For details, refer to the description (Printable only 1, 2, 9 - 11, 15 - 19, 21, 22,
(N model only 29, 33, 34, 35) below.) 29, 33 - 35) (N model only 29, 33, 34, 35)
B DOT1 (DOT1>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of print dot number (M 1-255 1
parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern 2,11: 2-255 except above: 1-255)
C DOT2 (DOT2>=2 IF A:2,11) Setting of blank dot number 0-255 254
(N parameter) (Self print pattern: m by n) (Pattern2,11: 2-255 except above: 0-255)
D DENSITY (FIXED "255" IF A: 9) Used to specify the print gradation. 1-255 255
(Pattern 9: 255 Fixed except above:1-255)
E MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
F EXPOSURE THROUGH Exposure mode No process (through) (Pattern 15 - 19, 33 - 35: 2 - 9 1 8
(2 - 9 IF A: 15 - 19, 33 - 35) CHAR/PIC specification Text/Printed Photo except above:1 - 9) 2 (STANDARD
(N model only 33 - 35) CHAR/PRPIC Text/ Photograph (N model only 33 - 35) 3 DITHER)
CHAR Text Other pattern: 1 - 9 4
PRINT PIC Printed Photo 5
PRINT PAPER Photograph 6
MAP Map 7
STANDARD Dither without 8
DITHER correction
AUTO Automatic 9
G PAPER MFT Tray selection Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
H DUPLEX YES Duplex print Yes 0-1 0 1 (NO)
NO selection No 1
I PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 1-4 1 1 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 2
OHP OHP 3
ENVELOPE Envelope 4
<Print pattern of Item A>
Pattern
Content Pattern generating section NOTE
No.
1 Grid pattern LSU-ASIC
2 Dot print -
9 10% area (A4/A4R) density print
10 Belt print
11 Dot print (sub scan)
15 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Sub scan) MFP ASIC 16 gradations print
16 16 gradations + M by N (center gradations only): Main scan) The gradation is changed for every 256 dots.
17 Halftone pattern (all over the page) Controller (Memory) -
18 256 gradations pattern (Other dither) -
19 256 gradations pattern (straight) 600dpi -
20 - - -
21 4-point dot print (main scan) LSU-ASIC
22 Slant line
29 Dot print 1200dpi N model only
33 Halftone pattern 1200dpi (all over the page) Controller (Memory) N model only
34 256 gradation pattern 1200dpi N model only
35 256 gradation pattern (straight) 1200dpi N model only

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6(/)35,17%:6(59,&(
$ 35,173$77(51
$ % '27'27,)$
& '27'27,)$

' '(16,7<),;(',)$
( 08/7,&2817
) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5
* 3$3(5&6
+ '83/(;12
, 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
(;(&87( 2.
64-4
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print)
* This simulation functions only for the
machines which are provided with the
printer function.
Section
Operation/Procedure
3) The test print (self print) is performed.
A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1-3 3
(* For details, refer to the description below.)
B DENSITY Used to specify the print gradation. 1 - 255 128
C MULTI COUNT Number of print 1 - 999 1
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 3 (CS2)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra fine text 1
(N model only)
F DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2 (CALIB)
CALIB correction Calibration 2
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0
HEAVY Heavy paper 1
<Print pattern of Item A>

Pattern No. Content
1 256 gradations pattern (B/W)
2 Half tone pattern (B/W)
3 Dot, background (BW)

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,17
$ 35,173$77(51
$ % '(16,7<
& 08/7,&2817

' 3$3(5&6
( 48$/,7<67$1'$5'
) ',7+(5&$/,%
* 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
64-5
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PCL)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2
CS1 selection Tray 1 2 (CS1)
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
(N model only)
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,173&/
$ 35,173$77(51
% % ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817

' 3$3(5&6
( 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
) 721(56$9(02'(2))
* 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
64-6
Purpose Self print
Function (Purpose) Printer test print. (Self print) (PS)
Section
Operation/Procedure

A PRINT PATTERN Specification of the print pattern 1 1
B DITHER STRAIGHT Specification of dither Straight 1-2 1 2
D PAPER MFT Paper feed tray Manual paper feed 1-6 1 2 (CS1)
CS1 selection Tray 1 2
CS2 Tray 2 3
CS3 Tray 3 4
CS4 Tray 4 5
LCC LCC 6
E QUALITY STANDARD Image quality setting Standard (600dpi, 1bit) 0-1 0 0 (STANDARD)
FINE Ultra Fine (1200dpi, 1bit) 1
(N model only)
F TONER SAVE MODE ON Toner save mode set. 0-1 0 1 (OFF)
OFF not set. 1
G PAPER TYPE PLAIN Paper type Standard paper 0-1 0 0 (PLAIN)
HEAVY Heavy paper 1

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(56(/)35,1736
$ 35,173$77(51
% % ',7+(5&$/,%
& 08/7,&2817

' 3$3(5&6
( 48$/,7<+,*+48$/,7<
) 721(56$9(02'(2))
* 3$3(57<3(3/$,1
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.
65
;<

65-1
Purpose Adjustment

Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD dis-
play section) detection coordinates.


(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure

Touch the center of the cross mark at the four corners of the
screen.
When the adjustment is completed normally, the screen shifts to 65-5
the simulation sub number entry menu. Purpose Operation test/check
In case of an error, the screen returns to the adjustment menu. Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation panel key
input.
(Operation/Display control PWB)
Operation/Procedure
Press the keys sequentially according to the guidance displayed on
the screen.
If the key entry is effective, the guidance for pressing the next key
is displayed. When all the key entries are completed, "COMPLETE"
is displayed.
<Check target key>
Operation panel
JOB STATUS
SYSTEM SETTINGS
65-2 HOME
Purpose Information display 1
2
Function (Purpose) Used to display the touch panel (LCD dis-
3
play section) detection coordinates.
4
Section Operation unit 5
(Operation/Display control PWB) 6
Operation/Procedure 7
Touch the touch panel. 8
The coordinates X (horizontal direction) and Y (vertical direction) of 9
the touched position is displayed in real time. AUDIT CLEAR
0
PROGRAM
CLEAR
STOP
CLEAR ALL/RESET
START (MONO)
Setting Default
Item/Display
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( range value
23(5$7,213$1(/.(<&+(&.
3/($6(386+-2%67$786.(<
A POINT1 1 - 99 50
B POINT2 1 - 99 50
C POINT3 1 - 99 50
D POINT4 1 - 99 50
E POINT5 1 - 99 50
F POINT6 1 - 99 50
G POINT7 1 - 99 50
H POINT8 1 - 99 50
I POINT9 1 - 99 50
J POINT10 1 - 99 50
K POINT11 1 - 99 50
L POINT12 1 - 99 50
M POINT13 1 - 99 50
N POINT14 1 - 99 50
O POINT15 1 - 99 50
67 P POINT16 1 - 99 50
Q POINT17 1 - 99 50
67-17

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
Function (Purpose) Printer controller reset 35,17(5(1*,1(*5$<%$/$1&(0$18$/$'-8670(173*
$ 32,17
Section $ % 32,17
Operation/Procedure & 32,17

' 32,17
1) Press [EXECUTE] key. ( 32,17
2) Press [YES] key. ) 32,17

* 32,17
The set data related to the printer are initialized. (Including the + 32,17
NIC setting.) , 32,17

- 32,17
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to the . 32,17
normal display. / 32,17
. & 0 < (;(&87( 2.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
35,17(5&21752//(50(025<&/($5
67-31
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the printer calibration value
(Half-tone process control data).
machines which are provided with the
printer option function.
Section
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Operation/Procedure
2) Press [YES] key.
67-25
The printer calibration data (Half tone correction data) are
Purpose Adjustment cleared.
Function (Purpose) Printer density adjustment (Manual adjust- (The printer density correction is canceled.)
ment)
6,08/$7,2112
machines which are provided with the 7(67
35,17(5&$/%5$7,21'$7$&/($5
&/26(

Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key on the
touch panel.
3) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(

When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in
the density corresponding to the adjustment value.
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected.
67-33 67-34
Purpose Adjustment Purpose Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the gamma and the density Function (Purpose) Used to set the density correction in the
in each printer screen. printer high density section. (Support for
* This simulation functions only for the the high density section tone gap)
machines which are provided with the Section
Operation/Procedure
Section
Operation/Procedure
1) Select a target screen with [SCREEN] key. 0 Enable
1 Disable (Default)
2) Select a target adjustment density level with [] [] key.
3) Enter the set value with 10-key. 2) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.)
4) Press [OK] key. (The set value is saved.) When tone gap is generated in the high density section, set to
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the check pattern in printed in "0".
the density corresponding to the adjustment value. The density in the high density section is decreased, but tone
A4R (11" x 8.5"R) paper is selected by priority. If there is no A4R gap is reduced.
(11" x 8.5"R) paper, A3 (11" x 17") paper is selected. To increase the density in the high density section further, set to
"1".
Screen Content The tone gap may occur in high density part.
HEAVY PAPER Heavy paper mode
SCREEN1 600dpi 1bit screen

SCREEN2 1200dpi 1 bit screen (N model only) 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
(1*,1(0$;,080'(16,7<$'-8670(1702'()2535,17(5
SCREEN3 Toner Save mode $ (1$%/(',6$%/(
$

Setting Default
range value
A POINT1 Point 1 0 - 255 128
B POINT2 Point 2 0 - 255 128
C POINT3 Point 3 0 - 255 128
D POINT4 Point 4 0 - 255 128
E POINT5 Point 5 0 - 255 128
F POINT6 Point 6 0 - 255 128 2.
G POINT7 Point 7 0 - 255 128
H POINT8 Point 8 0 - 255 128
I POINT9 Point 9 0 - 255 128
J POINT10 Point 10 0 - 255 128 67-70
K POINT11 Point 11 0 - 255 128 Purpose Data clear/Reset
L POINT12 Point 12 0 - 255 128
Function (Purpose) MFP PWB SRAM data clear
M POINT13 Point 13 0 - 255 128
N POINT14 Point 14 0 - 255 128 Section MFP (ICU) PWB
O POINT15 Point 15 0 - 255 128 Operation/Procedure
P POINT16 Point 16 0 - 255 128 1) Press [EXECUTE] key.
Q POINT17 Point 17 0 - 255 128
2) Press [YES] key.
MFP PWB SRAM data is cleared.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
When the operation is completed, [EXECUTE] key returns to
35,17(56&5((1*$00$$'-8670(17+($9<3$3(5 the normal display.
$ 32,17
$ % 32,17
NOTE: When the MFP PWB is replaced, execute this simulation.
& 32,17
' 32,17

( 32,17 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
) 32,17 65$0&/($5
* 32,17
+ 32,17
, 32,17
- 32,17
. 32,17
/ 32,17
. (;(&87( 2.
$5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
[6] SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE
MX-M503N C. Self diag
Service operation
Manual
(1) Self diag operation and related work flow
CODE The machine always monitors its own state.
When the machine recognizes a trouble, it stops the operation and
1. Self diag displays the trouble message.
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consum- A warning message is displayed when a consumable part life is
able part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine nearly expired or is expired.
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user When a warning message is displayed, the machine may be or
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble, may not be stopped.
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the The trouble messages and the warning messages are displayed by
machine to minimize the damage. the LCD and lamp.
A. Function and purpose Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trou-
ble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simula-
1) Securing safety. (The machine is stopped on detection of a
tion.
trouble.)
Some warning messages of consumable parts are automatically
2) The damage to the machine is minimized. (The machine is
cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other warning mes-
stopped on detection of a trouble.)
sages must be cleared by a simulation.
3) By displaying the trouble content, the trouble position can be
quickly identified. (This allows to perform an accurate repair,
improving the repair efficiency.) Monitors the machine
conditions.
4) Preliminary warning of running out of consumable parts allows
to arrange for new parts in advance of running out. (This
avoids stopping of the machine due to running out the a con- Detects/analyzes
sumable part.) the content.
B. Self diag message kinds

The self diag messages are classified as shown in the table below.
Warning

Class 1 User Warning of troubles which can be recovered by the
Trouble/Warning

user. (Paper jam, consumable part life expiration,
etc.) Trouble

Service Warning of troubles which can be recovered only by
a serviceman. (Motor trouble, maintenance, etc.)
Others -
The machine is stopped.
Class 2 Warning Warning to the user, not a machine trouble
(Preliminary warning of life expiration of a
consumable part, etc.)

The content is displayed.
Trouble Warning of a machine trouble. The machine is
stopped.
Others -
Warning
A consumable No
OP

Trouble/Warning part has reached
its lifetime
Trouble
ZFT
YES
Replace or supply
Troubleshoot
the cause.
the consumable part.

Repair
Cancel the self-diagnostic

message with the

diagnostic (test
commands).
Reset

Standby
state
MX-M503N SELF DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE 6 1

D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode processing
Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan FAST
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print Notification
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption) to host
FAX board trouble MFP F6 (00, 01, 04, 21, 30,
97, 98)
HDD trouble E7 (03)
HDD-ASIC trouble E7 (04)
SCU communication E7 (80)
trouble A0 (02)
PCU communication E7 (90)
trouble A0 (01)
ACU communication A0 (04)
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall U1 (01)
Controller fan motor trouble L4 (30)
External communication U7 (50, 51)
disable (RIC)
Memory error (included not U2 (00, 05, 10, 11, 22, 10
installed the expansion 23, 24)
RAM)
Connection trouble (MFP E7 (60, 61, 65)
detection) A0 (10, 11, 12, 15, 20)
Serial number discrepancy U2 (30)
HDD registration data sum U2 (50)
error
If the HDD is not installed,
data check sum error of the
Flash memory for setting
and registration.
Image memory trouble, E7 (01, 05, 06, 08,
decode error 09)
Image memory trouble, E7 (42, 46, 48) 11
decode error (ACRE-
related 1)
Image memory trouble, E7 (49)
decode error (ACRE-
related 2)
Personal counter PC (00)
installation trouble
Power controller trouble L8 (20)
Special function error U2 (60)
MFP Flash memory access E7 (31)
error
Laser trouble PCU E7 (20, 21, 28, 29),
L6 (10) 7
Connection trouble E7 (50, 55)
(PCU detection) A0 (21)
F1 (50)
PCU section troubles C1 (10),
(motor, fusing, etc.) F2 (40, 64, 70, 74), 7
H2 (00, 02),
H3 (00, 02),
H4 (00, 02),
H5 (01),
H7 (10, 12),
L4 (02, 03, 04, 11, 31,
32, 34, 43, 58, 59),
L8 (01, 02),
U2 (90, 91),
Paper feed tray 1 trouble F3 (12) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 2 trouble F3 (22) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 3 trouble U6 (01) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 4 trouble U6 (02) 2 2 2/7 2
Paper feed tray 5 trouble U6 2 2 2/7 2
(09, 20, 21, 22, 51)
Paper feed tray other U6 (00, 10, 50) 8 8 7/8 8
troubles
Staple trouble F1 (08, 10) 3 3 3 3 3 3/7 3 3
Saddle stitch section F1 (31, 41, 43, 45, 47) 3 3 3 3 3 3/7 3 3
trouble

Operatable mode
Judgment Copy scan FAST
Kind of trouble Trouble code Scan Scan Scan- List FAX FAX
block (including Print Notification
(Push) (Pull) To HDD print Send print
interruption) to host
After-process trouble PCU F1 (00, 03, 11, 15, 19, 3 3 3 3 3 3/7 3 3
20, 21, 22, 23, 32, 33,
34, 36, 37, 38, 39)
Other troubles EE (EC, EL, EU)
Process control trouble F2 (31, 39, 58)
(PCU detection) 9
Connection trouble SCU A0 (22)
(SCU detection)
SCU color system troubles UC (02) 6 6 6 6 6
(SCU detection)
Anti copy system UC (20)
EEPROM faction U2 (80, 81)
Scanner section troubles L1 (00), L3 (00)
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading, E7 (10, 11, 14)
etc.)
DSPF/DF trouble U5 (00, 16, 40) 4 4 4 4 4
General troubles in the E6 (10, 11, 14) 5 5 5 5 5
DSPF back surface
scanning section
: Operation enabled, : Operation disabled

2 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled with a tray other than the trouble tray.
3 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in a section other than the trouble paper exit section.
* However, it is valid only when the escape tray setting has been made.
4 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode.
5 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the OC mode and the simplex scanning mode.
6 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in the black and white mode.
7 : Since communication is enabled, reception can be transferred.
8 : When detected during other than a job, the operation is enabled in other than the DESK.
9 : Trouble display is message of 2 lines. (Example: Ready to copy. F2 trouble)
10 : In case of U2-22, the trouble cannot be notified. In case of U2-23, if either of the FAX soft SW data or the FAST data cannot be restored,
the trouble cannot be notified.
11 : Execution of a job is enabled only for the format other than the high-compression PDF related ones.
(2) Power ON trouble detection sequence.
MFP event
manager Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, H5, U1, U2, U6 trouble check When the power is turned
Trouble check is made in each block when on, check is made in each
initializing and data are sent to the MFP PWB. block.
Communication of trouble status
[Trouble code] [Trouble status]
H3, H4, H5 Saved in the PCU
U1 Saved in the MFP
U2 Saved in each block
U6-09 Saved in the PCU
(Trouble cancel sequence) sim task
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16

(To the corre-
SIM 13: U1 trouble cancel sponding block)
SIM 14: H3, H4, H5 cancel Trouble cancel
SIM 15: LCC (U6) trouble cancel Trouble cancel command (The trouble memory
SIM 16: U2 trouble cancel is initialized.)
Trouble cancel status
is communicated.

2. Trouble code list
Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
Main Sub Trouble code content Option Electricity FAX Supply
detection nism
code code
C1 10 Main charger trouble PCU
E6 10 DSPF (CIS) shading error (Black correction) SCU
11 DSPF (CIS) shading error (White correction) SCU
14 CIS-ASIC error SCU
E7 01 MFP image data error MFP
03 HDD trouble MFP
04 HDD-ASIC error MFP
05 Standard/Extension memory R/W error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP
06 Image data decode error MFP
08 MFP memory compatibility error (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP
09 Standard/Extension memory size (MFP PWB) (Local memory) MFP
10 Shading error (Black correction) SCU
11 Shading error (White correction) SCU
14 CCD-ASIC error SCU
20 LSU laser detection error PCU
21 LSU laser deterioration trouble PCU
28 LSU-PCU connection error PCU
29 LSU ASIC frequency error PCU
31 MFP Flash memory access error MFP
42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) MFP
46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC) MFP
48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) MFP
49 Water Mark data error MFP
50 Engine connection trouble PCU
55 PWB information sum error (Engine detection) PCU
60 Combination error between the MFP PWB and other PWB, firmware MFP
61 Combination error between the MFP PWB and the PCU PWB MFP
65 MFP EEPROM sum check error MFP
80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error MFP
90 MFP-PCU PWB communication error MFP
EE EC Automatic toner density adjustment error (Sampling level 67-94/106-154) PCU
EL Automatic toner density adjustment error (Over toner) PCU
EU Automatic toner density adjustment error (Under toner) PCU
F1 00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication error PCU
03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting operation trouble PCU
08 Stapler shift trouble PCU
10 Staple operation trouble PCU
11 Finisher grip operation trouble PCU
15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation trouble PCU
19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F PCU
20 Finisher alignment operation trouble R PCU
21 Finisher fan trouble PCU
22 Finisher assist motor trouble PCU
23 Finisher shutter trouble PCU
31 Saddle paper folding trouble PCU
32 Finisher - Punch unit communication error PCU
33 Punch unit shift operation trouble PCU
34 Punch operation trouble PCU
36 Punch paper edge detection error PCU
37 Finisher data backup RAM error PCU
38 Punch data backup RAM error PCU
39 Punch paper dust sensor error PCU
41 Saddle paper positioning operation trouble PCU
43 Saddle alignment operation trouble PCU
45 Saddle staple trouble PCU
47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble PCU
50 Main unit - Finisher combination error PCU
F2 31 Image density sensor trouble PCU
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio abnormality)
39 Process thermistor trouble PCU
40 Toner density sensor trouble PCU
58 Process humidity sensor trouble PCU
64 Toner supply operation trouble PCU
70 Improper toner cartridge detection PCU
74 Toner cartridge CRUM error PCU
F3 12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble PCU
22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble PCU

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
F6 00 MFP-FAX communication trouble MFP
01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error FAX
04 FAX MODEM operation trouble FAX
21 Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch FAX
30 Access error to 1-chip microprocessor on the FAX board (FAX detection) FAX
97 The FAX PWB does not match with the machine model. FAX
98 Combination error between the FAX-BOX destination information and the FAX
machine destination information.
H2 00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) PCU
02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) PCU
H3 00 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
02 Fusing section high temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H4 00 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_UM) PCU
02 Fusing section low temperature trouble (TH_US) PCU
H5 01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach jam PCU
H7 10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_UM_AD2) PCU
12 Recovery error from low fuser temp. (TH_US) PCU
L1 00 Scanner feed trouble SCU
L3 00 Scanner return trouble SCU
L4 02 Paper feed motor trouble PCU
03 Fusing motor trouble PCU
04 Drum motor trouble PCU
11 Shift motor trouble PCU
30 MFP fan motor trouble MFP
31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1/2) trouble PCU
32 Power source cooling fan trouble PCU
34 LSU cooling fan trouble PCU
43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3) trouble PCU
58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble PCU
59 Suction fan trouble PCU
L6 10 Polygon motor trouble PCU
L8 01 Full wave signal detection error PCU
02 Full wave signal error PCU
20 Communication error of MFP PWB/Mother board MFP
PC - Personal counter not detected MFP
U1 01 Battery trouble MFP
U2 00 MFP EEPROM read/write error MFP
05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents inconsistency MFP
10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication index check sum error MFP
11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check sum error MFP
22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum error MFP
23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum error MFP
24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user authentication counter check sum error MFP
30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB manufacturing No. data inconsistency MFP
50 HDD/Flash memory registration data check sum error MFP
60 Water Mark check error MFP
80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error SCU
81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error SCU
90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error PCU
91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error PCU
U5 00 Document feed unit communication error SCU
16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble SCU
40 Document feed unit installation trouble SCU
U6 00 Communication error of PCU PWB/Desk paper feed unit PCU
01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble PCU
02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble PCU
09 LCC lift trouble PCU
10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport motor trouble PCU
20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error PCU
21 LCC paper transport motor trouble PCU
22 LCC 24V power trouble PCU
50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble PCU
51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble PCU
U7 50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine communication error MFP
51 Vendor machine error MFP
UC 02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error (N model only) SCU
20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error (N model only) SCU

Trouble code
Trouble Mecha-
detection nism
code code
A0 01 PCU PWB ROM error MFP
02 SCU PWB ROM error MFP
04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner expansion kit is installed) MFP
10 MFP PWB ROM error MFP
11 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - PCU) MFP
12 Firmware version inconsistency (MFP - SCU) MFP
15 DSK BOOT version disagreement MFP
20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (MFP) MFP
21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (PCU) PCU
22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data version (SCU) SCU
3. Details of trouble code
C1-10 Main charger trouble E7-01 MFP image data error
Trouble content Trouble content

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause The main charger unit is not installed properly. Cause Image data transfer error in the MFP PWB.
There is an abnormality in the main charger unit. MFP PWB trouble.
Disconnection of the high voltage PWB connector. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
MC/DV high voltage PWB trouble. the MFP PWB.
PCU PWB trouble Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the output of the main charger with SIM8-2.
Check disconnection of the main charger./Replace.
Check disconnection of the high voltage PWB E7-03 HDD trouble
connector./Replace.
Replace the MC/DV high voltage PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble in the MFP
E6-10 DSPF (CIS) shading error PWB and HDD.
HDD error file management area data abnormality
(Black correction) (FAT breakage).
MFP PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness of
Detail SCU the MFP PWB and HDD.
Cause Installation error of the CIS unit harness. Use SIM62-2,3 to check read/write operations of the
CIS unit trouble. HDD.
DSPF PWB trouble. Replace the HDD.
Replace the MFP PWB.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness to the CIS
unit.
Check the CIS unit.
Check the DSPF PWB. E7-04 HDD-ASIC error
Trouble content
E6-11 DSPF (CIS) shading error Detail MFP
(White correction) Cause HDD-ASIC trouble.
An error occurs in the HDD-ASIC self test when
booting.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Installation error of the CIS unit harness.
Copy lamp lighting trouble.
Dirt on the reference white plate.
E7-05 Standard/Extension memory R/W
CIS unit trouble. error (MFP PWB) (Local memory)
DSPF PWB trouble.
Shading adjustment error
Trouble content Memory access is disabled.
Check & Remedy Check the installing state of the harness the CIS unit.
Detail MFP
Clean the reference white plate.
Cause Improper insertion of the memory.
Check the CIS unit.
Garbled memory data.
Check the DSPF PWB.
The memory capacity is not the specified level.
Check & Remedy Check insertion of the memory.
Use SIM60-1 to check the read/write operations of the
E6-14 CIS-ASIC error memory.
Replace the expansion memory.
Trouble content Replace the MFP PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause DSPF PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the DSPF PWB.

E7-06 Image data decode error E7-14 CCD-ASIC error

Detail MFP Detail SCU
Cause Compressed image data abnormality. Cause SCU PWB trouble.
HDD connection trouble when HDD is installed. Check & Remedy Check the SCU PWB.
Image data compression/transfer data garble. Replace the SCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy If the job at an occurrence of an error is a FAX job,
check the FAX PWB. E7-20 LSU laser detection error
Check connection of the MFPC PWB and the HDD.
Replace the MFPC PWB.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
E7-08 MFP memory compatibility error Cause Optical axis shift.
Reduced laser power, lighting error, laser diode
(MFP PWB) (Local memory) trouble.
Harness and connector trouble between the LD/BD
Trouble content PWB and the LSU control PWB.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
Cause A DIMM of different specifications is installed to the Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
MFP memory slot. LSU.
DIMM trouble. Replace the LSU.
Check & Remedy Check the installed DIMM.
Replace the DIMM.
E7-21 LSU laser deterioration trouble
E7-09 Standard/Extension memory size Trouble content

(MFP PWB) (Local memory) Detail PCU
Cause Power reduction due to laser deterioration.
Harness and connector disconnection/insertion
Trouble content
trouble between the LD PWB and the LSU control
Detail MFP PWB.
Cause A DIMM which is not 512MB is inserted. Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the LSU.
DIMM trouble. Check the PWB and connection of the harness in the
Insufficient memory size. LSU.
Check & Remedy Replace the DIMM. Replace the LSU.
E7-10 Shading error (Black correction) E7-28 LSU-PCU connection error

Detail SCU Detail PCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD black scan level when the Cause Communication error between the CPU in the PCU
scanner lamp is turned OFF. PWB and the LSU control ASIC.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit. Improper connection of the communication connector
CCD unit abnormality. between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
SCU PWB abnormality. (interface PWB).
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. Harness trouble between the PCU PWB and the LSU
Check the CCD unit. control PWB (interface PWB)
Check the SCU PWB. PCU PWB or LSU control PWB (interface PWB)
trouble
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness
E7-11 Shading error (White correction) between the PCU PWB and the LSU control PWB
(interface PWB).
Replace the LSU control PWB.
Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Abnormality in the CCD white reference plate scan
level when the scanner lamp is turned ON.
Improper installation of the harness to the CCD unit.
E7-29 LSU ASIC frequency error
Dirt on the mirror, lens, and the reference white plate.
Scanner lamp lighting trouble. Trouble content
CCD unit abnormality. Detail PCU
SCU PWB abnormality. Cause Oscillation abnormality of the external oscillator and
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness to the CCD unit. the internal oscillating circuit used in the LSU ASIC.
Check connection of the harness to the scanner lamp LSU ASIC abnormality on the LSU ASIC PWB.
unit. Check & Remedy Replace the LSU control PWB.
Clean the mirror, the lens, and the reference white
plate.
Check the CCD unit.
Check the SCU PWB.

E7-31 MFP Flash memory access error E7-50 Engine connection trouble
Trouble content MFP Flash memory access error Trouble content

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause Read/write error for the MFP Flash memory Cause A PWB, or firmware, or LSU which is not supported by
Target data the machine specifications is detected in the PCU
Address book data PWB.
Part of the key operator program PCU PWB trouble.
Copy job program LSU trouble.
Part of the user authentication data Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Sender record, etc. Check the LSU, and replace it if necessary.
MFP Flash memory error Check the PCU PWB, and replace it if necessary.
MFP Flash memory contact error
Malfunctions caused by noises
Saved data are garbled. E7-55 PWB information sum error
Check & Remedy Check the following data for any abnormality. If there
is any abnormality, reset and register the content.
(Engine detection)
Part of the key operator program
Copy job program Trouble content PCU EEPROM PWB information sum error
Part of the user authentication data Detail PCU
Image send series registration data (Sender record) Cause PCU EEPROM sum check error.
Replace the MFP PWB. PCU EEPROM trouble.
When the main power is turned OFF/ON in a machine PCU EEPROM contact trouble.
without HDD installed, if an error occurs again, Malfunction due to noises
execute SIM62-01. If the trouble is not canceled by
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB.
this procedure, replace the MFP PWB.
Replace the PCU EEPROM.
E7-42 Data error (ACRE ASIC) E7-60 Combination error between the MFP
PWB and other PWB, firmware
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Image transfer trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check the connection state of the ACRE ASIC PWB Detail MFP
connector. Cause A PWB or firmware which is not supported by the
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. machine specifications is detected in the MFP PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
The PWB/firmware which is not supported by the
machine specifications is connected.
E7-46 Decode error (ACRE ASIC)
Check & Remedy Check the kind and the version of the firmware.
Check the MFP PWB, and replace it if necessary.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Compression data abnormality. E7-61 Combination error between the MFP
Garbled data are produced in image compression/
transmission.
PWB and the PCU PWB
ACRE ASIC PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the installation state of the PWB. Trouble content
Check connection of the ACRE ASIC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the ACRE ASIC PWB. Cause Combination error between the MFP PWB and the
PCU PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
E7-48 Memory error (ACRE ASIC) PCU PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP PWB and
the PCU PWB.
Trouble content
Detail MFP Replace the PCU PWB.
Cause DIMM trouble, memory slot trouble.
DIMM insertion trouble, different DIMM inserted.
Check & Remedy DIMM trouble. E7-65 MFP EEPROM sum check error
Replace the PWB.
Trouble content
E7-49 Water Mark data error Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM device breakdown.
Contact trouble of the MFP EEPROM device.
Trouble content Malfunction due to noises.
Detail MFP Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB.
Cause Watermark data trouble Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
Replace the HDD.

E7-80 MFP-SCU PWB communication error EE-EU Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Under toner)
Trouble content
Detail MFP Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Cause SCU PWB connector connection trouble. adjustment is 155 or above or the control voltage is 48
SCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. or less.
SCU PWB mother board connection trouble. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
Mother board trouble.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the SCU PWB, the MFP PWB, PCU PWB trouble.
and the mother board.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor.
Check the ground.
Replace the developing unit.
Replace the SCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
F1-00 Finisher - PCU PWB communication

E7-90 MFP - PCU PWB communication error error

Detail MFP Detail PCU
Cause PCU PWB connector connection trouble. Cause Connection trouble of the connector and the harness
PCU PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble. between the finisher and the PCU PWB.
PCU PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Mother board trouble. Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the PCU PWB, the MFP PWB, Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
and the mother board. finisher and the PCU PWB.
Check the ground. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the mother board.
F1-03 Finisher paper exit roller lifting
operation trouble
EE-EC Automatic toner density adjustment
error (Sampling level 67-94/106-154) Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density Cause Finisher paper exit roller lift motor trouble.
adjustment is outside of 1005. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Developing unit trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
PCU PWB trouble. roller lift motor.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner density sensor. Replace the paper exit roller lift motor.
Replace the developing unit. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the home position sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB.
EE-EL Automatic toner density adjustment

F1-08 Stapler shift trouble
error (Over toner)
Trouble content
Trouble content The sampling level in the automatic toner density
Detail PCU
adjustment is 66 or less or the control voltage is 198
or above. Cause Stapler shift motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble.
Detail PCU
Home position sensor trouble.
Cause Toner density sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the stapler shift
Charging voltage/ developing voltage trouble, toner
motor.
density trouble, or developing unit trouble.
Replace the stapler shift motor.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the home position sensor.

F1-10 Staple operation trouble F1-21 Finisher fan trouble

Detail PCU Detail PCU
Cause Staple motor trouble. Cause Finisher fan motor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the staple Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the fan motor.
motor. Check connection between the finisher control PWB
Replace the staple motor. and the fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the fan.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the finisher control PWB.
F1-22 Finisher assist motor trouble

F1-11 Finisher grip operation trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Motor harness short/open trouble.
Cause Grip motor trouble. Control PWB trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble
Grip arm trouble. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
Home position sensor trouble. SIM3-3.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the grip motor. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the grip motor. Replace the control PWB.
Replace the grip arm.
Replace the home position sensor. F1-23 Finisher shutter trouble
Trouble content
F1-15 Finisher paper exit tray lift operation
Detail PCU
trouble Cause Motor lock trouble.
Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content Lift motor trouble. Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Check the operation of the rear edge assist motor with
Cause Paper exit tray lift motor trouble. SIM3-3.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Replace the control PWB.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper exit
tray lift motor.
Replace the paper exit tray lift motor. F1-31 Saddle paper folding trouble
Trouble content
F1-19 Finisher alignment operation trouble F Detail PCU
Cause Motor lock trouble.
Trouble content Control PWB trouble, home position sensor trouble.
Detail PCU Connection harness/connector connection trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock. Check & Remedy Check the operation of the saddle motor with SIM3-3.
Motor speed abnormality. Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Over-current to the motor. Replace the control PWB.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Replace the sensor.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper
alignment motor F.
Replace the finisher control PWB. F1-32 Finisher - Punch unit communication
Replace the paper alignment motor F. error
Trouble content
F1-20 Finisher alignment operation trouble
Detail PCU
R Cause Connector/harness connection trouble or
disconnection between the finisher and the punch
Trouble content unit.
Detail PCU Finisher control PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Cause Finisher paper alignment motor lock.
Malfunction due to noises.
Motor speed abnormality.
The punch unit is in the adjustment mode.
Over-current to the motor.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness between the
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the paper finisher and the punch unit.
alignment motor R. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the paper alignment motor R. Cancel the adjustment mode of the punch unit.

F1-33 Punch unit shift operation trouble F1-39 Punch paper dust sensor error

Cause Punch shift motor trouble. Cause Punch dust sensor trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Home position sensor trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Punch unit control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the punch Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor.
shifting. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Replace the punch shift motor. Replace the punch dust sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Replace the finisher control PWB.
Replace the home position sensor. Replace the punch unit control PWB.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
F1-41 Saddle paper positioning operation

F1-34 Punch operation trouble trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Abnormality in the folding positioning guide motor in
Detail PCU the saddle section.
Cause Punch motor trouble. Detail PCU
Cause Saddle paper positioning guide drive motor trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Check the punch operation. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the punch motor. Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
Replace the finisher control PWB. paper positioning motor.
Replace the home position sensor.
Check connection from the control PWB to the motor.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Turn OFF/ON the power.
Replace the sensor.
F1-36 Punch paper edge detection error
Trouble content F1-43 Saddle alignment operation trouble

Detail PCU
Cause Punch paper edge sensor trouble. Trouble content
Harness disconnection. Detail PCU
Finisher control PWB trouble. Cause Saddle alignment motor trouble.
Punch control PWB trouble. Finisher control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-2 to check the operation of the sensor. Home position sensor trouble.
Replace the punch paper edge sensor. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the Saddle
Replace the punch control PWB.
alignment motor (FSPAM).
Turn OFF/ON the power.
F1-37 Finisher data backup RAM error Replace the control PWB.
Replace the sensor.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Finisher control PWB trouble.
F1-45 Saddle staple trouble
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the finisher control PWB. Trouble content Abnormality of the staple unit drive motor in the saddle
Readjust the finisher. (Use SIM3-10,Finisher control section.
PWB DIP SW adjustment.) Detail PCU
Cause Saddle staple motor trouble.
F1-38 Punch data backup RAM error Home position sensor trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle
staple motor.
Detail PCU
Cause Punch control PWB trouble.
Turn OFF/ON the power.
Malfunction due to noises
Check & Remedy Replace the punch control PWB. Replace the sensor.
Set the punch unit specifications, and adjust the
sensor. (Punch unit control PWB DIP SW adjustment.)

F1-47 Saddle paper transport motor trouble F2-58 Process humidity sensor trouble
Trouble content Abnormality in the drive roller oscillation motor in the Trouble content
finisher saddle transport section. Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause Process humidity sensor trouble.
Cause Saddle paper transport motor trouble. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
Harness and connector connection trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the process humidity sensor.
Fuse blown (24V line). Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM3-3 to check the operation of the saddle Replace the PCU PWB.
paper transport motor.
Replace the control PWB. F2-64 Toner supply operation trouble
Replace the sensor.
Trouble content
F1-50 Main unit - Finisher combination error Detail PCU
Cause Toner clutch trouble.
Toner density sensor trouble.
Trouble content Connector/harness trouble.
Detail PCU PCU PWB trouble.
Cause The finisher which is not supported by the main unit Toner cartridge trouble.
model is installed. Developing unit trouble.
Finisher control PWB trouble. Check & Remedy Replace the toner clutch.
Check & Remedy Install a proper finisher. Replace the toner density sensor.
Replace the finisher control PWB. Connector and harness check.
Replace the toner cartridge.
F2-31 Image density sensor trouble Replace the developing unit.
(OPC drum surface reflection ratio
abnormality) F2-70 Improper toner cartridge detection

Cause Before execution of the process control, a document Cause An improper toner cartridge is inserted. (The main unit
is scanned by the image density sensor and the detects a toner cartridge of a different specification.)
sensor gain is adjusted so that the output is at a fixed Toner cartridge trouble.
level. Though, however, the sensor gain is changed, PCU PWB trouble
the output does not become a fixed level. Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Image density sensor trouble Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the harness between the PCU
PWB and the image density sensor
Image density sensor dirt
F2-74 Toner cartridge CRUM error
Check & Remedy Use SIM44-2 to execute the gain adjustment of the
process control sensor.
When there are some troubles, "Error" is displayed. Trouble content
Check the sensor and the harness at that time. Detail PCU
Cause Toner cartridge (CRUM) trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
F2-39 Process thermistor trouble Connector/harness trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
Connector and harness check.
Detail PCU
Cause Process thermistor trouble.
Process thermistor harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
F3-12 Paper feed tray 1 lift operation trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the process thermistor.
Check connection of the harness and the connector. Trouble content
Replace the PCU PWB. Detail PCU
Cause LUD1 is not turned ON within the specified time.
CLUD1 sensor trouble
F2-40 Toner density sensor trouble Paper feed tray 1 lift unit trouble.
PCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Check connection of the harness and the connector of
Detail PCU
LUD1.
Cause Toner density sensor output abnormality (Sample Replace the lift-up unit.
level 25 or less, or 201 or above) Replace the PCU PWB.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Developing unit trouble. PCU PWB trouble.

F3-22 Paper feed tray 2 lift operation trouble F6-21 Combination error between the
TEL/LIU PWB and the FAX soft switch
Trouble content LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
Detail PCU Trouble content Combination error between the TEL/LIU PWB and the
Cause LUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time. FAX PWB information (soft switch)
CLUD2 sensor trouble. Section FAX
Paper feed tray 2 lift unit trouble.
Case 1 Cause The destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB differs.
PCU PWB trouble.
Check Check the destination of the installed TEL/LIU PWB.
and
Check & Remedy Check the harness and the connector of LUD2.
remedy
Replace the lift-up unit.
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB information (soft switch) differs.
Check Check the FAX PWB information (soft switch).
and
remedy
F6-00 MFP-FAX communication trouble Case 3 Cause TEL/LIU PWB trouble
Check Replace the TEL/LIU PWB.
Trouble content Communication establishment error/Framing/Parity/ and
Protocol error remedy
Section MFP
Case 1 Cause FAX unit PWB connector connection error
Check Check the connector connection between the FAX unit F6-30 Access error to 1-chip microproces-
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. sor on the FAX board (FAX detection)
remedy
Case 2 Cause FAX unit PWB - MFPcnt PWB harness trouble
Check Check the connector harness between the FAX unit Trouble content Access error (read/write) to 1-chip microprocessor on
and PWB and the MFPcnt PWB. the FAX board
remedy Section FAX
Case 3 Cause FAX unit PWB mother board connector pin breakage Case 1 Cause Program writing error (or no writing) to the 1-chip
Check Check the machine grounding. microprocessor
and Check Use SIM66-24 to rewrite the 1-chip microprocessor
remedy and program.
Case 4 Cause FAX unit ROM trouble/ROM pin breakage remedy
Check Check the FAX unit PWB ROM. Case 2 Cause 1-chip microprocessor trouble
and Check Replace the 1-chip microprocessor chip. When
remedy and replacing, use SIM66-42 to rewrite the 1-chip
remedy microprocessor program.
Case 3 Cause FAX PWB 1-chip microprocessor access circuit
F6-01 FAX board EEPROM read/write error trouble
Check Replace the FAX PWB.
and
Trouble content EEPROM access error (read/write) remedy
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause EEPROM trouble
Check Check that no trouble occurs after replacement of F6-97 The FAX PWB does not match with the
and EEPROM. Execute the memory check of SIM66-3 to
remedy insure that EEPROM can be accessed.
machine model.
Case 2 Cause FAX PWB EEPROM access circuit trouble
Check Replace the PWB. In this case, not need to execute Trouble content The FAX PWB identification model does not match
and the simulation. with the machine model.
remedy Section FAX
Case 1 Cause An improper type of FAX PWB is installed to the
machine.
F6-04 FAX MODEM operation trouble Check Replace the FAX PWB with a proper one.
and
remedy
Trouble content FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause FAX PWB MODEM chip operation trouble F6-98 Combination error between the FAX-
Check Replace the FAX PWB MODEM chip.
and BOX destination information and the
remedy machine destination information.
Case 2 Cause The FAX PWB MODEM chip cannot be accessed.
Check Replace the FAX PWB.
Trouble content Combination error between the FAX PWB destination
and
information and the machine destination information.
remedy
Section FAX
Case 1 Cause Combination error between the destination
information written in EEPROM on the FAX PWB and
the destination information of the machine (set with
SIM26-6).
Check 1) Check the destination of the FAX PWB.
and 2) Check the destination of the machine. (SIM26-6)
remedy 3) Use a proper combination of the machine and
the FAX PWB.

H2-00 Thermistor open trouble (TH_UM) H4-00 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM)
Trouble content
Detail PCU Trouble content
Cause Thermistor trouble. Detail PCU
PCU PWB trouble
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
level within the specified time from turning ON the
Fusing unit not installed.
power relay.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Thermistor trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Heater lamp trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble.
H2-02 Thermistor open trouble (TH_US) HL PWB trouble.
Interlock switch trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Detail PCU
Cause Thermistor trouble.
Replace the thermostat.
PCU PWB trouble.
Replace the HL PWB.
Fusing unit not installed.
Replace the interlock switch.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
Replace the PCU PWB. heater lamp.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
H3-00 Fusing section high temperature H4-02 Fusing section low temperature
trouble (TH_UM) trouble (TH_US)
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level. Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Thermistor trouble. level within the specified time from turning ON the
PCU PWB trouble power relay.
Connection trouble of the fusing section connector Thermistor trouble.
and the harness. Heater lamp trouble.
HL PWB trouble. PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Thermostat trouble.
heater lamp. Connector, harness connection trouble.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. HL PWB trouble.
Replace the thermistor. Interlock switch trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the HL PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
H3-02 Fusing section high temperature Replace the HL PWB.
trouble (TH_US) Replace the interlock switch.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the
heater lamp.
Trouble content Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.
Detail PCU
Cause The fusing temperature exceeds the specified level.
Thermistor trouble. H5-01 5 times continuous POD1 not-reach
PCU PWB trouble.
HL PWB trouble. Fusing section connector connection
jam
trouble.
HL PWB trouble. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the Detail PCU
heater lamp. Cause A fusing jam is not canceled completely. (A jam paper
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble. remains.)
Check connection of the thermistor and the harness. POD1 sensor trouble.
Check the PCU PWB thermistor input circuit section. Fusing unit installation trouble.
(When the lamp is ON:) Check the HL PWB and the Connector, harness connection trouble.
PCU PWB lamp circuit. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the thermistor, the HL PWB, and the PCU Check & Remedy Replace the POD1 sensor.
PWB. Check the installing position of the fusing unit.
Replace the fusing unit.
Use SIM14 to cancel the trouble.

H7-10 Recovery error from low fuser temp. L3-00 Scanner return trouble
(TH_UM_AD2)
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail SCU
Detail PCU Cause Scanner return is not completed within the specified
time.
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified
Scanner unit trouble.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due
SCU PWB trouble
to fall in the fusing temperature.
Scanner control PWB trouble.
Thermistor trouble.
Heater lamp trouble.
Scanner home position sensor trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Scanner motor trouble.
Thermostat trouble.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation.
HL PWB trouble. Replace the scanner unit.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor.
Replace the heater lamp.
Replace the scanner home position sensor.
Replace the scanner motor.
Replace the HL PWB.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the L4-02 Paper feed motor trouble
heater lamp.
Trouble content
Detail PCU
H7-12 Recovery error from low fuser temp. Cause A lock signal is detected during ON period of the
(TH_US) paper feed motor in warming up or canceling a jam.
Paper feed motor trouble.
Trouble content
PCU PWB trouble
Detail PCU
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the paper feed
Cause The fusing temperature does not reach the specified motor.
level within the specified time from stopping a job due Replace the paper feed motor.
to fall in the fusing temperature. Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Thermistor trouble. Replace the PCU PWB.
Heater lamp trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
Thermostat trouble.
L4-03 Fusing motor trouble
HL PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the thermistor. Trouble content
Replace the heater lamp. Detail PCU
Replace the PCU PWB. Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Replace the thermostat. fusing motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Fusing motor trouble.
Replace the HL PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Use SIM5-2 to check the flashing operation of the PCU PWB trouble.
heater lamp. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the operation of the fusing
motor.
Replace the Fusing motor.
L1-00 Scanner feed trouble Check connection of the connectors and the harness.
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause Scanner feed is not completed within the specified
L4-04 Drum motor trouble
time.
Scanner unit trouble. Trouble content
SCU PWB trouble Detail PCU
Scanner control PWB trouble. Cause The motor lock signal is detected during rotation of the
Harness and connector connection trouble. drum motor.
Scanner home position sensor trouble. Drum motor trouble.
Scanner motor trouble. Drum unit trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM1-1 to check the scan operation. Harness and connector connection trouble.
Replace the scanner unit. PCU PWB trouble
Replace the SCU PWB. Developing unit trouble.
Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Check & Remedy Use SIM25-1 to check the operation of the drum
Replace the scanner home position sensor. motor.
Replace the scanner motor. Replace the drum motor.
Replace the drum unit.

L4-11 Shift motor trouble L4-34 LSU cooling fan trouble

Cause No change in the shifter home position sensor signal Cause When the LSU cooling fan is operated, the fan
is detected in the operation of the shifter initializing. operation signal is not detected within the specified
Shift motor trouble. time.
PCU PWB trouble. LSU cooling fan trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. PCU PWB trouble.
Shifter home position sensor trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-1 to check the shift operation. Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Use SIM30-1 to check the operation of the shifter Replace the LSU cooling fan.
home position sensor. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the shift motor. Replace the LSU control PWB.
Replace the PCU PWB. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the shifter home position sensor.
L4-43 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM3)
trouble
L4-30 MFP fan motor trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Detail MFP
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause Fan motor trouble.
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation.
MFP PWB trouble.Harness and connector connection
Paper exit cooling fan trouble.
trouble.
PCU PWB trouble
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.
Replace the fan motor. Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor.
Replace the MFP PWB. Replace the paper exit cooling fan.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Replace the PCU PWB.
L4-58 Ozone exhaust fan trouble

L4-31 Paper exit cooling fan (POFM1/2)
trouble
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Detail PCU specified time in the ozone exhaust fan operation.
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the Ozone exhaust fan trouble.
specified time in the paper exit cooling fan operation. PCU PWB trouble.
Paper exit cooling fan trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. power.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness. Replace the ozone exhaust fan.
Use SIM6-2 to check the rotating operation of the fan. Replace the PCU PWB.
Replace the paper exit cooling fan. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
L4-59 Suction fan trouble

L4-32 Power source cooling fan trouble
Trouble content
Trouble content Detail PCU
Detail PCU Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the
Cause The fan operation signal is not detected within the specified time in the suction fan operation.
specified time in the power cooling fan operation. Suction fan trouble.
Power cooling fan trouble. PCU PWB trouble.
PCU PWB trouble. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check that the fan is rotating after turning ON the
Check & Remedy Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan motor. power.
Replace the power cooling fan. Replace the suction fan.
Replace the PCU PWB. Replace the PCU PWB.
Check/replace the connector or the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.

L6-10 Polygon motor trouble U1-01 Battery trouble
Trouble content Trouble content Backup SRAM battery voltage fall.

Detail PCU Detail MFP
Cause The motor does not reach the specified rpm in 8 sec Cause Battery life
after starting rotation of the polygon motor. Battery circuit abnormality
Polygon motor trouble. Check & Remedy Check to confirm that the battery voltage is about 2.0V
LSU control PWB trouble. or above.
Check & Remedy Use SIM61-1 to check the operation of the polygon
motor. U2-00 MFP EEPROM read/write error
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the LSU. Trouble content
Replace the LSU control PWB. Detail MFP
Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
EEPROM socket contact trouble.
L8-01 Full wave signal detection error MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises.
Check & Remedy Replace the MFP PWB EEPROM.
Detail PCU Check the power environment.
Cause No full wave signal is detected.
PCU PWB trouble
Power unit trouble. U2-05 HDD/MFP PWB SRAM contents
inconsistency
Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The HDD or the MFP PWB which differs from that
L8-02 Full wave signal error before turning OFF the power is installed.
HDD trouble.
Trouble content MFP PWB trouble.
Detail PCU Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
If there is backup data (export data by device cloning),
Cause An abnormality in the full wave signal frequency is
import it.
detected. (The frequency is detected as 65Hz or
above, or 45Hz or less.)
PCU PWB trouble.
Power unit trouble. U2-10 MFP PWB SRAM user authentication
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. index check sum error
Power frequency, waveform abnormality.
Trouble content
Replace the power unit.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Detail MFP
Check the power waveform. Cause SRAM user index information (user authentication
basic data) check sum error.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble.
L8-20 Communication error of MFP PWB/
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Mother board Transfer the user index information data in the HDD to
the SRAM.
Detail MFP
Cause Mother board PWB - MFP PWB connection trouble.
MFP PWB trouble. U2-11 MFP PWB EEPROM counter check
Mother trouble. sum error
Check & Remedy Check connection between the mother board and the
MFP PWB.
Trouble content
Check the ground of the main unit.
Replace the MFPC PWB. Detail MFP
Replace the mother board. Cause MFP PWB EEPROM trouble.
MFP PWB trouble.
PC-- Personal counter not detected
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause The personal counter is not installed.
The personal counter is not detected.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connectors and the harness.

U2-22 MFP PWB SRAM memory check sum U2-50 HDD/Flash memory registration data
error check sum error
Trouble content Trouble content HDD/MFP Flash data check sum error (MFP PWB
Detail MFP detection)
Cause The identifier which controls the communication Detail MFP
management table stored in the SRAM and the FAX Cause HDD/MFP PWB Flash memory data check sum error
soft switch is not detected correctly. (when HDD is not installed)
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. Address book
MFP PWB trouble. Image send series registration data (Sender record,
Strong external noises. meta data, etc.)
Check & Remedy Since the data of the communication management Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
table and the FAX soft switch stored in the SRAM are etc.
initialized when an error occurs, register the deleted Error in write/read circuit to HDD or MFP Flash
data again individually. memory
Use SIM16 to cancel the error. Malfunctions caused by noises
Replace the MFP PWB. MFP PWB HSS access circuit error
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the U2 trouble.
Check the following data for any abnormality. If there
U2-23 MFP PWB SRAM memory individual is any abnormality, reset and register the content.
Address book
data check sum error Image send series registration data (Sender record,
meta data, etc.)
Trouble content MFP PWB SRAM memory individual data check sum Job end list (FAX/Internet FAX/scanner job only),
error. etc.
Detail MFP Replace the HDD.
Cause The check sum value for individual data of the Replace the MFP PWB.
communication table and the sender registration does
not match.
MFP PWB SRAM trouble. U2-60 Water Mark check error
MFP PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. Trouble content
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to initialize the data related to Detail MFP
the content of check sum error.
Cause Watermark data trouble
Since the registered contents are deleted, register the
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-5 to upload the watermark data.
deleted contents again.
Use SIM16 to cancel the error.
U2-80 SCU PWB EEPROM read/write error
U2-24 MFP PWB SRAM memory user Trouble content

authentication counter check sum Detail SCU
error Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
SCU PWB trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
Detail MFP Replace the SCU PWB.
Cause MFP PWB SRAM trouble. Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
MFP PWB trouble. Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Strong external noises. simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Check & Remedy Use SIM16 to cancel the error. and the adjustment values.
U2-30 MFP PWB and PCU PWB

manufacturing No. data inconsistency U2-81 SCU PWB EEPROM check sum error
Trouble content
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Detail MFP
Cause SCU PWB EEPROM trouble.
Cause Inconsistency between the manufacturing No. saved
Installation of non-initialized EEPROM.
in the PCU PWB and that in the MFP PWB.
SCU PWB trouble.
When replacing the PCU PWB or the MFP PWB, the
EEPROM which was mounted on the PWB before
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB EEPROM.
replacement is not mounted on the new PWB.
MFP PWB trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket.
PCU PWB trouble
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Check & Remedy Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
simulation to prevent against loss of the counter data
Check to confirm that the EEPROM which was
and the adjustment values.
mounted on the PWB before replacement is mounted
on the new PWB.

U2-90 PCU PWB EEPROM read/write error U6-00 Communication error of PCU PWB/
Desk paper feed unit
Trouble content
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Detail PCU
Cause Error when testing the communication line after
PCU PWB trouble
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Desk control PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. PCU PWB trouble
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Strong external noises.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power to cancel.
Check the connector and the harness in the
communication line.
Replace the desk control PWB.
U2-91 PCU PWB EEPROM check sum error

U6-01 Desk paper feed tray 1 lift trouble
Trouble content
Cause PCU PWB EEPROM trouble. Detail PCU
Cause DLUD1 does not turn ON within the specified time
PCU PWB trouble
when lift-up operation.
DLUD1 sensor trouble.
Check & Remedy Replace the PCU PWB EEPROM. Desk control PWB trouble.
Replace the PCU PWB. Lift unit trouble.
Check contact of the EEPROM socket. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Put down the counter/adjustment values in the PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU1 sensor.
Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
U5-00 Document feed unit communication
error
U6-02 Desk paper feed tray 2 lift trouble
Trouble content
Detail SCU Trouble content
Cause Connector, harness connection trouble. Detail PCU
SCU PWB trouble. Cause DLUD2 does not turn ON within the specified time
DSPF PWB trouble. when lift-up operation.
Check & Remedy Turn OFF/ON the power. DLUD2 sensor trouble.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Desk control PWB trouble.
Replace the SCU PWB. Lift unit trouble.
Replace the DSPF PWB. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
PCU PWB trouble
Check & Remedy Replace the DLDU2 sensor.
U5-16 Document feed unit fan motor trouble Replace the desk control PWB.
Replace the lift unit.
Trouble content Replace the PCU PWB.
Detail SCU
Cause Fan motor trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM2-3 to check the operation.
Check the DSPF PWB and the driver PWB connection
of the connector and the harness.
U5-40 Document feed unit installation

trouble
Trouble content
Detail SCU
Cause When two or more document feed units are detected.
Document feeder trouble.
Check & Remedy Check connection of the connector and the harness.

U6-09 LCC lift trouble U6-21 LCC paper transport motor trouble

Cause No change in the lift motor rotation sensor signal is Cause No change in the paper transport motor rotation
detected within the specified time after outputting the sensor signal is detected within the specified time
lift motor ON signal. after outputting the paper transport motor ON signal.
The lift motor rotation sensor signal varies though the The paper transport motor rotation sensor signal
lift motor is stopped. varies though the paper transport motor is stopped.
Lift motor rotation sensor trouble. Paper transport motor rotation sensor trouble.
LCC control PWB trouble LCC control PWB trouble.
Lift mechanism trouble. Mechanism trouble.
Lift motor trouble. Paper transport motor trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Connection trouble of the connector and the harness.
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-2 and 4-3 to check the operation of the Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the paper
sensor and the lift motor. transport motor.
Replace the lift motor rotation sensor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Replace the LCC control PWB. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the lift mechanism. Replace the mechanism.
Replace the lift motor. Replace the paper transport motor.
Check connection of the connector and the harness. Check connection of the connector and the harness.
U6-22 LCC 24V power trouble

U6-10 Desk paper feed unit paper transport
motor trouble Trouble content
Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause The DC24V power is not supplied from the main unit
Detail PCU to the LCC.
Cause Desk paper feed motor trouble (motor lock, motor rpm
LCC control PWB trouble.
abnormality, over-current to the motor).
Power source unit trouble.
Desk control PWB trouble.
Connection trouble of the connector and the harness. Check & Remedy Check the connector and the harness in the power
Check & Remedy Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the desk line.
transport motor. Replace the power unit.
Replace the desk control PWB. Replace the LCC control PWB.
Replace the desk paper feed motor.
U6-50 Desk - Main unit combination trouble
U6-20 PCU PWB - LCC communication error Trouble content

Detail PCU
Trouble content Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
Detail PCU desk.
Cause Error when testing the communication line after Desk control PWB trouble.
turning ON the power or canceling the simulation. Check & Remedy Install a desk which is proper for the main unit mode.
LCC control PWB trouble. Replace the desk control PWB.
PCU PWB trouble.
Strong external noises. U6-51 LCC - Main unit combination trouble
Improper combination between the main unit and the
LCC.
Trouble content
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Detail PCU
Check the connector and the harness in the
Cause Improper combination between the main unit and the
communication line.
LCC.
Replace the LCC control PWB.
LCC control PWB trouble.
Check & Remedy Install a LCC which is proper for the main unit mode.
Replace the LCC control PWB.

U7-50 MFP PWB - Vendor machine A0-02 SCU PWB ROM error
communication error
Trouble content
Trouble content Communication error between the MFP and the serial Detail MFP
vendor. Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
Detail MFP interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc.
Cause Improper setting of the vendor machine specifications
ROM trouble.
(SIMI26-3).
Vendor machine trouble. Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
MFP PWB trouble. again.
Connector, harness connection trouble. Replace the ROM.
Check & Remedy Cancel the error by turning OFF/ON the power.
Check the connector and the harness in the A0-04 ACU PWB ROM error (when scanner
communication line. Change the specifications of the expansion kit is installed)
vendor machine (SIM26-3).
Trouble content
Detail MFP
U7-51 Vendor machine error Cause The firmware update is failed because of turning OFF
the power during the firmware update operation, etc.
ROM trouble.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to execute update of the firmware.
Detail MFP (Notification of a trouble from the serial vendor) Replace the ROM.
Cause Serial vendor machine trouble.
Check & Remedy "Err.XX" is displayed on the operation panel of the A0-10 MFP PWB ROM error
vendor. (XX is the detail code.)
Repair the vendor machine referring to the detail
code. Trouble content
Check the connector and the harness in the Detail MFP
communication line. Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
image ROM (color correction ROM).
Check & Remedy Upgrade the firmware versions of the MFP and the
UC-02 IPD/DOCC ASIC IPD section error image ROM (color correction ROM).
(N model only)
A0-11 Firmware version inconsistency
Trouble content
(MFP - PCU)
Detail SCU
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble).
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB. Trouble content
Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
UC-20 IPD/DOCC ASIC DOCC section error PCU.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
(N model only) PCU.
Trouble content
Detail SCU A0-12 Firmware version inconsistency
Cause SCU PWB trouble (IPD/DOCC ASIC trouble). (MFP - SCU)
Check & Remedy Replace the SCU PWB.
Trouble content
A0-01 PCU PWB ROM error Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the MFP and the
SCU.
Trouble content Check & Remedy Check the combination between the MFP and the
Detail MFP SCU.
Cause The firmware version-up is not completed properly by
interruption of the power during the version-up
operation, etc. A0-15 DSK BOOT version disagreement
ROM trouble.
Check & Remedy Use SIM49-1 to perform the version-up procedure
again. Trouble content
Replace the ROM. Detail MFP
Cause Firmware combination error between the DSK and the
BOOT.
Check & Remedy Check the combination between the DSK and the
BOOT.

A0-20 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data A0-22 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data
version (MFP) version (SCU)

Detail MFP Detail SCU
Cause Inconsistency between the MFP firmware version and Cause Inconsistency between the SCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version. the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware. Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
A0-21 Conflict firmware and EEPROM data

version (PCU)
Trouble content
Detail PCU
Cause Inconsistency between the PCU firmware version and
the EEPROM data version.
Check & Remedy Check the combination of the firmware.
4. Paper JAM code

A. JAM cause code list
(1) Main unit
JAM detection method Basic JAM margin JAM detection

JAM code JAM content distance (A) distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition
[mm] *1 [mm] *1 [mm] *1
TRAY2 Cassette 2 paper feed JAM CPUC2 ON CPFD2 ON 95.1 65.0 160.1
(CPFD2 not-reached JAM)
CPFD2_N3 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 23.6 65.0 88.6
(Desk 1 feed paper) start command from DESK
(The paper lead edge is at
45mm from the last roller of
DESK1.)
CPFD2_N4 CPFD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 ON 23.6 65.0 88.6
(Desk 2 feed paper) start command from DESK
45mm from the last roller of
DESK1.)
TRAY1 Cassette 1 paper feed JAM CPUC1 ON CPFD1 ON 95.1 65.0 160.1
(CPFD1 not-reached JAM)
CPFD1_N2 CPFD1 not-reached JAM CPFD2 ON CPFD1 ON 109.6 65.0 174.6
(Cassette 2 feed paper)
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
MFT Manual feed tray paper feed MPUC ON MPFD ON 52.7 65.0 117.7
JAM (MPFD not-reached)
PPD2_N1 PPD2 not-reached JAM CPFD1 ON PPD2 ON 193.6 65.0 258.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_NM PPD2 not-reached JAM MPFD ON PPD2 ON 161.1 65.0 226.1
(Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2_NL PPD2 not-reached JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD2 ON 196.8 65.0 261.8
(LCC feed paper) start command from LCC
29mm from the LCC paper
feed port.)
PPD2_NA PPD2 not-reached JAM APPD2 ON PPD2 ON 186.7 65.0 251.7
(ADU refeed paper)
POD1_N POD1 not-reached JAM RRM ON POD1 ON 234.7 50.0 284.7
POD2_N POD2 not-reached JAM POD1 ON POD2 ON 93.2 65.0 158.2
POD3_N POD3 not-reached JAM Reversing start POD3 ON 104.2 65.0 169.2
APPD1_N APPD1 not-reached JAM Reversing start APPD1 ON 133.3 65.0 198.3
APPD2_N APPD2 not-reached JAM APPD1 ON APPD2 ON 269.9 65.0 334.9

[mm] *1 [mm] *1 [mm] *1
CPFD2_S2 CPFD2 remaining JAM CPUC2 OFF CPFD2 OFF 135.2 65.0 200.2
CPFD2_S3 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 68.3 65.0 133.3
(Desk 1 feed paper) end command from DESK
(The last rear edge roller
position of DSEK1)
CPFD2_S4 CPFD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed CPFD2 OFF 68.3 65.0 133.3
(Desk 2 feed paper) end command from DESK
(The last rear edge roller
position of DSEK1)
CPFD1_S1 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPUC1 OFF CPFD1 OFF 135.2 65.0 200.2
CPFD1_S2 CPFD1 remaining JAM CPFD2 OFF CPFD1 OFF 109.6 65.0 174.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
MPFD_S MPFD remaining JAM MPUC OFF MPFD OFF 52.1 65.0 117.1
PPD2_S1 PPD2 remaining JAM CPFD1 OFF PPD2 OFF 193.6 65.0 258.6
(Desk 1 feed paper)
(Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2_SM PPD2 remaining JAM MPFD OFF PPD2 OFF 139.0 65.0 204.0
(Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2_SL PPD2 remaining JAM Reception of the paper feed PPD2 OFF 235.2 65.0 300.2
(LCC feed paper) end command from LCC
(Transport sensor "LTD" in
LCC is OFF.)
PPD2_SA PPD2 remaining JAM APPD2 OFF PPD2 OFF 186.7 65.0 251.7
(ADU refeed paper)
POD1_S POD1 remaining JAM PPD2 OFF POD1 OFF 297.3 65.0 362.3
POD2_S POD2 remaining JAM POD1 OFF POD2 OFF 93.8 65.0 158.8
(When left paper exit)
POD2 remaining JAM Reversing start POD2 OFF after starting Paper 65.0 Paper transport
(When reversing (when ADU/ reversing transport direction length
right paper exit)) direction - 6.8
length - 6.8 + 65.0
POD3_S POD3 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting POD3 OFF 111.0 65.0 176.0
reversing
APPD1_S APPD1 remaining JAM POD2 OFF after starting APPD1 OFF 149.9 65.0 214.9
reversing
APPD2_S APPD2 remaining JAM APPD1 OFF APPD2 OFF 269.2 65.0 334.2
PPD2_PRI PPD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the
(Image preparation wait IMAGE_PREPARE END_IMAGE_PREPARE
time-out) command from PCU to ICU command from ICU
(for 30 sec or more)
CPFD2_DESK CPFD2 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the preliminary
(Desk communication preliminary paper feed paper feed start command
abnormality detection) request command from from DESK to PCU
PCU to DESK (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the preliminary Reception of the preliminary
paper feed start command paper feed end command
from DESK to PCU from DESK to PCU
Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper feed
feed request command from start command from DESK to
PCU to DESK PCU (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the paper feed Reception of the paper feed
start command from DESK to end command from DESK to
PCU PCU (for 30 sec or more)

[mm] *1 [mm] *1 [mm] *1
PPD1_LCC PPD1 JAM Transmission of the Reception of the preliminary
(LCC communication preliminary paper feed paper feed start command
abnormality detection) request command from PCU from LCC to PCU
to LCC (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the preliminary Reception of the preliminary
paper feed start command paper feed end command
from LCC to PCU from LCC to PCU
Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper feed
feed request command from start command from LCC to
PCU to LCC PCU (for 30 sec or more)
Reception of the paper feed Reception of the paper feed
start command from LCC to end command from LCC to
PCU PCU (for 30 sec or more)
PPD2_FIN PPD2 JAM Transmission of the paper Reception of the paper
(Finisher communication attribute data command from interval data command from
abnormality detection) PCU to FINISHER FINISHER from PCU (for 30
sec or more)
*1: The distance (length) divided by the process speed is the time.
Process speed 28/36 PPM Model 175mm/sec
45/50 PPM Model 225mm/sec
(2) DSPF
JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection

Basic distance
JAM code JAM content distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition (A) [mm]
[mm] [mm]
SPPD1_N SPPD1 not-reached JAM Paper feed start SPPD1 ON 51.5 450.0 501.5
(When the document width is
more than B5 size.)
less than B5 size.)
SPPD1 ON SPPD2 ON 38.7 50.0 88.7
more than B5 size.)
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM Restart at the temporal stop SPPD3 ON 23.7 50.0 73.7
position
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM SPPD3 ON SPPD5 ON 149.8 50.0 199.8
SPOD_N SPOD not-reached JAM SPPD5 ON SPOD ON 96.2 50.0 146.2
SPPD1_S SPPD1 remaining JAM SPPD1 ON SPPD1 OFF Normal mode: 50.0 Normal mode:
(When the document width is 431.8mm 481.8mm
more than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000.0mm 1050.0mm
less than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000.0mm 1050.0mm
SPPD1 OFF SPPD2 OFF 37.8 50.0 87.8
more than B5 size.)
SPPD3_S SPPD3 remaining JAM SPPD2 OFF SPPD3 OFF 68.8 50.0 118.8
SPOD_S SPOD remaining JAM SPPD5 OFF SPOD OFF 95.4 50.0 145.4
SPSD_SCN Exposure start Arrival at temporal stop Exposure start command
notification timer end position from ICU to SCU
no reception time-out (120
sec)
P_SHORT Short size JAM SPPD3 ON When the document length is
less than 120.0mm.
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM Stop by a job stop request
commend from ICU to SCU
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM Trouble mode transition
request from ICU to SCU
Emergency stop by a
command

(3) RSPF
JAM detection method JAM margin JAM detection

Basic distance
JAM code JAM content distance (B) distance (A+B)
JAM detection start trigger JAM judgment condition (A) [mm]
[mm] [mm]
more than B5 size.)
less than B5 size.)
SPPD1 ON SPPD2 ON 38.7 50.0 88.7
more than B5 size.)
SPPD3_N SPPD3 not-reached JAM Restart at the temporal stop SPPD3 ON 23.7 50.0 73.7
position
SPPD5_N SPPD5 not-reached JAM SPPD3 ON SPPD5 ON 149.8 50.0 199.8
SPPD2_NR SPPD2 reverse Reversing start SPPD2 ON 82.9 50.0 132.9
not-reached JAM
more than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000.0mm 1050.0mm
less than B5 size.) Long size mode: Long size mode:
1000.0mm 1050.0mm
SPPD1 OFF SPPD2 OFF 37.8 50.0 87.8
more than B5 size.)
SPPD2_SR SPPD2 reverse SPPD5 OFF SPPP2 OFF 100.9 50.0 150.9
remaining JAM
SPSD_SCN Exposure start Arrival at temporal stop Exposure start command
notification timer end position from ICU to SCU
no reception time-out (120
sec)
P_SHORT Short size JAM SPPD3 ON When the document length is
less than 120.0mm.
ICU_REQ ICU factor stop JAM Stop by a job stop request
commend from ICU to SCU
STOP_JAM Emergency stop JAM Trouble mode transition
request from ICU to SCU
Emergency stop by a
command
(4) Option
JAM detection method

JAM code Content
JAM detection timer start trigger JAM judge detector
FIN PDPPD1_N Interface inlet port not-reached 1K POD2 ON PDPPD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM 4K POD2 ON FJPID does not turn ON within the specified time.
PDPPD1_S Interface inlet port remaining 1K PDPPD1 ON PDPPD1 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
JAM 4K FJPID ON FJPID does not turn OFF within the specified time.
PDPPD2_N Interface outlet port not-reached 1K PDPPD1 ON PDPPD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM 4K FJPID ON FJPOD does not turn ON within the specified time.
PDPPD2_S Interface outlet port remaining 1K PDPPD2 ON PDPPD2 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
JAM 4K FJPOD ON FJPOD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FPPD1_N Finisher inlet port not-reached Inner POD2 ON FED does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM 1K PDPPD2 ON FPPD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
4K FJPOD ON FED does not turn ON within the specified time.
FPPD1_S Finisher inlet port remaining Inner FED ON FED does not turn OFF within the specified time.
JAM 1K FPPD1 ON FPPD1 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
4K FED ON FED does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FPPD2_N Saddle section not-reached JAM 1K Starting the switchback operation to FPPD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
the saddle transport section
FPPD2_S Saddle section remaining JAM 1K FPPD2 ON FPPD2 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
FPDD_S Bundle exit remaining JAM Inner Starting the bundle exit operation FSTPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
1K 1) Bundle exit operation start 1) FATPD does not turn OFF within the specified
2) time.
2) FPDD turns OFF (when the bundle exit
operation is ended.)

JAM detection method
JAM code Content
JAM detection timer start trigger JAM judge detector
FIN FSTPLJ Staple JAM Inner FSHPD OFF FSHPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
1K 1) FSHS OFF 1) FSHS does not turn ON within the specified
2) FSSHS OFF (Saddle) time. (It is, however, limited to the case when
3) FSHS turns ON by the reversing operation after
that.)
2) FSSHS does not turn ON within the specified
time. (It is, however, limited to the case when
FSSHS turns ON by the reversing operation
after that.)
3) After stapling operation, cuing of staples is
disabled. (including the saddle)
4K FSHPD OFF FSHPD does not turn ON within the specified time.
(It is, however, limited to the case when FSHPD turns
ON by the reversing operation after that.)
FPNCHJ Punch JAM 1K FPCHPS OFF (when punching is ended.)
4K Punching operation start FPE does not turn ON/OFF within the specified time
(FPNM (punch motor) drive start) (the specified number of times).
FDOP Finisher door open JAM Inner FDSW ON (during JOB)
4K FFDD ON or FCD ON or FJPDD ON (during JOB)
FIN_TIME Finisher paper early reaching Inner FED ON (front paper) FED turns ON earlier than the specified timing.
JAM (detection paper)
1K POD2 ON (front paper) POD2 turns ON earlier than the specified timing.
(detection paper)
4K POD2 ON (front paper) POD2 turns ON earlier than the specified timing.
(detection paper)
FIN_PAOF Paper attribute data reception 1K Reception of paper attribute data exceeds the
overflow allowable buffer limit (16 sheets).
FPATPD_S Saddle transport remaining JAM 1K Folding transport start (The paper FSATPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
lead edge is at 18.2mm after passing
the saddle exit roller.)
FPPD3_N Saddle paper exit not-reached 1K 1) Pushing operation start after 1) FPPD3 does not turn ON within the specified
JAM completion of paper transport to time.
the saddle process tray (FSDM 2) FPPD3 turns OFF. (When the paper lead edge
(saddle motor) drive start) reaches 18.2mm after passing the saddle exit
2) roller.)
FPPD3_S Saddle paper exit remaining 1K Folding transport start (The paper FPPD3 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
JAM lead edge is at 18.2mm after passing
the saddle exit roller.)
FSSMJ Stapler shift motor JAM 1K Stapler shift motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FPDMJ Paper exit motor JAM 1K Paper exit motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FSDMJ Saddle motor JAM 1K Saddle motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FGMJ Gripper motor JAM 1K Gripper motor trouble detection (during JOB)
FSPTMJ Saddle paper transport motor 1K Saddle paper transport motor trouble detection
JAM (during JOB)
FHS_N Paper exit not-reached JAM 4K FED ON FPDD does not turn ON within the specified time.
FHS_S Paper exit remaining JAM Inner FED OFF FSTPD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
4K FPDD ON FPDD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
DESK TRAY3 Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed DPUC1 ON (paper feed start) DPFD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM
DPFD1_N4 DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk DPFD2 ON DPFD1 does not turn ON within the specified time.
2 feed paper)
DPFD1_S3 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 DPFD1 ON DPFD1 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
feed paper)
DPFD1_S4 DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 DPFD2 OFF DPFD1 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
feed paper)
DPFD2_S4 DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 DPFD2 ON DPFD2 does not turn OFF within the specified time.
feed paper)
TRAY4 Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed DPUC2 ON (paper feed start) DPFD2 does not turn ON within the specified time.
JAM
LCC LCC Side LCC paper feed JAM LPFC ON (paper feed start) LPFD does not turn ON within the specified time.
(LPFD not-reached)
LPFD_SL LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC LPFD ON LPFD does not turn OFF within the specified time.
feed paper)

[7] FIRMWARE UPDATE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
*Firmware types
1. Outline
Flash ROM CONTENTS
A. Cases where update is required MAIN BODY ALL The following All the contents
ROM update is required in the following cases: ICU (PROG 1) CONFIG
XIO FONT
1) When there is a necessity to upgrade the performance.
GRAPHIC
2) When installing a new spare part ROM for repair to the CNUPDATE
machine. BOOT MAIN
3) When installing a new spare parts PWB unit (with ROM) for LANG
repair to the machine. PDL
4) When there is a trouble in the ROM program and it must be WEBHELP
repaired. ANIME
ICU (PROG 2) MAIN (NIC)
B. Notes for update UNI CODE
(1) Relationship between each ROM and update ESCP FONT
SCU SCU (MAIN)
Before execution of ROM update, check combinations with ROMs
PCU PCU (MAIN)
installed in the other PWBs including options. Some combinations
SPF DSPF (MAIN)
of each ROMs versions may cause malfunctions of the machine.
FAX1 FAX1 (MAIN)
C. Update procedures and kinds of firmware OPTION 1K FINISHER FINISHER_1K (MAIN)
INNER FINISHER FINISHER_INNER (MAIN)
There are following methods of update of the firmware.
LCC A4 LCC_A4 (MAIN)
1) Update method using SIM 49-1
DESK DESK (MAIN)
2) Update method using FTP PUNCH PUNCH (MAIN)
3) Update method using the Web page 4K FINISHER 4KFIN (MAIN)
4) Update method using the CN update function (There are three 4K PUNCH 4KPUNCH (MAIN)
methods.) ACRE ACRE (MAIN)
Normally, one of 1) - 3) is used to update the firmware.
When any one of 1) - 3) is interrupted by an error such as
power-off during updating, etc., and when retries of these
methods are failed, the method 4) is employed.
2. Update procedure
A. Update method using SIM 49-1
For the update, connect the media or USB memory to the USB port
that exists in the main body, and select the firmware data in the
media or USB memory by simulation screen in the main unit.
Media
Firmware.sfu Adapter
USB Host
Firmware.sfu +
Firmware.sfu USB memory
Firmware.sfu The machine detects the media

and executes the program automatically.
*1:
Store the firmware data (xxx .sfu) to the media or USB memory
beforehand.
The media used for the update must have an enouch capacity for
storing the firmware data.
The USB memory equipped with the security (secure) function
cannot be used.
MX-M503N FIRMWARE UPDATE 7 1

The firmware update executes by SIM49-01.

1) Insert the media or USB memory which stores the firmware 6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
into the main unit. ),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72
2) Enter the SIM49-01. ,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270
Press the key of the file to be updated. The screen transfers to
&855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 &855(1783'$7('72
the update screen. /$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG@
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
The progress is displayed on right side of "FIRMWARE

UPDATE" title by 20 steps.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
6 (
5(0$,16)25 0,187(6
&$87,21'212732:(52))7+(0)3),50:$5(83'$7(,1352*5(66
* The number of key changes according to the number of the
sfu file in the media or USB memory inserted.
* If the media or USB memory was not inserted when entry to
the SIM49-01 screen, "INSERT A USB MEMORY DEVICE
CONTAINING MFP FIRMWARE [OK]" is displayed on the
screen. Insert the media or USB memory and push the [OK]
key to open the file. If the media have not been inserted and
[OK] key is pushed, the next screen does not appear and the
screen waits the entry. Conversely, if the media or USB
At this time, only the progress gauge is displayed on the
memory is pulled out on the file list screen, the error is
screen, and the version and the firmware selection key are not
detected by the [FILE] key pressing, and the first screen
displayed.
appears.
6) If the update is normal completion, following screen is dis-
3) Current version number and the version number to be updated
played.
will be shown for each firmware respectively.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26( ),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @ &203/(7(3/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
&21),* &855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
Exit the simulation mode and turn off the power.

4) Select the key of the firmware to be updated. The key will be
Go to SIM22-05 and confirm the firmware has upgraded suc-
highlighted. (In this screen, [CONFIG] and [ICU(BOOTM)] are
cessfully.
selected.) At the same time, [EXECUTE] key appears.
7) If the update is not normal completion, following screen is dis-
If firmware's key is not selected, [EXECUTE] is gray out and
played.
cannot be pressed.

6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
),50:$5(83'$7(
),50:$5(83'$7(>XVEEG @
(55253/($6(728&+>2.@72),1,6+
&21),* ,&803&806&8%
&855(1783'$7('72
,&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%2270 &855(1783'$7('72
,&8%227&1 &855(1783'$7('72
/$1*8$*( &855(1783'$7('72
*5$3+,& &855(1783'$7('72
6/,67 &855(1783'$7('72
3&8%227 &855(1783'$7('72
3&80$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.%227 &855(1783'$7('72
'(6.0$,1 &855(1783'$7('72
$/&&%227 &855(1783'$7('72
2.
$// $5(<28685(" <(6 12 (;(&87(
* Press the selected key again to release the selection.

* Press [ALL] key to select all items.
5) Press [EXECUTE] key. ARE YOU SURE? [YES] [NO]
becomes clear. Press [YES] to start the update of selected
firemware.

B. Firmware update using FTP
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension ".sfu") from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identi-
fier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Machine 1 Machine 3
10.36.112.83 10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2 Machine 4
FTP Client
10.36.101.52 10.36.101.53
C. Firmware update using the Web page 4) When the firmware update is finished, "Firmware Update com-
pleted. Please reboot the MFP." appears. Pressing the
An Web browser (service technicians Web page) is used to update
the firmware. [Reboot] key, the machine will restart to complete the update.
The browser will shift to the following screen.
1) Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A
special firmware upgrade page appears.
2) Click the "Update of Firmware" key in the Web page. Click the
[Browse] key and select the firmware for the update.
MX-M503N
"Close the browser and open again to display latest informa-
tion." will be displayed.
5) Check the firmware version of machine again.
D. Firmware update using the CN update function

(There are three methods.)
(1) Outline
3) After selecting the file, click the [Submit] key to send the firm- The firmware update method using the MFP PWB ROM slot of the
ware to the machine. Update processing begins. While pro- MFP PWB is called "CN update."
cessing takes place, "Firmware Update, now processing..." a. Function
appears. There are the following five functions in the CN update mode.
1) ROM copy function 1
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in
details in this manual.)
2) Firmware update function
This function is used to update the firmware by transferring
data from the PC which is connected to the MFP PWB, the
SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, and various options
by means of a USB memory or USB cable.
This is basically the same as SIM49-01, but differs in the fol-
lowing points:
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during
firmware update operation of other method than the CN
update, this method can be used to update the firmware.

If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the d. DIP-SW used in the CN update mode
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the To enter the CN update mode, set DIP-SW1 and DIP-SW2 on the
normal boot program. MFP PWB as shown below:
If the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality DIP-SW1 ON: CN update mode
in the boot program (Program ROM 1).
DIP-SW2 OFF: OFF in the normal mode
If the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormal- NOTE: Keep DIP-SW2 at OFF. DIP-SW2 is used to enable the
ity in the main program (Program ROM 2). USB port on the front side or the USB port on the rear side.
When it is set to OFF, the USB port on the front side is
3) ROM copy function 2
enabled. When it is set to ON, the USB port on the rear
(This is not used in the market, and therefore, not described in side is enabled.
details in this manual.)
When the keyboard is installed to the machine, an exclu-
4) Firmware version check function sive connection is enabled. (Simultaneous connection is
(The method to check the firmware version by using SIM22-5 disabled.)
is easier than this method. Therefore, it is not described in this When terminating the CN update mode, reset DIP-SW1 to
manual.) OFF (normal mode).
5) ROM making function
NOTE: When using the USB port, be careful of the total current
(This function is not used in the market, and not described in consumption not to exceed 500mA.
this manual.)
b. Purpose
This function is used in the following cases:
1) When an error occurs during firmware update operation other
than the CN update.
When the power is shut down or an error occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this
Upper: DIP-SW1
method can be used to update the firmware. Lower: DIP-SW2
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, the When tilted forward, OFF.
Program ROM 1 must be replaced with a new one having the When tilted toward the PWB, ON.
normal boot program.
If an error occurs in the boot program, this method cannot be
used. In such a case, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced
with a new one having the normal boot program.
c. ROM slot used in the CN update mode
The following ROM slots are used in the CN update mode.
e. Keys used in the CN update mode
The following five keys are used for operations in the CN update
ROM slot numbers
used in the CN
mode. Be careful that the functions of the keys differ those in the
update mode normal mode.
CN12 slot UP key DOWN key

CN11 slot
CN10 slot
CN9 slot
MENU key BACK key OK key
Key name Functions in the CN update mode

[OK] key Executes the selected function or item.
[MENU] key Selects a menu.
[BACK] key Selects a menu.
(Serves as a cancel key in the execution check screen.)
[UP] key Selects an item.
[DOWN] key Selects an item.

f. Kinds of Flash ROM a-2. Procedures
There are following kinds of Flash ROM used in this machine. 1) Turn OFF the power, and remove the rear cabinet and the
Take care that a different model number of Flash ROM cannot be MFP PWB cover.
used. 2) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to ON. (Tilt it to the PWB side.)
The Flash ROM model number is marked on the semiconductor 3) Install the USB memory into the USB port.
chip on the Flash ROM.
The number of semiconductor chips differs depending on the Flash
ROM model number: 1, 2, and 4.
This also helps identifying the model number of Flash ROM.
Kinds of Flash ROM
Normal Number of
Flash ROM
Kinds installing semiconductor
model number
position chips
MFP (PROGRAM1) MFP PWB LHF64FK4 2
ROM CN12 slot
MFP (PROGRAM2) MFP PWB LHF64FK4 4
ROM CN11 slot
PCU ROM PCU PWB LHF00L28 1
SCU ROM SCU PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
PTTL90 USB port
DSPF ROM DSPF PWB LH28F800BJE - 1
USB memory installing position
PTTL90
(2) Operating procedures 4) Turn ON the power.

5) Check to confirm that the machine starts booting. (It takes
a. Firmware update function
more than ten seconds to display the menu.)
This function is used to copy the firmware data from a USB mem-
ory or the PC which is connected with a USB cable to the MFP
PWB, the SCU PWB, the PCU PWB, the FAX PWB, or various Update Program Init
options to update the firmware.
Please wait
It is basically same as SIM 49-01, but differs in the following points.
1) The update target ROM is automatically selected.
2) When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a
section other than the boot program for some reasons during Version Check
firmware update operation of other method than the CN Conf : 00050000
update.
If, however, an abnormality occurs in the boot program, this
Display when booting is completed
method cannot be used. On that case, the Program ROM 1
must be replaced with a new one having the normal boot pro- 6) Select the firmware update mode.
gram.
Select the update mode with [MENU] key and [BACK] key.
When the power is shut down or an abnormality occurs in a section
other than the boot program for some reasons during firmware
update operation of other method than the CN update, this method Firm Update
can be used to update the firmware. If, however, an abnormality
occurs in the boot program, the Program ROM 1 must be replaced
From USB Memory
with a new one having the normal boot program.
When the boot animation is not displayed, there is an abnormality Display of the firmware update mode
in the boot program (Program ROM 1).
7) Press [OK] key.
When the boot animation is displayed but "Copying is enabled" is
The firmware file saved in the USB memory is retrieved, and
not displayed on the copier basic menu, there is an abnormality in
the file selection menu is displayed.
the main program (Program ROM 2).
a-1. Necessary items
1) Machine (Insert the MFP (PROGRAM1) ROM into CN12 slot, Firm Update
and insert the MFP (PROGRAM2) ROM into CN11.) > F 0100P000.sfu
2) USB memory with the firmware file (SFU) saved in it. (Save the
firmware file in the main directory or in a one-level lower direc- Display of file selection
tory.)
8) Select the firmware file (SFU).
Select the target firmware file (SFU) with [UP] key and
[DOWN] key.
When [OK] key is pressed with a directory name (the head: ">
D") displayed, the menu goes to the one-stage lower directory.
When [BACK] key is pressed in the lower-stage directory, the
menu returns to the original upper directory.

9) Press [OK] key.
The selected firmware file (SFU) is read. It takes about one
minute.
Firm Update
Reading Data
Display of file reading
10) After completion of reading, the firmware update process is

continued.
Firm Update IcuM

Writing Data
Display of the firmware update process
* The abbreviated name of the firmware which is under

update process is indicated on the right upper corner of the
display.
* During the update process, the display may flash instanta-
neously. It is a normal operation.
11) Check the update result.
Use [UP] key and [DOWN] key to display the results of all the
firmware programs.
Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM Firm Update IcuM

Result : OK Result : Not Update Result : NG
Display of the firmware update result
OK: Update is completed successfully.

NG: Update is failed.
Not Update: Update is not executed.
12) Turn OFF the power.
13) Set the MFP PWB DIP-SW1 to OFF. (Set the DIP-SW to the
normal mode.)
14) Turn ON the power, and check to confirm that the machine
boots up normally.
Check to confirm that the boot animation is displayed.
Check to confirm that "Copying is enabled" is displayed on the
copier basic menu.
15) Check to confirm the version of each firmware with SIM22-5.
16) Attach the MFP PWB cover and the rear cabinet.
NOTE: If the CN update function does not work normally, refer to
"Check items when the CN update function does not work
normally" and fix the abnormal points.

[8] MAINTENANCE
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

A. Execution items before maintenance and servicing
To perform the procedures safely, refer to "NOTE FOR SERVICING" on the first page of this service manual.
Item Simulation
Check the developer counter value. 22 13
Check the OPC drum counter value. 22 13
Check the print count mode in each section and each operation mode. 22 1
Check the number of paper jam troubles. 22 2
Check the positions and contents of paper jams. 22 3
Check the positions and contents of paper jams (DSPF section). 22 12
Check the contents of troubles. 22 4
Print the setting values and the adjustment values. 22 6
Check the number of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch. 22 8
Check the number of use of each paper feed section. 22 9
Check the ROM version. 22 5
B. Necessary execution items in maintenance and servicing

Perform the work items listed in the maintenance list (parts) and details of works as well as the items described below.
(The necessary execution items are marked with "" in the table below.)
When repairing (replacing consumable parts) / maintenance When repairing

When When After (without
JOB When
No. Work item Simulation replacing replacing cleaning the Periodic replacement of
No. Installation replacing
the OPC the fuser scanner maintenance consumable
developer
drum web roller (read) section parts) / inspecting
1 Toner 25-2
concentration
reference control
level setting
2 The photo- 24-7
conductor
counter is
cleared.
3 Clear the fuser 24-4
web cleaning
send counter.
4 ADJ12A Copy/Printer 46-24
image quality
check and
adjustment
The JOB No. indicates the title number of the adjustment item described in the chapter of the adjustments.
Refer to the details based on this number according to necessity.
C. Execution items after maintenance and servicing

Item Simulation
The paper jam / trouble data are cleared. 24 1
The use quantity counter of each paper feed section is cleared. 24 2
The numbers of use of the DSPF, the scanner, the finisher, the stapler, and the punch are cleared. 24 3
The maintenance counter is cleared. (Select MAINTENANCE ALL) 24 4
The list of setting values and adjustment values is printed. 22 6
MX-M503N MAINTENANCE 8 1
2. Contents of the maintenance codes (Relationship between various counters values
and display messages)
The message of maintenance execution timing is displayed when each counter reaches the specified value.
The relationships between the kinds of messages and counters are as shown below.
A. Maintenance counter C. Fusing section counters

Message when near end over Message when near end over
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Near end Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Counter name Counter name
conditions 0 1 conditions 0 1
Print Enable Print Stop Print Enable Print Stop
Maintenance 90% of Sim.21-1 Message (1) Fusing unit print No criteria
counter (Total) set value counter
Fusing unit usage No criteria
days
Message when end over
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions
0 1 Message when not installed
Print Enable Print Stop Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
Unit name Not installed
Maintenance Sim.21-1 set value Message (1) Message (2) 0 1
counter (Total) Print Enable Print Stop
Fusing unit Judged by the Message (7) Message (7)
signal level of the
Message Print job
Message fusing thermistor
No. Enable/Disable
Fusing web unit No criteria
(1) Maintenance required.Code: TA Enable
(2) Maintenance required.Code: TA Disable
(With parentheses) Message when end over
Sim.26-38B Sim.26-38B
After completion of maintenance, clear the maintenance counter Counter name End conditions
0 1
of SIM24-4. Print Enable Print Stop
Fusing web print 200,000 [sheets] Message (5) Message (6)
B. Transfer unit section counters counter
Fusing web Judged by the Message (5) Message (6)
Message when near end over
cleaning feed fusing web life end
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name counter detection signal,
conditions 0 1 not by the fusing
Print Enable Print Stop web cleaning feed
Transfer unit print counter.
counter Fusing web usage 740 [days]
Transfer unit days
accumulated
traveling distance Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the fusing web print
Transfer unit counter or the web life end detection.
usage days
Waste toner Twice ON of Message (3) Message (3) Message Print job
Message
200ms or above of No. Enable/Disable
waste toner near (5) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Enable
end detection (6) Maintenance required.Code: FK3 Disable
signal (Displayed with parentheses)
(7) Install the fusing unit. Disable
Message when end over (Displayed with parentheses)
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions After completion of maintenance, clear the fusing unit counter of
0 1
Print Enable Print Stop SIM24-4 (the fusing unit print counter, and the fusing unit usage
Waste toner Twice ON of Message (4) Message (4) days).
200ms or above of
D. OPC drum section counters
waste toner end
detection signal
Message when near end over
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name
Message Print job conditions 0 1
Message
No. Enable/Disable Print Enable Print Stop
(3) Please replace the toner collection Enable Drum cartridge No criteria
container. (with OK key) print counter (K)
(Displayed with parentheses) Drum cartridge No criteria
(4) Please replace the toner collection Disable accumulated
container. (Displayed with parentheses) traveling distance
(K)
After completion of maintenance, clear the transfer unit counter Drum cartridge No criteria
of SIM 24-4-1 (the transfer unit print counter, the transfer unit usage days (K)
accumulated traveling distance, and the transfer unit usage
days).
F. Toner cartridge section counters
Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Counter name End conditions Toner preparation message
0 1
Sim.26-69A
Print Enable Print Stop Near end Sim.26-69A
Sensor name 1
Drum cartridge 36/45/50 CPM Message (8) Message (8) conditions 0
Not
print counter (K) model: 200,000 Displayed
displayed
[sheets]
Toner remaining Total toner supply Message (10)
28 CPM model:
quantity sensor time (Equivalent to
150,000 [sheets]
(K) 25% or less of
Drum accumulated 930K rotations Message (8) Message (8)
toner remaining
rotation number (K)
quantity)
Drum cartridge 9999 days
usage days (K) Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the drum cartridge print Message when near end over
counter or the drum rotations accumulated number counter. Sim.26-69B
Near end Sim.26-69B
Sensor name 1
Message Print job conditions 0
Message Not
No. Enable/Disable Displayed
displayed
(8) Maintenance required.Code: DK Enable Toner remaining When a low toner Message (12)
quantity sensor state continues for
After completion of maintenance, clear the drum counter of
(K) more than the
SIM24-7 (the drum print counter and the drum accumulated trav- specified time (*1)
eling distance).
Japan: Not displayed, EX Japan: Displayed
E. Developer section counters
Message when near end over Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A
Near end Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A Counter name End conditions
Counter name 0 1
conditions 0 1 Print Enable Print Stop
Print Enable Print stop Toner remaining When the pixel Message (11) Message (11)
Developer No criteria quantity sensor count value
cartridge print (K) reaches the
counter (K) specified level
Developer No criteria from the near end
cartridge condition. (*2)
accumulated
traveling distance
(K) Message Print job
Message
No. Enable/Disable
Developer No criteria
cartridge usage (10) Prepare a new one Enable
days (K) (11) Change the toner cartridge. K Disable
(Displayed with parentheses)
(12) K Toner supply is low. Enable
Counter name End conditions

Sim.26-38A Sim.26-38A *1
0 1
Near end conditions
Print Enable Print Stop
Developer 36/45/50 CPM Message (9) Message (9) (1) When the toner density sensor output continues 0.14V
cartridge print model: 200,000 greater than the toner density reference value for 30 sec.
counter (K) [sheets] (2) When the toner density sensor output continues 1.00V
28 CPM model: greater than the toner density reference value for 2.5 sec.
150,000 [sheets]
(3) When the toner density sensor output continues greater than
Developer 930K rotations Message (9) Message (9)
the toner density reference value and smaller than the
accumulated
rotation number (K) reference value + 0.14V for 120 sec.
Developer 9999 days *2
cartridge usage End conditions
days (K)
When the specified toner consumption count value is reached
Judgment is made at the earlier timing of the developer print from the near end state.
counter or the developer accumulated rotation number counter. The specified value is determined by the setting of SIM26-69D.
The developer rotation number is synchronized with the drum 1 0 sheet
motor rotation number. 2 25 sheets
3 50 sheets (Default)
Message Print job
Message 4 100 sheets
No. Enable/Disable
(9) Maintenance required.Code: VK Enable 5 200 sheets
After replacement of developer, use SIM25-2 to set the toner den- (The above numbers of sheets are based on A4 and 6% conver-
sion.)
sity control level. By this setting, the developer counters (the devel-
oper print counter and the developer accumulated traveling
distance counter) are cleared.
3. Maintenance list (parts) and details of works
36/45/50 CPM model
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Section Part name Remark
calling k k k k k k k k k k k k
Photo- Drum Replace even at the
conductor specified RPM.
section Storage period is 3 years.
Replace after 2 years of
use.
Cleaner blade Replace at 200K of the
drum counter or 2 years
of use.
Toner reception seal
Toner reception side
sheet F/R
Toner reception
lower molt
Side seal F/R
Drum separation
pawl unit
MC unit
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
advance if necessary.
Developing Developer Replace even at the
section specified RPM.
Storage period is 2 years.
use.
DV seal Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2
years of use.
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter Replace at 200K of the
years of use.
Connector
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
supply Replace after 2 years of
section use.
LSU Dust-proof glass
section
Transfer Transfer roller Replace at 200K or 2
section years of use.
Discharge plate
Transfer roller
bearing F and R
Transfer roller collar
Transfer rear star
ring
Transfer roller gear
Pre-transfer paper
guide
Process control Air cleaning
sensor
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Fusing Lower heat roller Replace with the lower
section heat roller unit. / Replace
at 200K or 2 years of use.
Lower heat roller Replace with the lower
bearing heat roller unit. / Apply
grease when assembling
to the heat roller.
Upper separation When a foreign material
pawl is attached, it must be
Thermistor cleaned away.
Lower separation
pawl
Web pressure roller
bearing
Web pressure roller
Web roller
Web 45T gear
Fusing paper exit
roller
Gears
Paper guides
Upper heat roller Replace with the upper
heat roller unit. / Replace
gear heat roller unit.
Upper heat roller grease when assembling
heat-insulation bush to the heat roller.
Filter Ozone filter
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller Replacement reference:
section Paper feed roller Replace according to
Separation roller each paper feed counter
value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2:
Replace at 100K or 1
year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at
100K or 1 year of use.
Torque limiter Replacement reference:
Replace according to
each paper feed counter
value.
100K
Manual feed: 100K
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Paper Resist roller (Idle)
transport Paper dust removing
section unit
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Duplex/ Discharge brush
paper exit Transport rollers
section Sensors
Gears When checking, apply to
the necessary positions.
Transport paper
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) When checking, apply to
section Shaft earth sections the necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Scanner Mirror/Lens/
section Reflection sheet/
CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner N model: Air cleaning for the LED
lamp LED section
PWB
U model:
Xenon
lamp
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
DSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
section Pickup roller Replace according to
value.
SPF section roller:
year of use.
Torque limiter SPF Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to
Call-in torque limiter each paper feed counter
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
limiter: Replace at 400K
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
No. 1 scanning plate
No. 2 scanning
section, scanning
glass
No. 2 scanning
section, white
reference glass
CIS unit Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush
OC mat
Belts
RSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
value.
SPF section roller:
year of use.
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
Scanning plate
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush
OC mat
Belts
Option
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Inner Transport rollers
finisher/ Transport paper
Punch unit guides
for Inner Gears When checking, apply to
finisher the necessary positions.
Belts
Knurling belt Replacement reference:
Paddle Replace at every 1000K
of the finisher paper exit
count value.
Sensors
Discharge brush
Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
Staple cartridge Replacement is made by the user at every 5,000 pcs.
Saddle Transport rollers
stitch Transport paper
finisher guides
(1K)/Punch Gears When checking, apply to
unit for the necessary positions.
Saddle Belts
stitch
finisher
Replace at every 1000K
(1K)
count value.
Sensors
Discharge brush
(For saddle finisher)
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
Finisher Transport rollers
(4K)/Punch Transport paper
unit for guides
Finisher Gears When checking, apply to
(4K) the necessary positions.
Belts
Sensors
Discharge brush
Paper Transport rollers
pass unit Transport paper
guides
Sensors
A4 large Pickup roller/ Replacement reference:
capacity Paper feed rollers Replace according to
tray each paper feed counter
value.: 100K or 1 year of
use
value.: 100K
Transport rollers
Transport paper
guides
Belts
Sensors
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
Paper feed Pickup roller Replacement reference:
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller Replace according to
use
value.: 100K
Transport rollers
Transport paper
guides
Gears
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Photo- Drum Replace even at the
conductor specified RPM.
section Storage period is 3 years.
use.
Cleaner blade Replace at 150K of the
drum counter or 2 years
of use.
Toner reception seal
Toner reception side
sheet F/R
Toner reception
lower molt
Side seal F/R
Drum separation
pawl unit
MC unit
Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. serviceman calls. It is
advisable to replace in
Developing Developer Replace even at the
section specified RPM.
use.
DV seal Replace at 150K of the
years of use.
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter Replace at 150K of the
years of use.
Connector
Toner Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
supply Replace after 2 years of
section use.
LSU Dust-proof glass
section
Transfer Transfer roller Replace at 150K or 2
section years of use.
Discharge plate
Transfer roller
bearing F and R
Transfer roller collar
Transfer rear star
ring
Transfer roller gear
Pre-transfer paper
guide
Process control Air cleaning
sensor
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Fusing Lower heat roller Replace with the lower
section heat roller unit. / Replace
Lower heat roller Replace with the lower
grease when assembling
to the heat roller.
Upper separation When a foreign material
pawl is attached, it must be
Thermistor cleaned away.
Lower separation
pawl
Web pressure roller
bearing
Web pressure roller
Web roller
Web 45T gear
Fusing paper exit
roller
Gears
Paper guides
heat roller unit. / Replace
gear heat roller unit.
Upper heat roller grease when assembling
heat-insulation bush to the heat roller.
Filter Ozone filter
section
Paper feed Paper pick-up roller Replacement reference:
section Paper feed roller Replace according to
value.
year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at
value.
100K
Manual feed: 100K
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Paper Resist roller (Idle)
transport Paper dust
section removing unit
Transport rollers
Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Duplex/ Discharge brush
paper exit Transport rollers
section Sensors
Transport paper
guides
Drive Gears (Grease) When checking, apply to
section Shaft earth sections the necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
Belts
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Scanner Mirror/Lens/
section Reflection sheet/
CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp Air cleaning for the LED
(LED PWB) section
Rails
Drive belt/drive wire
Sensors
RSPF Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
value.
SPF section roller:
year of use.
(for PIC) value.
SPF section torque
or 2 years of use.
Transport rollers
Scanning plate
Paper exit roller
Discharge brush
OC mat
Belts
Option
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Inner Transport rollers
finisher/ Transport paper
Punch unit guides
for Inner Gears When checking, apply to
finisher the necessary positions.
Belts
Paddle Replace at every 1000K
count value.
Sensors
Discharge brush
Saddle Transport rollers
stitch Transport paper
finisher guides
(1K)/Punch Gears When checking, apply to
unit for the necessary positions.
Saddle Belts
stitch
finisher
Replace at every 1000K
(1K)
count value.
Sensors
Discharge brush
(For saddle finisher)
Staple cartridge (For Replacement is made by the user at every 2,000 pcs.
saddle finisher)
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
Finisher Transport rollers
(4K)/Punch Transport paper
unit for guides
Finisher Gears When checking, apply to
(4K) the necessary positions.
Belts
Sensors
Discharge brush
Paper Transport rollers
pass unit Transport paper
guides
Sensors
A4 large Pickup roller/ Replacement reference:
capacity Paper feed rollers Replace according to
tray each paper feed counter
use
value.: 100K
Transport rollers
Transport paper
guides
Belts
Sensors
Paper feed Pickup roller Replacement reference:
tray (Desk) Paper feed roller Replace according to
use
value.: 100K
Transport rollers
Transport paper
guides
Gears
A. Photo-conductor section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
No. Part name Remark
1 Drum Replace even at the specified
RPM.
Replace after 2 years of use.
2 Cleaner blade Replace at 200K of the drum
counter or 2 years of use.
3 Toner reception seal
4 Toner reception side
sheet F/R
5 Toner reception
lower molt
6 Side seal F/R
7 Drum separation
pawl unit
8 MC unit
9 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Drum Replace even at the specified
RPM.
2 Cleaner blade Replace at 150K of the drum
counter or 2 years of use.
3 Toner reception seal
4 Toner reception side
sheet F/R
5 Toner reception
lower molt
6 Side seal F/R
7 Drum separation
pawl unit
8 MC unit
9 Waste toner box Replacement is made by the user every time when the waste toner box is full. Check when a serviceman calls.
When a serviceman calls, be sure to check. It is advisable to replace in
6
2
5 4
6 5
8
7
1
7
3
4
(Note for servicing the OPC drums) (1) Waste toner box replacement
1. Prevention of oily dirt attachment 1) Open the front cover.
[Note]
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the OPC drum
surface. (Keep the unit away from oils and dust.)
When replacing the OPC drum, cover the OPC drum with the
protection sheet and hold the protection sheet.
If it is required to hold the OPC drum directly, use enough care
not to touch the cleaning blade area, 5mm inside from both
edges of the OPC drum. (If a fingerprint or oily dirt is attached to
the cleaning blade area of the OPC drum, the cleaning blade
may flip.)
5mm
2) Tilt the waste toner box forward to remove it.

5mm
Maintenance: Replace the waste toner box with a new one
every time when it is full (By the user). Check it every-time
when a serviceman calls. (Replace it in advance if necessary.)
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the OPC drum surface erroneously,
perform the following countermeasures.
1) Use dry cloth to clean and remove the dirt.
2) Apply KYNAR to prevent blade flip.
[Check method]
Check to confirm that the OPC drum is free from fingerprints or oily
dirt and that the cleaning blade is completely cleaned by the follow-
ing method.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in
the image.
(2) Photo-conductor unit removal
2. Prior exposure prevention
1) Remove the toner cartridge.
[Note]
[Refer to "C. Toner supply section."]
Avoid servicing in a place where there is strong light.
2) Remove the developing unit.
Do not expose the unit to light for a long time. [Refer to "B. Developing section."]
Cover the OPC drum with light-blocking material. (When using 3) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
paper, use about 10 sheets of paper to block light.)
[Countermeasures]
If the OPC drum is erroneously exposed to light too much (prior
exposure), perform the following countermeasures.
1) Print half tone images on the whole surface of A4 (11" x 8.5")
paper, and check to confirm that there is no irregular density
area in the previously exposed section.
2) Damages due to prior exposure may be recovered by keeping
the OPC drum for several hours. If, however, image are not
recovered, replace the OPC drum.
4) Remove the blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and (4) Drum replacement
hold the handle to remove the unit. 1) Remove the blue screw, and rotate the fixing shaft to remove.
Slide the drum to the front side to remove.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
NOTE: When removing and installing, be careful not to scratch the
drum by making it into contact with the separation pawl.
NOTE: Before installing the photo-conductor unit, clean the both

surfaces of the resist unit paper guide.
Clean the metal section of the paper guide with alcohol,
and clean the cushion section without alcohol.
At that time, be careful not to deform the paper guide.
(5) Drum separation pawl unit replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the drum separation pawl
unit.
Maintenance
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch or put dirt on the tip of the separa-
tion pawl.
(3) MC unit replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the MC unit.
Maintenance
NOTE: When inserting the MC unit, be careful not to scratch the
drum.
(6) Toner reception seal, toner reception side sheets F (8) Side seals F and R replacement
and R replacement 1) Remove the side seals F and R.
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the toner reception seal. Maintenance
Maintenance 36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K. 28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K. NOTE: Attach with the cleaner blade edge as the reference so that
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of the clearance is within 0 - 0.3mm. Press to secure attach-
A and B. ment.
NOTE: Attach the toner reception side sheets F and R according to
the reference. 0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
0mm
F 0.3mm R
0.3mm
0mm
B
0.3mm 0mm 0mm 0.3mm
2) After replacement of the side seals F and R, apply stearic acid

A (UKOG-0309FCZZ) evenly to the side seals F and R by using
the micro-spatula (UKOG-0311FCZZ).
Plate edge reference NOTE: Be careful not to apply excessively to the parts on the
0mm 0mm periphery.
0.3mm 0.3mm
57mm
57mm
0mm 0.3mm 0.3mm 0mm
F R
Duplex tape reference Duplex tape reference
(7) Toner reception lower molt replacement

1) Remove the toner reception lower molt.
Maintenance
(9) Cleaner blade replacement
1) Remove the blue screw, and slide the cleaner blade to the rear
NOTE: Attach with the edges of the side seals F and R as the ref- side to remove.
erence so that there is no clearance with the side seals F Maintenance
and R.
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
NOTE: Before removing the cleaner blade, remove the side seals
0mm 0mm
F R F and R in advance. When, therefore, the cleaner blade is
replaced, replace the side seals F and R with new ones as
0.3mm 0.3mm well.
If this note is ignored, a trouble such as improper cleaning
or toner leakage may occur.
NOTE: Be careful not to touch or scratch the tip of the cleaner
blade.
NOTE: When installing, tighten the blue screws in the sequence of
A B C.
B. Developing section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Developer Replace even at the specified
RPM.
2 DV seal Replace at 200K of the
developer counter or 2 years of
use.
3 DV side seal F/R
4 Toner filter Replace at 200K of the
use.
5 Connector
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Developer Replace even at the specified
RPM.
2 DV seal Replace at 150K of the
use.
3 DV side seal F/R
4 Toner filter Replace at 150K of the
use.
5 Connector
5
3
2
1
(Note for servicing the DV roller) (Note for cleaning the developing unit)
1. Prevent roller contamination If the developing unit is cleaned with a cleaner or an air blower
[Note] with much developer in the developing unit, static electricity
may be accumulated in the unit.
Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV roller
surface. * Metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller sur-
When rotating the DV roller manually, hold the drive gear section face when transporting developer or removing foreign mate-
to rotate it. rial from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the
magnet roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling
the magnet roller.
* Remove developer in the development unit as well as devel-
oper attached to the magnet roller as far as possible.
NOTE: Before cleaning with a vacuum, remove ground the magnet
roller rear side cored bar as shown in the figure below and
clean the unit with a vacuum. (Do not pinch the grounding
wire with a crocodile clip connector in order to prevent
against damage on the cored bar.)
[Countermeasures]
If a fingerprint is attached to the DV roller surface erroneously, per-
form the following countermeasures.
1) Remove developer material from the developer unit and the
developer mag roller.
2) Remove oily dirt on the DV roller with alcohol.
3) When alcohol dries completely, supply developer and perform
SIM 25-02.
(2) Developer replacement
[Check method]
NOTE: Supply of developer must be performed after completion of
Check to confirm that the DV roller is free from fingerprints or oily
all the maintenance works of the developing unit.
dirt and that cleaning is completely executed or not by the following
method. 1) Remove the screw, and hold the rib to remove the cover.
Make a print of a half tone image on all the surface of A4 (11" x NOTE: After installing, check to confirm that the cover is securely
8.5") paper, and check the printed paper for any abnormality in engaged with the frame pawl.
the image.
(1) Developing unit removal
1) Remove the waste toner box. [Refer to "A. Photo-conductor
section."]
2) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "C. Toner supply sec-
tion."]
3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
2) While rotating the mixing roller, discharge developer from the (4) DV seal replacement
unit. 1) Remove the DV seal.
Maintenance
NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
0.5mm 0mm
0mm
0.5mm
(5) DV side seal F and R replacement

1) Remove the DV side seal F and R.
3) Supply new developer. Maintenance
Maintenance 36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K. 28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K. NOTE: Attach the seal according to the reference, and press and
hold securely after attachment.
NOTE: When supplying developer, use care not to spill it. Espe-
cially, take a great care not to spill developer on the drive
section.
NOTE: After supplying developer, do not tilt the developing unit.
0.5mm 0.5mm
F R
0mm 0mm
0.5mm 0mm 0mm 0.5mm
(3) Toner filter replacement

1) Remove the toner filter.
Maintenance
C. Toner supply section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Toner cartridge User replacement for every toner empty. Storage period is 2 years.
(1) Toner cartridge replacement 2) Pull out the toner cartridge to remove.
1) Open the front cover. Maintenance: Replace every-time when toner empty. (By the
user)
NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and

inset it slowly.
NOTE: Shake the toner cartridge several times.
D. LSU section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Dust-proof glass
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Dust-proof glass
(1) LSU removal 3) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2. LSU.
NOTE: Lift the LSU tip and insert it so that the LSU boss comes in
the frame hole. After insertion, remove the toner cartridge
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and and check.
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
A 4
1 3
(2) Dust-proof glass cleaning
1) Clean the dust-proof glass.
Maintenance
36/45/50 CPM model: Clean at every 200K.
28 CPM model: Clean at every 150K.
NOTE: Do not touch the dust-proof glass with bare hands.
E. Transfer section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transfer roller Replace at 200K or 2 years
of use.
2 Discharge plate
3 Transfer roller bearing
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar
5 Transfer rear star ring
6 Transfer roller gear
7 Pre-transfer paper guide
8 Process control sensor Air cleaning
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Transfer roller Replace at 150K or 2 years
of use.
2 Discharge plate
3 Transfer roller bearing
F and R
4 Transfer roller collar
5 Transfer rear star ring
6 Transfer roller gear
7 Pre-transfer paper guide
8 Process control sensor Air cleaning
5 4
6
5
5
5
3
5
5
2
43
7
(1) Transfer unit removal NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. gear and the transfer roller collar.
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
2) Remove the transfer roller collar and the transfer roller bearing
F from the holder.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing F and the holder boss securely.
NOTE: Be careful of the installing direction of the transfer roller col-
lar.
(2) Pre-transfer paper guide and process control

sensor cleaning
1) Remove the pre-transfer paper guide. Clean the pre-transfer
paper guide and the process control sensor.
Maintenance
(4) Discharge plate replacement
NOTE: When installing, engage the boss in the rear side, and then
1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the discharge plate
engage the boss in the front side. holder. Remove the discharge plate.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, insert the discharge plate into the boss
and check to confirm that it is securely on the ground elec-
trode.
(3) Transfer roller, transfer roller bearing F and R,

transfer roller collar, and transfer roller gear
replacement
1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the transfer roller. Remove
the transfer roller bearing R, the transfer roller collar, and the
transfer roller gear from the transfer roller.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert the spring into the trans-
fer roller bearing R and the holder boss securely.
F. Fusing section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Lower heat roller Replace with the lower heat
roller unit. / Replace at 200K or
2 years of use.
bearing roller unit. / Apply grease when
assembling to the heat roller.
3 Upper separation pawl When a foreign material is
4 Thermistor attached, it must be cleaned
5 Lower separation pawl away.
6 Web pressure roller
bearing
8 Web roller
9 Web 45T gear
10 Fusing paper exit roller
11 Gears
12 Paper guides
13 Upper heat roller Replace with the upper heat
2 years of use.
14 Upper heat roller gear Replace with the upper heat
roller unit.
16 Upper heat roller heat- assembling to the heat roller.
insulation bush
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
2 years of use.
assembling to the heat roller.
3 Upper separation pawl When a foreign material is
4 Thermistor attached, it must be cleaned
5 Lower separation pawl away.
bearing
8 Web roller
9 Web 45T gear
10 Fusing paper exit roller
11 Gears
12 Paper guides
2 years of use.
14 Upper heat roller gear Replace with the upper heat
roller unit.
16 Upper heat roller heat- assembling to the heat roller.
insulation bush
3
13 15
4 16
3 14
4
1
5
8
15
16
2
17
9
11
6
11 6
7
11 Grease Grease
UKOG-0299FCZZ UKOG-0235FCZZ
Grease 11
UKOG-0012QSZZ
12
Grease
UKOG-0235FCZZ
11
Grease 10
UKOG-0235FCZZ
12
(1) Fusing unit replacement (3) Web pressure roller bearing and web pressure
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. roller replacement
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, and remove the harness. Remove the blue screw, and
remove the web unit.
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit.
2) Remove the web spring, and remove the web pressure roller
bearing. Remove the web pressure roller
Maintenance
(2) Fusing paper exit roller cleaning

1) Clean the fusing paper exit roller.
Maintenance
(4) Web roller/Web 45T gear removal

1) Remove the screw, and remove the web roller bearing.
2) Remove the left and the right springs, and remove the web 4) Remove two web tension shafts.
operation shaft. * When installing, insert the rear side first. Note that the front
side (gear side) of the shaft is narrower.
3) Remove the web roller (on the winding side).

Maintenance
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K. 5) Remove the web roller (on the feed side) and the web 45T
* When installing, check to confirm that there are one concave gear.
section on the front side and two concave sections on the Maintenance
rear side, and be sure to engage them securely. 36/45/50 CPM model: Replace at every 200K.
* When installing, engage the concave section (one position) 28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K.
on the front side with the spring pin and two concave sec-
* When installing, fit the concave section and the convex sec-
tions on the rear side with the web roller (on the feed side).
tion of the gear on the front side to engage securely.
[Route diagram]
[Note for installation] NOTE: When installing the separation pawl unit to the fusing unit,
Turn the gear (B) in the arrow direction, and set so that the lead arrange so that the long hole of the unit is fit with the hook
edge of the green line (A) of the web roller can be seen. section of the fusing unit.
B A
(7) Lower separation pawl replacement

(5) Thermistor replacement 1) Lift the lever to cancel the pressure of the heat roller. Remove
the blue screw, and open the fusing unit.
1) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness. Remove
the screw, and remove the thermistor.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing, be sure to insert into the thermistor boss.
(6) Upper separation pawl replacement

1) Remove the blue screw, and remove the upper separation
pawl unit. Remove the upper separation pawl.
Maintenance
2) Open the paper guide. Release the spring edge on the paper (9) Upper heat roller, upper heat roller gear, upper
guide side from the paper guide spring stopper. Precisely heat roller insulation bush, and upper heat roller
speaking, slide the spring edge and push it down to the back bearing replacement
surface of the paper guide. In addition, disengage the lower
1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
separation pawl from the lower separation pawl shaft side
where the spring is attached. Remove the spring from the
lower separation pawl.
Maintenance
NOTE: When installing the spring, pass the spring hook through
the hole in the lower separation pawl.
NOTE: When installing the lower separation pawl, first install the
shaft which is not provided with the spring to the paper
guide.
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw, and

remove the fixing plate. Remove the heater lamp.
3) Remove the blue screw, the ground plate, and the paper guide
unit.
(8) Lower heat roller and lower heat roller bearing

replacement
1) Remove the lower heat roller unit. Remove the lower heat
roller bearing from the lower heat roller.
Maintenance
28 CPM model: Replace at every 150K. 4) Remove the upper heat roller unit.
NOTE: When installing, put the flange of the upper heat roller bear-
ing on the outside of the frame.
5) Remove the roller stopper from the upper heat roller, and
remove the upper heat roller gear, the upper heat roller insula-
tion bush, and the upper heat roller bearing.
Maintenance
G. Filter section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Ozone filter
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Ozone filter
(1) Ozone filter replacement

1) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the ozone
filter.
Maintenance
When installing the filter, be careful not to turn out the periph-
eral molt and to insert the filter straight.
H. Paper feed section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Paper pick-up roller Replacement reference:
2 Paper feed roller Replace according to each
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: Replace
at 100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
4 Torque limiter Replacement reference:
Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers
6 Sensors
7 Transport paper guides
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Paper pick-up roller Replacement reference:
Paper feed tray 1, 2: Replace
at 100K or 1 year of use.
Manual feed: Replace at 100K
or 1 year of use.
paper feed counter value.
Paper feed tray 1, 2: 100K
Manual feed: 100K
5 Transport rollers
6 Sensors
1
2
4
5 6
6
6 6
6
3
2
6 6
1 5
1
6 6
5 2
6
4 4
6 6
3 3
5 5
(1) Manual paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper (2) Manual paper feed unit torque limiter replacement
feed roller, and separation roller replacement 1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
1) Remove the pickup cover.
2) Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller 2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
(B). the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
counter.
3) Open the maintenance cover, remove the separation roller.

counter.
3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
2 Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
1
1
3
4
5
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R. 8) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector. 9) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive).
1
2
6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual 10) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
feed tray unit.
7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed

unit. 11) Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
counter.
1
3
2
(3) Tray paper feed unit paper pickup roller, paper feed 4) Remove the separation roller.
roller, and separation roller replacement Maintenance: Replace at every 100K of each paper feed
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2. counter.
2) Remove the paper guide.
(4) Tray paper feed unit torque limiter replacement

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
3) Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
counter.
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front. 7) Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
4) Remove the right lower door unit.
8) Remove the pressure release spring, and remove the paper

feed lower PG supporting plate. Remove the separation pres-
sure spring, and the separation pressure release plate.
1
2
5) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.

3
9) Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the sep-
aration shift. Remove the torque limiter.
counter.
3 2
6) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.
1 4
I. Paper transport section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Resist roller (Idle)
2 Paper dust removing unit
3 Transport rollers
4 Sensors
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Resist roller (Idle)
2 Paper dust removing unit
3 Transport rollers
4 Sensors
3
1
4
4
3
(1) Resist roller (idle), and each transport roller 2) Clean the resist roller (Idle) (A), resist roller (Drive) (B) and the
cleaning transport roller 8 (Drive) (C).
1) Open the right door. Maintenance
B C
J. Duplex/Paper exit section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Discharge brush
2 Transport rollers
3 Sensors
4 Gears When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Discharge brush
2 Transport rollers
3 Sensors
4 Gears When checking, apply to the
necessary positions.
3 3
Grease 1
UKOG-0307FCZZ
3 3
3
3
1
2
2
2
3
(1) Each transport roller cleaning 4) Open the right door.
1) Clean the paper exit roller 2 (Drive).
Maintenance
5) Remove the reverse PG unit.

2) Open the ADU open/close door.
6) Clean the transport roller 13 (Drive).

Maintenance
3) Clean the transport roller 10 (Drive) (A), and the transport
roller 11 (Drive) (B).
Maintenance
K. Drive section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Gears (Grease) When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Gears (Grease) When checking, apply to the
2 Shaft earth sections necessary positions.
(Conduction grease)
3 Belts
1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
1
Grease 2
UKOG-0299 Grease
FCZZ UKOG-0012QSZZ
3 1
Grease
UKOG-0307FCZZ
L. Scanner section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Mirror/Lens/
Reflection sheet (Reflector)/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner N model: LED PWB Air cleaning for the
lamp LED section
U model: Xenon lamp
4 Rails
5 Drive belt/drive wire
6 Sensors
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Mirror/Lens/
Reflection sheet/CCD
2 Table glass/SPF glass
3 Scanner lamp (LED PWB) Air cleaning for the
LED section
4 Rails
5 Drive belt/drive wire
6 Sensors
4 4
2
2
4
5
6
5
5
1
1
N model U model
3
1 3
1 1
1 1
M. DSPF section
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Paper feed roller Replacement reference:
2 Pickup roller Replace according to each
SPF section roller: Replace at
4 Torque limiter SPF Replacement reference:
(for separation) Replace according to each
5 Call-in torque limiter paper feed counter value.
(for PIC) SPF section torque limiter:
Replace at 400K or 2 years of
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 No. 1 scanning plate
8 No. 2 scanning section,
scanning glass
9 No. 2 scanning section,
white reference glass
10 CIS unit Air cleaning for the Selfoc
lens section.
11 Paper exit roller
12 Discharge brush
13 OC mat
14 Belts
14 14
5
2
4
1
3
6
10
13
7
6
8
9
11
12
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
counter.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.
(3) Torque limiter SPF replacement

1) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
counter.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide. Remove

the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
counter.
(4) Take-up torque limiter replacement

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring.
Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing, the holder, and the
take-up torque limiter.
counter.
(2) Separation roller replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover.
N. RSPF section
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 100 120 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
calling k k k k 0k 0k k k k k k k
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 Scanning plate
8 Paper exit roller
9 Discharge brush
10 OC mat
11 Belts
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
use.
6 Transport rollers
7 Scanning plate
8 Paper exit roller
9 Discharge brush
10 OC mat
11 Belts
11 11
5
2
4
1
3
6
10
7
6
8
9
(1) Pickup roller, paper feed roller replacement 2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder. Remove the sep-
1) Open the paper feed unit. aration roller.
counter.
2) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper guide.
(3) Torque limiter SPF replacement

1) Remove the torque limiter SPF.
counter.
3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the holder guide. Remove

the pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
counter.
(4) Take-up torque limiter replacement

1) Remove the one-way coupling, the belt, and the pulley.
Remove the E-ring.
Pull out the shaft, and remove the bearing, the holder, and the
take-up torque limiter.
counter.
(2) Separation roller replacement

1) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover.
O. Inner finisher/Punch unit for Inner finisher
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transport rollers
Transport paper guides
Belts
2 Knurling belt Replacement reference:
Finisher count value of
1000K.
3 Paddle
4 Sensors
5 Discharge brush
6 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 200K stapling.
7 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 1000K punching.
8 Staple cartridge User replacement for every use of 5,000 pcs.
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Transport rollers
Belts
2 Knurling belt Replacement reference:
Finisher count value of
1000K.
3 Paddle
4 Sensors
5 Discharge brush
6 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 200K stapling.
7 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit for every 1000K punching.
8 Staple cartridge User replacement for every use of 5,000 pcs.
1
1
1
1 1
1
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4 4
4 4
4 4
4
4 4 4
4 4
4
5
3
2
3
3
5
3 6
5
3 8
3
2
P. Saddle stitch finisher (1K)/Punch unit for Saddle stitch finisher (1K)
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transport rollers
Belts
Replace at every 1000K of
the finisher paper exit count
value.
2 Sensors
3 Discharge brush
4 Stapler unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 200K staple.
5 Stapler unit for saddle Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
6 Punch unit Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 1000K.
7 Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000pcs.
8 Staple cartridge for saddle User replacement for every 2000pcs.
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Transport rollers
Belts
Replace at every 1000K of
the finisher paper exit count
value.
2 Sensors
3 Discharge brush
5 Stapler unit for saddle Replacement reference: Replace the unit at every 100K staple.
7 Staple cartridge User replacement for every 5000pcs.
8 Staple cartridge for saddle User replacement for every 2000pcs.
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 6
7
2 2
2 2
1
2
2
2 7
2 1
2
2 1
2 4
2 2 5
8
2 2
3
2 2 1
2
1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Q. Finisher (4K)/Punch unit for Finisher (4K)
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transport rollers
Belts
2 Sensors
Discharge brush
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Transport rollers
Belts
2 Sensors
Discharge brush
1 1 1 1 3 1 1 4
2
2
2 2
2
2 2 2
2
2
2
2 2
2
2 2
R. Paper pass unit
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Transport rollers
2 Sensors
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Transport rollers
2 Sensors
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
S. A4 large capacity tray
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Pickup roller/ Replacement reference:
Paper feed rollers Replace according to each
paper feed counter value.:
100K or 1 year of use
100K
3 Transport rollers
5 Belts
6 Sensors
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Pickup roller/ Replacement reference:
Paper feed rollers Replace according to each
100K
3 Transport rollers
5 Belts
6 Sensors
6
6
2
3
6
1
1 6
6 5
1
T. Paper feed tray (Desk)
36/45/50 CPM model
When 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200 2400
1 Pickup roller Replacement reference:
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.:
100K
5 Transport rollers
Gears
28 CPM model
When 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200 1350 1500 1650 1800
1 Pickup roller Replacement reference:
3 Separation roller paper feed counter value.:
100K
5 Transport rollers
Gears
1
5
4
2
3
5
4
5
3
2
1
[9] VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. HDD partition and data contents

A. HDD map
offset
(GB) 0 1 2 3 4
Outer
tracks 0 Image file system 1 (ERDH/Temporary storage) 12GB
10
15 Image file system 2 (Document filing) 38GB
20
25
30
35
40
45
System storage data Printer spooler General-purpose file General-purpose file
1GB 2GB system 1 system 2
50 1GB 1GB
General-purpose file system 3
55 2GB
Unassigned area
60
65
General-purpose file system 4 General-purpose file system 5
70 2GB 5GB
Inner
tracks 75
B. HDD storage data
Description of the area Capacity Stored data

Image file system 1 12 [GB] Image data (ERDH/Temporary storage)
Image file system 2 38 [GB] Image data (Document filing)
System storage data 1 [GB] Image-send-related data such as an address book, FSS data
Printer spooler 2 [GB] Spool area for printer
General-purpose file system 1 1 [GB] User authentication data, FEP learning dictionary, download font, user profile
General-purpose file system 2 1 [GB] Job log, job completion list
General-purpose file system 3 2 [GB] Application work area
General-purpose file system 4 2 [GB] Data escape area during transition of DSK
General-purpose file system 5 5 [GB] e-manual
MX-M503N VARIOUS STORAGE DATA HANDLING 9 1

2. Necessary works when replacing the PWB and the HDD
A. MFP substrate replacement procedure (work flow)

NOTE: The backup data must not be installed to another machine. If installed, the adjustment data will be overwritten and a trouble may be
generated.

B. Works and procedures necessary for HDD replacement
Note for HDD replacement
Data of the following list are saved in the HDD of the complex machine. If the HDD operates normally and data backup is possible before
replacement, perform data backup and then replace the HDD.
If the HDD does not operate normally, data cannot be backed up.
The HDD replacement procedures with a broken HDD differs from that with a normal HDD.
Contents of this chapter
1) HDD storage data and backup
2) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data can be backed up
3) Replacement procedures when HDD storage data cannot be backed up due to breakdown of HDD
4) Reinstall and update procedures of Operation Manual data saved in HDD
5) Reinstall and update procedures of watermark data.
(1) HDD storage data and backup
Some HDD storage data can be backed up, and some other cannot. Some HDD storage data can be reinstalled, and some other cannot.
If the HDD operates normally before replacement and data can be backed up, back up the data before replacement of the HDD referring to the
HDD storage data list. Then reinstall the data after replacement of the HDD.
a. HDD storage data list
Before installation After installation Enable/ Enable/

Data reinstall Reinstall
No. Data kind (When shipping (After use by Disable of Backup means Disable of
procedures operator
from the factory) users) data backup data reinstall
1 e-Manual Available Available Disable *1 Enable Sim49-3 Service
2 Address book Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
Storage backup Storage backup
3 Image send series Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
registration data (Senders Device cloning / Device cloning /
information, meta data, etc.) Storage backup Storage backup
4 User authentication Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
Device cloning / Device cloning /
5 Japanese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
(Learning)
6 Chinese FEP dictionary Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
(Learning)
7 JOB LOG Not available Available Enable Perform with Disable
WEB PAGE.
8 JOB completion list Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
9 New N/A (FSS) information Not available Available Disable Not available Disable
10 User font (Added) Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with Service
WEB PAGE. or User
11 User macro Not available Available Disable Not available Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE.
12 Document filing Not available Available Enable Perform with Enable Perform with
WEB PAGE. WEB PAGE.
13 Some of system setting Not available Available Enable Sim56-2 / Enable Sim56-2 / Service
data Device cloning / Device cloning /
14 Watermark Available Available Disable *2 Enable Sim49-5 Service
*1: The e-Manual cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-3 and USB memory.
*2: Watermark data cannot be backed up, but can be reinstalled by using Sim49-5 and USB memory.

(2) Replacement procedures when HDD data can be b. Work contents and procedures
backed up
When a new HDD
a. Work contents and procedures (blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same
When a new HDD is normal but a program model) is used *
(blank HDD, service part) is When a used HDD error occurs in it is used.
Procedures used, or when a HDD which (used in the same Step 1 Install a HDD to the machine, Install a HDD to the
is normal but a program model) is used * and boot the complex machine. machine, and boot the
error occurs in it is used. Formatting is automatically complex machine.
Step 1 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. performed.
(Servicing) Step 2 The trouble code, U2-05,
Use SIM56-2 or the device cloning, or the storage backup is displayed. Cancel
function to backup the data. (Back up the data to the USB with SIM16.
memory.)
Step 3 Since a blank HDD is Use Sim62-1 to format
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User
is no need to perform
authentication data))
formatting procedure with SIM.
Step 2 Back up the HDD storage data before replacement. (User
Step 4 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The
or servicing)
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
Back up the data to PC with Web page.
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
(Backup enable data: HDD storage data list No. 7, 10, 14
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not
(Document filing data, JOB LOG data))
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet
Step 3 Replace the HDD. Fax models.)
Step 4 Boot the complex machine. Boot the complex Step 5 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD.
Formatting is automatically machine.
Step 6 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to
performed.
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
Step 5 The trouble code, U2-05, machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
is displayed. Cancel
with SIM16. With the above procedures, the HDD is reset to the state of factory
Step 6 Since a blank HDD is Use SIM62-1 to format shipping.
automatically formatted, there the HDD.
is no need to perform (4) Reinstall and update procedures of the HDD
formatting procedure with SIM. storage Operation Manual data
Step 7 Use SIM66-10 to clear the FAX image memory. The 1) Obtain the Operation Manual data.
memory is cleared in order to keep compliance between
the HDD data and the image related memory and to
Download the Operation Manual data from the utility menu on
prevent malfunctions. (The memory must be cleared not the web site (Tech-DS home page).
only in the FAX model but in the scanner and the Internet Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing
Fax models.) the file hierarchy.
Step 8 Use SIM49-3 to install the manual data to the HDD. (To upload to the complex machine, files of "**_pdf_fax.idx"
Step 9 The trouble code, U2-60, is displayed. Use SIM49-5 to and "**_pdf.idx" and "version.txt" as well as the Operation
install the watermark data to the HDD. After booting the
Manual data (**.pdf) are required. When the downloaded files
machine, use SIM16 to cancel the "U2-60" trouble.
are copied without changing the file hierarchy, these files also
Step 10 Import the data backed up in Step 1.
Use SIM56-2, or the device cloning, or the storage backup
are copied.)
to import. NOTE:
(Import enable data: HDD storage data list No. 2, 3, 4 When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if
(Address book, Image send series registration data, User there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are
authentication data))
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which
Step 11 Import the data backed up with the Web page function in
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD.
Step 2.
Import enable data: Document filing data, User font, Use The file size is different.
macro The time stamp is different.
(The JOB LOG data can be backed up but cannot be
The file exists only in the USB memory.
imported.)
(3) Replacement procedures when the HDD storage
data cannot be backed up due to breakdown 6,08/$7,21 12

7(67 &/26(
a. Display when HDD breakdown (0$18$/83'$7(>XVEEG@

',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
When a trouble occurs in the HDD, the error code display of E7-03 ),/( ',5!)2/'(5
is popped up. ',5!0$18$/
In this case, the main power must be turned OFF and the HDD
must be replaced.


3) Insert the USB memory into the machine. 2) Enter the SIM49-5 mode.
When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
6,08/$7,2112
7(67 &/26(
button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu :$7(50$5.83'$7(>XVEEG@
1. ',5!)2/'(5 ),/(
),/( ',5!)2/'(5
4) Select the folder of the Operation Manual data. (The screen ',5!:0
shifts to the Operation Manual data install menu.)
The current version and the update version are displayed.
5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
are changed from gray-out to active display.
6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected Operation Manual
is installed.
When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case

of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed. 3) Insert the USB memory into the machine.
(5) Watermark data reinstall and update procedures When the USB memory is not inserted, "INSERT A STOR-
1) Obtain the watermark data. ANGEE-MANUAL STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK]
Download the watermark data from the utility menu on the web button is pressed, the screen shifts to the folder select menu
site (Tech-DS home page). 1.
Copy the downloaded files to the USB device without changing 4) Select the folder of the watermark data. (The screen shifts to
the file hierarchy. Or copy the watermark data from the acces- the watermark data install menu.)
sory CD-ROM to the USB device. The current version and the update version are displayed.
NOTE: 5) Press [EXECUTE] button.
When data are uploaded from the USB memory to the HDD, if [EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
there are some data in the HDD, the files in the memory are are changed from gray-out to active display.
compared with the files in the HDD and only the files which 6) When [YES] button is pressed, the selected watermark data
satisfy the following conditions are written into the HDD. are installed.
The file size is different. When install is completed, "COMPLETE" is displayed. In case
The time stamp is different. of an abnormality, "ERROR" is displayed.
The file exists only in the USB memory.
3. Counter list
SIM
Display item Descriptions Count-up
Setting Display Clear
condition setting
MAINTENANCE COUNTER Maintenance preset counter (Total) 21-01
(TOTAL)
TOTAL OUT(BW) Total output quantity of black and white 22-01
TOTAL(BW) Total use quantity of black and white 22-01 26-5
COPY(BW) Black and white copy counter 22-01 24-06
PRINT(BW) Black and white print counter 22-01 24-09
DOC FIL(BW) Black and white document filing print counter 22-01
OTHER(BW) Black and white other counter 22-01 24-09
MAINTENANCE ALL Maintenance counter (Total) 22-01 24-04 26-5
FUSER WEB SEND Fusing web cleaning send counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB UNIT Fusing web print counter 22-01 24-04
FUSER WEB DAY Use day of fusing web unit 22-01 24-04
DRUM LIFE(K) Accumulated number of drum rotations K (%) 22-01
DEVE LIFE(K) Accumulated number of developer rotations K (%) 22-01
MACHINE JAM Machine JAM counter 22-02 24-01
RSPF/DSPF JAM SPF JAM counter 22-02 24-01
TROUBLE Trouble counter 22-02 24-01
SPF Document feed quantity 22-08 24-03
SCAN Number of times of scan 22-08 24-03
STAPLER Staple counter 22-08 24-03
PUNCHER Puncher counter 22-08 24-03
STAMP Stamp counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE STAPLER Saddle staple counter 22-08 24-03
SADDLE V FOLD Saddle finisher V fold counter 22-08 24-03
COVER Cover open/close counter 22-08 24-03
HP_ON Number of scanner HP detection 22-08 24-03
OC LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in OC section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
DSPF LAMP TIME Total lighting time of the lamp in DSPF section (* hour * minutes) 22-08 24-03
TRAY1 Tray 1 paper feed counter 22-09 24-02

SIM
Display item Descriptions Count-up
Setting Display Clear
condition setting
MFT TOTAL Manual paper feed counter (Total) 22-09 24-02
MFT HEAVY Manual paper feed counter (Heavy paper) 22-09 24-02
MFT OHP Manual paper feed counter (OHP) 22-09 24-02
MFT ENV Manual paper feed counter (Envelope) 22-09 24-02
LCC Side LCC paper feed counter (A4 LCC) 22-09 24-02
ADU ADU paper feed counter (Paper reverse section) 22-09 24-02
FAX OUTPUT FAX print quantity counter 22-11 24-10
FAX SEND FAX send counter 22-11 24-10
FAX RECEIVED FAX receive counter 22-11 24-10
SEND IMAGES FAX send quantity counter 22-11 24-10
SEND TIME FAX send time 22-11 24-10
RECEIVED TIME FAX receive time 22-11 24-10
ACR SEND Number of carrier prefix adding communications 22-11 24-10
DRUM CTRG K Drum cartridge print counter (K) 22-13 24-07
DRUM RANGE K Drum cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 22-13 24-07
DRUM TURN K Drum cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 22-13
DRUM DAY K Number of day that used drum (Day) (K) 22-13 24-07
DEVE CTRG K Developer cartridge print counter (K) 22-13 24-05 26-5
DEVE RANGE K Developer cartridge accumulated traveling distance (cm) (K) 22-13 24-05
DEVE TURN K Developer cartridge accumulated rotation time (K) 22-13
DEVE DAY K Number of day that used developer (Day) (K) 22-13 24-05
TONER MOTOR K Toner motor print counter (K) 22-13
TONER TURN K Toner motor accumulated rotation time (sec) (K) 22-13
NET SCN ORG_B/W Network scanner document read quantity counter (B/W scan job) 22-19 24-15
NET SCN ORG_CL Network scanner document read quantity counter (Color scan job) 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT Number of internet FAX output 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX sending page 22-19 24-15
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE Number of internet FAX receive 22-19 24-15
INTERNET FAX SEND Number of internet FAX send 22-19 24-15
MAIL COUNTER Number of times of E-MAIL send 22-19 24-15
FTP COUNTER Number of FTP send 22-19 24-15
SMB SEND Number of SMB send 22-19 24-15
USB CNT Number of times of USB storage 22-19 24-15
TRIAL MODE_B&C Trial mode counter (B/W & COLOR scan job) 22-19 24-15
SCAN TO HDD_B/W SCAN TO HDD record quantity (B/W) 22-19 24-15
SCAN TO HDD_CL SCAN TO HDD record quantity (COLOR) 22-19 24-15

[10] SERVICE WEB PAGE
MX-M503N 2. Details
Service and operation procedures
Manual
A. Procedures to enter the Hidden Web page
1. General exclusively used for the serviceman
The following functions are available on the Hidden Web Page 1) Boot a browser program.
exclusively used for the serviceman. 2) Enter the specified
URL (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/service_login.html) and enter the
Menu/Item Function and content servicing page menu.
Password Setting Used to set the password to enter the Hidden Default password: "service"
Web Page exclusively used for the serviceman.
Output of Test Page Used to print out the test page (system setting
contents).
Font/Form Download Used to download Font/Form.
Font/Form of PCL and PostScript, macro, and
other resources are downloaded to the HDD
and controlled. (PS, PCL5 only)
Device Cloning Used to import/export the system setting
information in XML format. By importing the
export file to the other device, the setting values
and setting contents of the device can be
copied to another device. This function is useful
to set the same setting to two or more machines
efficiently.
Filing Data Backup Used to import/export the document filing data
in the unit of folder.
User Control Used to shift to the user mode. After log in, the
screen is shifted to the setting screen of user
management.
User Control 2 Used to set the Pages Limit Group and the
Favorite Operation Group by authority of the
serviceman. (Select among preset items.)
Job Save Job Log Used to save the Job Log. NOTE: The password can be optionally changed in the Password
Log View Job Log Used to display the Job Log. Setting menu.
Update of Firmware Used to update the firmware version.
If the password is changed and forgotten, use SIM24-31 to
Syslog Administration Used to set the Log Type. (Set to the default.)
reset the password to the default.
*1 Settings
Storage/Send Keep all the items selected.
Settings
Save/ Delete Used to save or delete the log data.
B. Password Setting
Syslog
View Syslog Used to display the log data.
*1: This may be useful for troubleshooting when a trouble occurs.

When submission of the log data file is requested in order to
troubleshoot, use the log file save mode to export the log data
file to the client PC.
* The password can be optionally changed in the following proce-

dures.
1) Enter a new password.
2) Enter the new password again to make confirmation.
3) Click "Submit" (registration) button.
MX-M503N SERVICE WEB PAGE 10 1

C. Output of Test Page (3) Procedures to delete all the files at a time
1) Click "Initialize" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
OK key.
NOTE: By the Write-Protect Setting function, the downloaded files
can be set to write protect.
E. Device Cloning
1) Click "Print" button of an item or report to be printed.

When there is a list of items for selection, select one of the
items in the pull-down menu list, and click "Print" button.
The list is printed out.
D. Font/Form Download
(1) Export
1) Select an item to be backed up.
2) Click "Execute" button.
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file.
(File name: *****.bin)
When the password is set, the set password must be entered
when importing.
(2) Import
1) Import from a file: Click "Refer" button to select the back-up
file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button to execute import.
If the password is set when exporting, the password must be
entered.
(1) Download of Font, Form, and Macro
3) Reboot the machine.
1) Select "Resource Type" from the pull-down menu list.
(Example: PCL/PostScript Font/Form or Macro)
2) Click "Refer" button to select a target file.
3) Click "Download" button.
The file is downloaded to the HDD.
The list of the downloaded files and the use percentage of the
HDD are displayed.
(2) Delete of downloaded font
(Procedures to delete a file separately)
1) Select a file to be deleted from the list of the downloaded files,
and click "Delete" button.
2) Check that the confirmation message is displayed, and press
Yes key.
The file in the HDD is deleted.

F. Filing Data Backup H. User Control 2
(1) Export Select the Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group.
1) Select the folder to be backed up. (The Pages Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group must be
set in advance.)
The list display conditions can be specified by changing the
index and the number of display items on the pull-down menu. (Example of use)
2) Click "Execute" button. The use sets the conditions for servicing work by using the Pages
Limit Group and the Favorite Operation Group functions in
Specify the save position of the file, and save the file. (File
advance, and the serviceman selects the set conditions in this
name: *****.bin)
mode for servicing work.
3) Click "Update" button.
(2) Import
I. Job Log
1) Click "Refer" button to select a target file. (File name: *****.bin)
2) Click "Execute" button. (1) Save Job Log
The target file is imported.
3) Click "Update" button.
G. User Control
1) Click "Save" button, and specify the save position of the Job
Log to save it.
1) Enter the password to log in.

Default Password: admin
The screen is shifted to the setting menu of user management.

(2) View Job Log K. Syslog
There are following functions in the Syslog mode.
This function is provided to acquire the detailed Syslog to trouble-
shoot when a trouble occurs.
When submission of the log data file is requested for troubleshoot-
ing, use the log file save mode to export the log data file to the cli-
ent PC.
Syslog Administration Settings Log Type Setting (Set to the default.)

Storage/Send Settings Set all the items selected.
Save/ Delete Syslog Log data save, delete
View Syslog Log data display
(1) Administration Settings/ Log Type Setting

Set to the default.
1) Select a Jog Log item to be displayed. (In the default setting,

all the items are selected. Remove check marks of the items
which are not to be displayed.)
2) Click "Show" (display) button.
The Jog Log is displayed.
J. Update of Firmware
1) Click "Refer" button to select a firmware file.

2) After selecting a firmware file, click "Execute" button.
The firmware data are sent to the machine, and update of the
firmware is processed.
During the process, the message of "Firmware Update, now
processing..." is displayed.

(2) Storage/Send Settings (4) View Syslog
Keep all the items selected.
1) Select a Syslog item to be displayed.

2) Click "Show" button.
The Syslog is displayed.
(3) Save/ Delete Syslog
When saving the Syslog, click "Save" button and specify the save
position and save it.
When deleting, click "Delete" button.
Check to confirm that the confirmation message is displayed, and
press OK key.

[11] SPECIFICATIONS
MX-M503N (7) Printable
Service area
Manual
A3 Wide * 297 x 420mm 12" x 18" * 279 x 432mm
1. Basic specifications A3 293 x 413mm 11" x 17" 275 x 425mm
B4 253 x 357mm 8.5" x 14" 212 x 349mm
A. Base engine A4 206 x 290mm 8.5" x 13.5" 212 x 336mm
(1) Type B5 178 x 250mm 8.5" x 13.4" 212 x 333mm
A5 144 x 203mm 8.5" x 13" 212 x 323mm
Type Desktop Postcard 96 x 141mm Executive 180 x 260mm
8K 266 x 383mm 8.5" x 11" 212 x 272mm
(2) Engine composition 16K 191 x 263mm 5.5" x 8.5" 136 x 209mm
Photo-conductor kind OPC (Drum diameter: 30mm) * The printable area for A3W/12" x 18" must be as large as the A3/
Copying method Electronic photo (Laser) 11" x 17" page dimension (297 x 450mm) by PCL/PS driver.
Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development
Charging system Charged saw-tooth method Void area Image loss Lead edge: 4mm or less
Rear edge: 2 mm or more, and 5 mm or less
Transfer system Transfer roller
Total of the lead edge and the rear edge:
Cleaning system Counter blade
8mm or less
Fusing system Heat roller FR total: 4mm2mm or less
Waste toner disposal No toner recycling system / Waste toner bottle
system (8) Engine speed (ppm)
(3) Dimension / Weight a. In case of tray (1-4, LCC) paper feeding
Outer dimension (W x D x H) N model: 28 36 45 50

Paper
25-25/64 x 27-23/64 x 36-51/64 inch Paper size CPM CPM CPM CPM
type
(645 x 695 x 935 mm) model model model model
U model: Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 15 17 20 22
25-25/64 x 26-3/8 x 36-51/64 inch paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 17 20 23 25
(645 x 670 x 935 mm) 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
Machine dimension with the N model: 8.5" x 13.5"
bypass tray extended 38-13/16 x 27-23/64 inch (986 x 695 mm) A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 20 25 30 30
(W x D). U model: B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
38-13/16 x 26-3/8 inch (986 x 670 mm) A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22
Weight Main unit Approx. 209 lbs (95 kg) A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 28 36 45 50
(including Extra, User-Extra: 14 16 19 21
photoreceptor) Paper width 150mm or less
(not including
Extra, User-Extra:
consumables)
Paper width over 150mm
(4) Warm-up Heavy A3, 11" x 17", 8K 11 11 15 15
paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 14 14 17 17
Warm-up time 20 seconds or less 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 13.4",
8.5" x 13.5"
Pre-heat Yes
A4R, 8.5" x 11"R, 16KR 17 17 21 21
(5) First copy time B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22
28 CPM 36 CPM model 45/50 CPM model A4, B5, 8.5" x 11", 16K 28 30 35 35
Engine
model N model U model N model U model Extra, User-Extra: 11 11 14 14
Platen 4.6 second 3.9 second Paper width 150mm or less
RSPF 10.1 10.1 9.3 Extra, User-Extra:
second second second Paper width over 150mm
DSPF 9.5 8.8
second second b. In case of manual paper feed tray paper feeding
* Measuring conditions: A4 (8.5" x 11") 28 36 45 50

Paper
Paper size CPM CPM CPM CPM
(6) Engine resolution type
model model model model
Plain A3, 11" x 17", 8K 15 17 20 22
N model U model paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 17 20 23 25
Resolution Writing Writing 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5"
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi Copy: 600 x 600dpi A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 28 32 41 41
600 x 600dpi *1
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 20 23 30 30
Print: 600 x 600dpi
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R
1200 x 1200dpi
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22
Gradation Writing Writing
Monochrome Monochrome 12" x 18", A3W *1 14 16 19 21
Copy: 1200 x 1200dpi *2 1bit Copy: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit Extra, User-Extra:
600 x 600dpi *2 1bit *1 Print: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit Paper width 150mm or less
Print: 600 x 600dpi *2 1bit Extra, User-Extra:
1200 x 1200dpi *2 1bit Paper width over 150mm
*1: Default resolution (Copy)

Printed photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph: 1200dpi
Automatic, Text, Text/Printed photo, Map: 600dpi
*2: Equivalent to 256 gradation
MX-M503N SPECIFICATIONS 11 1
28 36 45 50 (2) Memory, hard disk
Paper
Paper size CPM CPM CPM CPM Memory capacity, HDD capacity
type
model model model model
Heavy A3, 11" x 17", 8K 11 11 15 15 Copier memory Standard Memory N model: 640MB *1
paper B4, 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13", 14 14 17 17 (Local Memory) U model: 320MB *2
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13.5" Expansion Memory No
A4, 8.5" x 11", 16K, B5 28 30 35 35 Max. N model: 640MB
B5R, 7.25" x 10.5"R 17 17 21 21 U model: 320MB
A4R, 16KR, 8.5" x 11"R Printer memory Standard Memory 1GB
A5R, 5.5" x 8.5"R 18 18 22 22 (System Memory) Expansion Memory 1GB
12" x 18", A3W *1 11 11 14 14 Max. 2GB
Extra, User-Extra: HDD *4 80GB *3
Paper width 150mm or less
Extra, User-Extra: *1: 128MB (on-board) + 512MB
Paper width over 150mm *2: 64MB (on-board) + 256MB
Envelope 11 11 14 14 *3: The HDD capacity may vary depending on the production date.
Postcard HIGH *2 18 18 22 22
*4: U model: Option
Postcard LOW *2 11 11 14 14
(printer expansion kit with hard drive: MX-PB11)
OHP (A4, 8.5" x 11") 28 30 35 35
OHP (A4R, 8.5" x 11"R) 17 17 21 21 C. Operation panel
*1: ppm when exiting to the finisher (A3W/12" x 18" cannot exit to (1) Display device
the center tray)
a. LCD
*2: Switched by the service simulation setting. Postcard is set Low
before shipment. N model U model
(9) Power source Size/resolution 8.5inch WVGA 8.1inch HVGA
Type Dot matrix LCD, touch panel
NOTE: Check the shape of the power plug of the machine, and Display dot number 800 x 480 (WVGA) 640 x 240 (HVGA)
insert it into a power outlet of the acceptable shape. Color Color Monochrome
LCD drive display area (W x D) 184.8 x 110.88mm 192 x 72mm
100V series 200V series
LCD back-light Fluorescent lamp back-light system
Voltage / Current 100 - 127V 12A 220 - 240V 8A
LCD brightness adjustment Yes
Frequency 50/60Hz
Power source code Fixed type Inlet D. Scanner section
(Direct connection)
Power switch 2 switches (1) Resolution/Gradation
(Primary switch: in the front cover;
Secondary switch: the operation panel) Scanning Platen600 x 600 dpi
Resolution 600 x 400 dpi
(10) Power consumption (dpi) 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
RSPF 600 x 600 dpi
100V series 200V series 600 x 400 dpi (Default)
Max. Rated Power 1.44kW 1.84kW DSPF 600 x 600 dpi
Consumption *1 600 x 400 dpi
TEC value 28 CPM model: 3.8 kWh 600 x 300 dpi (Default)
36 CPM model: 6.6 kWh In sending Internet Fax /
Scanner Fax
45 CPM model: 9.75 kWh Resolution Direct SMTP
50 CPM model: 11.50 kWh (dpi) Standard
200dpi x 100dpi
Moving time to Pre-heat mode 10 minutes (default) (203.2 x 97.8 dpi)
100dpi x 100dpi (halftone not
Moving time to Sleep mode 1 minutes (default) (halftone not
allowed)
allowed)
*1: When the power supply is turned on, when the dehumidification Fine
200dpi x 200dpi 200dpi x 200dpi
heater is OFF. (203.2 x 195.6 dpi)
Super Fine
B. Controller board 300dpi x 300dpi 200dpi x 400dpi
(203.2 x 391 dpi)
(1) Controller board Ultra Fine
400dpi x 400dpi 400dpi x 400dpi
(406.4 x 391 dpi)
CPU Power QUICC II Pro MPC8377E 600dpi x 600dpi 600dpi x 600dpi ---
Interface Exposure lamp N model: White LED
Ethernet 1 port U model: Xenon
Interface 10Base-T, 100Base-TX, Reading gradation 10bits
1000Base-T Output gradation B/W: 1bit
Support TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6), IPX/ Grayscale (N model only): 8bit
Protocol SPX, NetBEUI, EtherTalk Full color (N model only):
RGB colors are 8bit each
USB 2.0 (Host) The ports on the front and on the side of
* Simultaneous connection the rear section cannot be used
(2) Document table
is inhibited. The total simultaneously. (Exclusive use)
current consumption must
Type Document table fixed system (Flat bed)
not exceed 500mA.
Scanning area 297 x 432mm
USB 2.0 (high speed) Device 1 port
Original standard position Left bottom reference
Scanner expansion I/F Yes
(N model only) Detection Yes
Memory Refer to the section on (2) Memory, hard Detection size Automatic detection
disk. Dehumidifying heater Supplied as a service part
Memory slot 2 slots (one is empty slot) (Scanner section)
(3) Automatic document feeder
Type DSPF (Duplex single pass feeder): 36/45/50 CPM N model

RSPF (Reversing single pass feeder): 28 CPM N model, 36/45/50 CPM U model
Scan speed Monochrome (A4 / 8.5" x 11") Color (A4 / 8.5" x 11") (N model only)
Copy DSPF
Single: 70-sheet/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 1bit)
50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 70-page/min. (600 x 300 dpi, 1bit)
50-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
N/A
RSPF
Single: 50-sheet/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 20-page/min. (600 x 400 dpi, 1bit)
Fax / Internet Fax DSPF
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
N/A
RSPF
Duplex: 20-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Scanner DSPF DSPF
Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 70-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 70-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 8 bit)
RSPF RSPF (28 CPM N model only)
Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Single: 50-sheet/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Duplex: 20-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit) Duplex: 20-page/min. (200 x 200 dpi, 1 bit)
Original setup direction Upward standard (1 to N feeding standard)
Original standard Center standard (Rear one-side standard for random feeding)
position Face Up (1 to N Feeding standard)
Original transport Sheet-through method
method
Original size Standard size: (Refer to the "paper detection size")
Long paper: 1000 mm (Monochrome binary only)
Internet Fax 600 x 600 dpi: Max. 800 mm. When scan 400 dpi or more, long paper is not available.
Mix paper feed (Same series, same width paper) enabled
Random paper feed combination
Mix feeding available. (same system, same width)
Random feeding (feeding of different types / different widths)
Only the following combinations of 2 size types are allowed:
either A3 or A4 and either B4 or B5; either B4 or B5 and either A4R or A5 and 11-inch and 8.5-inch. AMS available.
2-sided scanning is disabled during random feeding (when the RSPF is used).
Original copy weight Single: (Thin paper) 9 - 13 lb bond (35 - 49 g/m2), (plain paper) 13 - 32 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
* Thin paper mode (19pages/minute (A4, 8.5" x 11", 600dpi)) is set up for the thin paper.
Duplex: 13 - 28 lb bond (50 - 128 g/m2)
Max. loading capacity of Max. 100 sheets (21lbs Bond, 80g/m2), or Max. height: 1/2 inch, 13mm or less
documents
Un-acceptable originals OHP, second original paper, tracing paper, carbon paper, thermal paper, paper with wrinkles, folds, or breakage, pasted paper, cutout
for feeding. document, document printed with ink ribbon, documents with perforation other than 2- or 3-holes (Perforated document by punch unit
is allowed.)
Detection Yes
Paper detection size Auto detection (Switching one type of detection unit)
(Platen/DSPF/RSPF) Inch-1 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-2 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
Inch-3 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 5.5" x 8.5", A3, A4
DSPF/ AB-1 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 11"
RSPF AB-2 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-3 8K, 16K, 16KR, A3, B4, A4, A4R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11"
AB-4 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 11"
AB-5 A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, 11" x 17", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 11"
* 5.5" x 8.5"R, A5R cannot be detected.
Paper feeding direction Right hand feeding
Finish stamp Option
Power source Provided from main unit
Dimensions W23-13/16 x D20-5/64 x H6-3/32 inch (W605 x D510 x H155 mm)
E. Paper feed section (5) Tray 5 (LCC)
(1) Type Type 3,500-Sheet Large Capacity Tray
Transport speed 124 mm/s - 360 mm/s
Type Standard:
Paper size A4, B5, 8.5" x 11"
2-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper
Paper size setting Simulation setup
feed tray
Full option: Paper size setting when A4
4-stage paper feed tray + multi manual paper shipping
feed + LCC Paper type setting Yes
Dehumidifying heater Service parts (Supported by kit) Allowable paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper,
and weight for paper letter head, punched paper, colored paper:
(2) Tray 1, 2 (Main unit) feed 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Paper capacity 3,500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) Effective height: 385 mm
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", Paper remaining Yes (5 levels: 100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, none)
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", detection
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, Driving form The transport motor (DC brush-less motor)
5.5" x 8.5"R, 8K, 16K, 16KR and control PWB are built-in to LCC.
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Off-center adjustment 3mm
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, (Move the regulation plate F/R to adjustment)
heavy paper Power consumption Normal operation : 26.4W
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: 16 - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) (without heater) During lift-up : 40.8W
Heavy paper: 28 lb bond - 110 lb index Power source 5V5% and 24V5% are supplied from main
(106 - 209g/m2) unit
Paper size setting when AB series; Tray 1: A4, Tray 2: A3 External dimensions 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 x 20-15/32 inch,
shipping Inch series; Tray 1: 8.5" x 11", Tray 2: 11" x 17" (W x D x H) 370 x 550 x 520 mm
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) Dimensions occupied by 14-9/16 x 21-21/32 inch, 370 x 550 (mm)
detection Machine (W x D) * Clearance with main unit: 235 mm
Weight Approx. 66.1 lbs, 30 kg
(3) Manual paper feed tray (main unit) Thermal heater Standard equipment: AC power is supplied
from main unit. And main unit can control ON/
Paper capacity Plain paper: 100 sheets (80 g/m2) OFF operation.
envelope/OHP: 20 sheets
Optional detection Auto detection system
Paper size A3W, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R,
12" x 18", 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", F. Paper exit section
8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", 8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R,
7.25" x 10.5"R, 5.5" x 8.5"R, envelope, 8K, (1) Center tray of main unit
16K, 16KR
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, Paper exit section Center section of the Right side paper exit
letter head, punched paper, colored paper, main unit section of the main
heavy paper, thin paper, envelope, OHP, unit
label sheet, tab paper Paper exit system Face-down paper exit system
Feedable Paper Weight Thin paper: Paper exit capacity 400 sheets 100 sheets
15 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2) (When A4, 8.5" x 11") (When A4, 8.5" x 11")
Plain paper: Paper exit paper size/ Thin paper:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) weight 15 lb bond -16 lb bond (56 - 59g/m2)
Heavy paper: Plain paper:
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2)
Heavy paper:
(4) Tray 3, 4 (2-stage paper feed tray) 28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2)
Envelope:
Paper capacity Plain paper: 500 sheets (80 g/m2) x 2 20 - 24 lb bond (75 - 90g/m2)
Paper size A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, 11" x 17", Shifter function Yes No
8.5" x 14", 8.5" x 13.5", 8.5" x 13.4", 8.5" x 13", Paper exit detection No
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11" R, 7.25" x 10.5"R, 8K,
Paper exit full detection Yes
16K, 16KR
Paper type Plain paper, printed paper, recycled paper, (2) Shifter
letter head, punched paper, colored paper,
heavy paper Paper weight 15 lb bond - 110 lb index (56 - 209g/m2)
Feedable Paper Weight Plain paper: Paper size/type Non-offset Size:
16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) mode A3W and 12" x 18" are not
Heavy paper: acceptable
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209g/m2) Type:
Paper size setting when Maximum position of paper guide width Glossy paper are not acceptable
shipping Offset Size:
Paper remaining Yes (Paper empty and 3 levels) mode A3W, 12" x 18", envelope and
detection are not acceptable
Power consumption 20W (Power is supplied from main unit) Type:
Dimensions with 28-22/64 x 11-15/16 inch, Envelope, OHP, label paper,
(W x D x H) adjuster 720 x 670 x 303 mm tab paper and glossy paper are
without 24-13/64 x 26-3/8 x 11-15/16 inch, not acceptable
adjuster 615 x 670 x 303 mm Offset width 30 mm
Integrity Non-offset Getting out:
* In using the mode It doesn't fall down from tray
recommended paper, Offset Getting out: within 50 mm
A4/8.5" x 11" mode FR shift: within 10 mm
JOB distance: 10 mm or more
(3) Paper exit tray Functions N model U model
Preview function Yes
Type Exit tray unit
Paper exit position/ Paper exit to external in the right side of the *1: When the HDD (MX-PB11) is installed.
system main unit/Paper exits in face-down
Paper exit capacity 100 sheets (When A4/8.5" x 11")
Paper exit paper size/ All of allowable paper for paper feed except MX-M363N/
Special functions N model
type envelope, tab paper and gloss paper. M453N/M503U
Shifter function No Binding margin (Left and Right/Top) Yes
Paper exit paper full Yes Erase (Edge/Center/center + edge/ Yes
detection side erase)
2 in 1 Yes
G. Copy functions Center binding (Centering provided) Yes
Large volume document mode Yes
(1) Copy magnification ratio
Setting change for each bunch Yes
Tandem copy Yes (via Yes (via
Copy magnification ratio Normal ratio 1: 1 0.8%
* Available only between MX-M283/ network) network) *1
AB series 25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%,
M363/M453/M503 series
100%, 115%, 122%, 141%,
Cover paper insertion Yes
200%, 400%
Tab paper insertion Yes
Inch series 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%,
* Tab Paper Insertion only.
121%, 129%, 200%, 400%
No copying on tabs allowed
Zoom 25-400% (DSPF/RSPF: 25-200%)
OHP insertion Yes
Preset magnification 4 (Reduction 2/Enlargement 2)
(Inserted paper is automatically
ratio
selected.)
XY zoom Yes
Multi shot (2 in 1 / 4 in 1) Yes
(2) Density/copy image quality process Boundary line print Yes
Centering Yes
Exposure mode Automatic, Text, Text/Printed Photo, Map Page printing per original page Yes
(600 dpi) Book copy Yes
Printed Photo, Text/Photograph, Photograph Tab copy Yes
(1200 dpi) Card shot Yes
* U model: 600 dpi only Stamp Date print Yes
Number of manual steps 9 steps Text print Yes
Toner save mode Yes Stamp Yes
* Available for Automatic (AE), Text/Printed Page print Yes
Photo
User stamp No
(3) Duplex Watermark Yes Yes*1
Image edit Photo repeat Yes
System Non stack system Multi-page Yes
Paper size 11" x 17", 8.5" x 14" (216 x 356), enlargement Crop mark printing supported.
8.5" x 13.5" (216 x 343), Mirror image Yes
8.5" x 13.4" (216 x 340), 8.5" x 13" (216 x 330), A3 full bleed Yes
8.5" x 11", 8.5" x 11"R, Centering Yes
5.5" x 8.5"R, A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, B/W reverse Yes
8K, 16K, 16KR (B/W copy) (UK not supported)
Type and weight of Plain paper: Sharpness Yes
paper which can be 16 lb bond - 28 lb bond (60 - 105g/m2) Quick file Yes Yes*1
passed Heavy paper: Filing Yes Yes*1
28 lb bond - 110 lb index (106 - 209 g/m2)
Proof copy Yes Yes*1
Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper, colored paper,
Original count Yes
letter head, printed paper, punched paper,
Mixed original Yes
heavy paper
Random Yes
(4) Copy functions MIX Yes
Combination with APS Yes
Functions N model U model Combination with AMS Yes
Automatic paper selection Yes Slow scan Yes
Automatic magnification ratio selection Yes Ignore blank paper No
Paper type selection Yes Repeat layout No
Paper type setting Yes Chapter inserts No
Auto tray switching Yes Book division No
Rotation copy Yes Move No
Large rotated copy over A4 width Yes Shading No
Electronic sort Yes Document control Yes No
Rotation sort No (When the Data Security Kit is
Job reservation Yes (99) installed)
Tray installation priority Yes
*1: Only when the HDD (MX-PB11) is installed.
Program call / registration Yes (48) Yes (48)*1/(10)
Program name registration Yes
Document paper size input Yes
Document paper size registration Yes
Indeterminate paper size input Yes
Indeterminate paper size registration Yes
2-sided copy direction switch Yes
H. Printer function I. Image send function
(1) Platform (1) Mode
IBM PC/AT Scanner Scan to e-mail

Macintosh Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
(2) Support OS Scan to Folder (SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Custom Custom Custom Scan to e-mail with Meta*1
OS PPD
PCL6 PCL5e PS Scan to Desktop with Meta*1
Windows 98 / Me Yes Yes Yes Yes Scan to FTP with Meta*1
NT 4.0 SP5 or later Yes Yes Yes Yes Scan to SMB with Meta*1
2000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Scan to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
(Document Admin)
XP Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fax Fax to Fax (Manual)
XP x 64 Yes No Yes Yes
Fax to e-mail/Internet Fax*1/Fax (Relay transfer)
Server 2003 Yes Yes Yes Yes
Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Inbound routing)*1
Server 2003 x 64 Yes No Yes Yes Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB (Document Admin)
Server 2008 Yes No Yes Yes Internet Fax*1 Internet Fax to Internet Fax (Manual)
Server 2008 x 64 Yes No Yes Yes Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Vista Yes Yes Yes Yes (Inbound routing)*1
Vista x 64 Yes No Yes Yes Internet Fax to e-mail/FTP/Desktop/SMB
Mac 9.0 - 9.2.2 No No No Yes (Document Admin)
X 10.2.8 No No No Yes
*1: For the machine with HDD installed.
X 10.3.9 No No No Yes
10.4.11 No No No Yes (2) Support system
X 10.5 - 10.5.5 No No No Yes
Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax
(3) PDL emulation Direct SMTP *1
Corresponding SMTP POP server
PCL5e compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard. server/protocol FTP (TCP / IP) SMTP server
N/A
PCL XL compatibility Compatible with PCL of Hewlett-Packard. SMB ESMTP server
PostScript 3 compatibility Compatible with PS3 of Adobe Systems. HTTP/HTTPS
(4) Font *1: For the machine with HDD installed.

(3) Support image
Emulation Built-in fonts Option font
PCL5e Roman outline fonts = 80 fonts Font for bar code Support image
compatibility, Line printer font (BMP) = 1 font = 28 fonts Mode
N model U model
PCL6
Scanner File format TIFF
compatibility
(Monochrome) PDF
PostScript 3 Roman outline fonts
compatibility = 136 fonts Encrypted PDF
(Option) XPS
File format Color TIFF
(5) Print channel (Color/ JPEG
Grayscale) PDF N/A
USB USB.1.1: Windows 98/Me/2000/Server 2003/ Encrypted PDF
XP/Vista/server 2008 only XPS
USB2.0 (High Speed): Window 2000/XP/Vista/
Compression Non-compression
server 2008 only
system G3 (1-dimensional) =
PSERVER / RPRINT for Print channel in PSERVER/PRINT mode to be (Monochrome) MH (Modified Huffman)
NetWare environment used in netware environment
G4 = MMR (Modified MR)
LPR UNIX LPR/LPD command-compatible print
Compression JPEG (High/
channel
system Middle/Low)
IPP Print channel in compliance with IPP1.0
(Color/ High compression N/A
PAP: EtherTalk Print channel to be used for Macintosh Grayscale) PDF (When MX-
(AppleTalk) environment
EBX3 is installed)
FTP Equipped with the function to print data
Internet Fax File format TIFF-FX (TIFF-F, TIFF-FX (TIFF-F,
received via built-in FTP server
Direct SMTP (Monochrome) TIFF-S) TIFF-S)*1
NetBEUI Microsoft NetBEUI compatible print channel
Compression G3 G3
Raw Port (Port9100) 9100 TCP port (Raw Port) supported system (1-dimensional) = (1-dimensional) =
HTTP (Web Submit (Monochrome) MH (Modified MH (Modified
Print) Huffman) Huffman)*1
POP3 (E-Mail To Print) G4 = MMR G4 = MMR
(Modified MR) (Modified MR)*1
IPP, HTTP and POP3 support SSL.
Fax File format
N/A
(6) Environment setting (Monochrome)
Compression MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Setting item General system
Default setting Basic settings for using the printer such as the number (Monochrome)
of copies and the print direction Conversion for each page to a file (Available to quantity specification)
PCL Setting of the PCL symbol and fonts
*1: Only when the HDD (MX-PB11) is installed.
PS Setting of enabling/disabling of print in case of a PS
error, setting of binary data outputting
(4) Item number of registration items (6) Specification of addresses
Item No. of registration items Internet Fax *1

Mode Scanner Fax
One-touch/Group 1000*1 / 500*2 items Direct SMTP *1
Max. number of registration items for one Address setting Setting by one-touch/group/direct address entry,
group (500*1 / 300*2 items) entry from externally-connected keyboard and
Program 48*1 / 8*2 items selection from LDAP server are available
Memory box Total of bulletin board / confidential letter / * Modes for direct address setting is allowed:
relay and broadcast: 100*1 / 30*2 items e-mail / Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)*1/
(Fax) Fax/SMB*1
Sender registration Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item Default address Yes N/A
User list (Return address list) Scanner: 1,000*1 / 200*2 items setting *2
Transfer table list Fax, Internet Fax*1: 1 item Number of one- Total (number of key): Max. 1000*1/500*5
touch address key (Total registrable number for FTP/SMB/Desktop is
Sender selection 18 items
registration 200*1/100*5 at max.)
Item name 30 items
Number of Group Max. 500*1/300*5
File name 30 items
(1 key) address
Polling allow number Fax: 10 items registration
Number of Group 5000*1/100*5
key registration of (Total address number included in 1000*1/500*5 key)
*2: For the machine without HDD installed. direct entry
(5) Image processing Program 48*1/8*5 (Group/one-touch)
Direct entry of Entry using Soft keyboard or an Entry by
Internet Fax *1 addresses external keyboard *1 10-key, # key,
Mode Scanner Fax Yes (SMB: No) *5 * key
Direct SMTP *1
Original Black-white Yes Yes Yes Directory walking Yes (SMB) *1 N/A
scanning Grayscale Yes*2 N/A (Refer/Search) No *5
color Full color Yes*2 N/A Chain dial N/A Yes
(by pause key)
Auto Color N/A
Selection Resend Call up nearest 8 addresses sent as a single
destination. *3
Halftone Equivalent Equivalent to 256 gradations levels
reproduction to 256 Destination N/A Yes
gradations confirmation
levels Shortcut for Use the 10-key to call up registered numbers of
Density Auto Yes Yes address selection addresses.
adjustment (Color/ (Quick key)
Gray: Text/ CC/BCC sending Yes N/A
Printed 3) Subject Select from the list /direct entry N/A
*2 Subject 30 N/A
Manual 5 steps registration
Original Text Yes N/A Direct entry of Yes N/A
document Text/ Yes N/A subject
type Photograph File name Select from the list /direct entry N/A
(Selectable Text/ Yes N/A File name 30 N/A
in manual Printed registration
mode) photo Direct entry of file Yes N/A
Photograph Yes N/A name
Printed Yes N/A Reply-To Select from the N/A N/A
photo list/direct entry/
Map Yes N/A select from
Magical scan (Area N/A LDAP server
division + Suppress Transmission Yes *1 N/A
Background) message No *5
Selection of image quality N/A Halftone (Black-white only) (message body)
ON/OFF Transmission Select from the list/direct entry *1 N/A
Resolution (depends on 100 x 200 x 100dpi Normal text message selection No *5
file format/transmission 100dpi (Halftone not (203.2 x Number of letters Max. of 1800 half-width letters.*1 N/A
method) allowed) 97.8dpi) of transmission No *5
(Halftone message
not allowed) Preset mail footer Yes N/A
200 x 200 x 200dpi Fine (203.2 *4
200dpi x 195.6dpi) Disable Yes
300 x 200 x 400dpi Super Fine Registering
300dpi (203.2 x Destination from
391dpi) Operation Panel
400 x 400 x 400dpi Ultra Fine Disable Yes
400dpi (406.4 x registration
391dpi) destination on
600 x 600 x 600dpi N/A Web page
600dpi Disable Yes N/A
Moire reduction mode Yes N/A registration using
the network
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. scanner tool
Disable [Retry] on Yes
*2: N model only.
Fax/Image send
mode
Internet Fax *1 Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 Direct SMTP *1
Disable selection Yes Change of the number Yes N/A
from the address of pages for each file
book Job partition through No N/A
Disable direct Yes recognition of white
entry paper.
Disable broadcast No Ignore blank paper No N/A
setting Restriction on Yes (Direct SMTP doesnt have No
Disable N/A Yes N/A transmission size limitation)
PC-Internet Fax Drop-out color No N/A
sending Finish stamp function Yes (option)
Disable PC-Fax N/A N/A Yes Confidential N/A No
sending transmission
(Sharp mode)
Relay broadcast N/A No
*2: The scanner mode allows setting the default address. transmission
To transmit data, users only have to set the original and press (Sharp mode)
the start key. Job build mode Yes
*3: Desktop, USB memory, SMB, FTP and broadcast are not Thin paper scan mode Yes
included. Mixed originals feeder Yes (random + MIX)
*4: Function to set up a text message that will be added Default date sender N/A Yes
transmission
automatically to the message body upon e-mail transmission.
(ON only)
Editing upon transmission is not allowed.
Preview Yes (N model only)
*5: For the machine without HDD installed. Edge erase Yes
(7) Specification of multiple addresses (Edge/Edge + center/
center/side)
Internet Fax *1 Original count Yes
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 Book division No
Broadcast Yes (e-mail/ Yes Fax destination N/A Yes
FTP/Desktop/ confirmation
SMB available) (Preventing
Number of Broadcast 500*1/300*2 mistarnsmittion)
destinations (For FTP/SMB/Desktop, max. 200*1/100*2 items)
Request of serial N/A Yes
transmission (9) Reception function
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax
*2: For the machine without HDD installed. Direct SMTP *1
Automatic reception N/A Yes
(8) Transmission functions
Manual reception N/A Yes Yes
(Direct SMTP: No) Switching from
Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax manual reception
Direct SMTP *1
to automatic
Memory transmission 94*1/47*2 destinations in all reception.
On-hook N/A Yes Allowed only for
Quick on-line N/A Yes France.
transmission Switching from N/A Yes
Direct transmission N/A Yes manual reception to (France only)
(Switching: Memory automatic reception
transmission Direct Fixed size reduced N/A Yes
transmission) reception
Manual transmission N/A No Specified size scaled N/A No
setting reception
Automatically reduced N/A Yes Rotated reception N/A Yes
transmission Setting of received N/A N/A Yes
Rotated transmission N/A Yes data print condition
Scaled transmission Yes 2-sided reception N/A Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a 2 in 1 reception N/A No
fixed size to another.
A3 RX automatic N/A Yes
Recall mode Error N/A Yes reduce print (Inch
Busy N/A Yes (Direct Yes type and Fax using
SMTP) destinations only)
N/A Internet Fax: only Yes Letter Size RX N/A Yes
number is set. automatic reduce
Direct SMTP: print (AB type and
Number/times Fax using
set in the System destinations only)
Settings. Allowing Address/ N/A Yes N/A
Long original Yes Domain setting (50 domains)
transmission Max. of 1000mm (1-side only/black-white binary reception
only) Not allowing N/A Yes N/A
Internet Fax, 600 x 600dpi: Max. of 800mm (only Address/Domain (50 domains)
for the machine with HDD installed) setting reception.
Scanner, 400dpi or more: impossible (To be rejected)
Internet Fax *1 (10) Report/list function
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1
Allowing reception N/A Specified Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax
from a specific numbers only Direct SMTP *1
number. (50*1 (30*2) Communication Yes
numbers/ report table Time-specified output/ Output when memory is full
20 digits) Scanner: only manual output
Not allowing N/A Specified * Maximum of 200*1/50*2 reports including both
reception from a numbers only transmission and reception
specific number. (50*1 (30*2) Communication N/A Yes
(To be rejected) numbers/ result table
20 digits) Address/phone Yes
Automatic switching N/A No number table
of phone/Fax. Group table Yes
External phone N/A Yes Program table Yes
connection remote Memory box table N/A Yes
Answering phone N/A No (F code)
connection Notification table of No *1 N/A
Dial-in N/A No clearing memory Yes *2
Confidential N/A No (During error)
reception Communication N/A Yes
(Sharp mode) original contents print
Received data N/A Yes List of allowed or not N/A Yes
bypass output allowed numbers for
Reception N/A Yes N/A reception
confirmation cycle (Setting by List of allowed or not N/A Yes N/A
setting 0-8 hours/ allowed addresses
each minute) for reception
(Direct SMTP: No) Inbound routing No Yes (only for the machine with
POP3 N/A Yes N/A Table list HDD installed)
communications (Setting by Document Admin list Yes
time-out setting 30-300/every 30 All settings list Yes
seconds) Web setting list Yes
(Direct SMTP: No)
Index printing N/A No *1: For the machine with HDD installed.
Body text print N/A Yes N/A *2: For the machine without HDD installed.
setting
Transfer function N/A Yes (11) Other functions
during output is (1 transfer receiver can be registered
disabled. each.) Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax
Inbound routing N/A Yes (only for the machine with HDD Direct SMTP *1
(Internet Fax/Fax installed) Time Yes*1 Yes
receive data network 1) Formats can be selected. specification No*2
transfer) (PDF/Single TIFF/Multi TIFF/ Polling N/A Yes
XPS) reception
2) Destinations: e-mail/FTP/SMB/ Bulletin board N/A Yes
Desktop transmission Up to 100*1/30*2
3) Information about the MFP that registrations
transfers the data is added to the allowed with
transferred data. bulletin board,
4) Transmission table has confidential and
timetable. relay broadcast all
5) Transfer by judging the line kind combined. (Free
is enabled. (Fax/Internet Fax) area: 1
Exit tray setting N/A Yes registration)
Insertion of job N/A No Setting of the
Separator sheet number of
Print number setting N/A No Yes transmission: 1/no
of received data limit.
Staple function of N/A Yes Cover sheet N/A
received data function
Auto wake up print N/A Yes Transmission N/A
Hold Setting for N/A Yes message
Received Data Print Sender print N/A Yes
(ALL RX data into the Sender N/A Yes
Memory regardless) selection
Foot print N/A Yes Page number N/A Yes
Image Check N/A Yes (Users can check received data print
(Preview) before printing it) (N model only) Date print N/A Yes
Alternative reception N/A 100 (Total of Internet Fax and (Date indication can be changed)
number Fax)*1 Polling N/A Yes
50*2 protection
function
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. Page partition Yes
*2: For the machine without HDD installed. transmission
Page No
connection
Internet Fax *1 Internet Fax *1
Mode Scanner Fax Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 Direct SMTP *1
Confidential N/A Yes Desktop registration Yes N/A
transmission (F code method) (Registration by using
Relay broadcast N/A Yes Web or NST (network
instruction (F code method) scanner tool))
Transmission SMB destination Yes N/A
Relay broadcast N/A Yes *1 registration (Can be
transmission Yes registered on the
(Fax to e-mail/ (Fax to e-mail/ Web.)
Internet Fax/ Fax/Fax only) *2 FTP destination Yes N/A
Fax (F code) *3 registration (Can be
2 in 1 No Yes registered on the
transmission Allowed for Web.)
Fax/Internet Program Addresses 48*3/8*4
Fax (One-touch, groups),
broadcast *1 settings (density,
Allowed for image quality,
Fax resolution, original
broadcast *2 setting) and special
Suppress Yes *1 N/A functions can be
background (Only color and registered in one set.
grayscale) Number of memory N/A 100*3/30*4
Card shot Yes (Magnification ratio 63-400%) boxes (Including
Transmission N/A Yes N/A bulletin board/
confirmation Time-out time confidential/relay
can be set from broadcast)
1 minute - 240 Memory box N/A Up to 18
hours by each registration name characters in full
minute (Direct and half size
SMTP: No) Reply-To registration 1000*3/ N/A
Forwarding sent Yes 200*4
and received Forwarding data formats can be selected. (Single TIFF/ (user
data (Document Multi TIFF/PDF/XPS) (Scan to e-mail/FTP/SMB/ registration
Admin) Desktop/PC-Internet Fax*1/PC-Fax/Fax/Internet Fax*1 from Web)
are also supported) Number of sender N/A 1 (20 characters) Only one sender
Folder setting by each of send and receive is registration is registered, and Internet Fax*3/
supported. Fax addresses or phone numbers
Number of Job 99*1/50*2 are registered in the name part.
status indication (40 characters in half size is
available by soft switch setting)
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. Number of sender N/A N/A Total: 18
*2: For the machine without HDD installed. selection registration (20 characters)
(In addition to
*3: Function that enables settings of e-mail/Internet Fax/Fax
default,
addresses as destinations of F-code broadcast.
18 registrations
(12) Record size available)
(40 characters in
Internet Fax *1 half size is
Mode Scanner Fax available by soft
Direct SMTP *1
Maximum record width N/A 293mm switch setting)
Record size N/A A3 - A5/11" x 17" - 5.5" x 8.5" Registration of polling N/A Yes
approval number 10 numbers/
*1: For the machine with HDD installed. 20 digits
Registration of Fax N/A No
(13) Registration-related setting system number
(Sharp mode)
Internet Fax *1 Registration of Fax N/A No
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 polling approval ID
One-touch/group *1 1000*3/500*4 destinations LDAP can be used. number (Sharp mode)
e-mail/ FTP/ Desktop/ Fax relay ID N/A No
SMB/ Internet Fax registration (Sharp
(Direct SMTP)/ Fax mode)
Maximum registration 500*3/300*4 addresses Quick key (short cut Yes
number per group dial registration) *2 (0001 - 1000*3 / 0001 - 500*4)
One-touch name 36 characters in full and half size Retrieving/scanning Yes
registration of registered data to (By address book conversion utility)
One-touch dial Up to 64 digits including receiver number, other model
receiver number sub-address and passcode (including /). Import/export of Yes
registration (Fax) address book (By storage backup)
Group name 36 characters in full and half size
registration *1: Since scan/Internet Fax (including Direct SMTP)/Fax uses the
Address book No common address book, the number of addresses allowed for
registration from registration is the sum total of all modes.
Resend screen
*2: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
Default address setup Yes N/A
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users can select a quick key number.
*3: For the machine with HDD installed. J. PC-Fax, PC-Internet Fax functions
*4: For the machine without HDD installed.
(1) Working environment
(14) Sound settings
OS Windows 98
Internet Fax *7 Windows Me
Mode Item Scanner Fax Windows NT4.0 Workstation
Direct SMTP *7
On-hook sound Sound volume N/A Yes*2 (Service Pack5, IE4.0 or more)
setting Windows 2000
Sound volume Sound volume N/A Yes*6 Windows XP
for calling setting Windows XP x 64
Windows Server 2003
Ring tone Sound volume N/A N/A
Windows Server 2003 x 64
setting
Windows Server 2008
Line monitor Sound volume N/A Yes*6
Windows Server 2008 x 64
sound setting
Windows Vista
Reception Sound volume N/A Yes*1 No Windows Vista x 64
sound setting
PC IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Reception Sound volume N/A Yes*6
CPU Pentium II 300MHz or more
finish sound setting
Monitor Screen resolution: 640 X 480 pixel or above
Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
Number of colors: 256 colors or above
Time setting for N/A Yes*4
Memory 64 MB or more
communication
HDD Empty capacity of 50MB or above
ending sound
Interface USB 2.0
Transmission Sound volume N/A Yes*6
10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
finish sound setting
1000BASE-T
Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
Communication protocol LPR / lp
Time setting for N/A Yes*4
Port9100 (RAW)
communication
IPP
ending sound
USB2.0
Transmission Sound volume N/A Yes*6
and reception setting (2) Functions
error sound Sound pattern N/A Yes*3
Time setting for N/A Yes*5 PC-Internet Fax send Yes (Internet Fax expansion kit is required)
communication Internet Fax address: max. 64 digits
ending sound PC-Fax send Yes
Communication Sound volume N/A Yes*1 No (When Fax is installed)
error sound setting Fax number max. 64 digits
Sound setting Sound volume Yes*1 (including sub-address and passcode)
for end of setting Resolution 200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
original reading 400 x 400dpi /600 x 600dpi*
(image send) * Internet-Fax/Direct SMTP only
Windows 2000 type is only supported.
*1: Setup by system setting. Send document size A3 / B4 / A4 / A5 / B5 / 11" x 17" / 8.5" x 14" /
*2: 9 steps. Setup by system setting. 8.5" x 11" / 5.5" x 8.5" / 8.5" x 13" / 8K / 16K
*3: PATTERN 1/2/3/4. Setup by system setting. Compression system MH / MMR
Broadcast send Yes (Mix of Fax and Internet Fax is available.
Different sound should be selectable for each of reception/
Max. 500 items)
transmission success/transmission and reception error.
F-code send Yes Sub address Yes
*4: Setup by system setting. 5 steps of 2.0 - 4.0 seconds. (Max. 20 digits)
*5: Setup by system setting. 2-steps setting by very 0.3 or Pass code Yes
0.7 second. (Max. 20 digits)
*6: 10 steps (including no sound). Setup by system setting. Telephone book Yes
registration, Send function
Use of MFP phone book No
(15) Others Covering letter Yes (Not allowed for broadcast transmission)
attachment function
Internet Fax *1 Covering letter making Yes
Mode Scanner Fax
Direct SMTP *1 function
PC-Internet N/A Yes N/A Sender print Prints always
Fax Preview Yes
PC-Fax N/A Yes Delivery confirmation Yes
FAST N/A Yes (Notification to PC by
(North America NJR)
only) Document filing function Filing (only for the machine with HDD
Network FAST N/A No installed)
Distinctive ring N/A Setting for each Automatic temporary save (only for the
detection destination machine with HDD installed)
Trial mode Scanner*2: Yes No N/A PC-Fax send log Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
Meta data: Yes User authentication Yes
Linearized PDF Yes Supported N/A Timer No
with Net Scan
Tool

*2: U model: only for B/W scanner
K. Document filing function/Print hold function
(1) Basic function
Document filing (For the machine with HDD installed)
Number of files that can 38GB Color Gray Monochrome
be saved in the standard 20,000 pages or 3,000 files (*1) (N model only) (Binary mode)
folder/user folder Original gregfruit test sheet C test sheet C
Number of files that can 12GB
be saved in temporary file 10,000 pages or 1,000 files (*2)
folders.
Number of folders that Max. 1,000 folders
can be made as user
folders.
Number of users which Same as that of account users of the main
can be registered unit (1,000)
(*1): When the standard document (binary) is used. 38GB 2,500 5,500 20,000
(*2): When the standard document (gray) is used. 12GB 800 1,700 10,000
Print hold (For the machine without HDD installed)

Number of files that can 512 pages or 512 files (*1)
be saved
Number of users which Same as that of account users of the main
can be registered unit (200)
(*1): Sharp Standard Chart/ binary monochrome
(2) Data operation by each function
N model/U model + MX-PB11 U model

Each folder in the standard folder
Temporary folder Print hold
Job /user folder
Confidential Confidential Confidential
Sharing storage Sharing storage Sharing storage
storage storage storage
Copy Yes Yes Yes No N/A N/A
Printer Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Direct print (FTP pull) No No Yes No Yes No
Direct print (FTP push) No No Yes No Yes No
Direct print (USB pull) No No Yes No N/A N/A
Direct print (e-mail push) Yes No Yes No Yes No
Direct print (Web push) No No Yes No Yes No
Direct print (SMB pull) No No Yes No Yes No
Scan to e-mail/FTP Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
Scan to Desktop Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
Scan to SMB Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
Scan to USB memory No No No No N/A N/A
Scan to HDD Yes Yes No No N/A N/A
Internet Fax reception No No No No N/A N/A
Internet Fax send Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
Fax reception No No No No N/A N/A
Fax send Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
PC Fax / PC-Internet Fax send Yes Yes Yes No N/A N/A
Data input Yes No Yes No N/A N/A
Remote PC Scan No No No No N/A N/A
(3) Data operation contents

Operation content
WEB Operation panel WEB Operation panel
Reprint Yes No Yes
Resend Yes No
Delete Yes No Yes
Shift Yes No
Attribute change (Common/Confidential/Protection) Yes No
Confidential file setting Yes
No Yes
(Password: max. of 8 digit numbers)
Confidential folder setting Yes
No
(Password: max. of 8 digit numbers)
File name change Yes No
Creation of a folder Yes No
File transfer to Local PC, FTP server (Data backup) Yes No No
Backup scheduling setting No No
Auto backup upon obstruction at trouble No No
Machine HDD occupying rate display Yes No
Preview Preview before storing in N/A Yes*1
No
Scan to HDD
Checking stored image Yes*1
No
data (The print data displays only the first page.)
Retrieval Yes No
Changing file format Yes No
Collective print Yes No
Delete with the time specified Yes Yes
Connection of different files No No
Multi file selection (print only) Yes No
* During the above setting on the operation panel, web access is disabled.
*1: N model only
(4) Reprint / resend limitation items for each job
Users selection section Reprint

Selected color mode (Monochrome only)
Mode Job kind
N model U model + MX-PB11 U model N model U model + MX-PB11 U model
Printer Printer No selection available Yes
Copy Copy No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Image Scan send Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes N/A
send Grayscale
Binary B/W
Internet Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Document Scan to HDD Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes N/A
filing Grayscale (Send allowed mode)
Binary B/W Binary B/W
(Send allowed mode) (High capacity mode)
Binary B/W
(High capacity mode)

Functional settings for reprint Basic function Number of copies, finishing, selecting paper, duplex
Special modes Saddle stitch, 2 in 1/4 in1, margin shift, stamp, document N/A
control (when data security kit is installed: MX-MxxxN only),
tandem print
Users selection section
Resend
Selected color mode
Mode Job kind
N model U model + MX-PB11 U model N model U model + MX-PB11 U model
Printer Printer No selection available N/A
Copy Copy No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Image Scan send Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes: Full color/ Yes N/A
send Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes:
Binary B/W
Internet Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Fax send No selection available N/A Yes N/A
Document Scan to HDD Full color Binary B/W N/A Yes: Full color/ Yes N/A
filing (Send allowed mode) Binary B/W
Grayscale Yes: Grayscale
Binary B/W Yes
(Send allowed mode)
Binary B/W No No
(High capacity mode)
Functional Basic Format, resolution, image quality, transmission

settings function details settings, meta-data input
for resend Special Time specification, sender print, sender
modes selection, communication result table
L. Ambient conditions
(1) Working environment
(Humidity)
85%
60%
20%
10 30 35
(Temperature)
Standard environmental Temperature 20 25 C

Usage environmental Temperature 10 35 C
Atmospheric 590 1013 hPa
pressure (height: 0 2000m)
Storage period Toner/Developer: 24 months from the
manufactured month (Production lot) under
unsealed state
Drum: 36 months from the manufactured
month under unsealed state
DSPF UNIT RSPF UNIT
<MX-M363N/M453N/M503N> SCOV SPPD1 SPED SPLS1 <MX-M283N/
OPTION
MX-M503N
SRRC SPPD2 SOCD SPLS2 MX-M363U/M453U/M503U/

STMPS SPLS1 SPPD1 SCOV
MX-M363F/M423F/M503F>
DSPFCFM SPPD3 SPPD5 SPWS
OPTION SPRS SPLS2 SPPD2 SPED
SPM SPOD
STMPS CIS UNIT SOCD
SPFM SPM SPWS SPPD3
SPFM
SRVC SRRC SPPD5
DSPF DRIVER PWB DSPF CNT PWB RSPF DRIVER PWB

1. Block diagram
A. System block diagram
F model internal FAX SCANNER UNIT

(Japan) CARD READER OPTION
CCD PWB
FAX
SCN AUDITOR
1
DERIVERY UNIT <N model> PWB PNC
DSW_F OPTION
POD1 POFM1 POM OPTION LED PWB
OPTION MIM
POFM2 ADUMH DSW_R PNC
POD2 COIN VENDOR PCU MOTHER LED DRIVER
POFM3 ORS_LED
TNF PWB PWB
[12] ELECTRICAL SECTION
TFD2 OSM PWB

<U/F model>
HPOS WEBM TNBOX CL INV PWB OCSW
FUM TDSC MHPS

OPTION CL
USB HUB OPERATION UNIT
TOUCH
PWB PANEL
ADUML OZFM INVERTER
FUSER UNIT WEB-END DRIVER
LVDS PWB LCD
PFM PWB DM CRUM PWB
TH_UM
RRM PSPS OPTION ORS_PD
TH_US HL_UM OPE
FIN 4K PWB PWB
HL POWER SW
HL_US or PWB
PWB Option (N model)
S-FIN
HL_UW USB
or CONV KEY BOARD
PS UNIT TH/HUD-DV USB I/F
FIN INNER
RIGHT DOOR UNIT PPD1 TCS
RDCFM LCC
OPTION PPD2
POD3 HVU DH LSU CNT LD PWB
PCS USB HOST
MX-M503N ELECTRICAL SECTION 12 1

PWB
APPD1 BD PWB
DESK 1
RD I/F PSFM1 DH PGM
Service Manual
APPD2
OPTION PWB CPUC1 CPUC2 CSS11-14 CSS21-24 or
TFD3 PSFM2 DESK 2 LSU UNIT
CPFC1 CSPD1 CSPD2
DSW_ADU DH
CLUM1 CLUM2
MFPC
CPFD1 CPFD2 PWB OPTION
ADUGS DCPS
LSUCFM CPFM CLUD1 CLUD2 FAX
CPED1 CPED2 OPTION 2
MPWD MPFD Japan
DSW_C WHSW STD
PAPER FEED 2
MPLD MPED UNIT HDD
CPFC2 LAN
AC TRAY
MTOP1 MPUC MSW WH N/F model: Standard USB
PAPER FEED 1 PWB Japan
DH1 STD U model: Option USB HOST
UNIT PWB
MTOP2 MPFS
DH2
Japan
MPGS STD SCNNER CPUFM
MANUAL PAPER FEED UNIT AC IN
B. DSPF/RSPF unit, Operation unit and Scanner control PWB
DSPF unit (DSPF model) RSPF unit (RSPF model) OPE unit
(Color) CIS unit DSPF Driver PWB Touch Panel Touch Panel
Motor
White LED Sensor Moter
8.5 inch 8.1 inch
CIS Motor Color WVGA B/W HVGA
Driver SOL (N model) (U/F model)
AFE AFE Moter
Driver
LSI Sensor
LVDS PWB KEY PWB
DSPF control PWB Receiver
KEY Buzzer LED
Receiver CPU
(H8S) USB Host
Program SRAM Front Access
Flash ROM Flash DIMM
SCAN ASIC Work
SDRAM (Shading) Key Board Option Power SW PWB
(Medusa) Sensor
(N model)
Mirror
Motor
Scanner control PWB

(N model) (U/F model) CPU
Program SRAM IO ASIC
Flash DIMM Work (H8S)
LED light source xenon lamp
(Color) CCD PWB (B/W) CCD PWB
Color CCD B/W CCD
(N model)
AFE AFE
SDRAM
IPD/DOCC ASIC
Receiver
SCAN ASIC BUS SW

Receiver Transmitter
(Medusa)
(U/F model)
Transmitter
Mother PWB
USB SWITCH/HUB LCD I/F PIC
SCAN I/F

C. MFP control PWB, Mother PWB
OPE unit
USB Host LVDS PWB

Front Access
Receiver
Key Board Option Power SW PWB

(Option (N model only))
Scanner control PWB
Transmitter
MFP control PWB

Mother PWB
B2B CN
USB Host 2.0
USB SWITCH/HUB
USB Host
System Memory PHY IC
DDR2 200pin SO-DIMM x 2Solt
Program / Option
Flash DIMM
G Ethernet G Ether
PHY IC Data memory/
On board Flash memory
(U/F model only)
SoC MPC8377E
PIC
RIC I/F ACRE I/F
D-SUB 9pin
PCI-e (Option (N model only))
ImageArea
LSU I/F
PCI Uranos
USB device
2.0 Hi-Speed SCAN I/F
Kronos2 ASIC
2nd FAX I/F LCD I/F

Image Bus
Local Memory
Kronos2 Local Memory DDR2 144pin SO-DIMM x
On Board SDRAM SATA CN
1Solt
FAX I/F
HDD unit
(N/F model: Standard) FAX unit
(U model: Option) (F model)
MX-FXX2 (Option: N/U model)

MX-FLX2 (Option: F model) Engine Block
LSU unit
LD PWB
LSU control PWB
LSU ASIC
(Raccon)
D. Engine
Mother PWB
Engine Block
PCU PWB
CPU LSU I/F

Program
Flash DIMM (H8S) LCC (Option)
SRAM Finisher (Option)

Work
Fuser unit PMC ASIC DESK (Option)

HV
Sensor
Stepping Motor EEPROM Mother LSU unit
PWB
LD PWB
CRUM
FAN Motor LSU control PWB
LSU ASIC
IO ASIC
(Raccon)
DC Motor
Sensor
Sensor Coin Vendor

(Option)

Uranos ASIC
P.U.
TxD0 RxD[1]
nPCU_RxD
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
RxD0 TxD[1]
nPCU_TxD
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U.
I/O port CTS[1]
PCU_DSR
P.D. O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
I/O port RTS[1]
PCU_DTR
Schmit Inv. O.C.
TxD1
P.U.
RxD
SCN Cnt
TRANS_DAT P.U. TxD[0]
RxD
P.D. Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. nTxD_SCN
P.U.
RxD1 TxD Schmit Inv. O.C.
RSV_DAT LSU ASIC P.U.
TxD RxD[0]
Schmit Inv. Schmit Inv. P.D. nRxD_SCN
P.U. CPU P.D.
SCK1 SCK O.C Schmit Inv.
SCK_LSU H8S/2373 P.U.
RTS[0]
P.D. Schmit Inv. RTS_SCN
Schmit Inv. A[4:0]
E. Serial communication
LSU I/O ASIC Schmit Inv. O.C.

P.U.
PD65892GC CTS[0]
P.U. P.U. D[15:8] CTS_SCN
TxD2 RxD
TxD
RxD
TxD_FIN P.D. O.C Schmit Inv.
CPU O.C. Schmit Inv. RTS_DSPF

P.U. P.U. CTS_DSPF
H8S/2373 RxD2 TxD
RxD_FIN
RXD_DSPF
SoC MPC8377E
TXD_DSPF
O.C. O.C.
P.D.
CPU
P.D.
P.U. P.U.
I/O M30843FWGP P.U.
O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. TxD[PIC]
DTR_FIN
nTxD_PIC
O.C. Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
Schmit Inv. O.C.
P.U. P.U.
I/O FINISHER P.U. P.U.
RxD[PIC]
DSR_FIN
nRxD_PIC
O.C. O.C.
(Optional) PIC
O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD3 RxD I/O port
P.U.
P.U.
TxD_DSK CLR_PIC
O.C. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. Schmit Inv. O.C. O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U. P.U.
RxD3 TxD I/O port
P.D.
P.D.
RxD_DSK REQ_PIC
O.C. O.C. CPU O.C O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3684
I/O
DTR_DSK
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
O.C. O.C.
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O DESK
DSR_DSK CPU
O.C. O.C.
(Optional) H8S/2373
P.U. P.U. P.U.

TxD4 RxD
TxD_LCC
Mot her MFPC Kronos2 ASIC
O.C. O.C.
RxD4
P.U. P.U. P.U.
TxD
DSPF Cnt(for DSPF model)
RxD_LCC TxD[0]
TxD_FAX1 (D)
O.C. O.C. CPU TxD_FAX(D)+
P.U. P.U. P.U. H8/3687 P.U. 244 (buffer)
I/O TxD_FAX(D)- RxD[0]
DTR_LCC RxD_FAX1 (D)
RxD_FAX(D)+
O.C. O.C. RxD_FAX(D)- 244 (buffer)
) LVDS TxD[2]
P.U. P.U. P.U.
I/O LCC TxD_FAX1 (CS)
DSR_LCC TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- P.U. 244 (buffer) RxD[2]
O.C. O.C. (Optional) RxD_FAX1 (CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+

RxD_FAX(CS)- 244 (buffer)
New
ASIC P.U.
RTS[0]
RTS_FAX1 (D)
TxD Schmit Inv. Inv.
I/O ASIC P.U. O.C. CTS[0]
A[4:0] CPU
PIC CTS_FAX1 (D)
SH7706
PD65892GC- P.D. O.C P.U. 244 (buffer)
D[15:8] RxD RTS[2]
103 RTS_FAX1 (CS)
PCU Inv.
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. CTS[2]
CTS_FAX1 (CS)
P.D. O.C 244 (buffer)
F-model Internal FAX
TxD[1]
TxD_FAX2 (D)
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)- P.U. 244 (buffer) RxD[1]
RxD_FAX2 (D)
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)- 244 (buffer)
) LVDS TxD[3]
TxD_FAX2 (CS)
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)- P.U. 244 (buffer) RxD[3]
RxD_FAX2 (CS)
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)- 244 (buffer)
New
ASIC P.U.
RTS[1]
RTS_FAX2 (D)
TxD Schmit Inv. Inv.
P.U. O.C. CTS[1]
CPU
PIC CTS_FAX2 (D)
SH7706
P.D. O.C P.U. 244 (buffer)
RxD RTS[3]
RTS_FAX2 (CS)
Schmit Inv. P.U. O.C. Inv.
CTS[3]
CTS_FAX2 (CS)
P.D. O.C 244 (buffer)
MX-FXX2/2nd FAX for F-model
LIU PWB
F. FAX (Option: MX-FXX2)
RGDT-(CI detection)

Operation in 1W/7W
energy-save mode
DC POWER SUPPLY
F301
Voltage
T5AH/250V Conversion
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
D101
+
F101
~
~
12A/125V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
15A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T1AH/250V
N
FW Voltage
Z101
G. AC power line diagram (100V)
Generating F103 Conversion

Circuit +24V1
F3 +24V2
T2.0AH/250V T8AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
+3.3V
L1
no-mounting RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY2 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD2
TD1 TD3

24V1B T1 G T1 G T1 G
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 HLOUT_UM 1 1
MAIN UNIT HLOUT_UW HLOUT_US
10W 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
Reactor DC POWER SUPPLY
10mH
3A F301
Voltage
Conversion
T3.15AH/250V
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
D101
+
F101
~
~
T6.3AH/250V
-
N/F
AC PWB
MAIN POWER SW
AC IN F1
L
T10A/250V F102
A3 VR2 T3.15AH/250V
F2
N
T10A/250V FW Voltage
H. AC power line diagram (200V)
Z101 Generating Conversion

F103 +24V1
F3 F4 Circuit
+24V2
T2.0AH/250V T2.0AH/250V T5AH/250V +24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
WH-L WH-N +5Vn
+3.3V
L1
RY1
WARM HEATER SET: OPTION
INT24V1
L2
HL PWB
HL_PR
WH-SW
WH PWB
SCN unit
WH-N 7W
WH-L RY1 SCN
NC
WHPR NO TD1 TD2 TD3

T1 G T1 G T1 G
24V1B
T2 4 SSR1 T2 4 SSR2 T2 4 SSR3
1 1 1
MAIN UNIT HLOUT_UM HLOUT_UW HLOUT_US
10W 2 GND 2 GND 2 GND
MAIN UNIT 6 6 6
DESK
10W drawer
DESK
HL UW HL US
THERMOSTAT TS_US
LCC
10W
LCC HL UM
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
FUSING UNIT
PSU MFPC PWB FAX1(OP)
FAX2(OP) GND1
Mother PWB GND1 GND1 GND1 GND2
GND2 GND2 GND2 5VO
5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VO 5VL PIC LSU CNT PWB
SUB 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V PIC 3.3V GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 BD
5VL Internal FAX (F model) 5VN
MX-FXX2/FLX2 GND1
5VL 5VL GND2
PIC NIC 5VN 3.3V
FET 5VL 5VL 5VL
USB HUB 3.3V
GND2 1.5V GND1
3.3V 2.5V 1.8V 1.2V 1.0V
DCCNT2 24V3 24V3 PGM
GND1 RSPF unit
GND2 5VLD 5VLD 24V3
MAIN DCCNT1 5VO LD For U model Stamp(OP)
F203 5VL GND2
3.3V
24V3 24V3 24V3
5VN 5VN
6.3A/250V
GND1 Motor
+5V_HDD FET GND2
GND2 5VN Solenoid
HDD 12V
24V3 24V3 Cluch
I. DC power line diagram
3.3V
GND2 GND2 24V3 CCD RSPF Driver PWB
GND1 GND1 5VLD 5VN 5VN
A3.3V 3.3V GND2 Sensor
GND2
5VO
GND2 GND2 SCNcnt PWB
12V 12V 12V 12V A5V
24V3 24V3 A5V
5VN 5VN GND2 DSPF unit
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V For IT model
5VO 5VO A10V
A10V
12V 12V DSPFcnt PWB
GND1 GND1 12V
FAN
24V3
LED
5VLD
GND2
(IT model)
GND1 GND1
HVU
GND1 INT24V2
INT24V2 24V3 LAMP DSPF Driver
GND2 (U model) Motor
F202 24V3 PWB
RY1 Driver PWB Solenoid
24V2 24V2 INT24V2 PFM RRM ADUMH ADUML POM 24V3
INT24V2 10V Cluch
6.3A/250V INT24V1 FET A3.3V
GND2 A3.3V GND2
GND1 12V Fan Motor
GND2 (POFM3)
AC PWB 5VN 7V 24V3
3.3V 5VN 5VN
Stamp(OP)
GND2 Sensor
(TH/HUS-DV) 1.2V
5VLD
GND2
F201 GND2 24V3 ORS LED
PCU PWB 24V1B TCS,Solenoid 1.5V PWB 5VN
24V1B 24V1B Cluch,LUM,COUNTER(OP) GND2 Sensor
3.3V 1.5V
6.3A/250V 24V1A 24V1A 24V1A
GND2
DSW-R Fan Motor 5VO
12V
A7V
5VN
Reg
(POFM1/2,PSFM1/2
GND2 OZFM,LSUCFM) 24V3
SCM
Reg CIS
OSM(Stepping Motor)
DSW-F 5VN
FET
WEBM(Synchronous)
GND2 Sensor
INT24V1 INT24V1 OPE
LVDS-PWB GND2
24V3 24V3 24V3 24V3 INVERTER
5VN 5VN 5VN
DM FUM CPFM GND2 GND2 GND2
3.3V 3.3V 3.3V 3.3V
GND2 GND2 LCD
12V 12V

5VN
GND2 GND2 PSun 5VO
GND2 GND2 GND2 Sensor,CRUM
MFP-OPE
5VN Sensor GND2
GND2 (PPD1,PPD2) 3.3V
FW FW 5VO
5VN
INT24V1
GND2 GND2
5VN ORS PD
5VN 5VN L
GND2 GND2 RY1
5VN 5VN Sensor
3.3V 3.3V (DSW_ADU, APPD1/2)
RIGHT DOOR
GND2 I/F PWB
24V1B
GND2 Sensor(OP)
F204
(TFD3,POD3) L-HL
Fan Motor
24V4 24V4 INT24V1
GND1 GND1 (RDCFM) Sensor
6.3A/250V 5VN 5VN GND2 /HL_PR
GND2 LCC (MPLD1,MPWD HL(UM) HL(UW) HL(US)
F205 MTOP1/2,MPED
Solenoid
24V5 24V5 24V Punch MPFD) N_HL(UM)
GND1 GND1 5V Cluch
6.3A/250V 5VN 5VN 4K FINISHER 24V module
N_HL(UW)
GND2 5V
Interface Sensor (PCS) N_HL(US)
OR pass un
24V4 RIGHT DOOR
GND1 HL PWB
SADLLE 24V 5VN DESK 1
Punch Interface
FINISHER 5V pass un GND2
OR OR
INNER
Punch DESK 2
FINISHER
OPTION
AC PWB
<100V series> (AC CORD)
DC PWB MOTHER PWB
CN6 PAP-03V-S
VLP-03V DCCNT1 1 PHR-3 CN14
CN1 (NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 1 GND2
1 L_IN DCCNT2 3 2 nDCCNT1
(NC) 2 NC CN2 VLP-03V-K B03B-PASK-1 3 nDCCNT2
3 N_IN MSW-Nout 1 MSW-Nout 1 B3P-PH-K-S
B03P-VL NC 2 (NC) PS-250(RED) CN2 VHR-5N VHR-10N CN10
MSW-Lout 3 MSW-Lout 1 GND2 1 1 GND2
<200V series> (AC CORD) B03P-VL-K PS-250(RED) GND2 2 2 GND2
VLP-03V or MSW 5VL 4 3 5VL
CN1 CN3 5VL 5 4 5VL
L_IN L_IN 1 L_IN MSW-Lin 1 MSW-Lin 1 5VO 3 5 5VO
FG FG (NC) 2 NC NC 2 (NC) PS-250 B5P-VH-B 6 3.3V
N_IN N_IN 3 N_IN MSW-Nin 3 MSW-Nin 1 7 5VN
Inlet connecotr B03P-VL B03P-VL-R VLP-03V-R PS-250 8 12V
SRA-51T-4 F-GND 9 24V3
CN4 VHR-4N-R VHR-3N CN1 10 GND1
L_DC 1 3 L_DC CN3 VHR-3N B10P-VH
NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC 3.3V 1
NC 3 (NC) 1 N_DC 3.3V 2
N_DC 4 B2P3-VH-B GND2 3 (NC)
HL PWB B3P4-VH-R B3P-VH-B
CN1 VLP-03V VLP-03V-E CN5
L_HL 1 1 L_HL
NC 2 (NC) (NC) 2 NC CN4 VHR-6N
N_HL 3 3 N_HL 5VN 1
B03P-VL(WH) B03P-VL-E 5VN 2
5VN 3 P9
2. Actual wiring chart
5VN 4 P9
CN6 GND2 5
1 N_WH GND2 6
A. Power supply section (P1)
2 NC B6P-VH-B
3 L_WH
B2P3-VH-R
CN5 VHR-4N
12V 1 PCU PWB
12V 2
WH-SW GND2 3 (NC) CN4 CN8 PHDR-10VS-2 PSFM1
GND2 4 XLP-12V (Power supply section) (AC section/Power fan) SMR-03V-N / SMP-03V-NC
PS-187(WH) B4P-VH-B (NC) 12 NC PSFM1_V 1 1 PSFM1_V 1
L_WH 1 11 3.3V PSFM1_LD 3 2 PSFM1_LD 2
PS-187(WH) CN7 VHR-8N 9 5VN GND2 5 3 GND2 3
L_WH 1 FW 1 10 GND2 PSFM2_V 2 1 PSFM2_V 1
GND1 2 8 GND2 PSFM2_LD 4 3 PSFM2_LD 3
GND1 3 (NC) 7 12V GND2 6 2 GND2 2
GND1 4 (NC) 6 FW (in) GND2 7 (NC) SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
GND1 5 (NC) 5 FW (out) /INT_CNT 8 PSFM2
GND1 6 2 GND2 INT24V1 9
GND1 7 P9 (NC) 3 nc GND2 10
JPN:STANDARD GND1 8 P9 4 24V1B B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
EX100V:OPTION P3 B8P-VH-B 1 24V1A(Interlock)
EX120V:OPTION B12P-XL(LF)(SN)
EX200V:OPTION CN8 VHR-7N
WH PWB 24V1-b 1
CN1 CN5 24V1-a 2
1 WH-L WHPR 1 24V2 3
2 NC (NC) 2 (NC) 24V3 4
3 WH-N 24V1B 3 24V3 5 (NC)
B2P3-VH-R B03B-PH-K-R PHR-3-R 24V4 6 P9
VHR-3N-R 24V5 7 P9
B7P-VH-B
CN4
WH_N(LCC) 1
WH_N(DESK) 2
(NC) 3 (NC)
P9
WH_L(DESK) 4
WH_L(LCC) 5
B4P(5-3)-VH
VHR-5N
SCANNER UNIT
CN2 ELR-02V / ELP-02V ELR-02V / ELP-02V

WH-N(SCAN) 1 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2 2 WH-N(SCAN) 2
NC 2 (NC) 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 1 WH-L(SCAN) 1 WH
WH-L(SCAN) 3
B2P3VH-BL VHR-3N-BL JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
CN3 JPN:STANDARD EX120V:OPTION
WH-N(DESK1) 1 EX100V:OPTION EX200V:OPTION

NC 2 (NC) WH EX120V:OPTION
WH-L(DESK1) 3 EX200V:OPTION
B2P3-VH VHR-3N
AC PWB
VHR-4N CN7 CN9
1 24V2 GND2 2
(NC) 2 NC INT24V1 3
3 INT24V2 /INT CNT 1
MOTOR DRIVER PWB 4 INT24V2 B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) PHR-3
B4P-VH-B(LF)
CN5 VHR-3N-R SLR-06VF / SLP-06V SLR-02VF / SLP-02V
INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1 1 INT24V2 1
GND1 2 2 GND1 2 2 GND1 2
+5VN 3 3 LSUCFM_LD 3
B3P-VH-R 4 LSUCFM_V 4
P4 P4
5 GND2 5
6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6
PCU PWB
CN13
5VN 2
B7P-VH(LF)(SN)
HV PWB
CN1 PAP-07V-S SMR-02V-N/SMP-02V-NC
INT24V2 1 2 INT24V2 2
GND1 2 1 GND1 1
/HV_DATA# 3
/HV_CLK# 4
/HV_LD# 5 P5
MHV-T 6
HV_REM# 7
B07B-PASK
Fuser unit Main frame
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
THERMOSTAT(MAIN)
HL(MAIN) 100V series: 480W

200V series: 600W YLR-02VF / YLP-02V
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
VLR-03V / VLP-03V HL(SUB) 100V series: 510W
1 L-HL(COM) 1 200V series: 390W
3 L-HL(COM) 3
2 L-HL(COM) 2
HL(UW) 100V series: 300W
200V series: 300W YLR-01VF / YLP-01V
1 N-HL(UW) 1 PCU PWB
D1.25-M3(Ni) D1.25-M3(Ni)
HL PWB
VLP-03V-BK PHR-6 PHDR-18VS-2
CN2 CN4 CN12 (HL section drive)
THERMOSTAT(SUB) 1 N-HL(MAIN) INT24V1 6 2 INT24V1
(NC) 2 L-HL(COM) GND2 5 4 GND2
3 L-HL(COM) /HL_PR 1 6 /HL_PR
B03P-VL-BK HLout_UM 2 8 HLout_UM
HLout_US 4 10 HLout_US
CN3 HLout_UW 3 14 HLout_UW
1 L-HL(COM) B6B-PH-K-S (NC) 12 HLout_E
Drawer connector 2 N-HL(UW) (NC) 16 GND2
(LF)(SN) (LF)(SN) 3 N-HL(SUB) (NC) 18 /LSUSS
B03P-VL-R B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
(Power) VLP-03V-R
4 L-HL(COM) 4
6 N-HL(UW) 6
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
5 L-HL(COM) 5
(NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC)
Front frame
B. Front section, Fuser unit section (P2)
SMR-04V-B / SMP-04V-BC (Connector)

RTH 1 GND2 1 B-9 GND2 B-1
(Sub contact thermistor) 2 TH_US_IN 2 B-8 TH_US_IN B-2
3 GND2 3 (NC) B-7 (NC) B-3 (NC)
4 TH_MY_IN 4 (NC) B-6 (NC) B-4 (NC)
B-5 GND2 B-5
RTH (NOTE 1) B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6
100V series (NOTE 1) (NOTE 2)
(Main contact thermistor) B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7
B-4: TH_MY_IN (100) connection B-2 WEB-END B-8 SMR-18V-N / SMP-18V-NC
B-3: Not connection B-1 GND2 B-9 1 GND2 5V_TNF 10
200V series (NC) A-10 (NOTE 2) 2 TH_US_IN TNF 11
(NC) A-1 (NC)
B-4: Not connection (NC) A-9 (NC) A-2 (NC) 100V series 3 GND2 GND2 12
B-3: TH_MY_IN (200) connection (NC) A-8 (NC) A-3 (NC) 4 TH_E_IN 5V_TNBOX 13
SRA-01T-3.2 SMR-02V-B / SMP-02V-BC B-6: TH_MY_IN (100) connection
1 WEB-END 1 (NC) A-7 (NC) A-4 (NC) B-7: Not connection 5 GND2 TNBOX 14
WEB-END 2 GND2 2 (NC) A-6 (NC) A-5 (NC) 200V series 6 TH_MY_IN GND2 15
SRA-01T-3.2 (NC) A-5 (NC) A-6 (NC) B-6: Not connection 7 (NC) GND2 16 PHDR-26VS-1 CN16 (HL section sensor)
(NC) A-4 (NC) A-7 (NC) B-7: TH_MY_IN (200) connection 8 WEB-END TH_UMCS_IN 17 (NC) 1 GND2
(NC) A-3 (NC) A-8 (NC) 9 GND2 TH_UM_IN 18 (NC) 2 GND2
(NC) A-2 (NC) A-9 (NC) (NC) 3 TH_UMCS_IN
(NC) A-1 (NC) A-10 (NC) SMR-18V-N / SMP-18V-NC (NC) 4 TH_UM_IN
1 GND2 1 5 GND2
RCZR-09V-PS RCZR-09V-PS 2 TH_US_IN 2 7 TH_US_IN
RCZR-10V-PS RCZR-10V-PS (NC) 3 (NC) 3 (NC) (NC) 6 GND2
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) (NC) 8 TH_E_IN
5 GND2 5 9 GND2
6 TH_MY_IN 6 10 TH_MY_IN
(NC) 7 (NC) 7 (NC) (NC) 13 GND2
8 WEB-END 8 11 WEB-END
9 GND2 9 12 GND2
10 5V_TNF 10 15 5V_TNF
11 TNF 11 17 TNF
12 GND2 12 19 GND2
13 5V_TNBOX 13 16 5V_TNBOX
179228-3(BLACK) 14 TNBOX 14 18 TNBOX
TNF 15 GND2 15 20 GND2
5V_TNF 3 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC) (NC) 14 reserve4-in

TNF 1 (NC) 17 (NC) 17 (NC) 23 24V1B
Fuser unit side P4
GND2 2 (NC) 18 (NC) 18 (NC) 24 /PNC
VHPGP1S73P+-18 SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC (NC) 21 GND2
1 5V_TNF 1 (NC) 22 GND2
179228-3 2 TNF 2 (NC) 25 24V1B
TNBOX 3 GND2 3 (NC) 26 reserve2out
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
(Power)
N-HL(MAIN)
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5
4 L-HL(MAIN) 4 GND2 2 6 GND2 6
3
2
1
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
6 N-HL(UW) 6 VHPGP1S73P+-18 7 /C_CARD 7
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1 8 /C_SEL 8
4
5
6
B1
B5
B6
B7
B9
2 N-HL(SUB) 2 9 /C_CLOCK 9
5 L-HL(SUB) 5 10 /C_DATA 10
3 N-HL(EXT) 3 11 5VN 11
12 GND2 12
(NC)
(NC)
(Connector) SCN-CNT PWB
GND2
GND2
GND2
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC
N-HL(UW)
B2 WEB-END
B8 TH_US_IN
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B3 TH_MY_IN(200)
B4 TH_MY_IN(100)
B-9 GND2 B-1 1 /C_CARD 1
B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 /C_SEL 2 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N PHR-7 CN3
B-7 (NC) B-3 CARD READER 3 /C_CLOCK 3 1 /C_CARD 1 1 /C_CARD
B-6 (NC) B-4 (OPTION) 4 /C_DATA 4 2 /C_SEL 2 2 /C_SEL
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 5VN 5 3 /C_CLOCK 3 3 /C_CLOCK
Main frame side B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 GND2 6 4 /C_DATA 4 4 /C_DATA
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 5 5VN 5 5 5VN
B-2 WEB-END B-8 6 GND2 6 6 GND2
B-1 GND2 B-9 (NC) 7 (NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
A-10 (NC) A-1 B7B-PH-K-S
A-9 (NC) A-2
N-HL(EXT)
N-HL(SUB)
N-HL(MAIN)
A-8 (NC) A-3 CN13
A-7 (NC) A-4 (Interlock/Driver PWB)
1
2
3
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A10
A-6 (NC) A-5 (NC) 1 GND2
A-5 (NC) A-6 PS-187 P1 2 5VN
6
5
4
B1
B3
B4
B5
B9
A-4 (NC) A-7 DSW-F ELP-02V / ELR-02V ELP-02V / ELR-02V (NC) 3 GND2
A-3 (NC) A-8 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 1 DSW_Fin 1 4 DSW_Fin
A-2 (NC) A-9 2 DSW_Rout 2 2 DSW_Rout 2 5 DSW_Rout
(NC)
(NC)
GND2
GND2
GND2
A-1 (NC) A-10 DSW_Rout 2 6 DSW_Rin
7 24V1A(Interlock)
B8 WEB-END
B2 TH_US_IN
N-HL(UW)
L-HL(SUB)
L-HL(MAIN)
B6 TH_MY_IN(100)
B7 TH_MY_IN(200)
SPS-01T-187 PS-187-2V VHR-7N B7P-VH-B(LF)(SN)
DSW-R
DSW_Rin 1
24V1A(Interlock) 2
179228-3
PPD2
PS UNIT 5VN 1 Main frame
PPD2 2
GND2 3
5 5VN 5
179228-3 6 PPD2 6
PPD1 7 GND2 7
HV RESISTOR FG 5VN 1 1 5VN 1
SRA-21T-4 PPD1 2 2 PPD1 2
PWB GND2 3 3 GND2 3 PCU PWB
(NC) 4 (NC) 4 (NC) PHDR-26VS-1
CN6 (Right door sensor)

(NC) 16 3.3V
(NC) 17 HUD_PS
(NC) 19 GND2
(NC) 18 TH_PS
Right door unit 25 5VN
26 PPD2
QR/P4-32P-C(01) / QR/P4-32S-C(02) 24 GND2
(NC) 23 (NC) 23 (NC) 2 5VN
(NC) 24 (NC) 24 (NC) 4 PPD1
(NC) 25 (NC) 25 (NC) 6 GND2
1 5VN 1 1 5VN
2 SIN3 2 11 SIN3
3 SELIN2 3 7 SELIN2
4 APPD1 4 12 APPD1
OPTION
RIGHT DOOR I/F 5 MPFD 5 8 MPFD
6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD
179228-3 PWB 17 GND2 17 15 GND2
TFD3 PHNR-06-H/BU06P-TR-P-H/PHNR-06-H PHDR-16VS-2 CN2 CN1 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1
TFD3 1 6 TFD3 1 1 TFD3 5VN 1 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3
GND2 2 5 GND2 2 2 GND2 SIN3 3 20 APPD2 20 14 APPD2
5VLED1 3 4 5VLED1 3 3 5VLED1 SELIN2 5 21 POD3 21 10 POD3
3 POD3 4 4 POD3 APPD1 7 22 5VN 22 3 5VN
2 GND2 5 5 GND2 NC(APPD3) 9 (NC) 28 /MPGS 28 20 5VN
179228-3 1 5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 MPFD 11 (NC) 16 (NC) 16 (NC) (NC) 23 GND2
POD3 7 DSW_ADU MPWD 13 12 /MPFS 12 22 PCS
POD3 1 8 GND2 NC(HUD_M) 15 (NC) 13 24V1B 13 21 PCS_LED
GND2 2 9 5VLED2 GND2 2 7 5VN 7 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VLED4 3 10 APPD1 SELIN1 4 (NC) 8 (NC) 8 (NC)
11 GND2 SELIN3 6 9 PCS 9
12 5VLED5 APPD2 8 10 PCS_LED 10
(NC) 13 NC(APPD3) POD3 10 11 RDCFM_V 11
179228-3
(NC) 14 NC(GND2) NC(FAX_D) 12 (NC) 26 GND2 26
DSW_ADU
(NC) 15 NC(5VLED3) NC(TH_M) 14 (NC) 27 RDCFM_LD 27 CN10 (Right door drive section)
DSW_ADU 1 (NC) 8 /MPGS
16 NC 5VN 16 14 /ADUGS 14
GND2 2 (NC) 6 24V1B
S16B-PHDSS-B S16B-PHDSS-B 15 24V1B 15
5VLED2 3 7 /MPFS
PHDR-16VS-2 30 /MPUC 30
31 24V1B 31 5 24V1B
32 F-GND 32 11 RDCFM_V
179228-3 (NC) 29 (NC) 29 (NC) 15 GND2
APPD1 PHNR-03-H/BU03P-TR-P-H/PHNR-03-H 13 RDCFM_LD
APPD1 1 3 APPD1 1 3 /ADUGS
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 FG FG 1 24V1B
5VLED5 3 1 5VLED5 3 4 /MPUC
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 2 24V1B
18 24V1B
C. Right door unit section, PS unit section (P3)
P1
17 /WHPR
(NC) 16 GND2
(NC) 14 GND2
(NC) 12 GND2
PHDR-32VS-1 (NC) 10 24V1B
CN3 (NC) 9 GND2
(NC) 1 NC(FAX_D) PHDR-18VS-2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3 (NC) 2 NC(GND2)
APPD2 (NC) 3 NC(5VLED6)
APPD2 1 4 APPD2
GND2 2 5 GND2
5VLED10 3 6 5VLED10 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 11 NC(GND2) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 13 NC(PSD) 2 /MPUC 2
MPUC
(NC) 28 NC(5VN)
(NC) 29 NC(HUD_M)
(NC) 30 NC(GND2) SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
(NC) 31 NC(TH_M) 1 24V1B 1
(NC) 32 NC 2 /ADUGS 2
ADUGS
(NC) 15 NC(5VLED8)
16 MPLD
(NC) 17 NC(GND2)
18 5VLED12
19 5VN SMR-07V-N/SMP-07V-NC SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
20 MPWD 1 RDCFM_LD 1 3 RDCFM_LD 3
Manual feed tray unit (NC) 21 NC(GND2) PHDR-32VS-1 2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 RDCFM
22 MTOP2 CN3 3 RDCFM_V 3 1 RDCFM_V 1
(NC) 23 NC(GND2) MPED 7 4 PCS_LED 4
24 5VLED13 GND2 8 5 PCS 5

179228-3
25 MTOP1 5VLED7 9 6 5VN 6
MPLD (NC) 26 NC(GND2) 5VLED11 12 7 F-GND 7
MPLD 1 PHNR-09-H/BU09P-TR-P-H/PHNR-09-H 27 5VLED9 MPFD 10 SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N PHR-3 PCS
GND2 2 (NC) 1 (NC) 9 (NC) 14 GND2 S32B-PHDSS-B 3 PCS_LED 3 3 PCS_LED
5VLED12 3 (NC) 2 (NC) 8 (NC) S32B-PHDSS-B FG FG 2 PCS 2 2 PCS
(NC) 3 (NC) 7 (NC) SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
4 MPLD 6
PHNR-03-H 5 GND2 5
MPWD 6 5VLED12 4 PHNR-14-H/BU14P-TR-P-H/PHNR-14-H
5VN 3 7 5VN 3 (NC) 1 (NC) 14 (NC)
HV RESISTOR
MPWD 2 8 MPWD 2 (NC) 2 (NC) 13 (NC) PWB
GND2 1 9 GND2 1 3 MPLD 12 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
4 5VLED12 11 1 24V1B 1
5 5VN 10 2 /MPFS 2
MPFS
6 MPWD 9
7 MTOP2 8
PHNR-08-H/BU08P-TR-P-H/PHNR-08-H
8 5VLED13 7
8 24V1B 1 179228-3
9 MTOP1 6
7 /MPFS 2 MPED
179228-3 10 5VLED9 5
MTOP2 (NC) (NC)
6 MPED 3 1 MPED
11 (NC) 4
(NC) (NC)
5 GND2 4 2 GND2
MTOP2 1 12 (NC) 3
4 5VLED7 5 3 5VLED7
GND2 2 13 GND2 2
(NC) (NC)
3 5VLED11 6
5VLED13 3 14 (NC) 1
2 /MPGS 7
1 MPFD 8 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC
1 24V1B 1
179228-3 MPGS
2 /MPGS 2
MTOP1
MTOP1 1
GND2 2
5VLED9 3 PHNR-05-H/BU05P-TR-P-H/PHNR-05-H
5 24V1B 1 179228-3
4 /MPGS 2 MPFD
3 MPFD 3 1 MPFD
(NC)
2 GND2 4 2 GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1
3
5
2
4
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
1
2
3
4
5
6
GND2
GND2
GND2
24V1B
24V1B
24V1B
1
3
5
2
4
6
DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DP-SP1(05) DF11-6DS-2C
+
DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
CS1 PAPER FEED UNIT
179228-3
CLUD1 PHNR-14-H / BU14P-TR-P-H / PHNR-14-H
GND2 3 14 GND2 1
CLUD1 2 13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 12 5VN 3
11 GND2 4
10 CPED1 5
9 5VN 6
179228-3 8 GND2 7
CPED1 7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3 6 5VN 9
CPED1 2 5 GND2 10
5VN 1 4 DSW_C 11
3 5VN 12
2 /CPFC2 13
1 24V1B 14 Main frame
179228-3
CPFD1
GND2 3 179228-3 PCU PWB
CPFD1 2 CSPD1
5VN 1 GND2 3
CSPD1 2 DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-24DES-2.5RC PHDR-30VS-1 CN5 (Paper feed section sensor)
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
179228-3 5 CPFD1 5 3 CPFD1
DSW_C 179228-3 20 CPFD2 20 4 CPFD2
GND2 3 CSPD2 3 CLUD1 3 5 CLUD1
DSW_C 2 GND2 3 18 CLUD2 18 6 CLUD2
5VN 1 CSPD2 2 4 CPED1 4 7 CPED1
5VN 1 19 CPED2 19 8 CPED2
8 CSPD1 8 9 CSPD1
17 CSPD2 17 10 CSPD2
PHR-6
D. Paper feed unit section (P4)
6 DSW_C 6 11 DSW_C
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC CSS1 7 /CPFC2 7 (NC) 12 GND2
1 /CPFC2 1 (NC) 1 (NC) 21 24V1B 21 (NC) 13 CSS1
CPFC2 2 24V1B 2 GND2 2 (NC) 22 (NC) 22 (NC) (NC) 14 CSS2
CSS11 3 9 CSS11 9 15 CSS11
CSS12 4 13 CSS21 13 16 CSS21
CSS13 5 10 CSS12 10 17 CSS12
CSS14 6 14 CSS22 14 18 CSS22
11 CSS13 11 19 CSS13
15 CSS23 15 20 CSS23
PHR-6 12 CSS14 12 21 CSS14
CSS2 16 CSS24 16 22 CSS24
(NC) 1 (NC) 23 5VN 23 23 5VN
GND2 2 24 GND2 24 24 GND2
CSS21 3 (NC) 25 GND2
CSS22 4 (NC) 26 GND2
CS2 PAPER FEED UNIT CSS23 5 (NC) 27 5VN reserve2-in
CSS24 6 (NC) 28 reserve2-in
(NC) 29 GND2
(NC) 30 GND2
B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
179228-3
CLUD2 PHNR-09-H / BU09P-TR-P-H / PHNR-09-H
GND2 3 9 GND2 1
CLUD2 2 8 CLUD2 2
5VN 1 7 5VN 3
6 GND2 4
5 CPED2 5
4 5VN 6
179228-3 3 GND2 7
CPED2 2 CPFD2 8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CPED2 2
5VN 1
(NC)
(NC)
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHR-7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
CPFM
179228-3 INT24V1 1
CPFD2 GND2 2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2 3 FG-OUT 3 (NC)
CPFD2 2 /CPFM_D 5
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
5VN 1 CW/CCW 7 (NC)
/CPFM_CK 4
DF11-8DS-2C DF11-8DS-2C SSJC6-4 CPFM_LD 6
+DF11-8DP-SP1 +DF11-8DP-SP1
CN9 (Paper feed drive section)

14 /CPFC2
13 24V1B
SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC 1 INT24V1
1 GND2 1 2 GND2
2 5VN 2 SLR-06VF / SLP-06V 4 /CPFM_D
3 CRUM_CLK 3 1 INT24V2 1 6 CPFM_CK
SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N 4 CRUM_DATA 4 2 GND1 2 7 CPFM_LD
1 LSUCFM_V 1 1 LSUCFM_V 1 5 LSUCFM_V 5 4 LSUCFM_V 4 9 LSUCFM_V
4 LSUCFM_LD 4 2 LSUCFM_LD 2 6 LSUCFM_LD 6 3 LSUCFM_LD 3 8 LSUCFM_LD
LSUCFM 2 /LSUCFM_CNT 2 3 /LSUCFM_CNT 3 7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7 6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6 10 /LSUCFM_CNT
3 GND2 3 4 GND2 4 8 GND2 8 5 GND2 5 11 GND2
5 24V1B 5 9 24V1B 9 (NC) 3 GND2
P2
6 /PNC 6 10 /PNC 10 (NC) 5 5VN
292254-2 / 179228-2 (NC) 12 GND2
2 24V1B 1 15 24V1B
1 /PNC 2 16 /CPFC1
17 24V1B
18 /CPUC1
OPTION 19 24V1B
179228-2 20 /CPUC2
PNC PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H 21 CLUM1
24V1B 1 1 24V1B 2 22 CLUM2
/PNC 2
CPFC1 2 /CPFC1 1 23 GND2
24 GND2
When OPTION setting PHDR-24VS-2 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC
1 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1
CPUC1 2 /CPUC1 1 2 /CPUC1 2
3 24V1B 3
4 /CPUC2 4
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H
1 24V1B 2
CPUC2 2 /CPUC2 1
PHR-2
CLUM1
/CLUM1 2
GND2 1
PHR-2
CLUM2
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
Main drive unit Main frame
DV UNIT
PCU PWB
CN2 (TM)
(NC) 1 (nc)
(NC) 2 /TMA
(NC) 3 /TMXA
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC (NC) 4 /TMB
2 24V1B 2 (NC) 5 /TMXB
TDSC 1 /TDSC 1 (NC) 6 24V1B_TM
5 5 (NC) 7 (nc)
1 1 B7B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7
4 4 CN3
8 8 (DV section/high voltage section)
SMP-10V-NC / SMR-10V-N 1 (nc)
51021-0400 1 24V1B 1 2 (nc)
TCS QR/P8-8P-C(01)/QR/P8-8S-C(02) 2 /TDSC 2 3 24V1B
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 4 /TDSC
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 5 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 6 GND2
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 7 TSGout
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 8 GND2
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 9 TCS
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 10 24V1B
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 (NC) 11 5VN
12 DVCH1
(NC) 13 GND2
14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
(NC) 18 reserve1-in
(NC) 19 /DVBSREM
20 /HV_CLK
(NC) 21 /DHVREM
22 /HV_DATA
23 /HV_REM#
24 /HV_LD
(NC) 25 GND2
HV PWB 26 MHV-T
PF-187U(RED) RD CN1 PHDR-26VS-1
MHV MHV /HV_CLK# 4
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187 /HV_DATA# 3
HV_REM# 7
/HV_LD# 5
VHR-2N-Y YL MHV-T 6
GB 1 GB GND2 2
P1
(NC) 2 (NC) INT24V2 1
SRA-21T-3
B2P-VH-Y B07B-PASK
PAP-07V-S
GR
DVBS 1 DVBS
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-M B2P-VH-M
PF-187U(WHITE) WH
THV THV
SRA-21T-3 Faston tab #187
BL
DHV 1 DHV
(NC) 2 (NC)
SRA-21T-3
VHR-2N-BL B2P-VH-BL

MOTOR DRIVER
E. DV unit section, High voltage unit section, Stepping motor section (P5)
PWB PNDP-26V-Z PHDR-34VS-1

CN17 (Driver PWB)
PHR-6 PAP-06V-S (NC) 1 GND2
PFM CN1 CN4 (NC) 2 GND2
PFM24V 2 1 PFM24V ADUMHB 14 3 ADUMHB
PFM24V 5 2 PFM24V ADUMHA 25 4 ADUMHA
PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/ ADUMHXB 16 5 ADUMHXB
PFMB// 6 4 PFMB// ADUMHXA 23 6 ADUMHXA
PFMA// 4 5 PFMA// POMCNT 11 7 POMCNT
PFMA/ 1 6 PFMA/ ADUMHCNT 21 8 ADUMHCNT
B06B-PASK-1 POMB 17 9 POMB
POMA 15 10 POMA
POMXB 19 11 POMXB
POMXA 13 12 POMXA
PHR-6 ADUMLB 26 13 ADUMLB
ADUML PAP-13V-S CN3 ADUMLA 22 14 ADUMLA
ADUML24V 2 1 ADUML24V ADUMLXB 24 15 ADUMLXB
ADUML24V 5 2 ADUML24V ADUMLXA 20 16 ADUMLXA
ADUMLB/ 3 3 ADUMLB/ RRMCNT 1 17 RRMCNT
ADUMLB// 6 4 ADUMLB// ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
ADUMLA// 4 5 ADUMLA// RRMB 7 19 RRMB
ADUMLA/ 1 6 ADUMLA/ RRMA 5 20 RRMA
B13B-PASK-1 RRMXB 9 21 RRMXB
RRMXA 3 22 RRMXA
PFMB 10 23 PFMB
PHR-6-R PFMA 8 24 PFMA
RRM PAP-12V-S CN2 PFMXB 12 25 PFMXB
RRM24V 2 7 RRM24V PFMXA 6 26 PFMXA
RRM24V 5 8 RRM24V GND2 2 (NC) (NC) 27 PFM2CNT
RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/ PFMCNT 4 28 PFMCNT
RRMB// 6 10 RRMB// B26B-PNDZS-1 (NC) 29 PFM2B
RRMA// 4 11 RRMA// (NC) 30 PFM2A
RRMA/ 1 12 RRMA/ (NC) 31 PFM2XB
B12B-PASK-1 (NC) 32 PFM2XA
(NC) 33 (nc)
(NC) 34 (nc)
Paper delivery unit Main frame
PCU PWB
PHR-6-R PHDR-18VS-2
FUM SMR-12V-N / SMP-12V-NC CN12 (HL section drive)
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2 2 3 GND2
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC) (NC) 6 (NC) 6 (NC) (NC) 5 5VN
7 POMA// 7 (NC) 13 GND2
PHR-6 8 POM24V 8 (NC) 15 GND2
POM 9 POMB// 9 MOTOR DRIVER PWB (NC) 17 24V1B
POMA// 1 10 POMA/ 10 PAP-12V-S CN2 B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
POM24V 2 11 POM24V 11 5 POMA//
POMB// 3 12 POMB/ 12 1 POM24V
POMA/ 4 4 POMB//
POM24V 5 6 POMA/
POMB/ 6 2 POM24V
3 POMB/
B12B-PASK-1
FG FG
PAP-13V-S CN3
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 11 ADUMHA//
12 ADUMHA/
9 ADUMHB/
10 ADUMHB//
7 ADUMH24V
8 ADUMH24V
(NC) 13 NC
B13B-PASK-1
PHR-7
DM (Drum motor)
F. Paper delivery unit section (P6)
FGOUT 3 (NC) PHDR-20VS-2

CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14 (Paper exit/Process drive 1)
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
PHR-6 GND2 2 2 GND2
ADUMH /DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
ADUMHA// 1 DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
ADUMHA/ 4 DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
ADUMHB/ 6 RMOTP0929FCPZ (NC) 3 GND2
ADUMHB// 3 (NC) 7 5VN
ADUMH24V 2 (NC) 8 GND2
ADUMH24V 5 SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC (NC) 9 /reserve1out
2 24V1B 2 17 24V1B
PSPS 1 /PSPS 1 18 /PSPS
(NC) 10 5VN
DF1B-26DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-26DES-2.5RC (NC) 11 GND2
21 ADUMHA// 21 12 24V1B_OSM
22 ADUMHA/ 22 15 /OSMXB
23 ADUMHB/ 23 16 /OSMXA
24 ADUMHB// 24 13 /OSMB
25 ADUMH24V 25 14 /OSMA
SMR-06V-N / SMP-06V-NC 26 ADUMH24V 26 19 WEBMAout
5 24V1B_OSM 5 1 24V1B_OSM 1 20 WEBMBout
1 /OSMXB 1 2 /OSMXB 2 B20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
OSM 2 /OSMXA 2 3 /OSMXA 3
3 /OSMB 3 4 /OSMB 4
4 /OSMA 4 5 /OSMA 5 PHDR-30VS-1 CN15 Paper exit (sensor/fan)
6 POFM1_V 6 23 POFM1_V
SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC 7 /POFM1_CNT 7 25 /POFM1_CNT
4 POFM1_LD 4 8 POFM1_LD 8 27 POFM1_LD
3 GND2 3 9 POFM2_LD 9 28 POFM2_LD
POFM 1 2 /POFM1_CNT 2 (NC) 10 (NC) 10 (NC) (NC) 2 GND2
1 POFM1_V 1 11 GND2 11 29 GND2
12 5VN 12 7 5VN
SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC 13 TFD2 13 3 TFD2
4 POFM2_LD 4 14 POD2 14 4 POD2
3 GND2 3 15 HPOS 15 5 HPOS
POFM 2 2 /POFM1_CNT 2 16 POD1 16 6 POD1
1 POFM1_V 1 17 GND2 17 1 GND2
18 WEBMAout 18 (NC) 8 5VN
19 WEBMBout 19 (NC) 9 GND2
PHR-3 (NC) 20 (NC) 20 (NC) (NC) 11 DL
TFD2 SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N (NC) 13 reserve3-in
5VN 3 3 GND2 3 18 GND2

TFD2 2 POFM 3 2 POFM3_LD 2 20 POFM3_LD
GND2 1 1 POFM3_V 1 22 POFM3_V
(NC) 24 POFM2_V
(NC) 26 /POFM2_CNT
179228-3 SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N (NC) 30 GND2
POD2 1 OZFM_V 1 21 OZFM_V
5VN 1 2 /OZFM_CNT 2 19 /OZFM_CNT
OZFM 3 GND2 3 17 GND2
POD2 2
GND2 3 4 OZFM_LD 4 15 OZFM_LD
16 GND2
10 5VN
179228-3 12 CRUM_CLK
HPOS 14 CRUM_DATA
5VN 1 B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
HPOS 2
GND2 3
TSHR-04V-K
179228-3 CRUM SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC
POD1 GND2 4 1 GND2 1
5VN 1 5VN 3 2 5VN 2
POD1 2 CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3
GND2 3 CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4
5 LSUCFM_V 5
6 LSUCFM_LD 6
P4
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7
(NC)
P4
8 GND2 8
2
1
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
9 24V1B 9
P2
10 /PNC 10
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
DF11-4DS-2C
+ SSJC6-4 SSJC6-6
DF11-4DP-SP1(05)
SLP-02V / SLR-02VF
1 WEB_M1out 1
WEBM 2 WEB_M2out 2
LSU PWB MOTHER PWB PCU PWB
PHDR-26VS-1 PHDR-30VS-1
CN2 CN2 CN3 CN1 (MOTHER)
GND2 1 GR GR 3 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
+3.3V 3 OR OR 1 +3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND1 2 GR GR 4 GND1 5VLD 3 3 5VLD
+24V3 4 RD RD 2 +24V3 5VLD 4 4 5VLD
+5VN 5 BL BL 5 +5VN GND2 5 5 GND2
GND2 6 GR GR 6 GND2 GND2 6 (NC) (NC) 6 (nc)
S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) XAP-06V-1 RXD_PCU 7 7 PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR 8 8 PCU_DSR
TXD_PCU 9 9 PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR 10 10 PCU_DTR
GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 12 GND2
nPOF 13 13 /POF
nPCU_TRG 14 14 nPCU_TRG
nFAX_LED 15 15 /FAX_LED
PCU_RES 16 16 PCU_RES
2BEAM LD PWB PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 17 17 GND2
CN1 PHDR-20VS-2 CN5 JOBEND_INT 19 19 JOBEND_INT
+5VLD 2 BL BL 23 +5V_LD RSV_DAT 21 21 RSV_DAT
GND2 1 GY GY 24 GND2 CN3 PHDR-16VS-2 PHDR-24VS-2 GND2 23 23 GND2
GND2 3 GY GY 18 GND2 +5V_LD 1 22 +5V_LD TRANS_DAT 22 25 TRANS_DAT
nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1 GND2 2 GR GR 11 GND2 LSU_RST 18 26 LSU_RST
GND2 12 GY GY 1 GND2 nSCK_LSU 4 BR BR 12 nSCK_LSU TRANS_RST 24 27 TRANS_RST
nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2 GND2 3 GR GR 10 GND2 SCK 20 28 SCK
DT1- 14 WH WH 14 DT_K1- nTRANS_DAT 5 BR BR 9 nTRANS_DAT GND2 25 29 GND2
DT1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT_K1+ nRSV_DAT 6 PK BR 14 nRSV_DAT GND2 26 30 GND2
GND2 20 SD SD 12 GND2 JOBEND_INT 8 BR PK 13 JOBEND_INT B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 18 GND2
GND2 6 SD SD 2 GND2 LSUASIC_RST 7 8 LSUASIC_RST 20 HUD_DV
DT2- 8 WH WH 8 DT_K2- nTRANS_RST 9 7 nTRANS_RST 22 TH_DV
DT2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT_K2+ VSYNC_K_N 11 BR BR 18 LSU_VSYNC_K_N 24 +3.3V
nLDERR 11 BR BR 11 nLDERR_K VSYNC_K_P 12 PK PK 17 LSU_VSYNC_K_P B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
VREF_K1 9 BR BR 9 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K2_P 13 (NC) (NC) 16 (nc)
VREF_K2 7 BR BR 7 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K2_N 14 (NC) (NC) 20 (nc)
nENB_K 5 BR BR 5 nENB_K GND2 16 19 GND2
LDCHK2 17 BR BR 6 LD_CHK_2 nPCU_TRG 10 15 nPCU_TRG
LDCHK1 18 BR BR 3 LD_CHK_1 GND2 15 (NC) (NC) 21 GND2
LDCHK3 19 BR BR 17 LD_CHK_3 S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) (NC) 23 GND2
GND2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 nLDERR_K2 (NC) 24 GND2
S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B24B-PHDSS-B
BD PWB PHR-4
CN1
GND2 4 GR GR 21 GND2
BD 3 BR BR 19 nBD
GND2 2 GR GR 22 GND2
+5VN 1 BL BL 20 +5VN
G. LSU section, Temperature/humidity sensor section (P7)
S4B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CN4 PHDR-22VS-2 PHDR-22VS-2 CN4
CH0_N 1 WH WH 21 LSU_CH0_N
CH0_P 2 PK PK 22 LSU_CH0_P
N-model GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2
POLYGON MOTOR (1200dpi) GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2
CN1 PAP-05V-S PHR-5 CN1 CH1_N 5 WH WH 17 LSU_CH1_N
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK CH1_P 6 PK PK 18 LSU_CH1_P
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK CH2_N 7 WH WH 15 LSU_CH2_N
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CH2_P 8 PK PK 16 LSU_CH2_P
GND1 4 4 GND1 GND2 9 SD SD 14 GND2
+24V3 5 5 +24V3 GND2 10 SD SD 13 GND2
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P

or CH3_N 13 WH WH 9 LSU_CH3_N
U-model/F-model CH3_P 14 PK PK 10 LSU_CH3_P
POLYGON MOTOR (600dpi) GND2 15 SD SD 8 GND2
CN1 PHR-6 PHR-6 CN1 GND2 16 7 GND2
nPOLY_CK 2 1 nPOLY_CK ECLK_LSU_N 17 WH WH 5 LSU_ECLK_N
nPOLY_LOCK 3 2 nPOLY_LOCK ECLK_LSU_P 18 PK PK 6 LSU_ECLK_P
nPOLY_START 4 3 nPOLY_START GND2 19 SD SD 4 GND2
GND1 5 4 GND1 GND2 20 SD SD 3 GND2
+24V3 6 5 +24V3 HSYNC_LSU_P 21 PK PK 2 LSU_HSYNC_P
nBRAKE 1 6 nBRAKE HSYNC_LSU_N 22 WH WH 1 LSU_HSYNC_N
B6B-PH-SM4-TB B6B-PH-K-S S22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B22B-PHDSS-B
PHR-4
TH&HUD SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
GND2 3 1 GND2 1
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4
RDTCH0214FCPZ
SRA-01T-3.2
US N model: STANDARD
Other than US N model: USB CONVERSION KEY PWB
OPTION 1
2 PWB FG
3 SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4
4 MOTHER PWB
5 USB PWB PHDR-10VS-2
6 CN CN GHR-10V-S CN16 CN13 QR/P4-8S-C(01) / QR/P4-8P-C(01) SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N
7 1 VBUS2 VBUS2 5 10 VBUS2 PWR_CPUFAN 1 7 PWR_CPUFAN 7 1 PWR_CPUFAN 1
8 2 D2- D2- 4 9 D2- PWM_CPUFAN 3 6 PWM_CPUFAN 6 2 PWM_CPUFAN 2
9 3 D2+ D2+ 3 8 D2+ GND1 5 3 GND1 3 3 GND1 3
CPUFM
10 4 GND2 GND2 2 7 GND2 LOCK_CPUFAN 7 2 LOCK_CPUFAN 2 4 LOCK_CPUFAN 4
11 5 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 1 6 SHIELD2 +24V3 9 (NC) 1 +12V 1
12 BM05B-GHS-TBT 5 VBUS3 PWR_HDDFAN 2 (NC) 5 GND2 5
TO KEYBOARD 13 4 D3- PWM_HDDFAN 4 (NC) 4 +5V_HDD 4
14 TO USB I/F 3 D3+ GND1 6 8 GND2 8
15 2 GND2 LOCK_HDDFAN 8
16 1 SHIELD3 +24V3 10 (NC)
17 BM10B-GHS-TBT B10B-PHDSS-B
18 CN12 VHR-4N HDD(SATA)
19 +12V 1
20 GND2 3 SATA POWER
21 CN PAP-06V-S / PALR-06VF PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S +5V_HDD 2 15 +12V
22 VBUS3 BLUE 1 VBUS3 1 1 VBUS3 1 GND2 4 14 +12V
23 D3- BROWN 2 D3- 2 2 D3- 2 B4P-VH 13 +12V
24 D3+ LIGHTBLUE 3 D3+ 3 3 D3+ 3 12 GND2
25 GND2 GRAY 4 GND2 4 4 GND2 4 11 GND2
26 SHIELD3 GRAY 5 SHIELD3 5 5 SHIELD3 5 CN1 CN18 MFPC PWB 10 GND2
27 Soldering 6 FG 6 LCD_DATA0- 1 1 LCD_DATA0- 9 +5V_HDD
28 LCD_DATA0+ 2 2 LCD_DATA0+ 8 +5V_HDD
LCD_DATA1- 3 3 LCD_DATA1-
FG FG LCD_DATA1+ 4 4 LCD_DATA1+ 7 +5V_HDD
LCD_DATA2- 5 5 LCD_DATA2- 6 GND2
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 LCD_DATA2+ 6 6 LCD_DATA2+ 5 GND2
LCD_CLK 7 7 LCD_CLK 4 GND2
LCD_CLK+ 8 8 LCD_CLK+ (NC) 3 +3.3V
LCD_DATA3- 9 9 LCD_DATA3-
LCD_DATA3+ 10 10
(NC) 2 +3.3V
LCD_DATA3+
nLCD_DISP 11 11 nLCD_DISP SATA 22pin (NC) 1 +3.3V
LCD_REFCLKIN 12 12 LCD_REFCLKIN
SCANDATA3+ 13 13 SCANDATA3+ CN15 SATA SIGNAL
SCANDATA3- 14 14 SCANDATA3- GND2 1 1 GND2
USB HUB PWB SCANCLKOUT+ 15 15 SCANCLKOUT+
16 SCANCLKOUT-
SATA0_TX_P 2 2 SATA_TXP
SCANCLKOUT- 16
CN3 SCANDATA2+ 17 17 SCANDATA2+ SATA0_TX_N 3 3 SATA_TXN
VBUS2 10 SCANDATA2- 18 18 SCANDATA2- GND2 4 4 GND2
D1- 9 SCANDATA1+ 19 19 SCANDATA1+ SATA0_RX_N 5 5 SATA_RXN
D1+ 8 SCANDATA1- 20 20 SCANDATA1- SATA0_RX_P 6 6 SATA_RXP
SCANDATA0+ 21 21 SCANDATA0+
GND2 7 GND2 7 7 GND2
SCANDATA0- 22 22 SCANDATA0-
SHIELD1 6 CH0_N 23 23 CH0_N 6SAT07P-328B-B5
VBUS3 5 CH0_P 24 24 CH0_P SATA 7pin
D2- 4 CH1_N 25 25 CH1_N
D2+ 3 CH1_P 26 26 CH1_P
CH2_N 27 27 CH2_N POWER
GND2 2 28 CH2_P
CN3
CH2_P 28
SHIELD2 1 CLK_N 29 29 CLK_N +5V 1 (NC) 1 +12V
BM10B-GHS-TBT CLK_P 30 30 CLK_P D- 2 USB2.0 (NC) 2 GND2
CN4 GHR-04V-S PHR-11 CN17 CH3_N 31 31 CH3_N D+ 3 (NC) 3 GND2
VBUS 4 1 VBUS CH3_P 32 32 CH3_P GND2 4 (TYPE-A) (NC) 4 +5V
GND2 1 2 GND2 (NC) 33 33 (NC) UAR27-4K5J00
(NC) 34 34 (NC)
H. FAX section, MFP section, HDD section (P8)
RE_D+ 2 6 RE_D+ ECLK_LSU_N 35 35 ECLK_LSU_N

RE_D- 3 7 RE_D- ECLK_LSU_P 36 36 ECLK_LSU_P
BM04B-GHS-TBT 3 FP_D+ HSYNC_LSU_P 37 37 HSYNC_LSU_P CN2
CN5 CN2 GHR-05V-S 4 FP_D- HSYNC_LSU_N 38 38 HSYNC_LSU_N +5V 1
(NC) 6 VBUS VBUS 5 (NC) 5 GND2 VSYNC_K_N 39 39 VSYNC_K_N D- 2 USB2.0
VSYNC_K_P 40 40 VSYNC_K_P U model: option
(NC) 5 D- FP_D+ 3 8 GND2 D+ 3
(NC) 41 41 (NC)
(NC) 4 D+ FP_D- 4 9 GND2 (NC) 42 42 (NC) GND2 4 (TYPE-B)
(NC) 3 GND2 GND2 2 10 +5VL (NC) 43 43 (NC) UBR23-4K2200
(NC) 2 SHIELD GND2 1 11 +5VL (NC) 44 44 (NC)
(NC) 1 SHIELD BM05B-GHS-TBT B11B-PH-K-S (NC) 45 45 (NC)
(NC) 46 46 (NC)
BM06B-GHS-TBT CN1 PHR-3 LCDSEL0 47 47 LCDSEL0
CN4
GND2 3 (NC) 48 48 (NC) TRP1+ 1
+5VL 2 5V_IN 49 49 5V_IN TRP1- 2
+5VL 1 5V_IN 50 50 5V_IN TRP2+ 3
B3B-PH-SM4-TB 5V_IN 51 51 5V_IN TRP3+ 4
5V_IN 52 52 5V_IN LAN
53 5V_IN
TRP3- 5
5V_IN 53
5V_IN 54 54 5V_IN TRP2- 6
5V_IN 55 55 5V_IN TRP4+ 7
5V_IN 56 56 5V_IN TRP4- 8
5V_IN 57 57 5V_IN SI-51005-F
5V_IN 58 58 5V_IN
TEL LIU PWB FAX PWB (NC) 59 59 (NC)
(NC) 60 60 (NC)
MJ1 PHDR-32VS-1 PNL_USB_DN 61 61 PNL_USB_DN CN1
(JAPAN) CN2 CN7 CN1 CN15 PNL_USB_DP 62 62 PNL_USB_DP (NC) 1
1 - +24V 1 1 +24V GND1 1 1 GND1 USB_VBUS 11 63 63 USB_VBUS 11 RXD 2
2 AGND 2 2 AGND GND2 2 2 GND2 MT_USB_RTN_P 64 64 MT_USB_RTN_P TXD 3
- MT_USB_RTN_N 65 65 MT_USB_RTN_N
3 L1 +24V 3 3 +24V +3.3V 3 3 +3.3V GPO_PIC12VON 66 66 GPO_PIC12VON DTR 4
4 L2 AGND 4 4 AGND +3.3V 4 4 +3.3V RXD_SCN 67 67 RXD_SCN GND2 5 RS232C
nCTS_SCN 68 68 nCTS_SCN

5 - 150VON 5 5 150VON +24V3 6 5 +24V3 DSR 6
6 - CION 6 6 CION nFAXCS_CTS 5 6 nFAXCS_CTS TXD_SCN 69 69 TXD_SCN RTS 7
MJ-62J-RD315 MSGMUTE 7 7 MSGMUTE +5V_A 8 7 +5V_A nRTS_SCN 70 70 nRTS_SCN CTS 8
nRES_SCN 71 71 nRES_SCN
TO LINE HS1- 8 8 HS1- nFAXCS_RTS 7 8 nFAXCS_RTS nRES_PCU 72 72 nRES_PCU (NC) 9
BOARD TO BOARD Connector
(EX) HS2- 9 9 HS2- FLVPP 10 9 FLVPP RXD_PCU 73 73 RXD_PCU DBR30-091F100

1 - CI- 10 10 CI- nFAXD_CTS 9 10 nFAXD_CTS nCTS_PCU 74 74 nCTS_PCU
2 T2 EXHS- 11 11 EXHS- GND2 12 11 GND2 TXD_PCU 75 75 TXD_PCU
3 SON1 12 12 SON1 nFAXD_RTS 11 12 nFAXD_RTS nRTS_PCU 76 76 nRTS_PCU
R1
nPOF_MFPC 77 77 nPOF_MFPC
4 T1 SON2 13 13 SON2 GND2 14 13 GND2 nREQ_PIC 78 78 nREQ_PIC
5 R2 ECON 14 14 ECON +5V_OFF 16 14 +5V_OFF nCLR_PIC 79 79 nCLR_PIC CN6
6 - MRON 15 15 MRON FAXCS_RXD_N 13 15 FAXCS_RXD_N TXD_PIC 80 80 TXD_PIC GND2 1
MJ-64J-RD315 TELID 16 16 TELID FAXCS_RXD_P 15 16 FAXCS_RXD_P RXD_PIC 81 81 RXD_PIC GND2 2
CI2- 17 17 CI2- nFAX_WUP 18 17 nFAX_WUP PWM0 82 82 PWM0 +3.3V 3
nFAN_CNCT 83 83 nFAN_CNCT
NC 18 18 NC FAXD_RXD_P 17 18 FAXD_RXD_P nRST_PIC 84 84 nRST_PIC
+3.3V 4
MJ2 TELID2 19 19 TELID2 FAXD_RXD_N 19 19 FAXD_RXD_N RES_MFP_MT 85 85 RES_MFP_MT nCNCT_FAX 5
1 - NC 20 20 NC GND2 20 20 GND2 PWM0 86 86 PWM0 FAXD_TXD_N 6
2 - GND2 21 21 GND2 FAXCS_TXD_N 21 21 FAXCS_TXD_N nREQ_PIC_INT 87 87 nREQ_PIC_INT FAXD_TXD_P 7
3 TEL1 +3.3V 22 22 +3.3V FAXCS_TXD_P 23 22 FAXCS_TXD_P TXD_FAX1_D 88 88 TXD_FAX1_D +5VL 8
TO EX TEL RXD_FAX1_D 89 89 RXD_FAX1_D
4 TEL2 GND2 23 23 GND2 nRES_FAX 22 23 nRES_FAX nRES_FAX 9
RTS_FAX1_D 90 90 RTS_FAX1_D
5 - +5VS 24 24 +5VS +5V_OFF 24 24 +5V_OFF CTS_FAX1_D 91 91 CTS_FAX1_D FAXCS_TXD_P 10
6 - GND2 25 25 GND2 FAXD_TXD_P 25 25 FAXD_TXD_P TXD_FAX1_CS 92 92 TXD_FAX1_CS FAXCS_TXD_N 11
MJ-62J-RD315 SI3_RES- 26 26 SI3_RES- FAXD_TXD_N 27 26 FAXD_TXD_N RXD_FAX1_CS 93 93 RXD_FAX1_CS GND 12
SPK 27 27 SPK nCNCT_FAX 26 27 nCNCT_FAX RTS_FAX1_CS 94 94 RTS_FAX1_CS FAXD_RXD_N 13
CTS_FAX1_CS 95 95 CTS_FAX1_CS
MDM_ATXD 28 28 MDM_ATXD +3.3V 28 28 +3.3V FAXD_RXD_P 14
nRST_FAX1 96 96 nRST_FAX1
CN1 MDM_ARXD 29 29 MDM_ARXD +3.3V 29 29 +3.3V nCNCT_FAX1 97 97 nCNCT_FAX1 nFAX_WUP 15
1 TX+ MDM_ABITCLK 30 30 MDM_ABITCLK GND2 30 30 GND2 nFAX2_WU_OC 26 98 98 nFAX2_WU_OC 26 FAXCS_RXD_P 16 Option FAX
BOARD TO BOARD Connector

2 RX+ MDM_ASPCLK 31 31 MDM_ASPCLK BM30B-SHLDS-G-TFT (NC) 31 GND2 3R3V_ECO 99 99 3R3V_ECO FAXCS_RXD_N 17
TO HANDSET 3 RX- RGDT- 32 32 RGDT- (NC) 32 NC (NC) 100 100 (NC) +5VL 18
4 TX- MDM_CLK 33 33 MDM_CLK SHLDP-30V-S-1(B) B32B-PHDSS-B 3R3V_FAX 101 101 3R3V_FAX GND2 19
(JAPAN ONLY) 3R3V_FAX 102 102 3R3V_FAX
5 DG AFERES- 34 34 AFERES- 3R3V_FAX 103 103 3R3V_FAX nFAXD_RTS 20
6 RHS- BBITCLK 35 35 BBITCLK (NC) 104 104 (NC) GND2 21
BSPCLK 36 36 BSPCLK 5V0_FAX 105 105 5V0_FAX nFAXD_CTS 22
BRXD 37 37 BRXD USB_SEL_SW 7 106 106 USB_SEL_SW 7 FLVPP 23
BTXD 38 38 BTXD (NC) 107 107 (NC) nFAXCS_RTS 24
(NC) 108 108 (NC)
HDMUTE- 39 39 HDMUTE- GND2 109 109 GND2 +5V0 25
RHS- 40 40 RHS- GND2 110 110 GND2 nFAXCS_CTS 26
TX24-40R-10ST-H1 TX25-40P-8ST-H1 GND2 111 111 GND2 +24V3 27
GND2 112 112 GND2 +3.3V 28 MX-FXX2/MX-FLX2
GND2 113 113 GND2 +3.3V 29
GND2 114 114 GND2
PAP-02V-S CN2 GND2 115 115 GND2
GND2 30
1 SP- GND2 116 116 GND2 GND1 31
SPEAKER 2 SP+ GND2 117 117 GND2 B31B-CSRK
GND1 118 118 GND1
S02B-PASK-2(LF)(SN) (NC) 119 119 (NC)
Internal FAX (F model) 24V_FAX 120 120 24V_FAX
TX25-120P-LT-H1E TX24-120R-LT-H1E
PCU PWB
FINISHER
ELP-12V/ELR-12V CN11 (Coin Vendor)
TXD_FIN 1 1 TXD_INS 1 1 +24V1B
RXD_FIN 2 2 RXD_INS 2 2 GND2
/DTR_FIN 3 3 /DTR_INS 3 3 /CV_COPY
/DSR_FIN 4 4 /DSR_INS 4 4 /CV_COUNT
RES_FIN 5 5 RES_INS 5 5 /CV_START
+24V3 6 (NC) (NC) 6 NC 6 (NC) 6 /CV_CA
+5VN 7 7 +5VN 7 7 /CV_CLCOPY
GND2 8 8 GND2 8 TO COIN VENDOR 8 /CV_COLOR1
GND1 9 (NC) (NC) 9 NC 9 (NC) (OPTION) 9 /CV_STAPLE
F-GND 10 10 F-GND 10 FG 10 /CV_COLOR0
+24V5 11 11 +24V5 11 SRA-21T-4 11 /CV_DUPLEX
GND1 12 12 GND1 12 12 +5VN
13 /CV_SIZE0
14 /CV_SIZE1
15 /CV_SIZE2
DC PWB 16 /CV_SIZE3
CN8 VHR-7N PNDP-16V-Z B16B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)
4k FINISHER / SADLLE FINISHER / INNER FINISHER +24V4 6
OPTION +24V5 7
B7P-VH-B
CN7 VHR-8N
GND1 7
GND1 8
B8P-VH-B
CN4 VHR-6N
+5VN 3
+5VN 4
B6P-VH-B
DESK1 / DESK2 OPTION

CN F PHDR-12VS-2 SMR-11V-N/SMP-11V-NC
+24V4 1 1 +24V4 1
GND1 2 2 GND1 2
+5VN 3 3 +5VN 3
GND2 4 4 GND2 4 PHDR-22VS-2 CN7 (FIN/DESK/LCC)
GND2 5 5 GND2 5 4 TXD_INS
TXD_DSK 6 6 TXD_DSK 6 6 RXD_INS
DESK CONTROL RXD_DSK 7 7 RXD_DSK 7 5 /DTR_INS
PWB /DTR_DSK 8 8 /DTR_DSK 8 7 /DSR_INS
DSR_DSK 9 9 DSR_DSK 9 3 RES_INS
RES_DSK 10 10 RES_DSK 10 2 GND2
/TRC_DSK 11 11 /TRC_DSK 11 1 GND2
NC 12 (NC) 8 GND2
B12B-PHDSS-B 10 TXD_DSK
12 RXD_DSK
ELP-02V/ELR-02V ELP-03V/ELR-03V 11 /DTR_DSK
1 WH_L(DESK) 1 1 WH_L(DESK) 1 13 /DSR_DSK
I. Finisher, Desk, LCC, Coin vender section (P9)
WH 2 WH_N(DESK) 2 3 WH_N(DESK) 3 9 RES_DSK

2 F-GND 2 14 /TRC_DSK
17 TXD_LCC
FG FG 19 RXD_LCC
SRA-21T-4 16 /DTR_LCC
18 /DSR_LCC
ELP-15V/ELR-15V 15 RES_LCC
(NC) 1 NC 1 (NC) 21 GND2
(NC) 2 NC 2 (NC) 20 /TRC_LCC
3 TXD_LCC 3 (NC) 22 GND2
4 RXD_LCC 4 B22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5 /DTR_LCC 5
6 /DSR_LCC 6
7 RES_LCC 7
8 F-GND 8
9 +5VN 9
10 GND2 10
11 +24V4 11
FG 12 GND1 12
13 /TRC_LCC 13
14 NC 14
15 NC 15
CN A PHDR-12VS-2 FG
+24V4 1 SRA-21T-4
GND1 2
NC 3 (NC)

NC 4 (NC)
+5VN 5
LCC CONTROL GND2 6
TXD_LCC 7
PWB RXD_LCC 8
/DTR_LCC 9
/DSR_LCC 10
RES_LCC 11
/TRC_LCC 12
B12B-PHDSS-B
LCC OPTION
ELP-12V-/ELR-12V
(NC) 1 NC 1 (NC)
(NC) 2 NC 2 (NC)
ELP-02V/ELR-02V (NC) 3 NC 3 (NC)
1 WH_L(LCC) 1 4 WH_L(LCC) 4
WH 2 WH_N(LCC) 2 5 F-GND 5
(NC) 6 NC 6 (NC)
(NC) 7 NC 7 (NC)
(NC) 8 NC 8 (NC) FG
FG (NC) 9 NC 9 (NC) SRA-21T-4
(NC) 10 NC 10 (NC) WH PWB
(NC) 11 NC 11 (NC)
12 WH_N(LCC) 12 VHR-5N
CN4
5 WH_L(LCC)
4 WH_L(DESK)
(NC) 3 NC
2 WH_N(DESK)
1 WH_N(LCC)
B4P(5-3)-VH
CCD PWB SCN-CNT PWB EHR-3
CN1 CN10 CN4 PHR-6 OCSW
GND2 1 41 GND2 +5VN 1 1 +5VN
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 3 39 GND2 /OCSW 3 3 OCSW
RE+ 4 38 RE+ +24V3 4
RE- 5 37 RE- /SIZE_LED1 5
GND2 6 36 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 6 Soldering(LF) ORS LED PWB
RD+ 7 35 RD+ B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
RD- 8 34 RD- /SIZE_LED1
GND2 9 33 GND2 /SIZE_LED2
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ F-GND
CLK- 11 31 CLK- FG
GND2 12 30 GND2 SRA-21T-4
RC+ 13 29 RC+ CN1 PHR-4
RC- 14 28 RC- MIM_A 1
GND2 15 27 GND2 MIM_B 2 MIRROR
RB+ 16 26 RB+ MIM_XA 3
RB- 17 25 RB- MIM_XB 4
MOTOR
GND2 18 24 GND2 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
RA+ 19 23 RA+
RA- 20 22 RA- EHR-3
GND2 21 21 GND2 CN17 PHR-3 MHPS
A10V 22 20 A10V MHPS 1 3 MHPS
A10V 23 19 A10V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 24 18 GND2 +5VN 3 1 +5VN
A5V 25 17 A5V B3B-PH-K-S
A5V 26 16 A5V
A5V 27 15 A5V
GND2 28 14 GND2
A3.3V 29 13 A3.3V LED DRIVER PWB
A3.3V 30 12 A3.3V CN PHR-4 PHR-4 CN1 LED PWB 1
A3.3V 31 11 A3.3V LED1-11 1 1 LED1-11
A3.3V 32 10 A3.3V LED12-22 2 2 LED12-22
A3.3V 33 9 A3.3V LED23-33 3 3 LED23-33
A3.3V 34 8 A3.3V +24V 4 4 +24V
CN7 CN
GND2 35 7 GND2 S4B-PH-K-S B4B-PH-K-S
GND2 1 1 GND2
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD
GND2 2 2 GND2
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS
CL_ON 3 3 CL_ON
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK
POWER 4 4 POWER CN PHR-5 PHR-4 CN1 LED PWB 2
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD
+24V 5 5 +24V LED1-11 1 1 LED1-11
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05CPB7F LED12-22 2 2 LED12-22
GND2 41 1 GND2
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF LED23-33 3 3 LED23-33
+24V 4 4 +24V
(NC) 5 (NC) B4B-PH-K-S
MOTHER PWB S5B-PH-K-S
VHR-6N VHR-6N
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 PHR-6
+12V 3 2 +12V 501189-4030 ORS PD PWB 501189-2030
+5VN 4 4 +5VN 3 PDSEL2 MFP OPE PWB
J. Scanner, 8.5 inch operation system (P10)
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V CN2 2 PDSEL1 CN1

GND2 6 6 GND2 PDSEL2 20 1 PDSEL0 4 +5VO
B6P-VH B6P-VH PDSEL1 23 4 +5VN 6 GND2
PDSEL0 22 5 PD 8 WU_LED
MOTHER PWB
CN7 PHR-15 PHDR-16VS-2 CN11 +5VN 25 6 GND2 12 nINFO_LED
SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 21 10 POW_LED
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- GND2 40 2 GND2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ nBZR 34 16 nBZR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0 LCD INVERTER PWB
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1(nc)
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0 1 +CCFT
BACK LIGHT
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 2 /CCFT
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 36 501190-2017 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 18
CN5 PHDR-12VS-2 PHDR-12VS-2 CN5 GND2 19
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 16 CN4 GHR-05V-S PAP-05V-S
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 17 GND2 5 5 GND2
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN GND2 14 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 15 LVDS PWB +24V3 3 3 +24V3
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +3.3V 12 +24V3 2 2 +24V3
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0 +5VN 13 GND2 1 1 GND2
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 10 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4

GND2 10 10 GND2 XH(X1) 9 501189-4030 XH(X1) 3 TOUCH
nSPED 11 11 nSPED YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2 PANEL
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469 8.5inch LCD UN
VCONT 5 7 GND2 CN2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
PHR-13 PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
PHR-3 CN9 DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
POWER SW PWB 1 nA_PNC 501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
3 n PWRSW 2 nA_COPY 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
2 GND2 3 nA_CA 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
1 GND2 4 nA_READY 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
5 nA_AUD 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 501189-3030 6 +5VN 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10
TO AUDITER 7 GND2 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 8 +24V3 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
GND2 12 9 (NC) 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) 10 nA_TC 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) 11 +24V3 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 12 PNC-a 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
GND2 4 13 GND2 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
MFP OPE PWB
nINFO_LED 6 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
nWU_KEY 7 (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 9 SD SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 13 PK PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
LCD_DATA3- 14 WH WH 8 LCD_DATA3- B0 23 23 B0
GND2 17 SD SD 16 GND2 B1 24 24 B1
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
LCD_DATA1- 22 WH WH 26 LCD_DATA1- GND2 32 32 GND2
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
LCD_DATA0- 26 WH WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029 UD/LR 36 36 UD/LR
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
501190-3017(MOLEX) FG +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2 FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
CCD PWB SCN-CNT PWB EHR-3
CN1 CN10 CN4 PHR-6 OCSW
GND2 1 41 GND2 +5VN 1 1 +5VN
AFE_CSTG 2 40 AFE_CSTG GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 3 39 GND2 /OCSW 3 3 OCSW
RE+ 4 38 RE+ +24V3 4
RE- 5 37 RE- /SIZE_LED1 5
GND2 6 36 GND2 /SIZE_LED2 6 Soldering(LF) ORS LED PWB
RD+ 7 35 RD+ B6B-PH-SM4-TB +24V3
RD- 8 34 RD- /SIZE_LED1
GND2 9 33 GND2 /SIZE_LED2
CLK+ 10 32 CLK+ F-GND
CLK- 11 31 CLK- FG
GND2 12 30 GND2 SRA-21T-4
RC+ 13 29 RC+ CN1 PHR-4
RC- 14 28 RC- MIM_A 1
GND2 15 27 GND2 MIM_B 2 MIRROR
RB+ 16 26 RB+ MIM_XA 3
RB- 17 25 RB- MIM_XB 4
MOTOR
GND2 18 24 GND2 B4B-PH-SM4-TB
RA+ 19 23 RA+
RA- 20 22 RA-
GND2 21 21 GND2 CN17 PHR-3 EHR-3 MHPS
A10V 22 20 A10V MHPS 1 3 MHPS
A10V 23 19 A10V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 24 18 GND2 +5VN 3 1 +5VN
A5V 25 17 A5V B3B-PH-K-S
A5V 26 16 A5V
A5V 27 15 A5V
GND2 28 14 GND2
A3.3V 29 13 A3.3V
A3.3V 30 12 A3.3V
A3.3V 31 11 A3.3V
A3.3V 32 10 A3.3V
A3.3V 33 9 A3.3V
A3.3V 34 8 A3.3V
GND2 35 7 GND2 CL INVERTER PWB
/RES_CCDAD 36 6 /RES_CCDAD
AFE_CS 37 5 AFE_CS CN7 CN
AFE_SCLK 38 4 AFE_SCLK +24V3 1 1 +24V3 1 CL
AFE_WRD 39 3 AFE_WRD +24V3 2 2 +24V3 2
AFE_RDD 40 2 AFE_RDD CL 3 3 CL
MOTHER PWB GND2 41 1 GND2 GND1 4 4 GND1
FI-RE41S-VF FI-RE41S-VF GND1 5 5 GND1
5597-05CPB7F 5597-05APB
CN11 VHR-6N VHR-6N CN6

GND2 1 3 GND1 PHR-6 501189-2030
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 ORS PD PWB
+12V 3 2 +12V 3 PDSEL2 MFP OPE PWB
+5VN 4 4 +5VN CN2 2 PDSEL1 CN1
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL2 20 1 PDSEL0 4 +5VO
GND2 6 6 GND2 PDSEL1 23 4 +5VN 6 GND2
B6P-VH B6P-VH PDSEL0 22 5 PD 8 WU_LED
MOTHER PWB
+5VN 25 6 GND2 12 nINFO_LED
K. Scanner, 8.1 inch operation system (P10A)
CN7 PHR-15 PHDR-16VS-2 CN11 PD 24 14 nWU_KEY

SCANDATA0- 1 WH WH 1 SCANDATA0- GND2 21 10 POW_LED
SCANDATA0+ 2 PK PK 2 SCANDATA0+ GND2 39 1 GND2
SCANDATA1- 4 WH WH 4 SCANDATA1- +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nBZR 34 16 nBZR
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V GND2 36 501190-2017
B16B-PHDSS-B GND2 18
GND2 19
CN5 PHDR-12VS-2 PHDR-12VS-2 CN5 GND2 16
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 12
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0 +24V3 10
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 LVDS PWB
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 501189-4030
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 CN4
8.1inch LCD UN

nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 VO 1 15 VO
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 LP 2 14 LP
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2 GND2 3 13 GND2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 CP 4 12 CP
PHR-13 PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 5 11 GND2
PHR-3 CN9 DISP 1 40 GND2 +3.3V 6 10 +3.3V
POWER SW PWB 1 nA_PNC 501190-4017 25 +3.3V M 7 9 M
3 n PWRSW 2 nA_COPY 19 +3.3V D0 8 8 D0
2 GND2 3 nA_CA 23 +5VN D1 9 7 D1
1 GND2 4 nA_READY PHR-7 3 +24V3 GND2 10 6 GND2
5 nA_AUD /C_CARD 1 5 +24V3 D2 11 5 D2
CN6 501189-3030 TO AUDITER 6 +5VN /C_SEL 2 37 /YL(Y1) D3 12 4 D3
nPWR_SW 10 7 GND2 /C_CLOCK 3 P2 35 XH(X1) GND2 13 3 GND2
GND2 11 8 +24V3 /C_DATA 4 (CARD READER) 33 YH(Y2) DISP 14 2 DISP
GND2 12 9 (NC) 5VN 5 31 /XL(X2) VEE 15 1 VEE
(NC) 1 (NC) 10 nA_TC GND2 6 27 SC_TEMP 52030-2629 52030-2629
(NC) 2 (NC) 11 +24V3 (NC) 7 (NC) 21 VCONT
+5VO 3 12 PNC-a B7B-PH-K-S 17 /CCFT
GND2 4 13 GND2 15 PNL_SEL0 CN3
nWU_LED 5 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 /YL(Y1) 1
MFP OPE PWB
nINFO_LED 6 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 XH(X1) 2 TOUCH
nWU_KEY 7 (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 YH(Y2) 3 PANEL
nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP /XL(X2) 4
GND2 9 SD SD 10 GND2 52271-0469
LCD_DATA3+ 13 PK PK 6 LCD_DATA3+
LCD_DATA3- 14 WH WH 8 LCD_DATA3-
GND2 17 SD SD 16 GND2
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- PHR-3 PHR-3
LCD INVERTER PWB
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 CN4
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 +24V3 3 1 +24V3
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029 1 +CCFT
BACK LIGHT
(NC) 28 (NC) 2 /CCFT
(NC) 29 (NC) S02(8.0)B-BHS
(NC) 30 (NC)
501190-3017(MOLEX) FG
SRA-01T-3.2 SRA-01T-3.2
RSPF DRIVER PWB
CN F PHR-7 PHR-6 SPF
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD_SPM 2 5 +24VPD _SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
SCN-CNT PWB N.C. 7 (NC)
B7B-PH-K-S
CN16 PHR-14 PHDR-34VS-1 CN A CN E PHR-6 PHR-6 SPFM

GND2 1 34 GND2 SPFMA/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND2 2 33 GND2 +24VPD_SPFM 2 5 +24VPD_SPFM
+5VO 3 (NC) 8 +3.3V SPFMA 3 4 SPFMA
+3.3V 4 7 +5V SPFMB 4 3 SPFMB
+3.3V 5 (NC) 6 +24VPD +24VPD_SPFM 5 2 +24VPD_SPFM
+5V 6 (NC) 5 +24VPD SPFMB/ 6 1 SPFMB/
+5V 7 2 GND2 B6B-PH-K-S
+12V 8 (NC) 1 GND2
+12V 9 (NC) 3 SPPD1
+24V 10 4 SPPD2 179228-3
+24V 11 9 SPFMCK CN H PHR-12 PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S SPED
GND2 12 (NC) 10 SPFMM1 SPED 1 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 13 11 SPFMM2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
GND2 14 12 SPFMO1 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
B14B-PH-K-S 13 SPFMO2 +5VPD 4 4 +24VPD 4
L. RSPF unit section (P11)
14 SPMA SPPD1 5 5 +24VPD SW 5

15 SPMA/ GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
16 SPMB +5VPD 7 PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S SPPD1
17 SPMB/ SPPD2 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
18 SPMO1 GND2 9 2 SPPD1 2 2 SPPD1
19 SPRS +24VPD 10 3 GND2 3 3 GND2
CN15 PHDR-28VS-1 20 STMPS GND2 11 (NC) 4 +5VPD 4
SPPD1 1 21 SRRC +24VPD SW 12 5 SPPD2 5
SPPD2 2 22 SRVC B12B-PH-K-S 6 GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
SPFMCK 3 23 SPWS SPPD2
SPFMM1 4 24 SELA 1 +5VPD
SPFMM2 5 25 SELB 2 SPPD2
SPFMO1 6 26 SELC 3 GND2
SPFMO2 7 27 SSELO
SPMA 8 28 SPPD4
SPMA/ 9 29 SPFMRV PS-187
SPMB 10 30 SPPD3 SCOV
SPMB/ 11 31 SPPD5 1 +24VPD
SPMO1 12 32 +5VPD
SPRS 13 B34-PHDSS-B 1 +24VPD_SW
STMPS 14 SPS-01T-187
SRRC 15
SRVC 16 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
SPWS 17
SELA_ 18
SELB_ 19
SELC_ 20 CN D PHR-4 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
SSELO 21 +24VPD SRVC 1 1 +24VPD SRVC 1
SPPD4 22 SRVC/ 2 2 SRVC/ 2 SRVC
SPFMRV 23 +24VPD SPRS 3
SPPD3 24 SPRS/ 4
SPPD5 25 B04B-PH-K-S
+5VPD 26 CN I SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
SPED 27 (NC) 3 SPED 1 +24VPD SPRS 1
NC 28 (NC) 2 (NC) 2 SPRS/ 2 SPRS
B28-PHDSS-B 1 +5VO
PHR-3 B03B-PH-K-S
CN G PHR-8 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B

+24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
SRA-21T-3 SRA-21T-3 SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRC
+5VPD 3
SPPD3 4
GND2 5
SOCD 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
+5VPD SOCD 8 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
B08B-PH-K-S 2 SPPD3 2 2 SPPD3
3 GND2 3 3 GND2
4 SOCD 4
5 GND2 5
6 +5VPD SOCD 6 179228-3
SOCD

1 SOCD
2 GND2
3 +5VPD SOCD
CN B PHDR-10VS-2
+5VPD 1 (NC) SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
+5VPD 2
SPPD4 3 (NC)
SPPD5 4
GND2 5 (NC)
GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 7 SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4 SPPD5
STMPU 8 1 +5VPD
STMPS/ 9 2 SPPD5
+24VPD STMPS 10 3 GND2
B10B-PHDSS-B
179228-4 179228-4
1 GND2 4
2 STMPU 3
3 STMPS/ 2
4 +24VPD STMPS 1
STMPS
292254-4
179228-3
CN C PHR-9 SPLS1
+5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 4
SPLS2 5
+5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
AVCC 7 SPLS2
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
B09B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS

1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2
CIS PWB DSPF_CNT PWB DSPF DRIVER PWB
CN B PHR-6(RED) PHR-6 SPF
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
+24VPD _SPM 2 5 +24VPD_SPM
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
CN** PAP-06V-S PAP-06V-S CN6 CN8 PHDR-26VS-1 PHDR-26VS-1 CN-A +24VPD _SPM 5 2 +24VPD _SPM
+12V 1 1 +12V GND1 1 1 GND1 SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
GND2 2 2 GND2 GND1 2 2 GND1 B6B-PH-K-R(RED)
A7V 3 3 A7V +24VPD 3 3 +24VPD
GND2 4 4 GND2 +24VPD 4 4 +24VPD CN F PHR-6 PHR-6 SPFM
+5V 5 5 +5V +5V 5 5 +5V SPFMB/ 1 6 SPFMA/
GND2 6 6 GND2 SPFMCK 6 6 SPFMCK SPFMA/ 2 3 +24VPD_SPFM
SM06B-PASK-1 B06B-PASK-1 SPFMM1 7 7 SPFMM1 SPFMB 3 4 SPFMA
SPFMM2 8 8 SPFMM2 SPFMA 4 1 SPFMB
SPFMO1 9 9 SPFMO1 +24VPD_SPFM 5 5 +24VPD_SPFM
SPFMO2 10 10 SPFMO2 +24VPD_SPFM 6 2 SPFMB/
SPFMRV 11 11 SPFMRV B6B-PH-K-S
SPMA 12 12 SPMA
SPMA/ 13 13 SPMA/ CN D PHR-3 FAN
SPMB 14 14 SPMB +24VPD FAN 1 1 +24VPD FAN Cooling fan
SPMB/ 15 15 SPMB/ FAN_LOCK 2 2 GND2
SPMO1 16 16 SPMO1 GND2 3 3 FAN_LOCK (NFANP0107FCPZ)
STMPS 17 17 STMPS B3B-PH-K-S
SRRC 18 18 SRRC
SPFC 19 19 SPFC
SCOV 20 20 SCOV CN E PHR-5 SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
CN** 501189-3030(MOLEX) 501189-3030(MOLEX) CN4 STMPU 21 21 STMPU +24VPD SRRC 1 1 +24VPD SRRC 1
LVDSA_TA- 1 23 LVDSA_TA- +5VPD 22 22 +5VPD SRRC/ 2 2 SRRC/ 2 SRRC
GND2 2 22 GND2 FAN_ON 23 23 FAN_ON/OFF +24VPD 3
LVDSA_TA+ 3 21 LVDSA_TA+ FAN_LOCK 24 24 FAN_LOCK GND2 4 (NC)
PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S
M. DSPF unit section (P12)
GND2 4 20 GND2 GND2 25 25 GND2 +24VPD SW 5

1 SPED 1
LVDSA_TB- 5 19 LVDSA_TB- GND2 26 26 GND2 B5B-PH-K-S
2 GND2 2 PS-187
GND2 6 18 GND2 B26B-PHDSS-B B26B-PHDSS-B
3 +5V SPED 3 SCOV
LVDSA_TB+ 7 17 LVDSA_TB+
4 +24VPD 4 1 +24VPD
GND2 8 16 GND2
5 +24VPD SW 5
LVDSA_TC- 9 15 LVDSA_TC-
GND2 10 14 GND2 1 +24VPD_SW
LVDSA_TC+ 11 13 LVDSA_TC+ CN C PHR-7 SPS-01T-187
GND2 12 12 GND2 +24VPD SPFC 1 (NC)
LVDSA_CLK- 13 11 LVDSA_CLK- SPFC/ 2 (NC)
GND2 14 10 GND2 N.C 3 (NC)
LVDSA_CLK+ 15 9 LVDSA_CLK+ GND2 4
GND2 16 8 GND2 STMPU 5
LVDSA_TD- 17 7 LVDSA_TD- STMPS/ 6 SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N 179228-4 179228-4
GND2 18 6 GND2 +24VPD STMPS 7 1 GND2 1 1 GND2 4
LVDSA_TD+ 19 5 LVDSA_TD+ B7B-PH-K-S 2 STMPU 2 2 STMPU 3
GND2 20 4 GND2 3 STMPS/ 3 3 STMPS/ 2
LVDSA_TE- 21 3 LVDSA_TE- 4 +24VPD STMPS 4 4 +24VPD STMPS 1 STMPS
GND2 22 2 GND2 292254-4
LVDSA_TE+ 23 1 LVDSA_TE+
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
GND2 24 24 GND2
GND2 25 25 GND2
TRIG 26 26 TRIG
SPI_CS 27 27 SPI_CS 179228-3(BLACK)
SPI_SI 28 28 SPI_SI PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S SPPD1
SPI_SCK 29 29 SPI_SCK 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
SPI_SO 30 30 SPI_SO 4 +5VPD 4 2 SPPD1
501571-3007 501190-3017 2 SPPD1 2 3 GND2
5 SPPD2 5
3 GND2 3
6 GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
SPPD2
CN9 PHDR-16VS-2 1 +5VPD
+5V 1 2 SPPD2
+5V 2 3 GND2
SPPD1 3
SPPD2 4
SCN_CNT PWB GND2 5 179228-3(BLACK)
GND2 6 SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SPPD3
GND2 8 5 GND2 5 2 SPPD3
CN16 PHR-14 PHR-14 CN5 SPPD3 9 2 SPPD3 2 1 +5VPD
GND2 1 1 GND2 SOCD 10 4 SOCD 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 +5V 11 1 +5VPD 1
+5VO 3 3 +5VO +5V 12 6 +5V_SOCD 6 179228-3
+3.3V 4 4 +3.3V +5V 13 SOCD
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V SPED 14 1 SOCD
+5V 6 6 +5V GND2 15 2 GND2
+5V 7 7 +5V N.C 16 3 +5VPD SOCD
+12V 8 8 +12V B16B-PHDSS-B
+12V 9 9 +12V
+24V 10 10 +24V 179228-3
+24V 11 11 +24V PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S SPED

GND2 12 12 GND2 1 +5V_SPED 1 1 SPED
GND2 13 13 GND2 2 SPED 2 2 GND2
GND2 14 14 GND2 3 GND2 3 3 +5V SPED
B14B-PH-K-S B14B-PH-K-S
SRA-21T-4 SRA-21T-4
CN2 PHDR-10VS-2
+5V 1 (NC)
+5V 2
CN13 501189-3030(MOLEX) 501189-3030(MOLEX) CN3 SPPD4 3 (NC)
DSDATA_0N 1 1 DSDATA_0N SPPD5 4
GND2 2 2 GND2 GND2 5 (NC)
DSDATA_0P 3 3 DSDATA_0P GND2 6 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nPOF_DSPF 4 4 CN_nPOF_DSPF GND2 7 SPPD5
GND2 5 5 GND2 SPPD6 8 1 +5VPD
nLVDS_STBY1 8 8 nLVDS_STBY_SCN +5V 9 2 SPPD5
DSDATA_1N 7 7 DSDATA_1N N.C 10 (NC) 3 GND2
GND2 6 6 GND2 B10B-PHDSS-B
DSDATA_1P 9 9 DSDATA_1P
MM_nSTBY 10 10 MM_nSTBY 179228-3(BLACK)
CN_nDSPFUP 14 14 CN_nDSPFUP SPPD6
CN_SPED 12 12 CN_SPED 3 GND2
DSDATA_2N 13 13 DSDATA_2N 2 SPPD6
GND2 11 11 GND2 1 +5VPD
DSDATA_2P 15 15 DSDATA_2P
CN_RES_DSPF 16 16 CN_RES_DSPF
CN_nDSPF_INT 20 20 CN_nDSPF_INT PHR-9 179228-3
GND2 18 18 GND2 CN7 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_N 19 19 DSCLKOUT_N +5V_SPLS1 1 3 +5VPD SPLS1
GND2 17 17 GND2 SPLS1 2 1 SPLS1
DSCLKOUT_P 21 21 DSCLKOUT_P GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2 22 22 GND2 GND2 4
CN_TXD_DSPF 26 26 CN_RXD_SCN SPLS2 5
CN_RXD_DSPF 24 24 CN_TXD_SCN +5V_SPLS2 6 179228-3
DSDATA_3N 25 25 DSDATA_3N AVCC 7 SPLS2
GND2 23 23 GND2 SPWS 8 2 GND2
DSDATA_3P 27 27 DSDATA_3P GND2 9 1 SPLS2
CN_nCTS_DSPF 28 28 CN_nRTS_SCN B9B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
GND2 29 29 GND2
CN_nRTS_DSPF 30 30 CN_nCTS_SCN
501190-3017 501190-3017
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N SPWS
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND 3 GY GND2
3. Signal list
Signal Connector level Connector Pin PWB
Name [Type] Function/Operation NOTE
name "L" "H" No. No. name
ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate. ON OFF CN10 3 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drives the ADU upper section. CN17 3,4, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] 5,6 4-phase signal.
ADUMHCNT ADU motor upper current Selects the ADU motor upper Large Small CN17 8 PCU
select current. current current
ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the ADU lower section. CN17 13,14, PCU Drives with the
ADUMLCNT ADU motor lower current select Selects the ADU motor lower Large Small CN17 18 PCU
current. current current
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN6 12 PCU
[Transmission type] upper stream section.
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the ADU Pass CN6 14 PCU
[Transmission type] medium stream section.
CCFT LCD backlight LCD backlight ON OFF CN2 2 SCNcnt
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
CL_ON Scanner lamp Radiates lights to the ON OFF CN7 3 SCNcnt
document for the CCD to scan
the document images.
CLUD1 Tray 1 paper upper limit Detects the tray 1 upper limit. Upper limit CN5 5 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUD2 Tray 2 paper upper limit Detects the tray 2 upper limit. Upper limit CN5 6 PCU
detection [Transmission type]
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 21 PCU
feed tray 1) [DC brush motor]
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper Drives the paper tray lift plate. Stop Drive CN9 22 PCU
feed tray 2) [DC brush motor]
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN5 7 PCU
[Transmission type] 1.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects paper empty in the tray YES NO CN5 8 PCU
[Transmission type] 2.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 16 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray vertical transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN9 14 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] transport roller 2 in the paper
feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass CN5 3 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 1.
[Transmission type]
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection Detects paper pass in the tray Pass CN5 4 PCU
(Paper entry detection) 2.
[Transmission type]
CPFM_CK Paper feed motor drive Changes the paper feed CN9 6 PCU Pulse input
frequency [Brush-less motor] section speed.
CPFM_D Paper feed motor start/stop Drives the paper feed section. Drive Stop CN9 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
CPFM_LD Paper feed motor lock Detects the paper feed motor Lock CN9 7 PCU
detection lock. detection
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN9 18 PCU
tray 1) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed Controls ON/OFF of the roller ON OFF CN9 20 PCU
tray 2) [Electromagnetic clutch] in the paper feed tray section.
CSPD1 Tray 1 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN5 9 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 1. quantity during lifting up.
CSPD2 Tray 2 remaining paper Detects the remaining paper Remaining CN5 10 PCU Detects
quantity detection quantity in the tray 2. quantity during lifting up.
CSS11 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 Tray 1 paper size detection 1 YES NO CN5 15 PCU
DM_CK Drum motor drive frequency Changes the drum section CN14 6 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
DM_D Drum motor start/stop Drives the drum section. Drive Stop CN14 4 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
DM_LD Drum motor lock detection Detects the drum motor lock. Lock CN14 5 PCU
detection

DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close Detects open/close of the ADU Open Close CN2 7 RD I/F
detection [Transmission type] cover.
DSW_C Tray 1, 2 transport cover open/ Detects open/close of the tray Open Close CN5 11 PCU
close detection 1, 2 transport cover.
DSW_F Front door open/close switch Detects open/close of the front Open Close CN13 4 PCU
[Micro switch] door, and fusing, motor, LSU
laser power line.
DSW_R Right door open/close switch Detects open/close of the right Open Close CN13 6 PCU
[Micro switch] door unit, and fusing, motor,
LSU laser power line.
DVCH1 Developing check 1 Detects the destination of the Detection CN3 12 PCU
developing unit 1.
developing unit 2.
developing unit 3.
FUM_CK Fusing motor drive frequency Changes the fusing section CN12 9 PCU Pulse input
[Brush-less motor] speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop Drives the fusing section. Drive Stop CN12 7 PCU
[Brush-less motor]
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock. Lock CN12 11 PCU
detection
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 6 PCU
control relay.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 8 PCU
main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp OFF ON CN12 10 PCU
sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up OFF ON CN12 14 PCU
operation of the heater lamp.
HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home Home CN15 5 PCU
position. position
HUD_DV Developing section humidity Detects the developing section CN1 20 PCU Analog
detection humidity. detection
INT_CNT AC PWB interlock Controls the AC PWB interlock. Release Lock CN8 8 PCU
LOCK_ Controller cooling fan lock Lock CN13 7 Mother
CPUFAN detection detection
LSUCFM_ LSU cooling fan motor speed Adjusts the rotating speed of CN9 10 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT control the LSU cooling fan motor. drive
LSUCFM_ LSUCFM lock detection Detects the LSU cooling fan Lock CN9 8 PCU
LD motor lock. detection
LSUCFM_V LSU cooling fan motor Cools the LSU. Stop Drive CN9 9 PCU
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the scanner home Home CN17 1 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] position. position
MIM_* Scanner motor Scanner (reading) section CN1 1,2,3, SCNcnt
[Stepping motor] 4
MPED Manual feed paper empty Detects paper empty in the YES NO CN3 7 RD I/F Manual paper
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPFD Manual feed paper entry Detects paper entry in the Pass CN6 8 PCU
detection [Transmission type] manual paper feed tray.
MPFS Paper pickup solenoid Controls ON/OFF of the paper Pickup CN10 7 PCU
(Manual paper feed) pickup roller.
[Electromagnetic solenoid]
MPGS Manual feed gate solenoid Controls open/close of the ON OFF CN10 8 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] manual paper feed gate
solenoid.
MPLD Manual feed paper length Detects the paper length in the Detection CN3 16 RD I/F Manual paper
detector manual paper feed tray. feed unit
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper ON OFF CN10 4 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch] feed roller in the manual paper
feed section.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper Detects the paper width in the CN6 13 PCU Analog
width detector manual paper feed tray. detection
[Volume resistance]
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of Storing CN3 25 RD I/F Manual paper
position detection 1 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Retraction position)
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out Detects the pull-out position of Pull-out CN3 22 RD I/F Manual paper
position detection 2 the manual paper feed tray. position feed unit
(Pull-out position)
OCSW Original cover SW Detects open/close of the Close Open CN4 3 SCNcnt
[Transmission type] document cover
(document size detection
trigger).

OSM Shift motor [Stepping motor] Offsets the paper. CN14 13,14, PCU Drives with the
15,16 4-phase signal.
OZFM_CNT Ozone fan motor speed control Adjusts the rotating speed of CN15 19 PCU Pulse (Duty)
the ozone fan motor. drive
OZFM_LD Ozone fan motor lock detection Detects the ozone fan motor Lock CN15 15 PCU
lock. detection
OZFM_V Ozone fan motor drive Discharges the ozone. Stop Drive CN15 21 PCU
PCS Process control sensor light Detects the toner patch density. CN6 22 PCU Analog
reception [Reflection type] detection
PCS-LED Process control sensor light Adjusts the light emitting CN6 21 PCU Analog
emitting [Reflection type] amount of the process control detection
sensor.
PFM PS front transport motor Transports and drives the CN17 23,24, PCU Drives with the
[Stepping motor] registration front roller drive 25,26 4-phase signal.
system.
PFMCNT PS front transport motor Selects the PS front transport Large Small CN17 28 PCU
current selection motor current. current current
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects the paper exit from Pass CN15 6 PCU
[Transmission type] fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the discharged paper. Pass CN15 4 PCU
[Transmission type]
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects paper exit to the right Pass CN6 10 PCU
tray.
POFM1_ Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Controls the speed of the paper CN15 25 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT speed control exit cooling fan motor 1. drive
POFM1_LD POFM 1 lock detection Detects the POFM 1 lock. Lock CN15 27 PCU
detection
POFM1_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 1 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 23 PCU
POFM2_ Paper exit cooling fan motor 2 Controls the speed of the paper CN15 26 PCU Pulse (Duty)
CNT speed control exit cooling fan motor 2. drive
detection
POFM2_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 2 Cools the fusing unit. Stop Drive CN15 24 PCU
detection
POFM3_V Paper exit cooling fan motor 3 Cools the paper exit unit. Stop Drive CN15 22 PCU
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller. CN17 9,10, PCU Drives with the
POMCNT Paper exit drive motor current Selects the paper exit drive Large Small CN17 7 PCU
select motor current. current current
PPD1 Registration front detection Detects paper in front of the Pass CN6 4 PCU
[Transmission type] registration roller.
PPD2 Registration detection Detects paper at the rear of the Pass CN6 26 PCU
[Reflection type] registration roller.
PSFM1_LD Power cooling fan motor 1 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN8 3 PCU
detection motor 1 lock. detection
PSFM1_V Power cooling fan motor 1 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 1 PCU
PSFM2_LD Power cooling fan motor 2 lock Detects the power cooling fan Lock CN8 4 PCU
detection motor 2 lock. detection
PSFM2_V Power cooling fan motor 2 Cools the power unit. Stop Drive CN8 2 PCU
PSPS Separation solenoid Controls the separation ON OFF CN14 18 PCU
[Electromagnetic solenoid] solenoid.
PWM_ Controller cooling fan PWM Controller cooling fan. CN13 3 Mother Pulse (Duty)
CPUFAM control drive
* Control is
MFPC.
RDCFM_LD RDCFM lock detection Detects the RDCFM lock. Lock CN10 13 PCU
detection
RDCFM_V Suction fan motor Discharges air from the suction Stop Drive CN10 11 PCU
section.
RRM Registration motor transport Transports and drives the CN17 19,20, PCU Drives with the
motor [Stepping motor] registration roller drive system. 21,22 4-phase signal.
RRMCNT Registration motor current Selects the registration motor Large Small CN17 17 PCU
select current. current current
SCOV Upper cover open/close sensor Detects the upper cover open/ Open CN8 20 DSPFcnt
close.
SOCD Cover open/close sensor Detects the cover open/close. Close CN9 10 DSPFcnt
SPED Document empty sensor Detects the document empty. Detection CN9 14 DSPFcnt
SPFM* Transport motor Drives the transport motor. CN8 6,7,8, DSPFcnt
9,10,
11
CN15 3,4,5, SCNcnt U model, MX-
6,7,23 M283N
SPLS1 Document size sensor 1 Detects the document size. Detection CN7 2 DSPFcnt

SPLS2 Document size sensor 2 Detects the document size. Detection CN7 5 DSPFcnt
SPM* Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed motor. CN8 12,13, DSPFcnt
14,15,
16
Paper feed reverse motor Drives the paper feed reverse CN15 8,9, SCNcnt U model, MX-
motor. 10,11, M283N
12
SPOD Paper exit sensor Detects paper pass. Detection CN2 8 DSPFcnt
SPPD1 No. 1 paper feed sensor Detects paper pass. Detection CN9 3 DSPFcnt
CN15 1 SCNcnt U model, MX-
M283N
SPPD2 No. 2 paper feed (PS front) Detects paper pass. Detection CN9 4 DSPFcnt
sensor CN15 2 SCNcnt U model, MX-
M283N
SPPD3 No. 1 (front surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection CN9 9 DSPFcnt
front sensor
Scanning front sensor CN15 24 SCNcnt U model, MX-
M283N
SPPD5 No. 2 (back surface) scanning Detects paper pass. Detection CN2 4 DSPFcnt
front sensor
Reverse rear sensor CN15 25 SCNcnt U model, MX-
M283N
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Controls the pressure release OFF ON CN15 13 SCNcnt U model, MX-
solenoid. M283N
SPWS Document width sensor Detects the document width. CN7 8 DSPFcnt Analog
detection
M283N, Analog
detection
SRRC PS clutch Controls the PS clutch. OFF ON CN8 18 DSPFcnt
M283N
SRVC Reverse clutch Controls the reverse clutch. OFF ON CN15 16 SCNcnt U model, MX-
M283N
STMPS Stamp solenoid Controls the finish stamp. Stamping CN8 17 DSPFcnt
M283N
TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density. CN3 9 PCU Analog
[Magnetic sensor] detection
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls toner supply. ON OFF CN3 4 PCU
[Electromagnetic clutch]
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects the face-down paper Full CN15 3 PCU
[Transmission type] exit tray full.
TFD3 Right tray paper exit full Detects the paper exit full in the Full CN2 1 RD I/F
detection right tray.
TH_DV Developing section Detects the temperature in the CN1 22 PCU Analog
temperature detection developing section. detection
TH_MY_IN Main thermistor Detects the temperature. CN16 10 PCU Analog
detection
TH_US_IN Sub thermistor Detects the temperature. CN16 8 PCU Analog
detection
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity CN16 18 PCU "Detection
quantity detection in the waste toner box. pattern table"
provided.
TNF Waste toner box remaining Detects the remaining quantity CN16 17 PCU "Detection
quantity detection in the waste toner box. pattern table"
provided.
TSGOUT Toner density sensor control Controls the toner density. CN3 7 PCU Analog
voltage [Magnetic sensor] detection
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end. End CN16 11 PCU
WEBM Web motor Drives the fusing web cleaning CN14 19,20 PCU Drives with the
(Synchronous motor) paper. 2-phase signal.
WH_PR Dehumidifying heater control Turns ON/OFF the ON OFF CN10 17 PCU ON:
dehumidifying heater. Relay open

[13] TOOL LIST
MX-M503N
Service Manual
1. Exclusive-use tools list

For repair or adjustments of this machine, the following tools are required.
Name Parts code Purpose

DSPF shading adjustment sheet UKOG-0330FCZZ DSPF CIS unit shading adjustment
Gray scale chart UKOG-0162FCZZ Copy density and gradation check
Color test chart (AB series) UKOG-0326FCZZ Copy density and gradation check / Void area and image loss check /
Color test chart (Inch series) UKOG-0326FC11 Resolution check
SIT chart UKOG-0280FCZZ or UKOG-0280FCZ1 CCD, DSPF CIS color balance and gamma adjustment
Stearic acid UKOG-0309FCZZ Apply to the side seal on the OPC drum cleaner section.
MX-M503N TOOL LIST 13 1

[A] EXTERIOR
MX-M503N (2) Left cabinet
Service Manualrear lower/Left cabinet
1) Remove the tray 1 and 2.
1. Disassembly and assembly

2
A. Cabinet
d
i
k
h
l
p 1
2) Remove the desk connection lid (A). Remove the screw, and
remove the left cabinet rear lower (B) and the left cabinet (C).
j
n
g
f C
e
m B
a
o 2
c
A 4
1 3
Parts (3) Upper cabinet right/Upper cabinet left

a Rear cabinet 1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
b Left cabinet rear lower the table glass (C).
c Left cabinet
d Upper cabinet right
e Upper cabinet left B
C
f Upper cabinet rear cover
g Upper cabinet rear
h Front cabinet upper
i Operation panel base plate A
j Right cabinet front
k Right connection cabinet
l Right cabinet rear cover
m Paper exit cover
n Paper exit tray cabinet
o Left cabinet rear
p Front cover
(1) Rear cabinet

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet right (A) and
the upper cabinet left (B).
B
2
1 A
MX-M503N EXTERIOR A 1
(4) Upper cabinet rear cover/Upper cabinet rear (6) Right cabinet front/Right connection cabinet/
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the Right cabinet rear cover
screw, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B). 1) Remove the front cabinet upper.
2) Open the right door and the right cabinet lower.
A
B
2
1
2
2) Disconnect the connector. Remove the screw, and remove the
earth wire. Remove the screw, and remove the upper cabinet
rear.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the right cabinet front (A).
Remove the screw, and remove the right connection cabinet
(B). Remove the ozone filter cover (C). Remove the screw, and
remove the right cabinet rear cover (D).
B 2
(5) Front cabinet upper/Operation panel base plate

1) Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper. 1 D
A 4
3
(7) Paper exit cover/Paper exit tray cabinet/Left

cabinet rear
1) Remove the paper exit cover (A). Open the front cabinet, and
remove the screw.
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet (B).
2) Remove the screw, and remove the operation panel base

plate.
A
(8) Front cover
1) Remove the toner cartridge. [Refer to "[i] Toner supply sec-
tion."]
2) Remove the developing unit. [Refer to "[J] DEVELOPING
SECTION"]
3) Remove the photo-conductor unit. [Refer to "[H] PHOTO-CON-
DUCTOR SECTION"]
4) Remove the front cabinet upper and the paper exit tray cabi-
net.
6) Remove the band and the hinge, and remove the front cabinet.
7) Remove the screw, and remove the front cover.
3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0
4 +5VN
MX-M503N
5 PD
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
LCD
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL0 22 8 WU_LED
GND2 6 6 GND2 +5VN 25 12 nINFO_LED
B6P-VH B6P-VH PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
2
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
MFP OPE PWB

SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1(nc)
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2 +CCFT 1
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0
A. 8.5 inch operation panel
/CCFT 2
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 GND2 36 501190-2017
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V GND2 18
PWB
CN5 CN5 GND2 16 CN4
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17 GND2 5 5 GND2
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14 CCFT 4 4 CCFT
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15 +24V3 3 3 +24V3
[B] OPERATION PANEL
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 12 +24V3 2 2 +24V3
5
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13 GND2 1 1 GND2
+24V3 10 BM05B-GHS-TBT B5B-PASK-1
LCD INVERTER
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 XH(X1) 3
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2
nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2 CN2
nCCFT 2 29 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2 GND2 2 2 GND2
1
DISP 1 40 GND2 CK 3 3 CK
501190-4017 25 +3.3V GND2 4 4 GND2
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V GND2 5 5 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN NC 6 6 NC
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3 R0 7 7 R0
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3 R1 8 8 R1
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 nYL(Y1) R2 9 9 R2
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1) GND2 10 10 GND2
GND2 11 33 YH(Y2) R3 11 11 R3
6
+5VN 6
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 nXL(X2) R4 12 12 R4
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP R5 13 13 R5
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT GND2 14 14 GND2
+5VO 3 10 17 nCCFT G0 15 15 G0
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
3
GND2 4 +24V3 11 15 PNL_SEL0 G1 16 16 G1
nWU_LED 5 PNC-a 12 (NC) 13 PNL_SEL1 G2 17 17 G2
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2 GND2 18 18 GND2
1. Electrical and mechanical relation diagram
nWU_KEY 7 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3 G3 19 19 G3
MFP OPE PWB

nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP G4 20 20 G4
GND2 9 SD SD 10 GND2 G5 21 21 G5
LCD_DATA3+ 13 PK PK 6 LCD_DATA3+ GND2 22 22 GND2
GND2 17 SD SD 16 GND2 B1 24 24 B1
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+ B2 25 25 B2
8.5inch LCD UN
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK- GND2 26 26 GND2
GND2 18 SD SD 22 GND2 B3 27 27 B3
LCD_DATA2+ 19 PK PK 18 LCD_DATA2+ B4 28 28 B4
GND2 23 SD SD 28 GND2 GND2 30 30 GND2
LCD_DATA1+ 21 PK PK 24 LCD_DATA1+ Hsync 31 31 Hsync
GND2 24 SD SD 34 GND2 Vsync 33 33 Vsync
LCD_DATA0+ 25 PK PK 30 LCD_DATA0+ F-GND 34 34 F-GND
MX-M503N OPERATION PANEL B 1

LCD_DATA0- 26 WH WH 32 LCD_DATA0- ENAB 35 35 ENAB
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029 UD/LR 36 36 UD/LR
PWRSW
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC) +3.3V 37 37 +3.3V
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC) +3.3V 38 38 +3.3V
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC) NC 39 39 NC
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX) +3.3V 40 40 +3.3V
+24V3 4
FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55) FH12A-40S-0.5SH(55)
/SIZE_LED1 5
Service Manual
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
Signal Name Function/Operation
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operation panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting

3 PDSEL2
2 PDSEL1
1 PDSEL0
4 +5VN
5 PD
ORS PD PWB
6 GND2
CN11 CN6
GND2 1 3 GND1
+24V3 2 1 +24V3 CN2 CN1
+12V 3 2 +12V PDSEL2 20 4 +5VO
+5VN 4 4 +5VN PDSEL1 23 6 GND2
+3.3V 5 5 +3.3V PDSEL0 22 8 WU_LED
LCD
GND2 6 6 GND2 +5VN 25 12 nINFO_LED
B6P-VH B6P-VH PD 24 14 nWU_KEY
MOTHER PWB
CN7 CN11 GND2 21 10 POW_LED
2
TOUCH PANEL
GND2 3 GY GY 3 GND2 +5V_EXT 38 17 +5V_EXT
SCANDATA1+ 5 PK PK 6 SCANDATA1+ +3.3V_EXT 37 18 +3.3V_EXT
GND2 6 GY GY 5 GND2 nBZR 34 16 nBZR
SCANDATA2- 7 WH WH 8 SCANDATA2- nKEYIN 35 19 nKEYIN
BACK LIGHT
SCANDATA2+ 8 PK PK 10 SCANDATA2+ SEG0LEDBPR 32 15 SEG0LEDBPR
GND2 9 GY GY 7 GND2 SEG1LEDCPR 33 13 SEG1LEDCPR
MFP OPE PWB

SCANCLKOUT- 10 WH WH 12 SCANCLKOUT- SEG2D0 30 11 SEG2D0
5
SCANCLKOUT+ 11 PK PK 14 SCANCLKOUT+ nF0D1 31 9 nF0D1
GND2 12 GY GY 11 GND2 nF1D2 28 7 nF1D2 +CCFT 1
SCANDATA3- 13 WH WH 16 SCANDATA3- nF2G0 29 5 nF2G0 /CCFT 2
SCANDATA3+ 14 PK PK 15 SCANDATA3+ nF3G1 26 3 nF3G1 S02(8.0)B-BHS
GND2 15 GY GY 13 GND2 GND2 36 501190-2017
B. 8.1 inch operation panel
B15B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 +3.3V GND2 18

PWB
CN5 CN5 GND2 16
nRES_SCN 1 1 nRES_SCN GND2 17 CN4
+5VO 2 2 +5VO GND2 14 /CCFT 1 3 /CCFT
nRTS_SCN 3 3 nRTS_SCN +3.3V 15 GND2 2 2 GND2
nLCD_DISP 4 4 nLCD_DISP +3.3V 12 +24V3 3 1 +24V3
TXD_SCN 5 5 TXD_SCN +5VN 13 S3B-PH-SM4-TB S3B-PH-K-S
+24V3 10
LCD INVERTER
LCD_SEL0 6 6 LCD_SEL0
nCTS_SCN 7 7 nCTS_SCN +24V3 11 CN3
nPOF_SCN 8 8 nPOF_SCN nYL(Y1) 8 /YL(Y1) 4
RXD_SCN 9 9 RXD_SCN XH(X1) 9 XH(X1) 3
GND2 10 10 GND2 YH(Y2) 6 CN1 YH(Y2) 2
nSPED 11 11 nSPED nXL(X2) 7 1 GND2 /XL(X2) 1
nOCSW 12 12 nOCSW SC_TEMP 4 2 GND2 52271-0469
B12B-PHDSS-B B12B-PHDSS-B VCONT 5 7 GND2
CN4
nCCFT 2 29 GND2
VO 1 15 VO
PNL_SEL0 3 39 GND2
LP 2 14 LP
DISP 1 40 GND2
1
GND2 3 13 GND2
501190-4017 25 +3.3V
CP 4 12 CP
PWB
CN9 19 +3.3V
GND2 5 11 GND2
nA_PNC 1 23 +5VN
+3.3V 6 10 +3.3V
nA_COPY 2 3 +24V3
M 7 9 M
MOTHER
nA_CA 3 5 +24V3
D0 8 8 D0
CN6 nA_READY 4 37 /YL(Y1)
D1 9 7 D1
nPWR_SW 10 nA_AUD 5 35 XH(X1)
GND2 10 6 GND2
GND2 11 +5VN 6 33 YH(Y2)
D2 11 5 D2
GND2 12 GND2 7 31 /XL(X2)
D3 12 4 D3
(NC) 1 (NC) +24V3 8 27 SC_TEMP
GND2 13 3 GND2
8.1inch LCD UN
(NC) 2 (NC) (NC) 9 21 VCONT
DISP 14 2 DISP
+5VO 3 17 /CCFT
6
10
SCN-CNT PWB
nA_TC
VEE 15 1 VEE
GND2
nWU_LED
4
5
+24V3
PNC-a
11
12 (NC)
15
13
PNL_SEL0
PNL_SEL1 52030-2629 52030-2629 3
LVDS PWB
nINFO_LED 6 GND2 13 (NC) 11 PNL_SEL2
nWU_KEY 7 B13B-PH-K-S (NC) 9 PNL_SEL3
MFP OPE PWB

nPOW_LED 8 36 DISP
LCD_CLK+ 15 PK PK 12 LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLK- 16 WH WH 14 LCD_CLK-

PWRSW
(NC) 27 (NC) 501571-4029
CN4
(NC) 28 (NC)
+5VN 1
(NC) 29 (NC)
GND2 2
(NC) 30 (NC)
/OCSW 3
501190-3017(MOLEX)
+24V3 4
/SIZE_LED1 5
/SIZE_LED2 6
B6B-PH-SM4-TB
4
OCSW
POWER SW PWB
3 n PWRSW
2 GND2
1 GND2
1 +5VN
2 GND2
CN16 CN CN
3 OCSW
VBUS2 10 5 VBUS2 VBUS2 1
D2- 9 4 D2- D2- 2
+24V3
D2+ 8 3 D2+ D2+ 3
/SIZE_LED1
PWB
/SIZE_LED2
SHIELD2 6 1 SHIELD2 SHIELD2 5
ORS LED
BM05B-GHS-TBT F-GND
BM10B-GHS-TBT
USB PWB
FG
SRA-51T-4 SRA-51T-4 SRA-01T-3.2
KEY PWB
SRA-01T-3.2
OCSW Original cover SW Document size detection timing switch
PWRSW Operaton panel power supply switch Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.

1 8.1 MFP OPE-P PWB Detects the pressed key on the operation panel.
2 LVDS PWB Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
3 Document detection light receiving PWB Receives light from the document detection light emitting PWB to detect the document size.
4 Document detection light emitting PWB Emits light for detection of the document size.
5 LCD INV PWB Emits the document size detection LED lights.
6 USB connector PWB For USB connecting
2. Operational descriptions 3. Disassembly and assembly

A. Outline A. 8.5 inch operation panel unit
The operation panel is composed of the MFP OPE PWB, the LCD
INV PWB, the LVDS PWB, the USB CN PWB, the LCD unit, and
the operation key, and is used to operation the machine, to set and
to display the status. e
They are connected with the document detection light receiving
PWB for detection of the document size. They receive light from the g
document detection light emitting PWB attached to the rear frame
f c
side, detecting the document size.
The power switch of the operation panel outputs the ON/OFF con- a
trol signal of the DC power. b
The USB connector can be connected with the USB memory, the
USB keyboard, the IC card writer, the IC card reader, and the USB d
hub, sending the electronic data to the mother PWB.
Use of the keyboard in the lower section of the operation panel Parts
facilitates text inputs. a LCD INV PWB
b POWER SW PWB
c 8.5 MFP OPE PWB
d USB connector PWB
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Disconnect four con-
nectors.
*1 *2
*3
*1
*4 *1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
*4: Disconnect the connector from the Mylar.

3) Remove the screw, remove the earth harness from the (2) USB connector PWB
machine, and turn the operation panel back. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.
(3) LVDS PWB

1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
shield sheet.
(1) LCD INV PWB/POWER SW PWB/8.5 MFP OPE PWB

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the
LCD INV PWB and the POWER SW PWB.
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw and the earth
wire. Remove the LVDS PWB.
* When the LVDS PWB is removed, the earth plate for the
3) Remove the screw and the earth wire. Peel off the Mylar, and LCD is also removed. Be careful not to lose it.
remove the earth sheet and the 8.5 MFP OPE PWB.

(4) LCD module (5) Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Remove the LVDS shield sheet. 2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the LVDS
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw. Remove the shield sheet.
Mylar.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.

Mylar.
5) Remove the LCD module.

4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD unit.
5) Remove the touch panel.

B. 8.1 inch operation panel unit (1) POWER SW PWB/MFP OPE-P PWB
2) Remove the screw, and remove the POWER SW PWB.
f b
d
g
a
Parts
a POWER SW PWB
b MFP OPE-P PWB
c USB connector PWB 3) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the MFP
d LCD INV PWB OPE-P PWB.
e LVDS PWB
f LCD module
g Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel base plate.

2) Remove the screw, and disconnect the connector.
(2) USB connector PWB

*1 *2
*3 2) Remove the screw and the earth wire, and remove the USB
connector PWB.
*1
*1
*1: Since the lead wire is provided with the lock, do not pull the
lead wire.
Hold the connector and pull it out.
*2: Note that the lock is on the back surface.
*3: When disconnecting the connector, pull the lead wire
slowly.
3) Put the operation panel upside down.

(3) LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB (5) Touch panel
1) Remove the operation panel unit. 1) Remove the operation panel unit.
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the LCD INV PWB (A) and the LVDS PWB (B). the LCD unit.
* When the LCD INV PWB and the LVDS PWB are removed,
the earth wire for the LCD is also removed. Be careful not to
lose it.
3) Remove the touch panel.
(4) LCD module

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the LCD holder.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the LCD module.

[C] DSPF/RSPF SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. DSPF
(1) Paper feed section
&52(&4+8'429$
%0$
52/# 52/#
82&A52/ 82&A52/
52/# 52/#
52/$ 52/$
82&A52/ 82&A52/
52/$ 52/$
%0'
82&544%
544% 5%18
82& 82& 82&
&52(A%0629$ )0&
82&59

0% 82&59 82&A59
%0 %0# 522&

)0& )0&

82&
522&
SPM
)0& )0&
82& 82& )0&
82& 82&
8 8
52(/%- 52(/%-
52(// 52(// SPPD2
52(// 52(//
52(/1 52(/1
52(/1 52(/1
52(/48 52(/48
52/# 52/#
52/# 52/# 2 SCOV
52/$ 52/$
52/$ 52/$
52/1 52/1
56/25 56/25
544% 544%
52(% 52(%
5%18
56/27

5%18
56/27
SPPD1
82& 82&
(#0A10 (#0A101((
(#0A.1%-
)0&

(#0A.1%-
)0&
SPED 1
)0& )0&
3
%0
8 82&
8 82& 522&
522& 522& 82&
522& 522& 522&
)0& )0& )0&
)0& )0&
8 52'&
52'& 8A52'& 52'&
)0& 52'& )0&
0% )0& 852'& SPWS
SPLS1
SPLS2
%0 52.5
8A52.5 82&52.5
52.5 52.5
)0& )0&
)0&
52.5 52.5
8A52.5 )0&
#8%% 52.5
5295 82&52.5
)0&
#8%% $. #8%%
5295 $4 5295
)0& ); )0&

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.

SCOV DSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the DSPF upper cover.
SPED DSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 DSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 DSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the DSPF paper feed tray.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the rollers in the paper feed section.
SPPD1 DSPF paper pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SPWS DSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the DSPF paper feed tray.
MX-M503N DSPF/RSPF SECTION C 1

(2) Transport section
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3 FAN
SPPD5
2
SOCD
3 SPPD6 (SPOD)
4 STMPS
5
82&51%&
522&
82&
)0&
51%&
)0&

82&56/25
82&A52(/
82&A52(/
82&544%
82&(#0
56/25
56/27
(#0A.1%-
)0&

52(/#
52(/$
52(/#
52(/$
544%
)0&

0%

0%

0%
%0(
%0'
%0%
%0&
82&
522&
522&
82&
&52(&4+8'429$
)0&
)0&

82&56/25
(#0A101((
82&544%
82&52(%
82&A52(/
82&A52(/
(#0A.1%-
82&(#0
8A51%&
82&
82&
52(/%-
52(//
52(//
52(/1
52(/1
52(/48
(#0A.1%-
52/$
52/1
56/25
56/27
82&
52/#
56/25
52(/$
52(/#
522&
82&
)0&
)0&
52/$
544%
52(%
5%18
)0&
)0&
52/#
544%
52(%
56/27
52(/$
52(/#
)0&
)0&
51%&
8
)0&
)0&
0%
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
8

%0#

%0

0%

0%

0%

0%
%0
%0
%0
%0
&52(A%0629$

(#0A.1%-
82&
82&
(#0A10
52(/%-
52(//
52(//
52(/1
52(/1
52(/48
522&
52/$
52/1
56/25
56/27
82&
522&
522&
522&
52/#
8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
51%&
)0&
)0&
52/$
544%
52(%
5%18
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
52/#
#8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
0%

2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport 3 roller.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller.
5 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.
6 DSPF CIS unit Reads document images. (CIS PWB: CIS control, LED: Light source)

FAN Cooling fan motor DC motor Cools the CIS unit and the motor.
SOCD DSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the DSPF unit.
SPPD6 (SPOD) DSPF paper exit sensor Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.

B. RSPF
(1) Paper feed section
CN F
SPMA/ 1 6 SPMA/
SPMA 3 4 SPMA
SPMB 4 3 SPMB
SPMB/ 6 1 SPMB/
N.C. 7 (NC)
B7B-PH-K-S
CN H
SPED 1
GND2 2
+5V SPED 3 PALR-06VF / PAP-06V-S
+5VPD 4 1 +5VPD 1 1 +5VPD
SPPD1 5 2 SPPD1 2 2 SPPD1
+5VPD 7 4 +5VPD 4
SPPD2 8 5 SPPD2 5 1 +5VPD
GND2 9 6 GND2 6 2 SPPD2
+24VPD 10 3 GND2
GND2
+24VPD SW
11
12
B12B-PH-K-S
(NC)
SPM
SCN-CNT RSPF
PWB DRIVER SPPD2
GND2
CN16
1
PWB
GND2 2
+5VO 3 (NC) CN A
+3.3V 4 34 GND2
+3.3V 5 (NC) 33 GND2
+5V
+5V
6
7
(NC) 8
7
+3.3V
+5V
2 SCOV
+12V 8 (NC) 6 +24VPD
+12V 9 (NC) 5 +24VPD
+24V 10 2 GND2
+24V 11 1 GND2
GND2 12 (NC) 3 SPPD1
GND2 13 4 SPPD2
GND2 14 9 SPFMCK
B14B-PH-K-S
CN15
10
11
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPPD1
SPPD1 1 12 SPFMO1
SPPD2 2 13 SPFMO2
SPFMCK 3 14 SPMA
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
4
5
6
15
16
17
SPMA/
SPMB
SPMB/
SPED 1
SPFMO2 7 18 SPMO1
SPMA 8 19 SPRS
SPMA/ 9 20 STMPS
SPMB 10 21 SRRC
SPMB/ 11 22 SRVC
SPMO1 12 23 SPWS
SPRS 13 24 SELA
STMPS 14 25 SELB
SRRC 15 26 SELC
SRVC 16 27 SSELO
SPWS 17 28 SPPD4
SELA_
SELB_
18
19
29
30
31
SPFMRV
SPPD3
SPPD5
3
SELC_ 20
SSELO 21 32 +5VPD PALR-05VF / PAP-05V-S
SPPD4 22 B34-PHDSS-B 1 SPED 1 1 SPED
SPFMRV 23 2 GND2 2 2 GND2
SPPD3 24 3 +5V SPED 3 3 +5V SPED
SPPD5 25 4 +24VPD 4
+5VPD 26 5 +24VPD SW 5 1 +24VPD
SPED 27 (NC) 1 +24VPD_SW
NC 28 (NC)
B28-PHDSS-B
SPWS
+5V_SPLS1
SPLS1
CN C
1
2
3
1
+5VPD SPLS1
SPLS1
SPLS1
GND2 3 2 GND2
GND2
SPLS2
+5V_SPLS2
4
5
6
SPLS2
AVCC 7
SPWS 8 2 GND2
GND2 9 1 SPLS2
B09B-PH-K-S 3 +5VPD SPLS2
SMP-03V-NC / SMR-03V-N
1 AVCC 1 BL AVCC
2 SPWS 2 BR SPWS
3 GND2 3 GY GND2

1 Pick-up roller Picks up a document and feeds it to the paper feed roller.

SCOV RSPF upper cover open/close sensor Micro switch Detects open/close of the RSPF upper cover.
SPED RSPF document sensor Transmission type Detects document empty in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS1 RSPF document length sensor (short) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPLS2 RSPF document length sensor (long) Transmission type Detects the document length in the RSPF paper feed tray.
SPM Paper feed motor Stepping motor Drives the rollers in the paper feed section.
SPPD1 RSPF paper pass sensor 1 Transmission type Detects pass of the paper.
SPWS RSPF document width sensor Volume resistor Detects the document width in the RSPF paper feed tray.

(2) Transport section
SPFM
SRRC
SPPD3
SRVC
SPPD5 SPRS
2
3
SOCD
STMPS
5
4
+5VPD SOCD
SPPD3
+5VPD
SOCD
GND2
GND2
1
2
3
1
2
3
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
179228-4
+24VPD SRRC
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD_SPFM
4
3
2
1
SPPD5
+5VPD
GND2
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPPD3
+5VPD
SRRC/
SOCD
GND2
GND2
SMP-02V-BC / SMR-02V-B
+24VPD STMPS
1
2
1
2
292254-4
STMPS/
STMPU
GND2
+24VPD SPRS
+24VPD SRVC
SPRS/
SRVC/
1
2
3
SPFM
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
6
5
4
3
2
1
179228-4
1
2
3
4
1
2
1
2
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN E
CN B
B10B-PHDSS-B
CN D
B6B-PH-K-S
B08B-PH-K-S
B04B-PH-K-S
CN G
RSPF DRIVER PWB

10
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
+24VPD SRRC
+24VPD STMPS
+5VPD SOCD
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD_SPFM
+24VPD SRVC
+24VPD SPRS
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPFMRV
SPFMA/
SPFMB/
STMPS/
+24VPD
+24VPD
STMPU
SPFMA
SPFMB
SPMO1
STMPS
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
+5VPD
SSELO
+5VPD
+5VPD
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD5
SRRC/
+5VPD
SRVC/
SPRS/
SPMA/
SPMB/
SOCD
SPWS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SRRC
SPMA
SPMB
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SPRS
SRVC
+3.3V
SELC
SELA
SELB
+5V
B34-PHDSS-B
34
33
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
CN A
8
7
6
5
2
1
3
4
9
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
CN16
CN15
B28-PHDSS-B
B14B-PH-K-S
10
11
12
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SCN-CNT
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPFMRV
SPMO1
STMPS
SSELO
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD4
SPPD3
SPPD5
+5VPD
SELC_
SELA_
SELB_
SPMA/
SPMB/
SPWS
SRRC
SPMA
SPMB
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
SPRS
SPED
SRVC
+3.3V
+3.3V
+5VO
+12V
+12V
+24V
+24V
+5V
+5V
PWB
NC

2 Transport roller 1 (Drive) Transports paper from resist roller to No. 2 resist roller.
3 Transport roller 2 (Drive) Transports paper to the transport 3 roller.
4 Transport roller 3 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 2 to the paper exit roller. / Transports document to the resist roller when
reversing the document.
5 Paper exit roller (Drive) Discharges paper.

SOCD RSPF open/close sensor Transmission type Detects open/close of the RSPF unit.
SPRS Pressure release solenoid Electromagnetic solenoid Releases the pressure of the transport roller 3 when reversing a document and
transporting it to the resist roller.
SRVC Reverse clutch Electromagnetic clutch Controls ON/OFF of the transport power of the transport roller 3 and the paper exit
roller when discharging a document and reversing it to transport to the resist roller.

2. Operational descriptions 3) Resist operation (1st sheet)
(Resist clutch ON)
A. Document size detection (When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
Size detection on the document tray the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
The document width is detected by the document width sensor
(SPWS), and the document length is detected by the document
length sensors (SPLS1, SPLS2). The document size is judged from
the document width and the document length as shown in the table
below.
When, however, mixed sizes of documents are loaded on the tray,
the maximum size is detected.
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)
Document length sensor
Document size
SPLS1 SPLS2
AB series A5 OFF OFF
B5 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
B5R ON OFF
A4R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
B4 ON ON 5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
A3 ON ON
(When the SPPD1 detects the rear edge of the previous docu-
11" x 17" ON ON
ment, the paper feed motor is booted.)
Inch series 8.5" x 5.5" OFF OFF
11" x 8.5" OFF OFF
A4 OFF OFF
11" x 8.5"R ON OFF
8.5" x 13" ON ON
8.5" x 14" ON ON
A3 ON ON
11" x 17" ON ON
6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Resist operation (2nd sheet)

(When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)
SPWS
SPLS1 SPLS2
7) Scanning start (2nd sheet)
B. Paper feed and transport operations (DSPF)

(1) Single face scanning
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON)
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
2) Paper feed start (1st sheet)

The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
(The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)

9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet) 5) Preliminary paper feed start (2nd sheet)
10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
6) Scanning start (1st sheet, back surface)/Preliminary paper

feed complete (2nd sheet)
11) Pick-up roller lifting up

(After completion of a job, the paper feed motor is rotated
reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup 7) Scanning complete (1st sheet, back surface)
roller.)
The paper feed transport operation is the same as single-sur-

face scanning. Since, however, the next page surface must be
(2) Duplex scanning scanned after scanning the back surface with the CIS, the next
1) Document set (Document empty sensor ON) page is stopped temporarily at the resist roller section until
scanning of the back surface and the process on the MFP side
are completed.
Therefore, the paper interval becomes longer in duplex scan-
ning.

Pick-up roller descending
9) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)
3) Resist operation (1st sheet, front surface)
10) Resist operation (2nd sheet, front surface)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
11) Scanning start (2nd sheet, front surface)
The same operations are performed hereinafter.

(3) Stamp operation 8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet)
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet)

2) Paper feed start (1st sheet) (Stamp solenoid ON)
Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)
3) Resist operation (1st sheet)

(Resist clutch ON)
11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet)

reversely at a low speed for a certain time to lift the pickup
roller.)
5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
C. Paper feed and transport operations (RSPF)

(1) Single face scanning
6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet)
(Stamp solenoid ON)

The pick-up roller descends. (The paper feed motor is booted.)
7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd (The transport motor is booted simultaneously.)
sheet)

3) Resist operation (1st sheet) 10) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet)
(Resist clutch ON)

4) Scanning start (1st sheet) roller.)
(2) Duplex scanning

5) Paper feed start (2nd sheet)

Pick-up roller descending
6) Scanning complete (1st sheet)/Resist operation (2nd sheet)

3) Resist operation (1st sheet, front surface)
7) Scanning start (2nd sheet)
4) Scanning start (1st sheet, front surface)
5) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed. (Solenoid ON)
9) Scanning complete (2nd sheet)

6) After stopping the operation, reversing is started. 14) Scanning start (Second sheet)
7) After reversing, resist operation is executed.

15) After passing the scanning section, the reverse follower roller
is pressed.
8) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres-

sure is released.
16) The reverse follower roller pressure is released.
9) Scanning start (First sheet, back surface)
17) Discharge (First sheet)
10) After completion of scanning, the reverse follower roller is

pressed.
(3) Stamp operation

11) After stopping the operation, reversing is started.

Pick-up roller descending (The paper feed motor is booted.)
12) After reversing, resist operation is executed.
3) Resist operation (1st sheet)

(Resist clutch ON)
13) After turning ON the PS clutch, the reverse follower roller pres- (When a certain time passes after turning ON the resist clutch,
sure is released. the paper feed motor is turned OFF.)

4) Scanning start (1st sheet) 12) Pick-up roller lifting up
roller.)
5) Scanning complete (1st sheet)
D. Document feed, transport, scan, paper exit,

and operating speed
The document fed by the pickup roller is sent through the paper
feed roller and the transport roller to the resist roller section.
In the resist roller section, the document lead edge and the scan
start position are synchronized.
6) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (1st sheet) The document is transported to the scan section. After being
scanned, the document discharged to the document exit tray by the
(Stamp solenoid ON)
paper exit roller.
The document transport speed depends on the resolution as
shown below.
Document transport speed

Resolution
DSPF RSPF
300dpi 346mm/sec.
400dpi 259mm/sec.
7) Paper exit start (1st sheet)/Preliminary paper feed start (2nd 600dpi 173mm/sec.
sheet)
E. The original scan (DSPF)
The CIS (Contact Image Sensor) unit is the contact type image
scan sensor, and is assembled to the DSPF to scan document
images. The LED light in the CIS unit is radiated to a document,
and the reflected light is passed through the lens to the photoelec-
tric conversion elements to form images. (Pixel: 7196 pixels, reso-
lution: 600dpi) The CIS and the CCD assembled in the lens unit
8) Paper exit complete (1st sheet) allow simultaneous scan of duplex surfaces of a document.

A. DSPF unit
a
9) Stop at the stamp position/Stamp operation (2nd sheet) g
(Stamp solenoid ON) e
f
d
b
10) Paper exit start (2nd sheet)

Parts
a DSPF CIS unit
b Cooling fan motor
c DSPF control PWB
d DSPF driver PWB
e Transport motor
f PS clutch
11) Paper exit complete (2nd sheet) g Paper feed motor

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. (1) DSPF CIS unit
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 1) Open the paper feed unit.
earth wire. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the harness cover and the locking band.
2) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions) of the

front cabinet by inserting a minus screwdriver under the base
tray, and remove the front cabinet.
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.
4) Open the DSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and
slide the DSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the DSPF unit.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.

4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the (2) Cooling fan motor
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the holder. 1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit.
Remove the document tray.
cooling fan motor. Remove the screw, and remove the mount-
ing plate from the cooling fan motor.
NOTE: Be careful of the extending position of the harness. Be
careful of the installing direction of the fan.
5) Remove the screw, and remove the document tray lower and
the paper guide.
(3) DSPF control PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit.
2) Remove the cooling fan motor.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire. Remove the
snap band. Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and
remove the DSPF control PWB.
6) Remove the step screw. Remove the DSPF CIS unit. Discon-
nect the connector.
NOTE: Never touch the light source and the lens of the DSPF CIS
unit.
NOTE: Install so that the round hole of the DSPF CIS unit is on the
rear side of the mark, and tighten the screws in the
sequence of the round hole and then the long hole.
(4) DSPF driver PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet of the DSPF unit.
DSPF driver PWB.

(5) Transport motor 4) Loose the screw, and loosen the belt tension to remove the
1) Remove the document tray. belt. Remove the screw, and remove the transport motor.
Remove the harness from the transport motor.
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
wire saddle. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and NOTE: When ordering the DSPF motor as a service part, the har-
remove the earth wire. ness is provided with the motor. Do not use this newly-pro-
vided harness, but use the one which was originally
attached to the machine.
When replacement of the harness attached to the machine
is required, refer to the Parts Guide and order one.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the transport unit.
(6) PS clutch
1) Remove the document tray.
2) Remove the transport unit.
3) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE: When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.

(7) Paper feed motor B. RSPF unit
1) Remove the document tray.
3) Remove the PS clutch.
4) Loosen the belt tensioning screw to allow belt removal. d
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame. c
b
a
e
Parts
a Reverse clutch
b PS clutch
c Paper feed motor
d Transport motor
e Pressure release solenoid
f RSPF driver PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.

earth wire. Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and
remove the harness cover and the locking band.
5) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
Remove the harness from the paper feed motor.
NOTE: Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
70mm
30mm
Cable tie
3) Loosen the screw, and lower the angle adjustment plate.

4) Open the RSPF unit until it is upright. Remove the screw, and 3) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet.
slide the RSPF unit to the rear side. Fit the step screw with the
key hole of the hinge and remove the RSPF unit.
4) Remove the harness from the wire saddle, and disconnect the
connector. Remove the screw, and remove the grounding wire.
Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Remove the docu-
ment tray.
(1) Reverse clutch

1) Open the paper feed unit.
5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the snap band.

Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire.
2) Remove the screw. Disengage the pawls (2 positions) of the

front cabinet by inserting a minus screwdriver under the base
tray, and remove the front cabinet.

6) Remove the screw, and remove the transport unit. (3) Paper feed motor
1) Remove the reverse clutch.
3) Loosen the belt tensioning screw to allow belt removal.
Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame.
7) Remove the E-ring, and remove the reverse clutch.

NOTE: When installing, engage the rotation-stopper of the clutch
with the frame.
4) Remove the belt from the paper feed motor. Remove the
screw, and remove the shield plate and the paper feed motor.
NOTE: Do not use the attached harness. Use the original harness.
If the motor harness needs replacement, order the harness
shown in the parts guide.
(2) PS clutch
2) Remove the E-ring, and remove the PS clutch.
NOTE: When installing, attach the rotation-stopper of the clutch to
the frame.
(4) Transport motor

1) Remove the reverse clutch.
3) Remove the drive frame.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the transport motor.

(5) Pressure release solenoid
1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit.
harness from the edge saddle. Remove the solenoid unit.
NOTE: When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the slit of the
lever.
3) Remove the screw, and remove the pressure release solenoid.

NOTE: When installing, insert the solenoid pin into the long hole of
the frame.
(6) RSPF driver PWB

1) Remove the rear cabinet of the RSPF unit.
PWB supporter. Remove the RSPF driver PWB.

[D] SCANNER SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. N model
MHPS
6 9
3
MIM
7
4
CLI
3
1
2
8
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
8
8
%0
%0

%0

%0

.'&
.'&
.'&
.'&
%.A10
219'4
.'&
.'&
/*25
)0&
)0&
)0&
8
80
8
8

0%
2

%0

.'&&4+8'429$

%0
%0
%0

5%0%0629$
/+/A:#
/+/A:$
%.A10
219'4
/+/A#
/+/A$
/*25
)0&
80
)0&
)0&
8
4'5A%%&#&
#('A%56)
#('A5%.-
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4'
4$
4&
4&
4%
4%
4$
4#
4#
#8
#8
#8

%0
%0

4'5A%%&#&
#('A%56)
#('A5%.-
#('A94&
#('A4&&
#('A%5
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
%.-
%.-
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
#8
#8
)0&
)0&
)0&
)0&
4'
4'
4&
4&
4%
4%
4$
4$
4#
#8
#8
#8
4#
4#
%%&29$

CLI LED lamp unit Illuminates the document.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
4 No. 1 mirror Reflects the document image into the No. 2 mirror.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.
MX-M503N SCANNER SECTION D 1

B. U model
MHPS
5
4
6 9
3
MIM
7
CLI
3
1
2
8
1
2
MHPS
GND2
+5VN
+24V3
+24V3
GND1
GND1
CL
5597-05APB
CL INVERTER
MHPS
PWB
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
2
CN
CN17
CN7
CN1
B3B-PH-K-S
5597-05CPB7F
B4B-PH-SM4-TB
SCN-CNT PWB
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
/RES_CCDAD
AFE_CSTG
AFE_SCLK
AFE_WRD
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
MIM_XA
MIM_XB
CLK+
A10V
A10V
CLK-
RD+
RC+
RE+
RB+
RA+
A5V
A5V
A5V
MIM_A
MIM_B
RD-
RC-
RE-
RB-
RA-
+24V3
+24V3
MHPS
GND2
GND1
GND1
+5VN
CL
FI-RE41S-VF
CN10
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN1
FI-RE41S-VF
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/RES_CCDAD
AFE_CSTG
AFE_SCLK
AFE_WRD
AFE_RDD
AFE_CS
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
A3.3V
CLK+
A10V
A10V
CLK-
RD+
RC+
RE+
RB+
RA+
A5V
A5V
A5V
RD-
RC-
RE-
RB-
RA-
CCD PWB

CLI Scanner lamp Illuminates the document.
MHPS Scanner home position sensor Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
MIM Scanner motor Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.

1 Pulley belt Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
2 Pulley Drives the scanner drive wire.
3 Scanner drive wire Transmits the scanner motor drive to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
6 No. 3 mirror Reflects the document image into the lens.
7 Lens Shrinking the image (light) of the document, and project it on CCD.
8 CCD PWB Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
9 Idle gear Transmits the scanner motor drive power to the belt.

2. Operational descriptions
A. N model
(1) Outline
This section performs the following functions.
1) Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
three lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (ana-
log).
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig-
nals by the A/D converter.
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec-
tion (scanner control PWB).
(2) Detail description
a. Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by
the drive wires.
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from R
the scanner control PWB.
G
b. LED lamp drive
B
The LED lamp (CLI) is driven by the LED lamp drive voltage gener-
ated in the LED drive PWB according to the control signal sent from
(Image data for 1 line)
c. Image scan/color separation
Light is radiated to the document by the LED lamp, and the contrast
of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three lines of R G B
RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog). Red component Green component Blue component
The color components of document images are extracted to R, G, image data image data image data
and B separately by the three kinds of CCD elements (R,G,B).
The red CCD extracts the red component of document images, the d. Image signal A/D conversion
green CCD green the components, and the blue CCD the blue 1) The image signal (analog) for each of R, G, and B is converted
components. This operation is called the color separation. into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
The CCD unit looks like one unit, but it includes three kinds of CCD Each color pixel has 10bit information.
elements, R, G, and B.
2) The 10bit digital image signals of R, G, B are sent to the image
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by process section.
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc-
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner CCD PWB
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and Analog IC
reflected to the CCD. CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
The scan resolution is 600 dpi. (6 Lines) R
G
B
Buffer TG
R,G,B Color filter
Timing
Generator
CCD Elements
e. Zooming operation
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
3LINES CCD UNIT Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
but performed with the image process technology (by the software).

B. U model d. Image signal A/D conversion
1) The image signal (analog) is converted into 10bit digital signal
(1) Outline
by the A/D converter.
This section performs the following functions.
2) The 10bit digital image signals are sent to the image process
1) Light is radiated to the document by the xenon lamp, and the section.
contrast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of
monochrome to be converted into the image signal (analog). CCD PWB
2) The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital sig- Analog IC
nals by the A/D converter. CCD
AFE ADC LVDS
3) The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process sec- (6 Lines) R
tion (scanner control PWB). G
B
(2) Detail description
Buffer TG
a. Optical section drive
The optical section drive power is transmitted from the scanner
motor (MIM) to the drive pulley and the wire through the belt, to
drive the copy lamp unit and the mirror base which are attached by Timing
the drive wires. Generator
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
b. Xenon lamp drive
e. Zooming operation
The xenon lamp (CLI) is driven by the xenon lamp drive voltage
Zooming in the sub scanning direction is performed by changing
generated in the lamp drive PWB according to the control signal
the scanning speed in the sub scanning direction.
sent from the scanner control PWB.
Zooming in the main scanning direction is not performed optically,
c. Image scan/color separation but performed with the image process technology (by the software).
Light is radiated to the document by the xenon lamp, and the con-
trast of the reflected light is read by the CCD elements of three 3. Disassembly and assembly
lines of RGB to be converted into the image signal (analog).
The document scan in the main scanning direction is performed by A. Scanner unit
the CCD element. The document scan in the sub scanning direc-
tion is performed by shifting the scanner unit with the scanner
N model b U model
motor. Document images are optically reduced by the lens and
a c
reflected to the CCD.
The scan resolution is 600 dpi.
CCD Elements h
f
CCD UNIT
e
g
Parts
a LED lamp (N model)
b LED drive PWB (N model)
c Scanner lamp (U model)
d CL inverter PWB (U model)
e CCD unit
f Scanner motor
g Document detection light receiving PWB
h Document detection light emitting PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover. 8) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner unit.
2) Remove the DSPF/RSPF unit. [Refer to "[C] DSPF/RSPF
SECTION."]
3) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
4) Remove the operation panel unit. [Refer to "[B] OPERATION
PANEL."]
5) Remove the upper cabinet rear, the upper cabinet right, the
upper cabinet left, and the rear cabinet.
6) Disconnect the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
the harness from the wire saddle.
(1) LED lamp/LED drive PWB (N model)

1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
C B
7) Remove the screw, and remove the holder. Disconnect the

connector, and remove the harness from the wire saddle.
2) Move the LED lamp unit to the position where there are
notches in the frame.

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 2) Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screw, and
the LED lamp unit. Remove the LED lamp. Disconnect the remove the wire.
connector.
3 2
3) While rotating the lamp unit, lift it. Remove the harness holder
and the flat cable, and remove the lamp unit.

LED drive PWB.
4) Disconnect the connector, and remove the lamp.
(2) Scanner lamp/CL inverter PWB (U model)

1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and 5) Remove the CL inverter PWB.
the table glass (C).
C B

(3) CCD unit (4) Scanner motor
1) Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and 1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
the table glass (C). rear. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector and remove the scanner motor.
C B
2) Remove the dark box cover. Disconnect the connector, and (5) Document detection light receiving PWB
remove the CCD unit. 1) Remove the operation base plate. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the document detection
N model light receiving PWB.
U model (6) Document detection light emitting PWB

1) Remove the upper cabinet rear. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the light emitting unit.
3) Remove the document detection light emitting PWB.

[E] PAPER FEED SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Manual paper feed section
CN9
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/CPFM_D 4 (NC) 3 FG-OUT
CPFM_CK 6 5 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 7 (NC) 7 CW/CCW
B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 4 /CPFM_CK
CN17 6 CPFM_LD
GND2 1 (NC)
GND2 2 (NC) CN4 CN1
ADUMHB 3 14 ADUMHB PFM24V 1 2 PFM24V
ADUMHA 4 25 ADUMHA PFM24V 2 5 PFM24V
ADUMHXB 5 16 ADUMHXB PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
ADUMHXA 6 23 ADUMHXA PFMB// 4 6 PFMB//
POMCNT 7 11 POMCNT PFMA// 5 4 PFMA//
ADUMHCNT 8 21 ADUMHCNT PFMA/ 6 1 PFMA/
POMB 9 17 POMB B06B-PASK-1
POMA 10 15 POMA
POMXB 11 19 POMXB
PCU PWB POMXA 12 13 POMXA
ADUMLB 13 26 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 14 22 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 15 24 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 16 20 ADUMLXA
CN10
8 /MPGS RRMCNT 17 1 RRMCNT MOTOR
(NC) 6 24V1B ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
DRIVER
7
5
/MPFS
24V1B
RRMB
RRMA
19
20
7
5
RRMB
RRMA PWB
PFM
4 /MPUC RRMXB 21 9 RRMXB
2 24V1B RRMXA 22 3 RRMXA
B18B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) PFMB 23 10 PFMB
PFMA 24 8 PFMA
QR/P4-32P-C(01) / QR/P4-32S-C(02) CN6
PFMXB 25 12 PFMXB
1 5VN 1 1 5VN
PFMXA 26 6 PFMXA
2 SIN3 2 11 SIN3 (NC) (NC)
PFM2CNT 27 2 GND2
3 SELIN2 3 7 SELIN2
PFMCNT 28 4 PFMCNT
4 APPD1 4 12 APPD1 (NC)
PFM2B 29 B26B-PNDZS-1
5 MPFD 5 8 MPFD (NC)
PFM2A 30
6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD (NC)
PFM2XB 31
17 GND2 17 15 GND2 (NC)
PFM2XA 32
CN1 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1 (NC)
(nc) 33
5VN 1 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3 (NC)
(nc) 34
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
20
21
APPD2
POD3
20
21
14
10
APPD2
POD3
CPFM MPUC
APPD1 7 22 5VN 22 3 5VN
NC(APPD3) 9 28 /MPGS 28 20 5VN
MPFD 11 12 /MPFS 12 23 GND2
MPWD 13 13 24V1B 13 22 PCS
NC(HUD_M) 15 30 /MPUC 30 21 PCS_LED
GND2 2 31 24V1B 31 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
SELIN1 4
SELIN3 6 SMP-02V-NC / SMR-02V-N
APPD2
POD3
8
10
1
2
24V1B
/MPUC
1
2
4
NC(FAX_D) 12 1
NC(TH_M) 14
5VN 16
S16B-PHDSS-B
5
MPFD MPFS
3
2
MPED MTOP1
RIGHT DOOR
I/F PWB
MPWD MTOP2
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC MPGS
8 24V1B 1
1
2
24V1B
/MPFS
1
2
MPLD
CN3 7 /MPFS 2
MPED 7 6 MPED 3 1 MPED
5VLED7 9 4 5VLED7 5 3 5VLED7
5VLED11 12 3 5VLED11 6
MPFD 10 2 /MPGS 7
S32B-PHDSS-B 1 MPFD 8
PHNR-05-H/BU05P-TR-P-H/PHNR-05-H 1 24V1B 1
6 24V1B 6 5 24V1B 1 2 /MPGS 2
4 24V1B 4 4 /MPGS 2
2 24V1B 2 3 MPFD 3 1 MPFD
5 GND2 5 2 GND2 4 2 GND2
3 GND2 3 1 5VLED11 5 3 5VLED11
1 GND2 1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DS-SP2(05)
9 (NC) 1
8 (NC) 2
H-41-RNHP/H-P-RT-P41UB/H-41-RNHP 7 (NC) 3 1 MPLD
CN3 14 (NC) 1 6 MPLD 4 2 GND2
MPLD 16 13 (NC) 2 5 GND2 5 3 5VLED12
NC(GND2) 17 12 MPLD 3 4 5VLED12 6
5VLED12 18 11 5VLED12 4 3 5VN 7 3 5VN
5VN 19 10 5VN 5 2 MPWD 8 2 MPWD
MPWD 20 9 MPWD 6 1 GND2 9 1 GND2
NC(GND2) 21 8 MTOP2 7
MTOP2 22 7 5VLED13 8
NC(GND2) 23 6 MTOP1 9
5VLED13 24 5 5VLED9 10 1 MTOP2
MTOP1 25 4 (NC) 11 2 GND2
NC(GND2) 26 3 (NC) 12 3 5VLED13
5VLED9 27 2 GND2 13
GND2 14 1 (NC) 14 1 MTOP1
5 (NC)
S32B-PHDSS-B 2 GND2
3 5VLED9
6
4
3
2
1
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DS-2C + DF11-6DP-SP1(05)
MX-M503N PAPER FEED SECTION E 1

CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
MPED Manual feed paper empty detection Detects the manual feed paper empty.
MPFD Manual feed paper entry detection Detects the manual feed paper entry.
MPDS Paper pickup solenoid Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
MPGS Manual paper feed gate solenoid Controls the manual paper feed gate Open/Close.
MPLD Manual feed paper length detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper length.
MPUC Manual paper feed clutch Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
MPWD Manual paper feed tray paper width detector Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
MTOP1 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (storing position).
MTOP2 Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2 Detects the manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position (pull-out position).
PFM Transport motor Transports paper from the paper feed section to the transport motor drive system.
Transports paper from the right door section to the transport motor drive system.

1 Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray) Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
2 Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray) Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
3 Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray) Sends paper to the paper feed roller.
4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
5 Transport roller 12 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. / Transports the
paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport roller 8.

B. Tray paper feed section
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H SMR-04V-N / SMP-04V-NC CN9

1 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1 17 24V1B
2 /CPUC1 1 2 /CPUC1 2 18 /CPUC1
3 24V1B 3 19 24V1B
4 /CPUC2 4 20 /CPUC2
1 24V1B 2
2 /CPUC2 1
INT24V1 1
DF11-8DS-2C GND2 2
DF11-8DS-2C
FG-OUT 3 (NC)
+DF11-8DP-SP1 +DF11-8DP-SP1
/CPFM_D 5 1 INT24V1
CW/CCW 7 (NC) 2 GND2
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
/CPFM_CK 4 4 /CPFM_D
CPFM_LD 6 6 CPFM_CK
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
PHNR-02-H / BU02P-TR-P-H / PHNR-02-H 7 CPFM_LD
GND2 3 1 24V1B 2 15 24V1B
CLUD1 2 2 /CPFC1 1 16 /CPFC1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
(NC) 7
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VN 1 21 CLUM1
22 CLUM2
GND2 3 23 GND2
14 GND2 1
CPED1 2 24 GND2
13 CLUD1 2
5VN 1 14 /CPFC2
12 5VN 3
13 24V1B
11 GND2 4
GND2 3 B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
10 CPED1 5
CPFD1 2
9 5VN 6
5VN 1
8 GND2 7
7 CPFD1 8
GND2 3
6 5VN 9
DSW_C 2
5 GND2 10
5VN 1
4 DSW_C 11
SMR-02V-N / SMP-02V-NC 3 5VN 12
1 /CPFC2 1 2 /CPFC2 13
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 14
CPFC2 CPUC1
CPFM
PCU PWB
CLUD1 4
CPED1
CPFC1
2
1
3 DSW_C
10 CPUC2
9
CPFD1
CSS11 CLUM1 /CLUM1 2
CSS13 CSS12 GND2 1
/CLUM2 2
GND2 1
CSS14 DF1B-24DEP-2.5RC / DF1B-24DES-2.5RC

1 5VN 1
CN5
1 5VN
2 GND2 2 2 GND2
5 CPFD1 5 3 CPFD1
GND2 3 20 CPFD2 20 4 CPFD2
3 CLUD1 3 5 CLUD1
CSPD1 CSPD1
5VN
2
1 18
4
CLUD2
CPED1
18
4
6
7
CLUD2
CPED1
19 CPED2 19 8 CPED2
GND2 3 8 CSPD1 8 9 CSPD1
CSPD2 2 17 CSPD2 17 10 CSPD2
5VN 1 6 DSW_C 6 11 DSW_C
7 /CPFC2 7
(NC) 1 21 24V1B 21
GND2 2 22 (NC) 22
CSS11 3 9 CSS11 9 15 CSS11
11 CSS12
CSS13
4
5
13
10
CSS21
CSS12
13
10
16
17
CSS21
CSS12
CSS14 6 14 CSS22 14 18 CSS22
11 CSS13 11 19 CSS13
15 CSS23 15 20 CSS23
12 CSS14 12 21 CSS14
16 CSS24 16 22 CSS24
CLUD2 (NC)
GND2
1
2
23
24
5VN
GND2
23
24
23
24
5VN
GND2
CPED2 CSS21
CSS22
3
4
CSS23 5
CSS24 6
6 PHNR-09-H / BU09P-TR-P-H / PHNR-09-H

5 GND2 3 9 GND2 1
CPFD2 CLUD2
5VN
2
1
8
7
CLUD2
5VN
2
3
7 8 6 GND2 4
GND2 3 5 CPED2 5
CPED2 2 4 5VN 6
12 5VN 1 3
2
GND2
CPFD2
7
8
GND2 3 1 5VN 9
CSS21 CPFD2 2
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VN 1
CSS23 CSS22
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
CSS24
10
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
SSJC6-4
CSPD2 CLUM2
11

CLUD1 Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 1 upper limit.
CLUD2 Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection) Detects the tray 2 upper limit.
CLUM1 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CLUM2 Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2) Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
CPED1 Tray 1 paper empty detection Detects the tray 1 paper empty.
CPED2 Tray 2 paper empty detection Detects the tray 2 paper empty.
CPFC1 Tray vertical transport clutch Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport roller in the paper feed tray section.
CPFC2 Tray transport clutch 2 Controls ON/OFF of the transport roller 2 in the paper feed tray section.
CPFD1 Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 1 paper pass.
CPFD2 Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection) Detects tray 2 paper pass.
CPFM Paper feed motor Drives the paper feed section.
CPUC1 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 1 section.
CPUC2 Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the paper feed tray 2 section.
CSS11 Tray 1 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 1 rear edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS12 Tray 1 rear edge detection 2 The paper size of tray 1 is detected.
CSS21 Tray 2 rear edge detection 1 Insertion of the tray is detected by detecting either of tray 2 rear edge detection 1 - 4.
CSS22 Tray 2 rear edge detection 2 The paper size of tray 2 is detected.
DSW_C Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close detection Detects the tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close.

4 Torque limiter A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
8 Transport roller 4 (Drive) Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray) to
the transport roller 7.
10 Transport roller 7 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the transport roller 8.
11 Rotating plate Lifts up the paper, and always keeps constant the paper feed position.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Bypass B. Tray paper feed
The pickup roller moves up and down to press the paper surface, (1) Paper feed front operation
separating the paper on the top of the paper bundle and sending it
Set paper and insert the paper feed tray, and the pickup roller
to the paper feed roller section.
falls to turn ON the paper feed tray sensor.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the transport section to pre-
The lift-up motor drives the rotating plate to move it up.
vent against double feed with the separation roller. The manual
paper feed clutch controls ON/OFF of the pickup roller and the The paper upper limit sensor turns ON, and the rotation plate
paper feed roller. Paper is sent to the resist roller by the manual stops at the specified position.
transport roller. (2) Paper feed operation
When copy/print operation is started, the motor and the clutch
are turned ON to rotate the pickup roller in the paper pickup tim-
ing, feeding paper.
At the same time, the paper feed roller rotates to transport paper
to the transport section. At that time, the separation roller rotates
to prevent against double feed of paper.
(3) Paper remaining detection
The notifying levels of paper remaining quantity are 4 steps in
total; 3 steps of paper remaining quantity and 1 step of paper
empty. The result is displayed.
(4) Paper remaining quantity detection method
The paper remaining quantity is judged from the number of rota-
tions of the remaining quantity sensor from starting the lift-up
operation of the paper feed tray to turning ON the upper limit
sensor.

(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects CPED

the state of no remaining paper. (paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
During no-paper detection Detection Actuator
CSPD
1/3 Field (remaining paper detection)
Sensor logic: Low
Remaining paper 1/3 position
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low

A. Manual paper feed unit 2) Remove the screw, and remove the connector cover. Remove
the screw and remove the ADU inner cover.
b
Parts
a Manual paper feed gate solenoid
b Paper pickup solenoid
1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.

3) Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl. 7) Disconnect the connector, and remove the manual paper feed
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever. unit.
3
1
3
4 (1) Manual paper feed gate solenoid
5 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.
4) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
3) Disconnect the connector, and disengage the pawl, and

remove the manual paper feed gate solenoid.
5) Remove the MF harness cover, and disconnect the connector.
(2) Paper pickup solenoid

6) Remove the MF tray installing shaft, and remove the manual 1) Remove the manual paper feed unit.
feed tray unit. 2) Remove the MF base guide supporting plate and the spring.

3) Remove each part, and remove the transport roller 12 (drive). 7) Remove the MF upper guide supporting plate.
1
2
2
1 1
8) Remove the paper pickup solenoid.
4) Remove each part, and remove the MF drive plate.
B. Tray paper feed unit

5) Disconnect the connector, and remove the MF front plate.
1 Parts
a Paper transport clutch 2
1) Remove the right cabinet front. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]

6) Remove the MF upper base paper guide unit.

3) Remove the right lower door unit. C. Others
4) Remove the paper feed movable PG lower.
Parts
a Paper size detection PWB
(1) Paper size detection PWB

5) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1, 2.

paper size detection unit.
(1) Paper transport clutch 2

1) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1.
cover. Remove the bearing, the belt and the clutch unit.
Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper transport clutch 2. 3) Disengage the pawl, and remove the paper size detection
NOTE: When installing, engage the rotation-stopper of the clutch PWB.
with the frame. Remove the spring from the paper size detection PWB.

[F] PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
MOTOR DRIVER PWB

CN2
RRM24V 2 7 RRM24V
RRM24V 5 8 RRM24V
RRM RRMB/ 3 9 RRMB/
RRMB// 6 10 RRMB//
RRMA// 4 11 RRMA//
RRMA/ 1 12 RRMA/
PHR-6-R B12B-PASK-1
CN1
PFM24V 2 1 PFM24V
1
PFM24V 5 2 PFM24V
2 PFM PFMB/ 3 3 PFMB/
PFMB// 6 4 PFMB//
PFMA// 4 5 PFMA//
PFMA/ 1 6 PFMA/
PHR-6 B06B-PASK-1
PPD2
3 PCU PWB
179228-3 SMR-07V-N / SMP-07V-NC CN6
5VN 1 5 5VN 5 25 5VN
PPD2 2 6 PPD2 6 26 PPD2
GND1 3 7 GND2 7 24 GND2
1 5VN 1 2 5VN
PPD1 2 PPD1 2 4 PPD1
3 GND2 3 6 GND2
179228-3 4 (NC) 4 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
5VN 1
PPD1 2
GND2 3

PFM Transport motor Drives transport between the resist roller and the paper feed section, transport between the resist roller
and the right door section.
PPD1 Resist pre-detection Detects the paper in front of resist roller.
PPD1 Resist detection Detects the paper in rear of resist roller.
RRM Resist motor Drives the resist roller and controls ON/OFF.

1 Resist roller (Drive) Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport timing to adjust relative relations
between images and paper.
2 Resist roller (Idle) Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give the transport power of the transport roller to the
paper.
3 Transport roller 8 (Drive) Transports the paper to resist roller.
MX-M503N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 1

Transport paper from each paper feed section to the resist roller A. Resist roller unit
with two or more transport rollers. The paper transport clutch con- 1) Remove the photo-conductor unit. [Refer to "[H] PHOTO-CON-
trols ON/OFF of each transport roller. The resist roller controls the
DUCTOR SECTION."]
relative positions of the transported paper and transfer images.
2) Remove the tray paper feed unit 1. [Refer to "[E] PAPER FEED
The resist roller controls the relative positions of the transported SECTION."]
paper and transfer images. The resist roller is driven by the resist
3) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
motor. The relative positions of the paper and the transfer images
are determined by the ON timing of the transport motor. 4) Remove the ADU connection drive.

the resist roller unit.
MX-M503N PAPER TRANSPORT SECTION F 2

[G] LSU SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
LSU PWB MOTHER PWB PCU PWB

CN2 CN2 CN3 CN1 (MOTHER)
GND2 1 GR GR 3 GND2 GND2 1 1 GND2
+3.3V 3 OR OR 1 +3.3V GND2 2 2 GND2
GND1 2 GR GR 4 GND1 5VLD 3 3 5VLD
+24V3 4 RD RD 2 +24V3 5VLD 4 4 5VLD
+5VN 5 BL BL 5 +5VN GND2 5 5 GND2
GND2 6 GR GR 6 GND2 GND2 6 (NC) (NC) 6 (nc)
CN1 CN5 S06B-XASK-1(LF)(SN) RXD_PCU 7 7 PCU_RXD
+5VLD 2 BL BL 23 +5V_LD PCU_DSR 8 8 PCU_DSR
GND2 1 GY GY 24 GND2 CN3 TXD_PCU 9 9 PCU_TXD
GND2 3 GY GY 18 GND2 +5V_LD 1 22 +5V_LD PCU_DTR 10 10 PCU_DTR
nSH_K1 15 BR BR 15 nSH_K1 GND2 2 GR GR 11 GND2 GND2 11 11 GND2
GND2 12 GY GY 1 GND2 nSCK_LSU 4 BR BR 12 nSCK_LSU GND2 12 12 GND2
nSH_K2 13 BR BR 13 nSH_K2 GND2 3 GR GR 10 GND2 nPOF 13 13 /POF
DT1- 14 WH WH 14 DT_K1- nTRANS_DAT 5 BR BR 9 nTRANS_DAT nPCU_TRG 14 14 nPCU_TRG
DT1+ 16 PK PK 16 DT_K1+ nRSV_DAT 6 PK BR 14 nRSV_DAT nFAX_LED 15 15 /FAX_LED
GND2 20 SD SD 12 GND2 JOBEND_INT 8 BR PK 13 JOBEND_INT PCU_RES 16 16 PCU_RES
GND2 6 SD SD 2 GND2 LSUASIC_RST 7 8 LSUASIC_RST GND2 17 17 GND2
DT2- 8 WH WH 8 DT_K2- nTRANS_RST 9 7 nTRANS_RST JOBEND_INT 19 19 JOBEND_INT
DT2+ 10 PK PK 10 DT_K2+ VSYNC_K_N 11 BR BR 18 LSU_VSYNC_K_N RSV_DAT 21 21 RSV_DAT
nLDERR 11 BR BR 11 nLDERR_K VSYNC_K_P 12 PK PK 17 LSU_VSYNC_K_P GND2 23 23 GND2
VREF_K1 9 BR BR 9 VREF_K1 VSYNC_K2_P 13 (NC) (NC) 16 (nc) TRANS_DAT 22 25 TRANS_DAT
VREF_K2 7 BR BR 7 VREF_K2 VSYNC_K2_N 14 (NC) (NC) 20 (nc) LSU_RST 18 26 LSU_RST
nENB_K 5 BR BR 5 nENB_K GND2 16 19 GND2 TRANS_RST 24 27 TRANS_RST
LDCHK2 17 BR BR 6 LD_CHK_2 nPCU_TRG 10 15 nPCU_TRG SCK 20 28 SCK
LDCHK1 18 BR BR 3 LD_CHK_1 GND2 15 (NC) (NC) 21 GND2 GND2 25 29 GND2
LDCHK3 19 BR BR 17 LD_CHK_3 S16B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) (NC) 23 GND2 GND2 26 30 GND2
GND2 4 (NC) (NC) 4 nLDERR_K2 (NC) 24 GND2 B26B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) 18 GND2
S20B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B24B-PHDSS-B 20 HUD_DV
22 TH_DV
CN4 CN4 24 +3.3V
CH0_N 1 WH WH 21 LSU_CH0_N B30B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
CN1
GND2 GND2 3 SD SD 20 GND2
GND2 4 GR GR 21
nBD GND2 4 SD SD 19 GND2
BD 3 BR BR 19
GND2 CH1_N 5 WH WH 17 LSU_CH1_N
GND2 2 GR GR 22
+5VN CH1_P 6 PK PK 18 LSU_CH1_P
+5VN 1 BL BL 20
CH2_N 7 WH WH 15 LSU_CH2_N
S4B-PH-K-S B24B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
N model CN1 CN1 GND2 10 SD SD 13 GND2
POLYCLK 1 1 nPOLY_CK CLCLK_N 11 WH WH 11 LSU_CLK_N
/LOCK 2 2 nPOLY_LOCK CLCLK_P 12 PK PK 12 LSU_CLK_P
/START 3 3 nPOLY_START CH3_N 13 WH WH 9 LSU_CH3_N
GND1 4 4 GND1 CH3_P 14 PK PK 10 LSU_CH3_P
+24V3 5 5 +24V3 GND2 15 SD SD 8 GND2
BM05B-PASS-TFT B5B-PH-K-S GND2 16 7 GND2
ECLK_LSU_N 17 WH WH 5 LSU_ECLK_N
U model CN1 CN1
18 PK PK 6 LSU_ECLK_P
ECLK_LSU_P
nPOLY_CK 2 1 nPOLY_CK
nPOLY_LOCK 3 2 nPOLY_LOCK
nPOLY_START 4 3 nPOLY_START
HSYNC_LSU_P 21 PK PK 2 LSU_HSYNC_P
GND1 5 4 GND1
HSYNC_LSU_N 22 WH WH 1 LSU_HSYNC_N
+24V3 6 5 +24V3
S22B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) B22B-PHDSS-B
nBRAKE 1 6 nBRAKE
B6B-PH-SM4-TB B6B-PH-K-S
SMP-04V-NC / SMR-04V-N SMP-06V-NC / SMR-06V-N SMR-10V-N / SMP-10V-NC SLR-06VF / SLP-06V CN9
1 LSUCFM_V 1 1 LSUCFM_V 1 5 LSUCFM_V 5 4 LSUCFM_V 4 9 LSUCFM_V
4 LSUCFM_LD 4 2 LSUCFM_LD 2 6 LSUCFM_LD 6 3 LSUCFM_LD 3 8 LSUCFM_LD
2 /LSUCFM_CNT 2 3 /LSUCFM_CNT 3 7 /LSUCFM_CNT 7 6 /LSUCFM_CNT 6 10 /LSUCFM_CNT
3 GND2 3 4 GND2 4 8 GND2 8 5 GND2 5 11 GND2
PGM
8
1 5
2
4
3
7 6
LSUCFM

LSUCFM LSU cooling fan motor Cools the section LSU.
PGM Polygon motor Reflects the laser beams at constant-speed rotating.
MX-M503N LSU SECTION G 1

1 LD PWB Controls flashing of laser beams and the output values.
2 Cylindrical lens Converges laser beams to focus.
3 f lens 1 Laser beams are refracted so that the laser scanning speed at the both ends of the OPC drum is the same as
4 f lens 2 that at the center.
5 Reflection mirror for BD Laser beams for BD are reflected to the BD PWB.
6 Collective lens for BD Converges laser beams to the BD PWB.
7 BD PWB Detects the timing for starting laser scanning.
8 LSU PWB Laser beams are controlled and the polygon motor control signal is generated according to the PCU PWB
control signal and image data.
2. Operational descriptions C. Outline of LSU specifications

A. Outline Process speed 45/50 CPM model: 225mm/sec
28/36 CPM model: 175mm/sec
Image data sent from the image process circuit are converted into
Resolution N model: 1200dpi
laser beams which are radiated to the surface of the OPC drum.
U model: 600dpi
In this model, the 2-laser system is employed which radiates two Laser beam Twin bean
laser beams. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system from Laser power Max. 0.255mW
the laser to the polygon mirror and the scanning system of the opti- Beam diameter Main scan = 50 to 80m, Sub scan = 60 to 90m
cal elements including the polygon mirror. Effective scan width 310mm
B. Composition LD wavelength 280 to 300nm
(Primary system)
NOTE: Do not disassemble the LSU unit.
A. LSU removal
1) Turn OFF the machine power, and disconnect the power plug
from the power outlet.
2) Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. [Refer
to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
3) Disconnect the LSU connectors, and remove the securing
screws to remove the LSU.
(Scanning system)
NOTE: Tip the LSU slightly to insert the alignment boss into the
LSU alignment hole. To check for proper alignment,
remove the toner cartridge to check.
(On the polygon motor)
Number of Rotating
Model Bearing
mirror surface speed
N 45/50 CPM model 7 surfaces 45556rpm AIR
N 28/36 CPM model 7 surfaces 35433rpm AIR
U 45/50 CPM model 7 surfaces 22778rpm OIL
U 36 CPM model 7 surfaces 17716rpm OIL
MX-M503N LSU SECTION G 2

[H] PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
OZFM
DM
PSPS
MC
3
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
5 INT24V1
GND2
1
2
1
2
INT24V1
GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
2 24V1B 2 17 24V1B
1 1 /PSPS 1 18 /PSPS
CN15
1 OZFM_V 1 21 OZFM_V
2 /OZFM_CNT 2 19 /OZFM_CNT
2 3
4
GND2
OZFM_LD
3
4
17
15
GND2
OZFM_LD
HV PWB CN3
RD CN1 20 /HV_CLK
MHV /HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
YL HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 GB /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1 DC PWB
TNBOX FW
CN7
1
GND1 2
TNF GND1 3 (NC) PCU PWB
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
5V_TNF 3
TNF 1
GND2 2 CN16
1 5V_TNF 1 10 5V_TNF 10 15 5V_TNF
2 TNF 2 11 TNF 11 17 TNF
3 GND2 3 12 GND2 12 19 GND2
5V_TNBOX 3 4 5V_TNBOX 4 13 5V_TNBOX 13 16 5V_TNBOX
TNBOX 1 5 TNBOX 5 14 TNBOX 14 18 TNBOX
GND2 2 6 GND2 6 15 GND2 15 20 GND2

DM Drum motor Drives the OPC drum and the developing unit.
MC Main charger Charges the OPC drum surface.
OZFM Ozone fan Discharges ozone generated in the machine.
PSPS Separation solenoid Separates paper from the OPC drum.
TNBOX Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.
TNF Waste toner box remaining quantity detection Detects installation of the waste toner box. Detects the waste toner near end and the waste
toner full.
MX-M503N PHOTO-CONDUCTOR SECTION H 1

1 OPC drum Latent electrostatic images are formed.
2 Cleaning blade Cleans and remove residual toner from the OPC drum surface.
3 Waste toner transport screw Transports waste toner to the toner collection box.
4 Ozone filter Removes ozone.
5 Waste toner collection box Collects waste toner.
2. Operational descriptions 3) After transfer operation, remaining toner is removed by the

cleaning blade.
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger. Toner removed from the OPC drum surface is transported to
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the waste toner section by the waste toner transport screw.
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1) The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main
charger.
Main corona unit
Screen grid
TNBOX
TNF
High voltage unit
OPC drum
CTL
CGL
Waste toner detection is performed by two sensors (TNBOX,
Aluminum layer TNF).
The following four statuses of the waste toner box are detected
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The by the two sensors as shown below.
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the volt-
age applied to the screen grid. Output level Sensor status
Pattern Status
TNBOX TNF TNBOX TNF
2) Laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
1 L H Transmitted Interrupted Waste toner
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images. box not
provided
2 L L Transmitted Transmitted Waste toner
box provided
+ Not full
3 H L Interrupted Transmitted Waste toner
OPC drum OPC drum box provided
+ Near end
4 H H Interrupted Interrupted Waste toner
Laser beams box provided
+ Full
Aluminum layer
CGL
CTL
When laser lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated on the CGL are attracted by the
negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other
hand, negative charges are attracted by the positive charges in
the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are bal-
anced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reduc-
ing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where laser lights are not
radiated. As a result, latent electrostatic images are formed on
the OPC drum surface.

3. Disassembly and assembly 6) Remove the blue screw. Pull the photo-conductor unit, and
hold the handle to remove the unit.
A. Photo-conductor unit
1) Open the front cover.
3) Remove the toner cartridge.

[Refer to "[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION."]
4) Remove the developing unit.
[Refer to "[J] DEVELOPING SECTION."]

[i] TONER SUPPLY SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
CN15
GND2 4 1 GND2 1 16 GND2
5VN 3 2 5VN 2 10 5VN
CRUM_CLK 2 3 CRUM_CLK 3 12 CRUM_CLK
CRUM_DATA 1 4 CRUM_DATA 4 14 CRUM_DATA
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
DM
PCU PWB
CRUM
TDSC
CN3
2 24V1B 2 1 24V1B 1 3 24V1B
1 /TDSC 1 2 /TDSC 2 4 /TDSC

CRUM Crum PWB Stores various information of the toner cartridge.
TDSC Toner supply clutch Controls ON/OFF of toner supply.
MX-M503N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 1

The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is driven by the A. Toner cartridge
drum motor to supply toner to the developing unit. 1) Open the front cover.
The toner transport screw in the toner cartridge is turned ON/OFF
by the toner supply clutch TDSC.
The toner density in the developing unit is detected by the toner
density sensor. When the density falls below the specified level, the
drum motor and the toner supply clutch TDSC are turned ON to
supply toner in the toner cartridge to the developing unit.
When the toner density reaches the specified level, TDSC turns
OFF to stop supply of toner to the developing unit.
With the above process, the toner density in the developing unit is
maintained at a fixed level.
2) Pull and remove the toner cartridge slowly and horizontally.

NOTE: When installing, hold the toner cartridge horizontally and
inset it slowly.
MX-M503N TONER SUPPLY SECTION i 2

[J] DEVELOPING SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
DM
TH_DV/
HUD_DV
FGOUT 3 (NC)
3 CW/CCW
INT24V1
7
1
(NC) CN14
1 INT24V1
GND2 2 2 GND2
/DM_D 5 4 /DM_D
DM_LD 6 5 DM_LD
DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
CN1
GND2 3 1 GND2 1 18 GND2
HUD_DV 2 2 HUD_DV 2 20 HUD_DV
TH_DV 4 3 TH_DV 3 22 TH_DV
+3.3V 1 4 +3.3V 4 24 +3.3V
5 5
1 1
6 2 2 6
7 3 3 7 PCU PWB
4 4
8 8
1 CN3
TSGout 1 1 TSGout 1 3 TSGout 3 7 TSGout
GND2 4 2 GND2 2 4 GND2 4 8 GND2
TCS 3 3 TCS 3 5 TCS 5 9 TCS
24V1B 2 4 24V1B 4 6 24V1B 6 10 24V1B
5 DVCH1 5 7 DVCH1 7 (NC) 11 5VN
6 DVCH2 6 8 DVCH2 8 12 DVCH1
7 DVCH3 7 9 DVCH3 9 (NC) 13 GND2
8 GND2 8 10 GND2 10 14 DVCH2
(NC) 15 /TNCRU
16 DVCH3
17 GND2
TCS HV PWB
(NC)
(NC)
18
19
reserve1-in
/DVBSREM
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
/HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
GR
HV_REM# 7 23 /HV_REM#
1 DVBS /HV_LD# 5 24 /HV_LD
(NC) 2 (NC) MHV-T 6 (NC) 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB
GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2

TCS Toner density sensor Detects the toner density in the developing unit.
TH_DV/HUD_DV Temperature/humidity sensor Detects the temperature and humidity of the process section for process control.

1 Developing roller Forms electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum into visible images.
2 Stirring roller Stirs toner and developer to charge toner negatively by friction.
3 Toner filter Prevents dispersing of toner.
MX-M503N DEVELOPING SECTION J 1

This converts the electrostatic latent images on the OPC drum gen- A. Developing unit
erated by the laser (writing) unit into visible images with toner.
NOTE: Be careful not to attach fingerprints or oily dirt on the DV
roller surface.
OPC drum
NOTE: Be careful not to hold the case adjacent to the developing
roller strongly.
1) Open the front cover.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are stirred and transported
by the mixing roller.
By mixing and transporting, toner and carrier are negatively
charged due to mechanical friction.
The developing bias voltage (negative) is applied to the developing
roller.
Negatively charged toner is attracted to the exposed section on the
OPC drum where the negative potential falls due to the developing
bias (negative).
If the OPC drum is not exposed, the negative potential is higher
than the developing bias voltage, and toner is not attracted.
When rotation of the OPC drum is started and stopped, some area
on the OPC drum is not charged negatively. To prevent toner from
attaching to that area, a positive voltage is applied to the drum.
OPC drum 3) Remove the blue screw, and pull the developing unit to
remove.
Toner
Carrier
Developing roller
Non-developing Developing mode

mode
MX-M503N DEVELOPING SECTION J 2

[K] TRANSFER SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
DM
FGOUT 3 (NC)
CW/CCW 7 (NC) CN14
HV PWB INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
BL GND2 2 2 GND2
PCS (NC)
1
2
DHV
(NC)
/DM_D
DM_LD
5
6
4
5
/DM_D
DM_LD
WH DM_CK 4 6 DM_CK
THV
CN3
CN1 20 /HV_CLK
/HV_CLK# 4 (NC) 21 /DHVREM
1 /HV_DATA# 3 22 /HV_DATA
RDCFM HV_REM#
/HV_LD#
7
5
(NC)
23
24
/HV_REM#
/HV_LD
MHV-T 6 25 GND2
GND2 2 26 MHV-T
INT24V2 1
DC PWB
CN7
FW 1
GND1 2
GND1 3 (NC)
GND1 4 (NC)
GND1 5
GND1 6
GND1 7 AC PWB PCU PWB
2 GND1 8 CN7
1 24V2
2 NC
1 GND1 1 3 INT24V2
HV RESISTOR PWB 2 INT24V2 2 4 INT24V2
CPWBF1593FCE2
FG FG CN6
20 5VN
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 (NC) 23 GND2
7 F-GND 7 7 5VN 7
PCS 2 2 PCS 2 (NC) (NC) 22 PCS
6 5VN 6 8 (NC) 8
PCS_LED 3 3 PCS_LED 3 21 PCS_LED
5 PCS 5 9 PCS 9
4 PCS_LED 4 10 PCS_LED 10 CN10
1 RDCFM_V 1 3 RDCFM_V 3 11 RDCFM_V 11 11 RDCFM_V
2 GND2 2 2 GND2 2 26 GND2 26 15 GND2
3 RDCFM_LD 3 1 RDCFM_LD 1 27 RDCFM_LD 27 13 RDCFM_LD

DM Drum motor Drives the OPC drum, the developing unit, and the transfer unit.
PCS Image density sensor Detects the toner patch density on the OPC drum in process control.
RDCFM Suction fan Stabilizes paper transport.

1 Transfer roller Transfers toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
2 Paper guide electrode Connected to the ground through a high resistor to maintain the paper guide at a proper potential, stabilizing the
transfer operation.
3 Separation charger Applies a high negative voltage to the paper which was charged positively in the transfer process in order to
discharge it.
MX-M503N TRANSFER SECTION K 1

2. Operational descriptions C. Toner patch density detection in the process
control
A. Transfer operation
In the process control, the toner patch density on the OPC drum is
A positive high voltage is applied to the transfer roller to transfer the detected with the image density sensor.
toner images from the OPC drum to paper.
In addition, the sensitivity of the image density sensor is automati-
OPC drum cally performed by using reflection on the OPC drum surface.
OPC drum
Separation charger
Transfer roller
Toner patch
To PCU PWB
Transfer roller
Image density sensor
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current) A. Transfer unit
B. Cleaning operation
In the cleaning process, the polarity of the voltage applied to the
transfer roller is made negative, and unnecessary toner on the
transfer roller is sent to the OPC drum, cleaned with the cleaning
blade, and transported to the waste toner section.
OPC drum
Separation charger
2) Remove the blue screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the
connector, and remove the transfer unit.
Transfer roller
Transfer mode Cleaning mode

(Constant current)
MX-M503N TRANSFER SECTION K 2

[L] FUSING SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual
CN12
INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1 1 1 INT24V1
/FUMCK 4 3 FUM_CK 3 9 FUM_CK
/FUMD 5 4 /FUM_D 4 7 /FUM_D
FUMLD 6 5 FUM_LD 5 11 FUM_LD
FGOUT 3 (NC)
FUM
WEBM
WEB-END
1 N-HL(MAIN) 1
2 N-HL(SUB) 2
1 N-HL(UW) 1
PCU PWB
1
6 TH_MY
TS_UM 4
3
TS_US
6 HL PWB
CN2
TH_US (NC)
1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(COM)
2 3
CN3
L-HL(COM)
1 L-HL(COM)
2 N-HL(UW)
3 N-HL(SUB)
1 L-HL(COM) 1 (Power) CN4 CN12
3
2
L-HL(COM)
L-HL(COM)
3
2 6 4
6
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(UW)
4
6
INT24V1
GND2
6
5
2
4
INT24V1
GND2
/HL_PR 1 6 /HL_PR
HL_UM/HL_US/HL_UW 2 1
2
N-HL(MAIN)
N-HL(SUB)
1
2 HLout_UM 2 8 HLout_UM
5 L-HL(COM) 5 HLout_US 4 10 HLout_US
3 (NC) 3 HLout_UW 3 14 HLout_UW
(Connector) CN16
1 GND2 1 B-9 GND2 B-1 1 GND2 1 5 GND2
2 TH_US_IN 2 B-8 TH_US_IN B-2 2 TH_US_IN 2 7 TH_US_IN
3 GND2 3 B-7 (NC) B-3 3 (NC) 3 (NC) 6 GND2
4 TH_MY_IN 4 B-6 (NC) B-4 4 (NC) 4 (NC) 8 TH_E_IN
B-5 GND2 B-5 5 GND2 5 9 GND2
B-4 TH_MY_IN(100) B-6 6 TH_MY_IN 6 10 TH_MY_IN
B-3 TH_MY_IN(200) B-7 7 (NC) 7 (NC) 13 GND2
1 WEB-END 1 B-2 WEB-END B-8 8 WEB-END 8 11 WEB-END
2 GND2 2 B-1 GND2 B-9 9 GND2 9 12 GND2
CN14
1 WEB_M1out 1 18 WEBMAout 18 19 WEBMAout
2 WEB_M2out 2 19 WEBMBout 19 20 WEBMBout
Signal name Name [Type] Function/Operation

FUM_CK Fusing motor drive frequency [Brush-less motor] Changes the fusing section speed.
FUM_D Fusing motor start/stop [Brush-less motor] Drives the fusing section.
FUM_LD Fusing motor lock detection Detects the fusing motor lock.
HLout_UM Heater lamp main Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp main.
HLout_US Heater lamp sub Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp sub.
HLout_UW Heater lamp warm-up Turns ON/OFF the warm-up operation of the heater lamp.
HL_PR Heater lamp control relay Turns ON/OFF the heater lamp control relay.
TH_MY_IN Main thermistor Detects the temperature.
TH_US_IN Sub thermistor Detects the temperature.
WEB-END Web end detection Detects the web end.
WEBM Web motor (Synchronous motor) Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.
MX-M503N FUSING SECTION L 1

1 Fusing roller (Heating) Applies heat and pressure to toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
2 Upper separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (heating).
3 Fusing roller (Pressing) Presses toner on paper to fuse.
4 Cleaning roller Cleans the fusing roller (pressing).
5 Web roller Cleans the fusing roller (heating).
6 Lower separation pawl Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the fusing roller (pressing).
7 Thermostat (Main) Shuts down the power to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally.
8 Thermostat (Sub) Shuts down the power to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally.
2. Operational descriptions C. Fusing operation

Toner on paper is heated and pressed to be fused by the heat
A. Fusing unit drive roller.
For driving the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
Driving by the drive motor (DC Brush-less motor) is performed
according to the control signal sent from the PCU.
PCU FUM
B. Heater lamp drive

The surface temperature of the heat roller detected by the ther-
mistor is sent to the PCU. When the temperature is lower than the
specified level, the heater lamp ON signal is sent from the PCU to
the heater lamp drive circuit on the HL PWB.
The power triac in the heater lamp drive circuit is turned on, and the
AC power is supplied to the heater lamp, lighting the lamp and
heating the heat roller.
To prepare for an abnormally high temperature of the heat roller,
the thermostat is provided for safety.
When the thermostat is opened, the power supply (AC line) to the
heater lamp is cut off.
Fusing roller (Heating)

Fusing roller (Pressing)
The fusing heat roller (heating) is provided with three heater lamps,
which heat the fusing roller to fuse toner onto paper.
The fusing rollers (pressing) are made of silicon rubber because of
the following reasons and purpose.
1) Paper is separated upward. (Since the fusing roller (heating) is
of higher hardness, the fusing roller (pressing) is deformed to
separate paper upward.)
2) The nip quantity is increased to increase heat capacity for
paper.
3) By pressing paper with the flexible roller, toner is fused without
deformation.

D. Fusing temperature control F. Web end detection
The temperature sensor is provided at the center of the fusing roller The judgment of web end is made by the fusing web print counter
(heating). or the web life end detection, whichever is earlier.
The roller temperature is detected by the thermistor sensor, and the The web life end detection is made when the WEB-END sensor ter-
heater lamp is controlled so that the temperature is maintained at minal is conducted by making contact with the roller shaft on the
the specified level. web supply side.
When the web life end is detected, the warning display is made, but
E. Roller cleaning
the machine still continues the operation.
The upper fusing roller is cleaned by the web. The lower fusing
Warning display content: Maintenance required. Code: FK3
roller is cleaned by the cleaning roller.
When the web is replaced with a new one and the web counter is
1) Remaining toner on the upper fusing roller is cleaned by the
cleared, the warring display disappears.
web with silicon included.
The new web is not automatically detected.
The web unit is provided in the upper section of the upper fus-
ing roller, and is composed of the feeding section of the web
sheet, the winding section, and the backup roller which
pressed the web sheet onto the upper fusing roller.
2) Remaining toner on the lower fusing roller is attached to the
cleaning roller by the differences in the temperature, etc.
between the lower fusing roller and the cleaning roller.
WEB-END
Web roller
WEB-END

Cleaning roller A. Fusing unit
c
a
b
Fusing roller (Heating)
Fusing roller (Pressing)
Parts
a Thermostat (main)
b Thermostat (sub)
c Heater lamp

1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door. (2) Heater lamp
1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
2) Remove the blue screw. Pull the lock lever and remove the
fusing unit. 3) Remove the screw, and remove the cover.
4) Disconnect the connector. Remove the blue screw, and

remove the fixing plate. Remove the heater lamp.
(1) Thermostat (main/sub)

1) Remove the fusing unit.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Remove the screw,
and remove the terminal. Remove the screw and the washer,
and remove the thermostat.
NOTE: When fixing the thermostat and the harness, tighten the
screws at the following torque:
1.0 - 1.2 Nm
10 - 12 kgfcm
0.7 - 0.9 lbft

[M] DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION
MX-M503N
Service Manual

A. Duplex section
ADUMH
CN2
TFD3 1 1 TFD3 6 1 TFD3
GND2
5VLED1
2
3
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
5
4
2
3
GND2
5VLED1
4
POD3 4 4 POD3 3
GND2 5 5 GND2 2 1 POD3
5VLED4 6 6 5VLED4 1 2 GND2
DSW_ADU 7 3 5VLED4
GND2 8 5
5VLED2
APPD1
9
10
1
2
DSW_ADU
GND2 POD3
GND2 11 3 5VLED2
5VLED5 12
1
2
APPD1
GND2
3
2
1
2
APPD1
GND2
TFD3
3 5VLED5 1 3 5VLED5
CN3
APPD2
GND2
4
5
1
2
APPD2
GND2
ADUGS
5VLED10 6 3 5VLED10
1 24V1B 1 ADUML
2 /ADUGS 2
RIGHT DOOR CN10 3
I/F PWB 14
15
/ADUGS
24V1B
14
15
3
1
SGUDA/
B1V42
CN1 CN6
5VN 1 1 5VN 1 1 5VN
SIN3
SELIN2
3
5
2
3
SIN3
SELIN2
2
3
11
7
SIN3
SELIN2
APPD1
APPD1
MPFD
7
11
4
5
APPD1
MPFD
4
5
12
8
APPD1
MPFD
DSW_ADU
MPWD 13 6 MPWD 6 13 MPWD
GND2 2 17 GND2 17 15 GND2
SELIN1 4 18 SELIN1 18 5 SELIN1
SELIN3 6 19 SELIN3 19 9 SELIN3
APPD2 8 20 APPD2 20 14 APPD2
POD3 10 21 POD3 21 10 POD3
5VN 16 22 5VN 22 3 5VN 1
PCU PWB
MOTOR DRIVER PWB
CN4 CN17
ADUMHB 14 3 ADUMHB
ADUMHA 25 4 ADUMHA
ADUMHXB 16 5 ADUMHXB
ADUMHXA 23 6 ADUMHXA
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT
11
21
7
8
POMCNT
ADUMHCNT 2
POMB 17 9 POMB
POMA 15 10 POMA
POMXB 19 11 POMXB
POMXA 13 12 POMXA
ADUMLB 26 13 ADUMLB
ADUMLA 22 14 ADUMLA
ADUMLXB 24 15 ADUMLXB
ADUMLXA 20 16 ADUMLXA
RRMCNT 1 17 RRMCNT
ADUMLCNT 18 18 ADUMLCNT
RRMB 7 19 RRMB
RRMA 5 20 RRMA
RRMXB 9 21 RRMXB
RRMXA 3 22 RRMXA
PFMB
PFMA
10
8
23
24
PFMB
PFMA
APPD2
PFMXB 12 25 PFMXB
PFMXA 6 26 PFMXA
GND2 2 (NC) (NC) 27 PFM2CNT
PFMCNT 4 28 PFMCNT
CN3
ADUML24V 1 2 ADUML24V
ADUML24V 2 5 ADUML24V
ADUMLB/ 3 3 ADUMLB/
ADUMLB// 4 6 ADUMLB//
ADUMLA// 5 4 ADUMLA//
ADUMLA/ 6 1 ADUMLA/
CN3
ADUMHA// 11 21 ADUMHA// 21 1 ADUMHA//
ADUMHA/ 12 22 ADUMHA/ 22 4 ADUMHA/
ADUMHB/ 9 23 ADUMHB/ 23 6 ADUMHB/
ADUMHB// 10 24 ADUMHB// 24 3 ADUMHB//
ADUMH24V 7 25 ADUMH24V 25 2 ADUMH24V
ADUMH24V 8 26 ADUMH24V 26 5 ADUMH24V
NC 13

ADUGS ADU gate solenoid Controls the ADU gate.
ADUMH ADU motor upper Drive the transport roller 13.
ADUML ADU motor lower Drives the right door section.
APPD1 ADU transport path detection 1 Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
APPD2 ADU transport path detection 2 Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
DSW_ADU ADU transport open/close detection Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
POD3 Right tray paper exit detection Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
TFD3 Detects the right tray paper exit full. Detects the right tray paper exit full.

1 Transport roller 10 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
2 Transport roller 11 (Drive) Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
3 Paper exit roller 2 (Drive) Used to discharge paper.
4 Right paper exit gate Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to the right tray.
5 Transport roller 13 (Drive) Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.
MX-M503N DUPLEX/PAPER EXIT SECTION M 1

B. Paper exit section
PCU PWB
CN14
12 24V1B_OSM
5 24V1B_OSM 5 1 24V1B_OSM 1 15 /OSMXB
1 /OSMXB 1 2 /OSMXB 2 16 /OSMXA
2 /OSMXA 2 3 /OSMXA 3 13 /OSMB
3 /OSMB 3 4 /OSMB 4 14 /OSMA
4 /OSMA 4 5 /OSMA 5 CN15
6 POFM1_V 6 23 POFM1_V
7 /POFM1_CNT 7 25 /POFM1_CNT
4 POFM1_LD 4 8 POFM1_LD 8 27 POFM1_LD
3 GND2 3 9 POFM2_LD 9 28 POFM2_LD
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 10 (NC) 10 (NC) 2 GND2
1 POFM1_V 1 11 GND2 11 29 GND2
12 5VN 12 7 5VN
13 TFD2 13 3 TFD2
4 POFM2_LD 4 14 POD2 14 4 POD2
3 GND2 3 15 HPOS 15 5 HPOS
2 /POFM1_CNT 2 16 POD1 16 6 POD1
1 POFM1_V 1 17 GND2 17 1 GND2
TFD2 5VN
TFD2
3
2
HPOS GND2 1
5VN 1
POD2 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
HPOS 2
GND2 3
5VN 1
POD1 2
GND2 3
OSM
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC)
(NC) 1
(NC) 7
(NC) 4
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
7
9
#
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
#
#
#
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
POFM1_V
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
/POFM1_CNT
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
GND2
POFM_1
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
5VN
1
2
3
4
2
1
3
4
5
6
4
2
6
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
#
#
#
POFM_3 3 GND2 3 18 GND2
1 2
1
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
2
1
20
22
POFM3_LD
POFM3_V
POD2 MOTOR DRIVER PWB

CN2
POM POMA//
POM24V
1
2
7
8
POMA//
POM24V
7
8
5
1
POMA//
POM24V
POMB// 3 9 POMB// 9 4 POMB//
POMA/ 4 10 POMA/ 10 6 POMA/
POM24V 5 11 POM24V 11 2 POM24V
POD1 POMB/ 6 12 POMB/ 12 3 POMB/
POFM_2

HPOS Shifter home position detection Detects the shifter home position.
OSM Shifter motor Performs offset of paper.
POD1 Fusing rear detection Detects paper exit from fusing after detection fusing.
POD2 Paper exit detection Detects the exit paper.
POFM_1 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_2 Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side) Cools the fusing unit.
POFM_3 Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side) Cools the fusing unit.
POM Paper exit drive motor Drives the paper exit roller.
TFD2 Paper exit full detection Detects face-down paper exit tray full.

1 Paper exit roller 1 (Drive) Discharges paper. / Transports paper to the right paper exit tray. / Transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section.

2. Operational descriptions 1) Pull the lock lever, and open the right door.
A. Duplex
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1.
At that time, paper is passed under the ADU reverse gate guide.
When the specified time passes from detection of the paper lead
edge by POD1, the paper exit drive motor rotates normally, and
rotates reversely after the specified time.
By the reverse rotation of the paper exit drive motor, paper is
sent to the reverse section. At that time, paper passes on the
upper side of the Ado gate which lowers by its own weight.
The transport rollers 10 and 11 are driven by the ADU motor
lower to transport paper to the duplex paper feed position. 2) Remove the right door unit.
Paper is stopped at the duplex paper feed position, and then
transported to the machine again.
B. Paper exit
Paper transported from the fusing section is sent from the trans-
port roller 13 (which is driven by the paper exit drive motor) to the
paper exit roller 1, and discharged to the inner tray.
When paper is discharged to the right tray, paper is sent to the
paper exit roller 1. The paper exit drive motor rotates reversely.
Paper is passed through the right paper exit gate, and dis-
charged to the right tray.

A. Right door unit (1) RD I/F PWB
1) Open the right door.
2) Remove the connector cover. Remove the ADU inner cover.
Parts
a RD I/F PWB 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the RD I/F PWB.
b Manual paper feed clutch
c ADU gate solenoid

(2) Manual paper feed clutch 5) Remove the manual paper feed clutch.
2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
(3) ADU gate solenoid

2) Remove the connector cover, and remove the ADU inner
cover.
3) Remove the ADU cabinet R.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU gate solenoid

unit.
4) Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the con-
Remove the ADU gate solenoid.
nector. Remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.

B. Paper exit unit 3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper exit cooling
fan motor.
e * When installing, be sure to note the fan direction.
a
a b
c f
(2) Shifter motor

1) Remove the paper exit unit.
Parts
a Paper exit cooling fan motor 2) Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
b Shifter motor Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
c Fusing web cleaning motor the connectors and remove the snap band.
d Fusing drive motor
e Paper exit drive motor
f ADU motor upper
1) Remove the upper cabinet right and the right connecting cabi-
A
net. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the fusing unit. [Refer to "[L] FUSING SECTION."]
3) Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and dis-
connect the connector.
B
(1) Paper exit cooling fan motor

3) Remove the shifter motor unit. Remove the gear.
2) Remove the exhaust fan duct.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.

4) Remove the screws, and remove the shifter motor. (5) Paper exit drive motor/ADU motor upper
2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and
remove the paper exit drive motor (A), and the ADU motor
upper (B).
(3) Fusing web cleaning motor

2) Remove the exhaust fan duct. B
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing web cleaning motor.
B A
* Be careful to install the motors in the proper direction.

* When installing, attach the belt as shown below.
(4) Fusing drive motor

2) Disconnect the connector, and remove the screws, and then
remove the fusing drive motor.

C. Others
Parts
a ADU motor lower
(1) ADU motor lower

2) Remove the screw, and open the control box.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the ADU motor lower.

[N] DRIVE SECTION
MX-M503N 4) Disconnect
Service the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
Manual
main drive unit.

A. Main drive unit
a
d
e c
Parts
a Drum motor
b Resist motor
c Toner supply clutch
d Separation solenoid
e Temperature/humidity sensor (1) Drum motor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and open the control box. 2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
drum motor.
(2) Resist motor

3) Remove the flywheel. 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
* After installing, check to confirm that the flywheel is not in [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
contact with the harness.
2) Open the control box.
3) Remove the flywheel.
4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, and remove the
resist motor.
MX-M503N DRIVE SECTION N 1

(3) Toner supply clutch (5) Temperature/humidity sensor
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. 1) Remove the main drive unit.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 2) Remove the drum motor and the toner supply clutch. [Refer to
2) Open the control box. "(1) Drum motor", "(3) Toner supply clutch".]
3) Remove the flywheel. 3) Disconnect the connector from the frame. Remove the screw,
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the gear. Disconnect the and remove the grounding plate. Remove grease from the
connector, remove the E-ring, and remove the toner supply shaft.
clutch. NOTE: When reassembling, apply conduction grease (UKOG-
0012QSZZ).
Conduction
grease
(4) Separation solenoid

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the main drive unit.
4) Remove the E-ring and the bearing. Remove the screw, and
3) Remove the E-ring and the screw, and remove the separation remove the frame.
solenoid.
5) Remove the snap band. Remove the screw, and remove the
temperature/humidity sensor. Disconnect the connector from
the temperature/humidity sensor.

B. Paper feed drive unit (2) Paper feed motor
a
the paper feed motor.
d
e b
c
f
Parts
a Transport motor
b Paper feed motor
c Paper tray lift-up motor
d Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1) (3) Paper tray lift-up motor
e Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2) 1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover.
f Paper transport clutch [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
1) Remove the rear cabinet and the right cabinet rear cover. 2) Open the control box.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
2) Open the control box. the paper tray lift-up motor unit.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the paper feed drive
unit.
4) Disengage the pawl, and remove the lift-up coupling.
(1) Transport motor

the transport motor.

(4) Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1/ 6) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper feed clutch.
Paper feed tray 2)/Paper transport clutch
2) Remove the paper feed drive unit.
3) Remove the gear and disconnect the connector.
7) Remove the belt.
4) Remove the screw, and remove the drive frame upper unit.
8) Remove the gear, and remove the paper transport clutch unit.
* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
5) Remove the paper feed clutch unit.

* When installing, be careful of wiring process.
9) Remove the E-ring, and remove the paper transport clutch 1.

[O] PWB SECTION
MX-M503N A. ControlManual
Service box

(Countermeasures against static electricity)
When handling the PWB and the electronic parts, be sure to
observe the following precautions in order to prevent against dam-
age by static electricity.
1) When in transit or storing, put the parts in an anti-static bag or
an anti-static case and do not touch them with bare hands.
h
b
a g
e
i
f
c
2) When and after removing the parts from an anti-static bag

(case), use an earth band as shown below:
Put an earth band to your arm, and connect it to the Parts
machine. a DIMM memory PWB (1GB)
b DIMM memory PWB (N model: 512MB/U model 256MB)
c PROG1 ROM PWB
d PROG2 ROM PWB
e MFP cnt PWB
f HDD
g PCU Flash ROM PWB
h PCU PWB
i Mother PWB
(1) DIMM memory PWB/PROG1 ROM PWB/

PROG 2 ROM PWB/MFP cnt PWB
1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
When repairing or replacing an electronic part, perform the

procedure on an anti-static mat.
* When placing the HDD on the upper side, do not apply an

excessive force to the DIMM memory. So remove it or put a
spacer.
MX-M503N PWB SECTION O 1

* Inserting position an inserting procedure when the DIMM * Note for removing procedure of the memory PWB
memory is removed Remove the PWB inside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Removing the IC outside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM3
DIMM1
DIMM2 * Note for installing procedure of the memory PWB

Install the PWB outside the tilt of the memory PWB first.
(Installing the IC inside the tilt will result in poor efficiency
of work.)
DIMM1: Option (200 pin)

DIMM2: 1GB (200 pin) a) Tilt the memory PWB and fit with the connector port. Put
DIMM3: N model 512MB/U model 256MB (144 pin) the memory PWB up to the line (A) in the figure.
3) Push Stopper (A) with your finger to release the lock holding * When inserting, be sure to hold the both ends and be
the memory PWB. sure not to touch the IC on the PWB.
About 15
A
A A
b) Push the memory PWB which is kept tilted fully to the

bottom.
4) When the lock is released, the memory PWB tilts. Pull it out.
* Be careful not to tilt left and right.
* Be sure to release the lock before pulling it out.
* The gold plated section must be completely seated
* Do not touch the IC on the memory PWB. inside slot.
[ Tilting left and right ]
[ The gold plated

section can be seen ]
[ Normal ]

c) Raise the memory PWB until the connector stopper (2) HDD (U model option)
clicks. 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
* Check to confirm that the lock pin (A) is in the center [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
of the lock hole. 2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
* The stopper (B) must penetrate inside the PWB. 3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the HDD unit.
A A
B B
5) Release the lock, and remove the PROG1 ROM PWB (A) and
the PROG2 ROM PWB (B).
4) Remove the screw, and remove the angle from the HDD.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
A B
6) Disconnect the connector (when the HDD is installed to the

machine) and remove the screw, and remove the MFP cnt
PWB.
(3) PCU Flash ROM PWB

1) Remove the screw, and remove the rear cabinet lid.

2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. B. Power unit
Parts
a AC power PWB
(4) PCU PWB
b DC power PWB
2) Remove the PCU Flash ROM PWB. (1) AC power PWB
3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove 1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
the PCU PWB. 2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector,
and remove the AC power PWB.
(5) Mother PWB

2) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw of the MFP
PWB and the mother PWB. Remove the mother PWB.
(2) DC power PWB
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and the AC cord unit and dis-
connect the connector, and remove the AC power PWB unit.

3) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove 3) Remove the securing screws and slide out the scanner PWB.
the DC power PWB. Disconnect the connector.
N model
U model
C. Others
4) Remove the screw, and remove the scanner control PWB.

a
b
c
d e
Parts
a SCN Flash ROM PWB
b Scanner control PWB
c HL PWB
d Motor drive PWB
e HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
(1) SCN Flash ROM PWB/Scanner control PWB

(2) HL PWB
1) Remove the upper cabinet rear cover.
[Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] 1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB. 2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the HL PWB.
2
1

(3) Motor drive PWB 4) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw, earth wire and
1) Remove the rear cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] the plate, and remove the PCU PWB.

3) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove the HV PWB.
the motor drive PWB.
(4) HV PWB (High voltage PWB)

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the left cabinet rear lower. [Refer
to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
3) Disconnect the connector, remove the screw and the plate,
and remove the control box.

6) Note for assembly of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB)
When inserting the connector into the high voltage output ter-
minal of the HV PWB (High voltage PWB), check to confirm
that the connector is securely inserted into the high voltage
output terminal as shown in the photo below.
If the high voltage output terminal is on the outside of the con-
nector, it is NG.
NG NG
The clearance
must be about 1mm.
OK
The clearance
must be about 2mm.
OK
NG NG

[P] FAN SECTION
MX-M503N 3) Disconnect
Service the connector, remove the snap band, and remove
Manual
the harness from the wire saddle.
Remove the screw, and remove the control box.
1. Disassembly and assembly * The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
A. Fan motor to damage the unit due to any external shock.
a
e
f
d
c
b
4) Remove the snap band. Disconnect the connector and remove

the screw, and remove the duct.
Parts
a Ozone fan
b Power cooling fan 1
c Power cooling fan 2
d MFP PWB cooling fan
e Paper exit cooling fan 3
f LSU cooling fan
(1) Ozone fan

1) Remove the rear cabinet and the upper cabinet rear cover.
5) Disengage the pawl, and remove the cover. Disconnect the

connector, remove the screw, and remove the ozone fan.
* When installing, arrange so that the fan label (A) faces out-
side.
MX-M503N FAN SECTION P 1

(2) Power cooling fan 1 4) Remove the screw, and remove the power cooling fan 2.
1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] * When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
2) Remove the screw, and remove the clamp. Disconnect the harness (B) facing upward.
connector and remove the screw, and remove the power cool-
ing fan 1.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and
arrange the engraved mark (B) in the blowing direction with
the arrow direction (C) of the metal plate.
C B
A
A
(3) Power cooling fan 2

1) Remove the rear cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."] (4) MFP PWB cooling fan
2) Remove the screw, the reactor and disconnect the connector, 1) Remove the right cabinet rear cover.
and remove the AC power PWB unit. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and pull out the MFP cnt PWB.
* The HDD is very fragile. Handle the HDD carefully so as not
to damage the unit due to any external shock.
3) Disconnect the connector. Open the wire saddle, and remove

the harness. Remove the screw, and remove the DC power
unit.

the MFP PWB cooling fan.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing outside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.

(5) Paper exit cooling fan 3
1) Remove the paper exit unit. [Refer to "[M] DUPLEX/PAPER
EXIT SECTION."]
2) Remove the screw and disconnect the connector, and remove
the paper exit cooling fan 3.
* When installing, put the fan label (A) facing inside, and the
harness (B) facing downward.
(6) LSU cooling fan

1) Remove the left cabinet. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the plate.
Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the
wire saddle.
3) Disconnect the connector, and remove the harness from the

wire saddle.
* When installing, arrange so that the fan label (A) faces
inside.

[Q] SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION
MX-M503N (3) Right door
Service open/close switch
Manual
1. Disassembly and assembly 2) Remove the resist roller unit. [Refer to "[F] PAPER TRANS-
A. Sensor/Switch PORT SECTION."]
c b
a
Parts
a Main switch 4) Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
b Front door open/close switch the right door open/close switch cover unit.
c Right door open/close switch
(1) Main switch

1) Remove the front cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the cover. Disconnect the con-
nector, disengage the pawl, and remove the main switch.
* Attach the main switch and the harness so that they are fit
with the marks on the back surface of the mounting plate.
5) Remove the right door open/close switch.
ON
W B Harness color
Switch position W W
Connector color
R R
OFF
(2) Front door open/close switch

1) Remove the front cover. [Refer to "[A] EXTERIOR."]
2) Remove the screw, and remove the front door open/close
switch unit.
Disconnect the connector and remove the screw, and remove
the front door open/close switch.
MX-M503N SENSOR/SWITCH SECTION Q 1

Memo
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
a
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm Sn-In-Ag-Bi i
Sn-Cu-Ni n
Sn-Ag-Sb s
Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag
(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting-point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the
exclusive-use soldering iron is recommended.
(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting-point of lead-freeCOPYRIGHT
solder is about 220C, which
XXXX is about 40C higher
BYSHARP than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering
CORPORATION
capacity is inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land
separation or may exceed the heat-resistive temperature ALLofRIGHTS
components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when
RESERVED.
completion of soldering is confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron
tip after completion of soldering work. No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without
prior written permission of the publisher.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
BATTERY DISPOSAL
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.
TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
COPYRIGHT 2009 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, Laser Writer, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM, PC/AT, and Power PC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
SHARP CORPORATION
Business Solutions Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2009 June Produced in Japan for electronic Distribution

Sharp MX M283 363 453 503 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Sharp MX M283 363 453 503 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

TopPage

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

This document has been published to be used

NOTE FOR SERVICING DETAILS OF EACH SECTION

2. Warning for servicing

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - i

5) Place which is full of organic gases such as ammonium

6) Place of much dust

7) Place near a wall

8) Unstable or slant surface

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - ii

MX-M503N NOTE FOR SERVICING - iii

Paper exit system

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL SYSTEM

STAPLE CARTRIDGE MX-M283N/M363N/M453N/M503N MX-M363U/M453U/M503U

PUNCH MODULE SADDLE STITCH FINISHER

STAPLE CARTRIDGE Paper feed system

Printer expansion Image send expansion

PRINTER EXPANSION KIT PRINTER EXPANSION KIT

DATA SECURITY KIT DATA SECURITY KIT

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 1

STD: Standard provision. OPT: Option. OPT*1: Product key target.

MX-M503N PRODUCT OUTLINE 1 2

D. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 1

B. Europe/Australia/New Zealand (MX-M283N/M363N/M363U/M453N/M453U/M503N/M503U)

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 2

3. Definition the developer/drum life end 4. Production number identification

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 3

Internal product name Destination Incompatibility

Production Serial No. Production Version

MX-M503N CONSUMABLE PARTS 2 4

1. Identification of each section and functions

The keyboard is provided

When a finisher is installed

(12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17)

When a saddle stitch finisher is (11)

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 1

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)

No. Name Function/Operation

B. Internal operation parts

(6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 2

When the fax expansion kit is installed

No. Name Function/Operation NOTE

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 3

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (9)

JOB STATUS PRINT

(7) (8) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 4

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (10)

No. Name Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 5

No. Name Function/Operation

(2) Sensors and Switches

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

MX-M503N EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE 3 6

Signal name Name Type Function/Operation

No. Name Function/Operation

5) When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, it is highlighted. The devel- 0+95,'6(77,1$1'287387

If [EE-EU], [EE-EL] or [EE-EC] is displayed, setting of the ref- $

erence toner density control value is not completed normally.

& 7&+($9<%:63;

& 7&+($9<%:63;

& '27'27,)$

' '(16,7<),;(',)$

) (;32685(,)$67$1'$5'',7+(5